Pioneer BDP-LX52 Operating Instructions
Operating Instructions Blu-ra y Disc PLA YER LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 1 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (ser vicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated âÂÂdangerous voltageâ within the productâÂÂs enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. CAUTION: TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE P ARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN IMPOR T ANT D3-4-2-1-1_A1_En Thank you f or b uying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will kno w how to operate y our model proper ly . After you ha ve finished reading the instructions, put them away i n a s a fe place for future ref erence . CAUTION This product is a class 1 laser product, but this product contains a laser diode higher than Class 1. To ensure continued safety , do not remove any covers or attempt to gain access to the inside of the product. Refer all servicing to qualified personnel. The following caution label appears on your unit. Location : inside of the unit D3-4-2-1-8*_C_En CAUTION ATTENTION ADVARSEL VARNING VORSICHT PRECAUCIÃÂN VARO! CLASS 3B VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN, AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM. RADIATIONS LASER VISIBLES ET INVISIBLES DE CLASSE 3B QUAND OUVERT. ÃÂVITEZ TOUT EXPOSITION AU FAISCEAU. KLASSE 3B SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTRàLING VED àBNING. UNDGàUDSÃÂTTELSE FOR STRàLING. KLASS 3B SYNLIG OCH OSYNLIG LASERSTRàLNING NÃÂR DENNA DEL ÃÂR ÃÂPPNAD. UNDVIK ATT UTSÃÂTTA DIG FÃÂR STRàLEN. BEI GEÃÂFFNETER ABDECKUNG IST SICHTBARE UND UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG DER KLASSE 3B IM GERÃÂTEINNEREN VORHANDEN. NICHT DEM LASERSTRAHL AUSSETZEN! CUANDO SE ABRE HAY RADIACIÃÂN LÃÂSER DE CLASE 3B VISIBLE E INVISIBLE. EVITE LA EXPOSICIÃÂN A LOS RAYOS LÃÂSER. AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA NÃÂKYVÃÂLLE JA NÃÂKYMÃÂTTÃÂMÃÂLLE LUOKAN 3B LASERSÃÂTEILYLLE. ÃÂLàKATSO SÃÂTEESEEN. 注æÂ ãÂÂãÂÂãÂÂéÂÂãÂÂ㨠CLASS 3B ã®å¯è¦Â㋼ã¶å ÂÃ¥ÂÂã³ä¸Âå¯è¦Â㋼㶠å ÂãÂÂåºã¾ãÂÂãÂÂãÂÂã¼ã ãÂÂç´æÂ¥è¦ÂãÂÂãÂÂãÂÂ触ãÂÂãÂÂãÂÂãÂÂãªãÂÂãÂÂã¨ã î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î "îÂÂ#%îÂÂ)îÂÂ!'îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ%îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ% îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ"îÂÂ!"'îÂÂ#îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ!*îÂÂ!îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ&"(%îÂÂîÂÂ&îÂÂîÂÂ&(îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ&îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ'îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ!îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ"!îÂÂ'îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ$(îÂÂ# îÂÂ!'îÂÂî î î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ! VENTILATION CAUTION When installing this unit, make sure to leave space around the unit for ventilation to improve heat radiation (at least 10 cm at top, 10 cm at rear, and 10 cm at each side). WARNING Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the product, and to protect it from overheating. To prevent fire hazard, the openings should never be blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers, table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the equipment on thick carpet or a bed. D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ&îÂÂîÂÂ$(îÂÂ# îÂÂ!'îÂÂîÂÂ&îÂÂ!"'îÂÂ*îÂÂ'îÂÂ%#%""îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî "îÂÂ#%îÂÂ)îÂÂ!'îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ% îÂÂî "%îÂÂ&îÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ-îÂÂ%îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ"îÂÂ!"'îÂÂ#îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ!,îÂÂîÂÂ"!'îÂÂîÂÂ!îÂÂ%îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî *îÂÂ'îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ$(îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ!îÂÂîÂÂ%îÂÂ'îÂÂîÂÂ&îÂÂîÂÂ$(îÂÂ# îÂÂ!'îÂÂîÂÂ&(îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ&îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ)îÂÂ&îÂÂîÂÂ"%î îÂÂîÂÂ"*îÂÂ%îÂÂ#"'îÂÂîÂÂ"%îÂÂî #"&îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ'îÂÂ'"îÂÂîÂÂ%îÂÂ##îÂÂ!îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ&#îÂÂîÂÂ&îÂÂîÂÂ!îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ%îÂÂîÂÂ!î "%î "îÂÂ&'(%îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ! Before plugging in for the first time, read the following section carefully . 2 En LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 2 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Operating Environment Operating environment temperature and humidity : 5 ðC to 35 ðC ( 41 ðF to 95 ðF); less than 85 %RH (cooling vents not blocked) Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or strong artificial light) D3-4-2-1-7c*_A1_En CAUTION The îÂÂîÂÂST ANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not completely shut off all power from the AC outlet. Since the power cord ser ves as the main disconnect device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from the AC outlet to shut down all power . Therefore, make sure the unit has been installed so that the power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC outlet in case of an accident. T o avoid fire hazard, the power cord should also be unplugged from the AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation). D3-4-2-2-2a_A_En îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ$î îÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ!îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ$îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ$îÂÂîÂÂ$îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî !îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ!îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ$îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ!îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ$îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ!îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ#îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ!îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî POWER-CORD CAUTION Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cords. The power cords should be routed such that they are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check the power cord once in a while. When you find it damaged, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized ser vice center or your dealer for a replacement. S002*_En This product incor porates cop yr ight protection technology that is protected by method claims of cer tain U .S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned b y Macrovision Cor poration and other rights owners. Use of this cop yr ight protection technology must be authorized b y Macrovision Cor poration, and is intended f or home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macro vision Cor poration. Re verse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. F or U .K. model: Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified ser vice personnel. D3-4-2-1-2-2_B_En IMPORTANT: THE MOULDED PLUG This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience. A 5 amp fuse is fitted in this plug. Should the fuse need to be replaced, please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of 5 amps and that it is approved by AST A or BSI to BS1362. Check for the AST A mark or the BSI mark on the body of the fuse. If the plug contains a removable fuse cover , you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced. If you lose the fuse cover the plug must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained. A replacement fuse cover can be obtained from your local dealer . If the fitted moulded plug is unsuitable for your socket outlet, then the fuse shall be removed and the plug cut off and disposed of safely. There is a danger of severe electrical shock if the cut off plug is inserted into any 13 amp socket. If a new plug is to be fitted, please obser ve the wiring code as shown below . If in any doubt, please consult a qualified electrician. IMPORT ANT : The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: Blue : Neutral Brown : Live As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows ; The wire which is coloured BL UE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. How to replace the fuse: Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse. For Australia Model C67-7-3_En 3 En LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 3 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Information for users on collection and disposal of old equipment and used batteries These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste. For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection points in accordance with your national legislation. By disposing of these products and batteries correctly , you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling. For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local municipality , your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items. These symbols are only valid in the European Union. For countries outside the European Union: If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal. K058a_A1_En Symbol examples for batteries Symbol for equipment Pb 4 En LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 4 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
5 En Contents 01 Before you start WhatâÂÂs in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Putting the batte r ies in the r emote cont r ol. . . . . . . . . . 6 Ty p es of discs/files that can be p layed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Playable discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Playable files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Pa r t Names and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Remote Cont r ol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 0 F r ont Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 F r ont Pa nel Dis p lay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Rea r Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 02 Connecting up Connecting using an HDMI cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 About HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 About KURO LINK function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Connecting an AV r eceiver o r amp lifie r . . . . . . . . . . . 1 5 Connecting video and a udio cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Connecting a TV using a video/audio cable . . . . . . . . 16 Connecting an AV r eceiver o r am p li fier using an o p tical digital audio cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Connecting com p onents to the USB p or t . . . . . . . . . . . 16 About USB (exte r nal sto ra ge) devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Connecting the USB (exte r nal sto r age) device. . . . . . 1 7 Netwo r k connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Connecting via an Ethe r n et hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Connecti ng the p ower co r d. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 7 03 Getting Started Making settings using the Setu p Navigato r menu . . . . 18 O pe r ating the TV with the p laye r âÂÂs r emote con t r ol . . . . 1 9 TV P r eset code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Using the TOOLS menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 0 Switchin g the vid eo out p ut te r minal to be viewed . . . . 21 Switchin g the out p ut video r esolu tion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 04 Playback Playing discs o r f iles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Fo r wa r d and reve r se scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Playing s p ecific titles, cha p te r s o r t racks . . . . . . . . . . 25 Ski pp ing conte nt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Playing in slow motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Ste p fo r wa r d and ste p r eve r se . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Switching the came r a angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 5 Switching the subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Switching the audio and seconda r y audio . . . . . . . . . 26 Switching the seconda r y video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Dis p laying the disc info r mation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Playback functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 7 Using the Play Mode functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Playing f r om a s p ecific time (Time Sea r ch) . . . . . . . . 28 Playing a s p ecif ic title, cha p ter or tr ack (Se a r ch) . . . 28 Playing a s p ecif ic section w ithin a t itle o r tr ack r ep eatedly (A-B Rep eat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 8 Playing r ep eatedly (Re p eat Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Playing in r andom o r der (Random Play) . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Abou t P lay Mode ty p es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Playing f r om the Home Media Galle r y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Playing discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Playing video files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Playing image files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Playing audio files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Playing in the desi r ed o r der (HMG Playlist) . . . . . . . . 32 05 Adjusting audio and video Adjusting the video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Adjusting the audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Adjusting the Audio DRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Adjusting the audio delay (Li p Sync) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 06 Advanced settings Changing the settin gs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 O pe r ating th e Initial Set u p sc r een . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Softwa r e u p dating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Resto r ing all the settings to the facto r y defa ult settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 About the audio ou t p ut settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Language Code Table and Count r y/Ar ea Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 07 Additional information Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Cautions on use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Moving th e p layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Place of installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Tu r n the p owe r off when not using the p laye r . . . . . . 54 Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Cleaning the p layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Caution fo r whe n the unit is installed in a r ack with a glass doo r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Cleaning the p ickup lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Handling discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 T r oubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 KURO LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Netwo r k . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Othe r s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Glossa r y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 S p ecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 5 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
01 6 En Chapter 1 Before you start WhatâÂÂs in the box â¢R e m o t e c o n t r ol x 1 ⢠Video/audio cable (yellow/white/ r ed p lugs) x 1 ⢠AA/R6 d ry cell batte r ies x 2 â¢W a rr anty ca r d â¢O p er ating instr uctions (this document) ⢠U.K., Australia and New Zealand models: Powe r co r d x 1 Others: Powe r co r d x 2 Putting the batteries in the remote control 1 Open the rear cover. 2 Insert the batteries (AA/R6 x 2). Inse r t as indicated by the ï« /ïª ma r ks into the batte r y com p ar tment. 3 Close the rear cover. Close secu r ely (a click should be hea r d). Caution ⢠Do not use any batte r ies othe r than th e ones s p ecified. Also, do not use a new batte r y togethe r with an old one. ⢠When loadin g the batte r ies into the r emote cont r ol, set them in the pr o pe r di r ection, as i ndicated by the p olar ity mar ks ( ï« and ïª ). ⢠Do not heat batte r ies, disassemble them, o r th r ow them into fl ames o r wate r . ⢠Batte r ies may have diffe r ent voltages, even if they look simila r . Do not use diffe r ent kinds of batte r ies togeth e r . â¢T o pr event lea kage of batte r y fluid, r emove the batte r ies if you do not p la n to use the r emo te cont r ol fo r a long p er iod of time (1 month o r mo r e). If the fluid should leak, w i p e it ca r efully off the inside of the case, then inse r t new batte r ies. If a batte r y should leak and the fluid shou ld get on you r skin, flush it off with la r ge quantities of wate r . ⢠When dis posing of used batte r ie s, p lease comp ly with gove r nmental r egulations o r envi r onme ntal p ublic institutio nâÂÂs r ules that a pp ly in you r count r y/a r ea. ⢠WARNING Do not use o r sto r e batte r ies in dir ect sunlight o r othe r excessively hot p lace, such as inside a ca r o r nea r a heate r . This can cause batte r ies to leak, ove r heat, ex p lode o r ca tch fi r e. It can also r educe the life o r p er for mance of batte r ies. D3-4-2-3-3_En P r ess lightly on this p ar t and slide into the di r ection of the a rr ow. Inse r t the negative ( ïª ) side fi r st. LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 6 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
7 En 01 Types of discs/files that can be played Playable discs Discs with the lo go marks below indicated on the disc la bel, package or jacket can be played. âÂÂBlu-ray Discâ and are trademarks. is a trademark of DVD Form at/Logo Li censing Corporation. Disc typ e Logo Applicatio n format BDMV 1 1. Inc luding the AVCHD fo r mat. BDAV DVD-Video DVD VR CD-DA DTS-CD DATA-DIS C 2 2. Discs on which video, image o r audio files a r e r ecor ded. BD 3 3. Incl uding dual-laye r ed di scs. BD-ROM ï± ï± ï³ï³ï³ï³ BD-R 4 4. Finalize (close) them befo r e p laying them on this p layer . ï± ï± ï³ï³ï³ï³ BD-RE ï± ï± ï³ï³ï³ï³ DVD DVD-ROM ï±ï³ï±ï³ ï³ï± DVD-R 3 , 4,5 5. DVD -R fo r Autho r ing discs (3.95 and 4.7 GB) cannot be p layed. ï±ï³ï± ï±ï³ï± DVD-RW 4,6 6. Ve r sion 1.0 DVD -RW discs cannot be p layed. ï±ï³ï± ï±ï³ï± DVD R 3,4 ï±ï³ï±ï³ ï³ï± DVD RW 4 ï±ï³ï±ï³ ï³ï± CD CD-DA (Audio CD) ï³ï³ï³ï³ ï± ï³ CD-R 4 ï³ï³ï³ï³ ï± ï± CD-RW 4 ï³ï³ï³ï³ ï± ï± CD-ROM ï³ï³ï³ï³ ï± ï± LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 7 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
01 8 En ï° Discs that cannot be played ⢠HD DVDs â¢D V D A u d i o d i s c s â¢D V D - R A M d i s c s â¢S A C D s â¢V i d e o C D s â¢S V C D s It is p ossible that some discs ot he r than th e ones listed above may not be p layable eithe r . Note ⢠Some discs cannot be p layed, even if one of the logo ma r ks on the pr evious p age is indicated. â¢T o p lay 8 cm discs, set the disc in the 8 cm disc de pr ession in the cente r of the disc t r ay. N o ada p te r is necessa r y. 8 cm BD-ROMs cannot be p layed. ï° About audio formats The following audio f o r mats a r e su pp o r ted on th is p laye r: â¢D o l b y T r ueHD â¢D o l b y D i g i t a l P l u s â¢D o l b y D i g i t a l â¢D T S - H D M a s t e r Audio â¢D T S - H D H i g h R e s o l u t i o n A u d i o ⢠DTS Digital Su rr ound â¢M P E G ⢠MPEG-2 AAC â¢L i n e a r PC M To enjoy the su rr o und sound of Dolby T r ueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-HD Maste r Audio and DTS-HD High Resolutio n Audio, it is r ecommended to connect th e p layer to an AV r eceiver or amp lifie r comp atible with these audio fo r mats using an HDMI cable. Afte r loading a BD containing sound in one o f these audio fo r mats, select the audio fo r mat on the menu sc r een. See About the audio output se ttings on p age 45 fo r the out p ut condit ions of the diffe r ent fo r mats. Manufactured under licens e from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the d ouble-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Manufactured under lic ense under U.S. Patent #âÂÂs: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974 ,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,392,195; 7,272,56 7; 7,333,929; 7,2 12,872 & other U.S. and worldwid e patents issued & pending. DTS is a registered trademark and th e DTS log os, Symbol, DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master Audio | Essential are trademarks of DTS, Inc. é 19 96-2008 DTS, Inc. Al l Rights Reserved. ï° Playing BDs ⢠BDs (BDMV) com p atible with the fo r mats bel ow can be p layed. âÂÂB l u - r ay Disc Read-Only (ROM) For mat Ver sion 2 âÂÂB l u - r ay Disc Recor dable (R) For mat Ver sion 2 âÂÂB l u - r ay Disc Rewr itable (RE) For mat Ver sion 3 This p laye r su pp o r ts BD-ROM P r ofile 2. BONUSVIEW functions suc h as p layback of seconda r y video (Pictu r e-in-Pictu r e) and seconda r y audio can be used. The data used with th e BONUSVIEW functions (the seconda r y video (Pictu r e-in-Pictu r e) and seconda r y audio data) m ay be sto r ed in the stor age. Fo r details on seconda r y video and seconda r y audio p layback, r efer to the discâÂÂs inst r uc tions. âÂÂBONUSVIEWâ is trademark of Blu-ray Disc Association. BD-LIVE functions such as downloading movie t r aile r s o r additional audio and su btitle languages and p laying o n-line games can be enjo yed ove r th e Inte r net. The da ta download ed with th e BD-LIVE function (t r aile r s, etc.) is sto r ed in the stor age. Ref e r to the discâÂÂs inst r uctions fo r de tails about BD- LIVE functions. âÂÂBD-LIVEâ logo is trad emark of Blu-ray Disc Association. With BD-ROMs, it is possible to use BD-J (Java) a pp licatio ns to c r eate high ly inte r active titles, fo r exam p le incl uding games . Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or regist ered trademarks of Sun Microsys tems, Inc. in the U.S. and ot her countri es. The p layer âÂÂs inter nal stor age has a maximum c ap acity of r oughly 1 GB. Use an exter nal stor age connected to the USB po r t if you want to sto r e la r ge quantities of data ( p age 16). If a message saying the r e is not enough sto r age s p ace a pp ea r s, e r ase an y unnecessa r y data ( p age 42). ⢠BDs (BDAV) com p atible with the fo r mats b elow can be p layed. âÂÂB l u - r ay D i sc Reco r da ble (R) Fo r mat Ve r sion 1 âÂÂB l u - r ay Disc Rewr itable (R E) For mat Ver sion 2 LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 8 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
9 En 01 ï° Playing DVDs This label indic ates playback compatibil ity with DVD-RW discs recorded in VR format (Video Recordin g format). However, for discs recorded with a record-only-once encrypted program, playbac k can only be achieved using a CPRM co mpatible device. The AVCHD is a high definition (HD) digital video came r a r ecor der fo r mat r ecor ding high-definition onto ce r tain media by using highly efficient codec technolo gies. âÂÂAVCHDâ and t he âÂÂAVCHDâ logo ar e trademarks of Panasonic Corporation and Sony Corporation. ï° About region numbers Blu- r ay Disc Playe r and BD-ROM o r DVD-Video discs a r e assigned r egion numbe r s acco r ding to the r egion in which they a r e sold. This p laye r âÂÂs r egion numbe r s a r e: â¢B D - R O M : â U.K., Australia and New Zealand models: B â Other s : A â¢D V D - V i d e o : â U.K. models : 2 â Australia and New Zealand models : 4 âÂÂO t h e r s : 3 Discs not including thes e numbe r s cannot be p layed. Discs p layable on this p laye r a r e as shown below. â¢B D s : â U.K., Australia and New Zealand models: B (including B) and ALL â Other s : A (including A) and ALL â¢D V D s : â U.K. models: 2 (including 2) and ALL â Australia and New Zealand models : 4 (including 4) and ALL â Other s: 3 (inclu ding 3) and ALL ï° Playing CDs Rega r ding co p y pr otected CDs: This p la yer is designed to confo r m to the s p ecifications of the Audio CD fo r mat. This p laye r does not su pp o r t the p layback o r function of discs that do not confo r m to these s p ecifications. ï° DualDisc playback A DualDisc is a new two-side d disc, one side of whic h contains DVD content â video, audio, etc. â while the othe r side co ntains non-DVD co ntent such as digita l audio mate r ial . The DVD side of a DualD isc can be p layed on this p lay er (excluding any DVD-Audio content). The non-DVD, audio side of the disc is not com p atible with this p layer . It is p ossible that when loading o r ejecting a DualDisc, the o pp osite side to that being p layed will be sc r atched. Sc r atched discs may not be p layable. Fo r mo r e detailed info r mation on the DualDisc s p ecificatio n, p lease r efe r to the disc manufactu r er o r disc r e taile r . ï° Playing discs created on computers or BD/DVD recorder s â¢I t m a y n o t b e p ossible to p lay discs r ecor ded using a com p ute r due to the a pp lication settings o r com p ute r âÂÂs envi r onment settings. Reco r d discs in a fo r mat p layable on this p layer . For detail s, contac t the deale r . â¢I t m a y n o t b e p ossible to p lay discs r ecor ded using a com p ute r o r a BD/DVD r eco r de r , if bu r n qual ity is not good due to cha r acter istics of the disc, sc r atches, di r t on the disc, di r t on the r ecor der âÂÂs lens, etc. Playable files Video, image and audio files r ecor ded on DVDs and CDs can be p layed. Caution ⢠In DVD, only the one r eco r ded by the ISO 9660 file system can be p layed. ⢠Some files may not be p layable. â¢F o r some f iles, it may not be p ossible to use cer tain functions du r ing p layback. ⢠It may not be p ossible to p lay some files, even if they have the extension of a file p layable on this p layer . â¢F i l e s pr otected by DRM (Digital Rights Management) cannot be p la yed (not including DivX VOD file s). ï° Supported video file formats â¢D i v X DivX î is a digital video f o r mat c r eated by DivX, Inc. This is an offi cial DivX Ce r tified o r DivX Ult r a Ce r tifi ed device that p lays DivX video. Confo r m to the size unde r 720 x 576 p ixels/720 x 480 p ixels. DivX files encoded with GMC/Q p el o p tion cannot be p layed. Only audio si gnals wit h MP3 o r Dolby Digital (AC3) fo r mat a r e out p ut. Note that files othe r than the ones con taining DivX video cannot be p layed, even if they have the extension âÂÂ.aviâÂÂ. DivX î is a registered trademar k of DivX, In c., and is used under license. âÂÂP l a y s D i v X î video LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 9 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
01 10 En Note â¢T h i s D i v X î Ce r tified device must be r egister ed in o r de r to p lay DivX Video-on-De mand (VOD) content. Fi r st gene r ate the DivX VOD r egist r ation code fo r you r device and submit it du r ing the r egistr atio n pr ocess. [Im p or ta nt: DivX VOD content is pr otected by a DivX DRM (Digital Rights Management) system that r estr icts p layback to r egiste r ed DivX Cer tified devices. If you t r y to p lay DivX VO D content not autho r ized fo r you r device, the message Authorization Er ror will be dis p layed and you r content will not p lay.] Lea r n mo r e at www.divx.com/vod. âÂÂT h i s p layer âÂÂs DivX VOD r egistr atio n code can be checked at Initial Set up ï¤ Playback ï¤ DivX VOD ï¤ Reg i stration Code ( p ag e 39). â The numbe r of views is r estr icted fo r some DivX VOD files. When such files a r e p layed on this p layer , the r ema ining number of views is disp layed. Files fo r which the r emaining numbe r of views has r eached 0 cannot be p layed ( Rental Expired is dis p layed). Files fo r which the numbe r of views is not r est r icted can be p la yed as many times as you like (the r emaining numbe r of views is not dis p layed). ï° Supported image file formats ⢠JPEG File fo r mat: JFIF Ve r . 1.02/Exif Ve r . 2.2 Resoluti on: U p to 4096 x 4096 p ixels Only baseline JPEG files a r e su pp o r ted. ï° Supported audio file formats ⢠Windows Med ia⢠Audio 9 (WMA9 ) Bit r ate: U p to 192 kb p s Sam p ling f r equencies: 22.05 kHz, 32 kHz, 4 4.1 kHz and 48 kHz Windows Media is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsof t Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. This product includ es technology owned by Microsoft Corporation and cann ot be used or distribute d without a license from Microsof t Licensing, Inc. ⢠MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3) Bit r ate: U p to 320 kb p s Sam p ling f r equencies: 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 1 2 kHz, 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz ï° Playable file extensions ⢠Video files .divx and .avi ⢠Image f iles .j p g and .j p eg ⢠Audio files .wma and .m p 3 Part Names and Functions Remote Control 1 ïµ STANDBY/ON â P r ess to tur n the p ower on and off. 2 TV CONTROL â ( p age 19) 3 AUDIO â ( p age 26) 4S U B T I T L E â ( p age 25) 5 Number buttons â Use these to select and p lay the title/cha p te r /t r ack you want to view o r listen to and to select items f r om menus. CLEAR â P r ess to clear the numer ic number , etc. ENTER â P r ess to execute the selected item or enter a setting that has been changed, etc. 6 SECON DARY AUDIO â ( p age 26) SECONDARY VIDEO â ( p age 26) STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE FL DIMMER CLEAR ENTER VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN BD PLAYER PLAY PREV PAUSE STOP NEXT RED GREEN BLUE YELLOW VIDEO ADJUST INPUT SELECT TV CONTROL CH VOL AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY OUTPUT RESOLUTION ENTER 10 7 8 4 12 13 1 2 3 5 6 9 11 14 18 20 17 19 21 15 16 22 23 LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 10 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
11 En 01 7 VIDEO SELECT â ( p age 21) 8 HOME MEDIA GALLERY â ( p age 31) 9T O P M E N U â P r ess to dis p lay the to p menu of the BD- ROM o r DVD-Video . 10 ï© /ïª /ï« /ï¬ â Use to select items, change settings and move the cu r sor . ENTER â P r ess to execute the selected item or enter a setting that has been changed, etc. 11 HOME MENU â ( p age 36) 12 ï¤ PLAY â ( p age 24) ïÂÂ¥ PAUSE â ( p age 24) ï§ STOP â ( p age 24) ï¯ PR EV/ï° NEXT â ( p age 25) ï /ï± / â ( p age 25) / ï²/ ï® â ( p age 25) 13 R ED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE â Use these to navigate BD-ROM menus. 14 VIDEO ADJUST â ( p age 34 ) 15 ï¨ OPEN/CLOSE â P r ess to o p en and close the disc t r ay. 16 FL DIMMER â W hen pr essed, the b r ightness of the p layer âÂÂs fr ont p anel disp lay and the status of the indicato r s on the p laye r âÂÂs f r ont p ane l change s. 17 ANGLE â ( p age 25) 18 OUTPUT RESO LUTION â ( p age 21) 19 PLAY MODE â ( p age 28) 20 POP UP MENU/MENU â P r ess to dis p lay the BD- ROM o r DVD-Video menus. 21 DISPLAY â ( p age 26) 22 TOOLS â ( p age 20) 23 RETURN â P r ess to r etur n to the pr evious sc r een. Front Panel 1 ïµ STANDBY/ON â P r ess to tur n the p ower on a nd off. When the p ower is on , the indica to r is lit. 2 FL OFF indicator â Lights when the p layer âÂÂs f r ont p anel disp lay is tur ned off pr essing FL DIMMER . 3 ï¯/ ï â P r ess to skip to the beginning of the pr evious title/cha p ter /tr ack/file . Pr ess and hold to sta r t r eve r se scanning ( p age 25). ï® /ï° â P r ess to skip to the beginning of the next title/cha p te r /t r ack/file . P r ess and hold to sta r t fo r war d scanning ( p age 25). ïÂÂ¥ â P r ess dur ing p layback to p ause. Pr ess agai n to r estar t p la yback. ï§ â P r ess to stop p layback. When the p ower is on, the above button indicato r s a r e lit. 4 Remote control sensor â Point the r emote cont r ol to this, then o p er ate i t within a ppr ox imately 7 m. The p layer may have tr ouble cap tur ing r emote contr ol signals if the r e is a fluo r escent light nea r by. If this ha pp ens, move the p laye r away f r om the fluo r escent light. 5 Disc tray 6 Blu-ray in dicator â Lights when the p ower is tu r ned on. 7 ï¨ OPEN/CLOSE â P r ess to op en and close the disc t r ay. 8 Front panel display 9P Q L S i n d i c a t o r â ( p age 14) 10 HDMI indicator â ( p age 13) 11 ï¤ â P r ess to sta r t p layback. Front panel display Indicators Front panel buttons Blu-ray PQLS HDMI 1 1. This lights when an H DMI-com p atible device is connected to an HDMI OUT te r mina l ( p age 13). FL OFF B r ight Lit B r ight Lit Lit Off Medium Lit B r ight Lit Lit Off Da r kL i tD a r kL i t L i t O f f O f fO f fO f fO f fO f f L i t 1 11 5 4 2 7 8 6 9 3 10 LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 11 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
01 12 En Front Panel Display 1 ï¤ â ( p age 24) 2 ïÂÂ¥ â ( p age 24) 3H D â This lights when an HD MI cable is c onnected and video signals a r e being out p ut with a r esolution of 1080/50i, 1080/50 p , 720/50 p , 1080/24 p , 1080 /60i, 1080/60 p o r 720/60 p . It also lights when a com p onent video cable is connected and video sig nals a r e being out p ut with a r esolu tion of 1080/60i o r 720/60 p . 4L A N â ( p age 17) 5 Character disp lay â Dis p lays the title/cha p ter /tr ack numbe r , ela p sed time, etc. 6 24HZ/ 50HZ/60H Z â The f r equency of the video f r am e o r field being out p ut lights. 7E X T â ( p age 16) 8C O N T R O L â ( p age 14) Rear Panel 1 AUDIO OUT te rminals â ( p age 16) 2 VIDEO OUT terminals VIDEO â ( p age 16) COMPONENT VIDEO â ( p age 16) 3A C I N â ( p age 17) 4 CONTROL IN terminal â Use to cont r ol this p layer f r om the r emote senso r of anothe r Pionee r com p onent with a CONTROL OUT te r minal and bea r ing the ï± ma r k. Connec t the CO NTROL OUT te r minal of the ot he r com p onent to CONTROL IN on this p laye r using a mini- p lug co r d (comme r cially available). Caution â¢B e s u r e to connect cables for outp utting the a udio and video signals. ⢠When connected via System Cont r ol , p oint the r emote contr ol towar d the connected comp onent (such as an AV r eceiver or am p li fie r ). The r em ote will not wo r k co rr ectly when p ointed at this p layer . ⢠You cannot use System Cont r ol with com p onents that do not have a System Con t r ol te r minal o r with com p onents manuf actu r ed by com p anies othe r than Pionee r . 5 DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL) terminal â ( p age 16) 6 HDMI OUT terminal â ( p age 15) 7U S B (BD ST ORAGE) port â ( p age 16) 8 LAN (100) terminal â ( p age 17) 9 RS-232C termin al â This te r minal is not used. LAN HD 24HZ 50HZ 60HZ CONTROL EXT 1 5 6 7 8 2 4 3 AC IN LAN (100) HDMI OUT OUTPUT COMPONENT VIDEO DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL CONTROL IN Y R AUDIO VIDEO L P B P R RS-232 C USB (BD STORAGE) 3 8 7 6 5 4 2 1 9 LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 12 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
13 En 02 Chapter 2 Connecting up Be su r e to tu r n off the p ower and un p lug the p ower co r d f r om the p owe r outlet whenev e r making o r chang ing connection s. Afte r connecting, make the settings a t the Setup Navigato r menu acco r ding to the typ e of cable connected ( p a ge 18). Also r efe r to the op er ating instr uctions of the device being connected. Connecting using an HDMI cable The audio and v ideo signals can be t r ansfe rr ed to HDMI- com p atible devices as digital signals with no loss of sound o r video quality. Note ⢠Make the settings at the Setup Navigator menu acco r ding to connected HDM I-com p atible devi ce ( p age 18). â¢T h e HDMI indicator on the p lay er âÂÂs f r ont p anel lights when an HDMI-com p atible device i s connected to an HDMI OUT te r minal ( p age 11). ⢠1080 p video si gnals ma y not be o ut p ut, de p ending on the HDMI cable being used. About HDMI This p laye r inco rp o r ates High-Defin ition Mult imedia Inte r face (HDMIâ¢) technology. HDMI, the HDMI Logo and High -Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or re gistered tradem arks of HDMI Licensin g, LLC. The p laye r su pp o r ts Dee p Colo r. The conventional p layer s can t r ansmit a video signal with 8 bit co lo r de p th in the YCbC r 4:4:4 o r RGB fo r mats, t he p layer s su pp or ting Deep Color can t r ansmit a video signal with a colo r bit de p th of g r eater than 8 bits p e r colo r com p onent. Subtle colo r g r adations can be r e pr oduced when conn ected to a TV that su pp or ts Deep Colo r . This pr oduct is com p atible with âÂÂx.v.Colo r â that have th e ca p ab ility to r ealize a wi de-gamut colo r sp ace based on the xvYCC s p ecifications. Playing video si gnals confo r ming to âÂÂxvYCCâ standa r ds on this p layer when connected to an âÂÂx .v.Colo r âÂÂ- com p atible TV, etc., ex p ands colo r r e pr oducti on ca p abilitie s, allowing natu r al colo r s to be r e pr oduced mo r e faithfully than eve r . âÂÂx.v.Colo r â is a pr omotio n name given to the pr oducts that have the ca p ability to r ealize a wide-gam ut colo r sp ac e based on the inte r na tional standa r d s p ecification s defined as xvYCC. âÂÂx.v.ColorâÂÂ, and are trademarks of Sony Corporation. ï° Audio signals that can be transferred with the playerâÂÂs HDMI OUT terminal â¢D o l b y T r ueHD â¢D o l b y D i g i t a l P l u s â¢D o l b y D i g i t a l â¢D T S - H D M a s t e r Audio ⢠DTS-HD High Resolution Audi o ⢠DTS Digi tal Su rr ound ⢠MPEG-2 AAC â¢L i n e a r PCM Linea r PCM audio signals meeting the following conditions can be out p ut: âÂÂS a m p ling fr equency: 32 kHz to 192 kHz âÂÂN u m b e r of channels: Up to 8 (up to 6 for a 192 kHz sam p lin g f r equency) Fo r details, see About the audio o utput settings on p age 45. ï° About the HDMI High Speed Transmission This p laye r out p uts 1080/50 p , 1080/60 p and Dee p Co lo r video signals. If you r TV su pp o r ts 108 0/50 p , 1080/60 p o r Dee p Colo r signals, use a High S p eed HD MI⢠cable in o r de r to take advantage of the max imum pe r fo r man ce the p layer and TV can offe r . Also set HDMI High Speed Transmission to On ( p age 38). High S p eed HDMI⢠cables a r e tested to ca rr y signals u p to 1080 p . 1080/50i, 1080/50 p , 720/50 p , 1080/24 p , 1080/60i, 1080/60 p and 720/60 p video signals that a r e ca p able of Dee p Colo r ca n also be ca rr ied. LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 13 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
02 14 En Note â¢S e t HDMI High Speed Transmission to Off when using an HDMI cable othe r than a High S p eed HDMI⢠cable (a Standa r d HDMI⢠cable). ⢠The follow ing r estr ictions a pp ly when HDMI High Speed Transmission is s et to Off : âÂÂD e e p Color signals ar e not outp ut. âÂÂI f t h e o u t p ut video r esolution is set to Auto , the signals a r e out p ut with a r esolution of 1080/50i o r 1080/60i when TVâÂÂs pr efe rr ed r esolution is 1080/50p o r 1080/60 p. â W hen the out p ut video r e solution is set to 576i/480i o r 576 p /480 p , Dolby T r ueHD and DTS-HD Maste r Audio audio signals a r e out put as Dolby Digital, DTS Digital Su rr ound o r lin ea r PCM signals. 96 kHz o r 192 kHz multi-channel audio signa ls a r e out p ut as linea r PCM 2-channel audi o signals ( p age 45). ⢠When an HDMI cable with a built-in eq ualize r is connected, it may not o p er ate pr op er ly. ï° When connected to a DVI device ⢠It is not possible to connect DVI devices (computer displays, for ex ample) that are not compatible wi th HDCP. HDCP is a s p ecific ation to pr otect audiovis ual conten t ac r oss the DVI/HDMI inte r face. ⢠No audi o signals a r e out p ut. Connect using an audio cable, etc. â¢T h i s p layer is designed for connectio n with HDMI- com p atible devices. W hen connected to a DVI device, it may not o p er ate pr op er ly de p ending on the DVI device. About KURO LINK function The functions listed below wo r k when a Pionee r KURO LINK-com p atible Flat Sc r een TV, AV system (AV r eceive r o r am p lifie r , etc.) o r HD A V C o n v er ter is connected to the p layer using an HDM I cable. Functions operated fro m the TV Such p layer o p er ations as star ting and sto pp ing p layback and dis p laying the menus can be p er for med f r om the Flat Sc r een TV. Auto-select function The in p ut switches automatically on the Flat Sc r een TV, AV system (AV r eceiver or am p lifier , etc.) and HD AV Conve r te r when p layback is sta r ted on the p laye r o r the Home Menu o r Home Media Galle r y is dis p layed. When the in p ut is switc hed, the p la yback p ict u r e, the Home Menu o r Home Media Galle r y a pp ea r s on the Flat Sc reen TV. Simultaneous po wer function When p la yback on the p la yer is star te d or the Home Menu o r Home Media Galle r y is dis p layed, if the Flat Sc r een TVâÂÂs p ower was off, its p ower tur ns on automatically. When the Flat Sc r ee n TVâÂÂs p ower is tur ned off, the p layer âÂÂs p ower automa tically tu r ns off. Unified language fun ction When the language info r mation f r om a connected Flat Sc r een TV is r eceived, you can h ave the p laye r âÂÂs on-sc r een dis p lay language change automatically to that of the Flat Sc r een TV. Th is function is ava ilable only when p layback is sto pp ed and the menu scr een is not dis p layed. Ca ut ion â¢A l s o r efe r to the op er ating instr uctions of the Fla t Sc r een TV, AV system (AV r eceive r o r am p lifie r , etc.) and HD AV Conve r ter . Note ⢠CONTROL on the p laye r âÂÂs f r ont p anel dis p lay light s when the KURO LINK function is activated ( p age 12). ï° To use the KURO LINK function ⢠The KURO LINK func tion only wo r ks wh en out p utting video signals f r om the HDMI OUT te r mina l. ⢠The KURO LINK function wo r ks when KURO LINK is set to On on the p layer (p age 38). ⢠The KURO LINK f unction o p er at e s wh e n K UR O L I NK is set to On fo r all devices connected with HDMI cables. Once connections and the settings of all the devices a r e finished, be su r e to check that the p la yer âÂÂs p ictur e is outp ut to the Flat Scr een TV. (Also check afte r chang ing the connected devi ces and r econnecting HDMI cables.) The KURO LINK f unction may not o p er ate pr op er ly if t he p layer âÂÂs p ictur e is not pr o pe r ly out p ut to the Flat Sc r een TV. â¢U s e H i g h S p eed HDMI⢠cables when using the KURO LINK function. The KURO LINK function may not o p er ate pr op er ly if othe r HDMI cables a r e u sed. â¢F o r some m odels, the KURO LINK function may be r efe rr ed to as âÂÂHDM I Contr olâÂÂ. â¢T h e S i m u l t a n e o u s p ower functi on is activat ed when the p laye r is set as follows ( p age 38): Display Power On : On Display Power Off : On ï° About PQLS function The PQLS (P r ecisio n Quar tz Lock System ) is a tr ansfer cont r ol technolo gy using the KURO LINK function . The p layer âÂÂs outp ut signals ar e contr olled fr om the AV r eceiver or amp lifi er to achieve high quality sound p layback using the quar tz oscillator of AV r eceiver or am p lifie r . Th is eliminates the influence of the jitte r gene r ated u p on tr ansfe r which can adve r sely affect the sound quality. â¢T h e p layer su pp or ts the âÂÂP QLS 2ch Audioâ function that is only activated when p laying a udio CDs (CD- DAs), and the âÂÂPQLS Multi S u rr ou ndâ function that is activated when p laying all disc s (BDs, DVDs, etc.) with audio out p ut i n linea r PCM. LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 14 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
15 En 02 ⢠The âÂÂPQLS 2ch Audioâ f uncti on is only activated when a Pionee r AV r eceiver o r am p li fier com p atible with the âÂÂPQLS 2ch Audioâ function is connected di r ectly to the p laye r âÂÂs HDMI OUT te r minal using an HDMI cable, and when the p layer is set as follows ( p age 38): KURO LINK : On PQLS : Auto ⢠The âÂÂPQLS Mu lti Su rr oundâ function is only activate d when a Pionee r AV r eceiver or am p lif ier com p atible with the âÂÂPQLS Multi Su rr oundâ f unction is connected di r ectly to the p layer âÂÂs HDMI OUT te r minal using an HDMI ca ble, and when the p laye r is set as follows ( p age 38): HDMI Audio Out : PCM KURO LINK : On PQLS : Auto â¢A l s o r efer to th e op er ating instr uctions of AV r eceiver o r am p li fi e r . ⢠Please see the Pionee r website fo r AV r eceiver s o r am p lifie r s th at su pp o r t the PQLS function. Caution â¢I f t h e o u t p ut video r esolution is switched, the PQLS function may not wo r k. The function will wo r k again once p layback has been sto pp ed then r esta r ted. Note â¢T h e PQLS indica tor on the p la ye r âÂÂs f r ont p anel lights when the PQLS function i s activated ( p age 12). ï° About connections to components of other makes supporting the KURO LINK function The functions listed below wo r k when a TV o r AV syst em (AV r eceive r o r amp li fie r , etc.) su pp o r ting the p laye r âÂÂs KURO LIN K function is co nnected to the p layer using an HDMI cable. (De p ending on you r TV o r A V system (AV r eceiver or amp li fier , etc.), it cou ld ha pp en that not all of the functions will wo r k.) ⢠Functions o p e r ated f r om the TV ⢠Auto-select function ⢠Simultaneous p owe r functio n ⢠Unified language fun ction Please see the P ionee r website fo r the latest in fo r mation on b r ands and model numbe r s of othe r br an ds that su pp o r t the KU RO LINK fu nction. Connecting a TV See Connecting an AV receiver or ampli fier below to connect an AV r eceiver o r amp lifier usi ng an HDMI cable. Caution â¢H o l d t h e p lug when connecting and disconnecting the cable. ⢠Placing a load on the p lug cou ld r esult in faulty contact and no video signals being out p ut. Connecting an AV receiver or amplifier Connect to an A V r eceiver or am p lifier in o r der to enjoy the su rr oun d sound of Dolby T r ueHD, D olby Digita l Plus, Dolby Digital, DTS-HD Maste r Audio, DTS-HD High Resolutio n Audio o r DTS Digita l Su rr ound. Fo r inst r uction s on connec ting the TV a nd s p eake r s to the AV r eceiver o r amp lifier , r efer to the op er ating instr uctions of AV r eceive r o r am p lifie r . Caution â¢H o l d t h e p lug when connecting and disconnecting the cable. â¢P l a c i n g a l o a d o n t h e p lu g could r esult in faulty contact and no video signals being out p ut. LAN (100) HDMI OUT OUTPUT COMPONENT VIDEO DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL CONTROL IN Y R AUDIO VIDEO L P B P R RS-232 C USB (BD STORAGE) Playe r âÂÂs r ea r p anel TV Match t he di r ection of the p lug to the ter minal and inse r t st r aight. To HDMI in p ut te r minal HDMI cabl e (comme r cially available) It is also p ossible to connect t o an AV r eceive r o r am p lifie r using an HDMI cable (below). Di r ection of signal flow LAN (100) HDMI OUT OUTPUT COMPONENT VIDEO DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL CONTROL IN Y R AUDIO VIDEO L P B P R RS-232 C USB (BD STORAGE) Playe r âÂÂs r ea r p anel To HDMI in p ut te r minal F r om HDMI out p ut te r minal AV r eceiv e r o r am p lifie r To HDMI in p ut te r minal TV HDMI cabl e (comme r cially available) Match the di r ection of the p lug to the te r minal and inse rt st r aight. Di r ection of signal flow HDMI cabl e (comme r cially available) LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 15 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
02 16 En Connecting video and audio cables Note ⢠Make the settings in the Setup Navigator menu acco r ding to the ty p e of cable connected ( p age 18). â¢T o o u t p ut video signals f r om this p layer , connect using one of the following (not inc luding when connected using an HDMI cable): a com p onen t video cable o r a video cable. Connecting a TV using a video/audio cable Caution ⢠Connect the playerâÂÂs vide o output directly to your TV. This p laye r su pp o r ts analog co p y pr otection technology . The r efo r e the p ictur e ma y not be dis p layed pr o pe r ly if connected to a TV via a DVD r ecor der /video deck or whe n p laying the p layer âÂÂs out p ut mate r ial that is r eco r ded by a DVD reco r de r / video deck. Fu r ther mo r e, the p ictur e ma y not be dis p layed pr o pe r ly due to th e co p y pr otection when the p laye r is conne cted to a TV with a buil t-in video deck. Fo r details, contact the manufactu r er of you r TV. Note â¢V i d e o s i g n a l s a r e outp ut with a r esolutio n of 576/50i o r 480/60i when connected using a video cable. ⢠When connected to the TV using a com p onent video cable, video signals a r e not out p ut with a resolutio n of 1080/50i, 1080/50 p , 720/50 p , 1080/24 p or 1080/60 p . â¢D e p ending on the outp ut video r esolution setting, the p ictur e may not be outp ut (p age 21). Connecting an AV receiver or amplifier using an optical digital audio cable Note ⢠To switch the video f r om the AV r eceiver or am p li fier , also conne ct the video out p ut te r min als. Connecting components to the USB port The data downloaded with the BD-LIVE function and the data used wit h the BON USVIEW fun ction when p laying BD-ROMs can be sto r ed on a device con nected to the USB po r t (exte r nal sto r age). About USB (external storage) devices The USB (exte r nal sto r age) devices that can be connected to the p layer ar e as shown below. â¢U S B 2 . 0 - c o m p at ible memor y devices or har d disks ⢠FAT16 o r FAT32 file system, minimum 1 GB ca p acity (2 GB o r mo r e r ecommended) Note ⢠Devices fo r matted with a file system othe r than t h e above cannot be used. Such devices may howeve r be usable if they a r e fo r matted f r om the p layer . â¢E x t e r nal sto r age devices may not be r ecognize d if they contain multi p le p ar titions. ⢠Some exte r nal sto r age devices ma y not o p er ate with this p lay e r . â¢O p er ation of exter nal stor age devices (USB memor y devices, exte r nal ha r d di sks, etc.) is not gua r anteed. OUTPUT COMPONENT VIDEO CONTROL IN Y R AUDIO VIDEO L P B P R TV Playe r âÂÂs r ea r p anel To com p onent video in p ut te r minals A com p onent cable o r th r ee comme r cially available video cables can be used instead of the video cable (yellow p lug) of the included video/audio cable fo r connection. Di r ection of signal flow Red White It is also p ossible to connect to an AV r eceiver or am p lifier . Connect the audio signals using an o p tical digital audio cable o r an audio cable (2 channels) (below). To video/audio in p ut te r minals Video/audio cable (included) Yellow LAN (100) HDMI OUT OUTPUT COMPONENT VIDEO DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL CONTROL IN Y R AUDIO VIDEO L P B P R RS-232 C USB (BD STORAGE) Playe r âÂÂs r ea r p anel To audio in p ut te r minal s AV r eceiv e r o r am p lifie r Red White Di r ection of signal flow 2-channel analog audio can also be connected. To o p tical digital audio in p ut te r minal O p tical digital audio cable (comme r cially available) Video/audio cable (included) LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 16 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
17 En 02 Connecting the USB (external storage) device Caution â¢B e s u r e to tur n the p layer âÂÂs p ower o ff befor e connecting o r disconnecting exte r nal sto r age devices. â¢U s e e m p ty exter nal stor age devices (on which nothing is sto r ed). ⢠When using an exte r nal ha r d disk as the exte r nal sto r age device, be su r e to tu r n on the ha r d diskâÂÂs p ower befor e tur ning on the p layer âÂÂs p ower . â¢I f t h e e x t e r nal stor age device is wr it e- pr otected, be su r e to disable the w r ite- pr otection. ⢠When connecting the USB cable, hold onto the p lug, set the p lug in the pr o pe r di rection fo r the p or t and ins e r t i t ho r izontally. ⢠Placing excessive loads on the p lug ma y r esult in p oor contact, making it imp ossible to wr ite data on the exte rnal sto r age device. â¢T h e p layer is equi pp ed with an inte r nal s to r age. This inte r nal sto r age cannot be used when an ex te r nal sto r age device is connected. â¢W h e n a U S B m e m o r y device or exter nal har d disk is connected and the p layer âÂÂs p ower is tur ned on, do not un p lug the p owe r co r d. Note â¢T h e EXT in dicato r on the p layer âÂÂs fr ont p anel disp lay lights when data can be sto r ed on the exte r nal sto r age ( p age 12). ⢠Devices may not wo r k i f connected to the USB p or t via a me mo r y ca r d r eader or USB hub. ⢠Use a USB cable with a lengt h of 2 mete r s o r less. Network connection BD-LIVE funct ions such as downloading mov ie t r ailer s o r additional audio and su btitle languages a nd p l aying on-line games can be enjoyed ove r the Inte r net. Th e p layer âÂÂs softwar e can also be u p dated ove r the Inte r net ( p age 44). Connect an Ethe r net hub (o r a r outer with hub functionalit y) that is connected to the Inte r net to the p laye r . Be su r e to use a 100BASE-TX com p atible Ethe r net hub o r r outer . Connecting via an Ethernet hub The p laye r can be connecte d to an Ethe r net hub using a LAN cable. Note ⢠LAN on the p laye r âÂÂs f r ont p anel dis p la y lights when the r e is an active local a r ea netwo r k (LAN) co nnection ( p age 12). â¢I f t h e r e is an available DHC P ser ver in your local ar ea netwo r k, the I P add r ess is obtained automatically. Othe r wise, set IP add r ess manually ( p age 41). â¢F o r some Inter net ser vice pr ovide r s, you may ha ve to set the individual netwo r k configu r ation manua lly. In this case, see p age 41. â¢P i o n e e r is not r esp onsible for any m alfunction of the p layer due to communication e rr or /malfunctions associated with you r netwo r k connection and/o r you r connected equi p ment. Please con t act you r Inte r net se r vice pr ovide r o r netwo r k device manufactu r er . Connecting the power cord Connect the p ower co r d afte r all the connectio ns between devices have been com p let ed. LAN (100) HDMI OUT OUTPUT COMPONENT VIDEO DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL CONTROL IN Y R AUDIO VIDEO L P B P R RS-232 C USB (BD STORAGE) USB memo r y device, etc. Ha r d disk, etc. Playe r âÂÂs r ea r p anel USB cable (comme r cially available) LAN (100) HDMI OUT OUTPUT COMPONENT VIDEO DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL C Y R AUDIO VIDEO L P B P R RS-232 C USB (BD STORAGE) 1 LAN 2 3 WAN LAN cabl e (comme r cially available) Ethe r net hub ( r oute r with hub functionality) Modem Inte r net Playe r âÂÂs r ea r p anel AC IN U T N T VIDEO CONTROL IN VIDEO P R Playe r âÂÂs rea r p anel Powe r co r d (included) To wall o utlet LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 17 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
03 18 En Chapter 3 Getting Started Making settings using the Setup Navigator menu Be su r e to p er for m these settings whe n using the p layer fo r the fi r st time . Caution â¢B e f o r e tur ning on the p ower , check that the connections between the p layer and othe r devices a r e co rr ect. Also, tu r n on the p owe r of the devices connected to the p la yer befo r e tu r ning on the p layer âÂÂs p ower . ⢠When using a Pione e r Flat Sc r een TV o r fr ont pr ojecto r com p atible with th e KURO LINK fu nction, set KURO LINK to On on the connected device befo r e tu r ning on the p laye r âÂÂs p owe r . â¢T h e s c r ee n in step 11 and test tones ar e outp ut simultaneously acco r d ing to the sett ings in ste p s 4 to 7. Lowe r the volume of the devices connected with the p layer . Note â¢W h e n a P i o n e e r Flat Scr een TV or fr ont pr ojector com p atible with the KURO LINK functi on is connect ed to the p layer using an HDMI cabl e, the p layer is automatically set to the op timum p ictur e quality fo r the connected de vice. 1 Turn on the TVâÂÂs power and switch the input. See the TVâÂÂs o p er ating inst ruction s fo r inst r uctions on o pe r ating the TV. 2 Turn on the playerâÂÂs po wer. P r ess ïµ STANDBY/ON. Check that the Setup Navigator menu is dis p layed. ï° If the Setup Navigator menu is not displayed ï¦ Press HOME ME NU to display the Home Menu, select In itial Setup ï¤ Setup Navigator ï¤ Start, then press ENTER. 3 Select the OSD language. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . Example ( U.K. mode ls): When a Pionee r Flat Sc r een TV that is com p atible wit h KURO LINK is connected to this p layer âÂÂs HDMI OUT te r minal, lan guage setti ngs a r e im p or ted f r om the Pionee r Flat Sc r een TVâÂÂs language settings befo r e Setup Navigator begins. 4 Select and set the vi deo and audio output terminals. Select the actually connected video and audio out p ut te r minals. Use ï© /ïª /ï« /ï¬ to select, then pr ess ENTER . Caution ⢠When HDMI is selected fo r Video , no video signals a r e out p ut f r om the COMPON ENT VIDEO o r VIDEO out p ut te r min als. ⢠When COMPONENT VIDEO o r VIDEO is selected at Video , no video signals a r e outp ut fr om the HDMI OUT te r minal. ⢠The video and audio signals out p ut fr om the set ou t p ut te r min als a r e out p ut synch r on ously (li p synch r onization). ⢠When COMPONENT VIDEO o r VIDEO is selected at Video , no sound is out p ut if HDMI is selected at Audio . Follow the pr ocedu r e below to r edo the connections, then select the pr o pe r connection at the setu p sc r een. â W hen connecting using com p onent video cables o r a video cable to wa tch the p ictu r e, connect to an AV r eceiver o r amp lifier , or a TV using either analog audio cables, an o p tical digit a l audio cable ( p age 16). TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER Setting item Output termina l name Video HDMI HDMI OUT COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO OUT COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO Audio HDMI HDMI OUT DIGITAL AUDIO DIGITAL OUT ANALOG AUDIO AUDIO OUT Setup Navigator BD PLAYER Please select the on-screen display language. Audio, subtitle and BDMV/DVD- Video menu language will also be set. LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 18 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
19 En 03 â T o listen to audio with the p layer connected to an AV r eceive r o r amp lifie r with an HDMI cable, connect the TV to the AV r eceiver o r am p lifier using an HDMI cable ( p age 15). â¢W h e n HDMI o r DIGITAL AUDIO is selected at Audio , linea r PCM au dio sign als (2 channel s) a r e out p ut f r om all te r minals othe r than the ones selected at Audio . â¢W h e n ANA LOG AUDIO is selected at Audio , no audio signals a r e out p ut f r om the HDMI OUT o r DIGITAL OUT te r minals . For steps 5 to 8, the step to which you should proceed depends on the comb ination of the Video and Audio settings. 5 Select and set the HDMI High Speed Transmission setting for the HD MI OUT terminal. Use ï« /ï¬ to selec t, then pr ess ENTER . When HDMI High Speed Transmissi on fo r the HDMI OUT te r minal is set to On , use a High S p eed HDMI ⢠cable. The p ict u r e and sound may not be out p ut pr o pe r ly if any othe r HDMI cable ( fo r exam p le a sta nda r d HDMI⢠cable) o r an HDMI cable wi th built-in equalize r is used. 6 Select the output vi deo resolution from the COMPONENT VIDEO output terminals. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . Fo r details on the r esolution settings, see Switching the output video resol ution on p age 21. 7 Select the aspect ratio of your TV. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . 8 Select the PQLS. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . Note ⢠Only when a Pionee r AV r eceiver or amp lifie r is connected , PQLS Sc r een a pp ea r s. ⢠The PQLS function wo r ks when linea r PCM audio signals a r e out p ut. Th e r efor e th e linea r PC M audio signals obt ained by dec oding all au dio signals a r e out p ut f r om HDMI OUT te r minal. Fo r details , see About the audio output settings on p age 45. â¢W h e n Use is select, the p layer is set to the settings below. HDMI Audio Out : PCM KURO LINK : On PQLS : Auto â¢F o r det ails on th e PQLS f unction, About PQLS function on p age 14. 9 Check the settings. Select Proceed , then pr ess ENTER . 10 Ou tput test tones. Use ï« /ï¬ to s elect Yes , then pr ess ENTER . 11 F inish the Setup Navigator menu. Use ï« /ï¬ to s elect Finish , then pr ess ENTE R . To r edo the settings f r om the sta r t, select Go Back . De p ending on the out p ut te r minal setting of ste p 4 o r the H D MI cable be ing used, it may ha pp en that no p ictur e and/o r sound is out p ut. If this ha pp ens, the setu p r etur ns to ste p 4 if the r e is no o p er ation fo r ove r 30 seconds. Once the setu p r etur ns to step 4, r edo the settings accor ding to the connected devices and the HDM I cable being used. 12 Checking the picture quality s ettings or setting the picture quality. If a Pionee r Flat Sc r een TV o r pr ojecto r is connected to the p layer and HDMI is selected for Video in step 4, the p layer sets the p ictur e quality auto matically. The automatic p ictu r e quality setting sc r een a pp ea r s. P r ess ENTER . When the automatic p ictur e quality se tting sc r een does not a pp ea r , the m anual p ictu r e quality setting sc r een a pp ea r s. U se ï©/ ïª to select the connected com p onent, then pr ess ENTE R . Operating the TV with the playerâÂÂs remote control When the manufactu r e r code fo r you r br and of TV is set on the p layer âÂÂs r emote con t r ol, the TV can be o p er ated using the p layer âÂÂs r em ote cont r ol. Caution â¢F o r some models it may not be p ossible to op er ate the TV with the p layer âÂÂs r emote cont r ol, even fo r TVs of b r ands listed on the manufac tu re r code list. â¢T h e s e t t i n g m a y b e r esto r ed to the default afte r the batte r ies a r e r ep laced. If this ha pp ens, r eset it. 1 Input the 2-digit manu facturer code. P r ess the numbe r buttons (0 to 9) to in p ut the code while pr essing TV CONTROL ïµ . Note â¢T h e f a c t o r y setting is 00 (PIONEER). ⢠If you make a mistake when in p utting the code, r elease T V CONTROL ïµ then st a r t ove r fr om th e beginning. TV CONTROL STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE FL DIMMER ENTER INPUT SELECT CH VOL AUDIO VIDEO OUTPUT RESOLUTION CLEAR LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 19 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
03 20 En â¢W h e n t h e r e ar e multip le c odes for a manu factur er , tr y in p utting them in the indicat ed o r de r until the TV can be o p er ated. 2 Check that the TV can be operated . O pe r ate th e TV using TV CONTROL. ïµ â P r ess to tur n the TVâÂÂs p ower on and off. INPUT SELECT â P r ess to switch the TVâÂÂs in p ut . CH /â â P r ess to select the TV channel. VOL /â â P r ess to adjust the volume. TV Preset code list Manufactur er Code(s) Using the TOOLS menu Va r ious functions can be calle d out acco r ding to the p layer âÂÂs op er ating status. PIONEER 00, 31, 32, 07, 36, 42, 51, 22 ACURA 44 ADMIRAL 31 AIWA 60 AKAI 32, 35, 42 AKURA 41 ALBA 07, 39, 41, 44 AMSTRAD 42, 44, 47 ANITECH 44 ASA 45 ASUKA 41 AUDIOGONIC 07, 36 BASIC LINE 41, 44 BAUR 31, 07, 42 BEKO 38 BEON 07 BLAUPUNKT 31 BLUE SKY 41 BLUE STAR 18 BPL 18 BRANDT 36 BTC 41 BUSH 07, 41, 42, 44, 47, 56 CASCADE 44 CATHAY 07 CENTURION 07 CGB 42 CIMLINE 44 CLARIVOX 07 CLATRONIC 38 CONDOR 38 CONTEC 44 CROSLEY 32 CROWN 38, 44 CRYSTAL 42 CYBERTRON 41 DAEWOO 07, 44, 56 DAINICHI 41 DANSAI 07 DAYTON 44 DECCA 07, 48 DIXI 07, 44 DUMONT 53 ELIN 07 ELITE 41 ELTA 44 EMERSON 42 ERRES 07 FERGUSON 07 , 36, 51 FINLANDIA 35, 43, 54 FINLUX 32, 07, 45, 48, 53, 54 FIRSTLINE 40, 44 FISHER 32, 35, 38, 45 FORMENTI 32, 07, 42 FRONTECH 31, 42, 46 FRONTECH / PROTECH 32 FUJITSU 48 FUNAI 40, 46, 58 GBC 32, 42 GE 00, 01, 08, 07, 10, 11 , 17, 02, 28, 18 GEC 07, 34, 48 GELOSO 32, 44 GENERAL 29 GENEXXA 31, 41 GOLDSTAR 10, 23, 21, 02, 07 , 50 GOODMANS 07, 39, 47, 48, 56 GORENJE 38 GPM 41 GRAETZ 31, 42 GRANADA 07, 35, 42, 43, 48 GRADIENTE 30, 57 GRANDIN 18 GRUNDIG 31, 53 HANSEATIC 07, 42 HCM 18, 44 HINARI 07, 41, 44 HISAWA 18 HITACHI 31, 33, 34, 36, 42, 43 , 54, 06, 10, 24, 25, 18 HUANYU 56 HYPSON 07, 18, 46 ICE 46, 47 IMPERIAL 38, 42 INDIANA 07 INGELEN 31 INTERFUNK 31, 32, 07, 42 INTERVISION 46, 49 ISUKAI 41 ITC 42 ITT 31, 32, 42 JEC 05 JVC 13, 23 KAISUI 18, 41, 44 KAPSCH 31 KENDO 42 KENNEDY 32, 42 KORPEL 07 KOYODA 44 LEYCO 07 , 40, 46, 48 LIE SENK & TTER 07 LOEWE 07 LUXOR 32, 42, 43 M - ELECTR ONIC 31, 44 , 45, 54, 56, 07, 36, 51 MAGNADYNE 32, 49 MAGNAFON 49 MAGNAVOX 07, 10, 03, 12, 29 MANESTH 39, 46 MARANTZ 07 MARK 07 MATSUI 07, 39, 40, 42, 44, 47, 48 MCMICHAEL 34 MEDIATOR 07 MEMOREX 44 METZ 31 MINERVA 31, 53 MITSUBISHI 09, 10, 02, 21 , 31 MULTITECH 44, 49 NEC 59 NECKERMANN 31, 07 NEI 07, 42 NIKKAI 05, 07, 41, 46, 48 NOBLIKO 49 NOKIA 32, 42, 52 NORDMENDE 32, 36, 51, 52 OCEANIC 31, 32, 42 ORION 32, 07, 39, 40 OSAKI 41, 46, 48 OSO 41 OSUME 48 OTTO VERSAND 31, 32, 07, 42 PALLADIUM 38 PANAMA 46 PANASONIC 31, 07, 08, 42, 22 PATHO CINEMA 42 PAUSA 44 PHILCO 32, 42 PHILIPS 31, 07, 34, 56, 68 PHOENIX 32 PHONOLA 07 PROFEX 42, 44 PROTECH 07, 42, 44, 46, 49 QUELLE 31, 32, 07, 42 , 45, 53 R - LINE 07 RADIOLA 07 RADIOSHACK 10, 23, 21, 02 RBM 53 RCA 01 , 10 , 15, 16, 17 , 18, 61, 62, 09 REDIFFUSION 32, 42 REX 31, 46 ROADSTAR 41, 44, 46 SABA 31, 36, 42, 51 SAISHO 39, 44, 46 SALORA 31, 32, 42, 43 SAMBERS 49 SAMSUNG 07, 38, 44, 46, 69, 70 SANYO 35, 45, 48, 21 , 14, 91 SBR 07, 34 SCHAUB LORENZ 42 SCHNEIDER 07, 41, 47 SEG 42, 46 SEI 32, 40, 49 SELECO 31, 42 SHARP 02, 19, 27, 67, 90 SIAREM 32, 49 SIEMENS 31 SINUDYNE 32, 39, 40, 49 SKANTIC 43 SOLAVOX 31 SONOKO 07, 44 SONOLOR 31, 35 SONTEC 07 SONY 04 SOUNDWAVE 07 STANDARD 41, 44 STERN 31 SUSUMU 41 SYSLINE 07 TANDY 31, 41, 48 TASHIKO 34 TATUNG 07, 48 TEC 42 TELEAVIA 36 TELEFUNKEN 36, 37, 52 TELETECH 44 TENSAI 40, 41 THOMSON 36, 51, 52, 63 THORN 31, 07, 42, 45, 48 TOMASHI 18 TOSHIBA 05, 02, 26, 21, 53 TOWADA 42 ULTRAVOX 32, 42, 49 UNIDEN 92 UNIVERSUM 31, 07, 38, 42, 45, 46, 54 VES TEL 07 VI CTOR 13 VOXSON 31 WALTHAM 43 WATSON 07 WATT RADIO 32, 42, 49 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 07 YOKO 07, 42, 46 ZENITH 03, 20 TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 20 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
21 En 03 1 Display the TOOLS men u. P r ess TOOLS. 2 Select and set the item. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . Note ⢠Items th at cannot be changed a r e dis p layed in gr ay. The items that c an be selected d e p end on the p la yer âÂÂs status. ï° To change the setting of the selected item Use ï« /ï¬ to ch ange. ï° To close the TOOLS menu P r ess TOOLS o r RETURN. ï° TOOLS menu item list Switching the video output terminal to be viewed Use the pr ocedu r e below to switch the video out p ut signal to be viewed between the HDMI OUT te r minal and an analog ou t p ut te r minal ( COMPONENT VIDEO o r VIDEO out p ut te r minals). Caution â¢T h e p ictur e may n ot be disp layed for a while when the video out p ut te r minal is switched. ⢠When the HDMI OUT te r m inal is selec ted, no video signals a r e ou t p ut f r om the othe r video o ut p ut te r minals. ⢠When a video out p ut te r minal othe r than the HDMI OUT te r minal is selected, no audio and video signals a r e out p ut f r om the HDMI OUT te r minal. ï¦ Press VIDEO SELECT. â¢T h e c u rr ent video out p ut ter minal is disp layed on the TV sc r een and on the p la yer âÂÂs f r ont p anel d is p lay. To switch the video out p ut te r minals, pr ess ï© /ïª . â¢T h e v i d e o o u t p ut ter minal setting can also be switche d by pr essing ï¯ï / ï®ï° on th e p layer âÂÂs fr ont p anel. Switching the output video resolution Use the pr ocedu r e below to switch the out p ut vi deo r esolution fr om the var ious video outp ut ter minals. Caution ⢠On some devices (TV, AV r eceiver or am p lif ier , etc.), the video o r audio may not be out p ut pr op er ly when the r esolution is switched. If this h a pp ens, us e OUTPUT RESOLUTION to set a r esolution at which the video and a udio a r e pr op er ly out p ut. ⢠When video signals a r e being out p ut with a r esolution of 1080/50i, 1080/50 p , 720/50 p , 1080/24 p , 1080/60i, 1080/60 p o r 720/60 p f r om the HDMI OUT te r minal o r COMPONEN T VIDEO out p ut te r minals, the p ictur e may be out p ut with an a s p ect r atio of 16:9, even if the TV Aspect Ratio is set to 4:3 (Standard) . Item Description Play f r om Be ginning Play the select ed title, t r ack o r fil e f r om the sta r t. Slideshow Play a slideshow of th e image files on the selected disc o r folde r . Play Mode Dis p lay the Play Mo de sc r een ( p age 28). Video Adjust Dis p lay the p ictur e qu ality adjustment sc r een ( p age 34). Seconda r y Video Switch the BD-ROMâÂÂs seconda r y vide o (Pictu r e-in-Pictu r e) ( p age 26). Subtitle Switch the subtitles ( p age 25). Angle Switch the BD-ROM/DV D-Video discâÂÂs came r a angles ( p ag e 25). Rotate Rotate the im age while p laying a slideshow ( p age 32). Audio Adjust Dis p lay the aud io adjus tment me nu ( p age 35). Audio Switch the audio ( p age 26). Seconda r y Audio Switch the BD-R OMâÂÂs seconda r y audio ( p age 26). Now Playing Dis p lay the p layback sc r een of the cu rr ently p laying t r ack o r file. O r iginal/Play List Switch the DVD-R/-RWâÂÂs (VR fo r ma t) list sc r een betwe en the o r iginal list and the p laylist. Add to HMG Playlist Add the selected t r ack o r file to the HMG Playlist ( p age 32). Delete f r om HMG Playlist Delete the selected t r ack o r file f r om the HMG Playlist ( p age 33). Out p ut Video Resolution Switch the out p ut video r esolution f r om the va r ious out p ut te r minals ( p age 21). Angle Audio Subtitle Audio Adjust Video Adjust BD PLAYER TOOLS VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY O UTPUT RESOLUTION HDMI (Source Direct) ï¡ ï¢ Video Output T erminal Out p ut video r esolution setting of selected vi deo out p ut te r minal Example: LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 21 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
03 22 En â¢T h e p ictur e may n ot be disp layed for a while when the r esolution is switched. ï¦ Press OUTPUT RESOLUTION. â¢T h e c u rr ent out p ut video r esolution setting is dis p layed on the TV sc r een and on the p laye r âÂÂs f r ont p anel disp lay. To switch the out p ut video r esolution, pr ess OUTPUT RESOLUTION again o r pr ess ï© /ïª . â¢T h e o u t p ut video r esolution dep ends on th e video out p ut te r mi nal ( p age 23). â¢T h e o u t p ut video r esolution setting can also be switched by selecting Output Video Re solution f r om the TOOLS menu. ï° About the frame/field frequency and NTSC/PAL TV systems U.K., Australia and New Zealand models: By facto r y default setting, the f r ame/field f r equency is set fo r an out p ut of 50 Hz, and the video signal out p ut f r om the VIDEO out p ut te r minals is set to be out p ut in the PAL TV sys tem fo r mat. When s ou r ces with a f r ame/field f r equency of 60 Hz o r 24 Hz a r e p layed, the outp ut fr ame/field fr equency automatically switches to 60 Hz (o r 24 Hz fo r HDM I, de p ending on the setting), and the TV system fo r mat fo r the video signal out p ut f r om the VIDEO out p ut te r minals de p ends on the NTSC on PAL TV setting. Other s: By facto r y defau lt settin g, the fr ame/field f r equency is set fo r an out p ut of 60 Hz, and the TV system fo r mat fo r the video signal out p ut f r om the VIDEO out p ut te r mi n als de p ends on the NTSC on PAL TV sett ing. When sou r ces with a f r ame/field f r equency of 50 Hz a r e p layed, the out p ut f r ame/field f r equency automatically switc hes to 50 Hz, and the video signal ou t p ut f r om the VIDEO out p ut te r minals is set to be out p ut in the PAL TV sy stem fo r mat. When p layback is sto pp ed, the fr ame/field f r equency and TV system settings r emain at the settings last used. The f r ame/field f r equency and TV system settings do not change even when the p ower is tu r n ed off. They only switch when a video mate r ial with a diffe r ent f r ame/field f r equency is p layed. If the p ictur e is not dis p layed on the TV when a sou r ce with a diffe r ent f r ame/field f r equency is p layed, use the pr ocedu r e bel ow to switch the f r am e/field f r equency and TV system settings fo r the signa l out p ut f r om the p layer . Eject the disc, then pr ess the ï¨ OPEN/CLOSE butt on on the f r ont p anel while pr essing the ï¤ button to switch to a diffe r ent f r ame/field f r equency. The f r ame/field f r equ ency switches between 50 Hz and 60 Hz each time this o pe r ation is p e r fo r med. The indicato r fo r the f r ame f r equencyâÂÂs cu rr ent settin g lights on the f r ont p anel dis p lay ( p age 12). ï° About Film material The film mate r ial is a video signal with a f r ame r ate o f 24 f r ames/second. Fo r exam p le, these mate r ials inc lude 1080/24 p , 720/24 p , etc. ï° To output film mater ial To out p ut 1080/24 p film m ate r ial f r om HDMI OUT te r minal, set the out p ut video r esolutio n to eithe r Auto o r Source Dire ct . Caution ⢠1080/24 p signals can only be out p ut f r om the HDMI OUT te r minal. They cannot be outp ut fr om other video te r min als. ⢠When Auto is selected , the p ictu r e is out p ut at 60 f r ames/second if you r TV is not com p atible with 1080/ 24 p signals. ⢠When Source Direct is selected, the signals a r e out p ut as such, even if you r TV is not com p atible with 1080/24 p signals. If the p ictu r e is n ot dis p layed pr o pe r ly, use OUTPUT RESOLUTION to set an out p ut video r esolution at which the video and audio signals a r e pro pe r ly o u t p ut. ⢠Even if Auto o r Source Direct is selected, 7 20/24 p video signals a r e out p ut at 60 fr ames/second. CLEAR ENTER VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY OUTPUT RESOLUTION Auto ï¡ ï¢ Output Video R esolution Source : 1080/50i Current Output : 1080/50i Video r esolution of the cu rr ently p laying disc Out p ut video r esolution f r om the p laye r Example: LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 22 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
23 En 03 ï° About the output video resolution The out p ut video r eso lution setting and the r esolution of the p ictur e that is ac tually out p ut diffe r fo r the diffe r ent te r minals. See the table below. The table belo w shows the out p ut video r esolution fo r the diffe r ent te r minals when the f r ame/field f r equency of the p layback sou r ce is 50 Hz on the u ppe r line, the r esolutions when the sou r ceâÂÂs f r ame/field f r equency is 60 Hz and 24 Hz on the lowe r line. Output video resoluti on setting HDMI 1 1. The video out p ut te r minal set at Video in the Setup Navigator ( p age 18) o r the video out p ut te r minal selected with VIDEO SELECT ( p age 21). COMPONENT VIDEO/VIDEO 1 HDMI OUT te rminal COMPONENT VIDEO/VIDEO output te rminals HDMI OUT terminal CO MPONENT VIDEO output terminals 2 2. De p ending on the BD, the p ictu r es may not be out p ut. VIDEO output terminal 2 (TV system) Auto 3 3. This cannot be selected when the video out p ut te r minal is set to COMPONENT VIDEO / VIDEO. Resolutio n pr efe rred by TV 4,5,6 4. The p ictu r es a r e out p ut with the pr efe rr ed out p ut r esolution of the device (TV, AV r ec eive r o r am p lifie r , etc.) connected to HDMI OUT te r minal. 5. Fo r details on the out p ut of film mate r ial (1080/24 p o r 720/24 p video signals), see To output film materi al on p age 22. 6. Sou r ces with a r esolution of 720/50 p , 720/60 p and 72 0/24 p a r e out p ut at 1080/50i o r 1080/60i ev en if the TVâÂÂs r ecommended r esolution is 1080/50 p o r 1080/60 p . No video signals a r e out p ut No video signals a r e out p ut âÂÂâ â 576i o r 480i 576/50i 576/50i 576/50i PAL 480/60i 48 0/60i 480/60i ïª 7 7. De p ends on the NTSC on PAL TV setting ( p age 37). 576 p o r 480 p 576/50 p 576/50 p 576/50i PAL 480/60 p 480/60 p 480/60i ïª 7 1080i 1080/5 0i 576/50 p 576/50i PAL 1080/60i 1080/60i 8,9 8. DVD-Video o r DVD-R/-RW (VR fo r mat) may be out p ut at 480/60 p . 9. BD-ROM o r BD-R/-RE may be out p ut at 480/60 p . 480/60i ïª 7 1080 p 3 1080/50 p 10,11 10. De p endi ng on the co nnected HD MI cable, the video signals may not be out p ut. 11. Sou r ces with a r esolution of 720/50 p , 720/60 p and 720/24 p a r e out p ut at 1080/50i o r 1080/60i. âÂÂâ â 1080/60 p 10,11 Sou r ce Di r ect Resolution r eco rded on disc 5,12,13 12. De p ending on the connected TV, the video signals may not be out p ut. 13. 720/24 p film mate r ial is out p ut at 720/60 p . Resolution r eco r ded on disc 9,12,13,14 14. 1080/24 p film mate r ial is out p ut at 1080/60i. 576/50i PAL 480/60i ïª 7 LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 23 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
04 24 En Chapter 4 Playback Playing discs or files This section desc r ibes the p layer âÂÂs main o p er atio ns. Fo r the ty p es of discs that can be p layed, see Playable discs on p ag e 7. Fo r the ty p es of files that can be p layed, see Playable fi les on p age 9. Video, im age and audio files r ecor ded o n disc s ar e p layed with the Home M edia Galle r y ( p age 31). 1 Press ïµ STANDBY /ON to tu rn on the power. Tu r n the TVâÂÂs p owe r on and switch its inp ut befor ehand. 2 Press ï¨ OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray and load the disc. Note ⢠Load the disc with the pr inted side facing u p. ⢠Seve r al doze n seconds a re r equi r ed to r ead the disc. Once r eading is com p leted, the ty p e of disc is dis p layed on the p la ye r âÂÂs f r ont p anel disp la y. 3 Press ï¤ PLAY to play the disc. ï¤ on the p layer âÂÂs fr ont p anel disp lay li ghts dur ing p layback. â¢T o p ause, pr ess ïÂÂ¥ PAUSE dur ing p layback. ïÂÂ¥ on the p layer âÂÂs fr ont p anel disp lay lights when p layback is p aused. â¢T o s t o p , pr ess ï§ STOP dur ing p layback. Note ⢠Some discs sta r t p laying automatically when the disc t r ay is closed. ⢠DVD-Video discs have p ar enta l lock featu r es. In p ut the p asswo r d r egiste r ed in the p laye r âÂÂs s ettings to unlock the p ar ental lock . For details, see p age 43. â¢F o r some BD-R /-RE, p layback pr otection is se t fo r the disc o r titles. In p ut the code number set for the dis c to unlock th e pr otection. â¢C h e c k Troubleshooting on p age 55 if video or audio signals a r e no t being out p ut pr op er ly. ï° If the disc menu is displayed Fo r some discs, the disc menu is dis p layed automatica lly when p la yback star ts. T he conten ts of the disc menu a nd the way to o p er ate diff e r fr om disc to disc. ï° Resuming playback from where it was stopped (resume playback function) ⢠When ï§ STOP is pr essed du r ing p layback, the p oint at which the disc sto pp ed is sto r ed in the memo r y. When ï¤ PLAY is pr essed, p layback r esumes f r om that p oint. â¢F o r audio CDs and audio files, p layback star ts fr om the beginning of the t r ack/file that was p laying. â¢I f t h e s t o p mode was set while p laying a slideshow of image files, p layback sta r ts f r om the image file last dis p layed. ⢠To cancel the r esume p la yback function, pr ess ï§ STOP while p lay back is sto pp ed. Note â¢T h e r esum e p layback function is canceled automaticall y in the foll owing cases : âÂÂW h e n t h e d i s c t r ay is op ened. â When the file list window is switched. âÂÂW h e n t h e p ower is tu r ned off. (Fo r BDs and DVDs this does not cancel the r esu me p la yback function.) â¢T h e r esum e p layback function can not be used for some discs. TV CONTROL STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE FL DIMMER ENTER VIDEO SELECT SECONDARY PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN PLAY PREV PAUSE STOP NEXT RED GREEN YELLOW BLUE INPUT SELECT CH VOL AUDIO VIDEO OUTPUT RESOLUTION ENTER CLEAR LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 24 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
25 En 04 Forward and reverse scanning ï¦ During playback, press ï or ï® . ⢠The scanning s p eed switches each time the button is pr essed. The s p eed step s dep end on the disc o r file (the s p eed is dis p layed on the TV sc r een). â¢F o r war d or r ever se scanning is also p ossible by holding the button down. No r mal p la yback r esumes when the bu tton is r eleased. ï° To resume normal playback ï¦ Pr ess ï¤ PLAY. Playing specific titles, chapters or tracks ï¦ Input the number of the ti tle, chapter or track you want to play. ⢠Use the numbe r buttons (0 to 9) to in p ut the numbe r , then pr ess ENTER . â¢P r ess CLEAR to clear the values you have inp ut. Skipping content ï¦ Pr ess ï¯ PREV or ï° NEXT . â¢W h e n ï° NEXT is pr essed, the p layba ck ski p s ahead to the beginning of the next title/cha p ter /tr ack/ file. â¢W h e n ï¯ PREV is pr essed, the p layback skip s back to the beginning of the cu rr en tly p la ying title/cha p ter / t r ack/file . P r ess twice to ski p back to the beginning of the pr eviou s title/ch a p te r /t r ack/file. Playing in slow motion ï¦ While playback is paused, press and h old ï± / or / ï² . â¢T h e s p eed switches each time the button is pr essed (the s p eed is dis p layed on the TV sc r een). The s p eed ste p s de p end on the disc o r file. ï° To resume normal playback ï¦ Pr ess ï¤ PLAY. Step forward and step reverse ï¦ While playback is paused, press ï± / o r / ï² . â¢T h e p ictur e moves a step for war d or r ever se each time the button is pr essed. ï° To resume normal playback ï¦ Pr ess ï¤ PLAY. Switching the camera angles Fo r BD-ROM and DVD-Video discs on which multi p le angles a r e r ecor ded, the angles can be switched du r ing p layback. ï¦ During playback, press ANGLE. â¢T h e c u rr ent angle and total numbe r of r ecor ded angles a r e dis p layed on the TV sc r een and on the p layer âÂÂs fr ont p anel disp lay. To switch the a ngles, pr ess ANGLE again o r pr ess ï© / ïª . ⢠The angles can also be switched by selecti ng Angle f r om the TOOLS menu. â¢I f t h e a n g l e s a r e not switched when ANGLE is pr essed, switch them f r om the menu scr een. Switching the subtitles Fo r discs o r files on whic h multi p le s ubtitles a r e r ecor ded, the subtitles can be switched du r ing p la yback. Caution ⢠The subtitles cannot be switched fo r discs r ecor ded on a DVD o r BD r ecor der . Also r efer to the o p e r ating inst r uction s of the device used fo r r eco r ding. ï¦ During playback, press SUBTI TLE. â¢T h e c u rr ent subtitle and total numbe r of r ecor ded subtitles a r e d is p layed on the TV sc r een and on the p layer âÂÂs fr ont p anel disp lay. To switch t he subtitle , pr ess SUBT ITLE again o r pr ess ï© /ïª . ⢠The subtitles can also be swit ched by selecting Subtitle f r om the TOOLS menu. ⢠If the subtitles a r e not swi tched when SUBTITLE is pr essed, switch them f r om the menu scr een. ï° Turning the subtitles off ï¦ Press SUBTITLE, then press CLEAR. ï° About displaying external subtitle files while playing DivX media files In addition to the subtitles r ecor ded in DivX media fil es, this p laye r also su pp o r ts the dis p lay of exte r na l subtitle files. If a file h as the same name as a Di vX media file aside f r om the file extensio n and the extension is one of the extensions listed below, the file is t r eated as an ex te r nal subtitle fil e. Note that DivX media files and exte r nal 1 /4 î î Angle Example: Cu rr ent angle/Total numbe r of r ecor ded angles 1/2 English Subtitle ï¡ ï¢ Example: Cu rr ent subtit le/Total numbe r of r ecor ded subtitles LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 25 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
04 26 En subtitle files must be loc ated in the same folde r . Only one exte r nal subt itle file ca n be dis p layed on this p layer . Use a co mp uter , etc., to delete any exter nal subtitle files you do not want to dis p lay f r om the disc. .s r t, .sub, .txt, .smi, .ssa, .ass If the language code is s p ecified fo r the ex te r nal subtitle file, the subtit les a r e dis p layed with the font co rr es p onding to that language code . If no language code is s p ecified, t h e subtitles a r e dis p layed with the font co rr es p onding to the language code set at Subtitle Language ( p age 39). The sam e font is used fo r the all the languages i n each of the g r oup s below. Note â¢D e p ending on the file , the exter nal subtitles may not be dis p layed pr op er ly. Switching the audio and secondary audio Fo r discs o r files on which mu lti p le aud io st r eams/ channels a r e r ecor ded, audio st r eams/channels can be switched du r ing p lay back. Also us e this pr ocedu r e to switch the seconda r y audio fo r BD-ROMs on which seconda r y audio is r eco r ded. ï¦ During playback, press AUDIO. â¢T h e c u rr ent audio and total numbe r of r ec o r ded audio st r eams a r e dis p layed on the TV sc r een an d on the p layer âÂÂs fr ont p anel disp lay. To switch the audio, pr ess AUDIO again o r pr ess ï© / ïª . ⢠To switch the seconda r y audio, pr ess SEC ONDARY AUDIO . â¢T h e a u d i o / s e c o n d a r y audio can also be switched by selecting Audio o r Second ary Audio f r om the TO OL S menu. â¢I f t h e a u d i o / s e c o n d a r y audio is not switched when AUDIO / SECONDARY AUDIO is pr essed, switch it f r om the menu sc r een. ï° Turning the Secondary Audio off ï¦ Press SECON DARY AUDIO, then press CLEAR. Switching the secondary video Use the pr ocedu r e below to switch the seconda r y video (Pictu r e-in-Pictu r e) r eco r ded on the BD-ROM. ï¦ During playback, pr ess SECONDARY VIDEO. â¢T h e c u rr ent seconda r y video and total numbe r of r ecor ded secondar y video str eams ar e disp layed on the TV sc r een an d on the p layer âÂÂs f r ont p anel dis p lay. To switch the seconda r y video, pr ess SEC ONDARY VIDEO again o r pr ess ï© /ïª . â¢T h e s e c o n d a r y video can also be switched by selecting Secondary Video f r om the TOOLS menu. â¢I f t h e s e c o n d a r y video is not switched when SECONDARY VIDEO is pr e ssed, swi tch it f r om th e menu sc r een. ï° Turning the Secondary Video off ï¦ Press SECONDARY VIDEO, then press CLEAR. Displaying the disc information ï¦ Press DISPLAY. The disc info r mation a pp ea r s on the TV sc r een. The info r mation switches each time the button is pr essed. The info r mation dis p la y diffe r s d u r ing p layback and when p layback is sto pp ed. Group 1 Af r ikaans(af/af r ), Basque(eu/eus), Catalan(ca/cat), Danish(da/dan), Dutch(nl/nld), English(en/eng), Fa r oese(fo/fao), Finnish(fi/fin), F r ench(f r /f r a), Galician(gl/ glg), Ge r man(de/deu), Gua r ani(gn/g r n), Icel andic(is/isl), I r ish(ga/gle), Italian(it/ita), Latin(la/lat), No r wegian(no/ no r ), Po r tuguese( p t/ p or ), Rhaeto-Romance( r m/ r oh), Scots-Gaelic(gd/gla), S p anish(es/sp a), Swahili(sw/swa), Swedish(sv/swe), Zulu(zu/zul) Group 2 Albanian(sq/sqi), C r oatian(hr /h r v), Czech(cs/ces), Hunga r ian(hu/hun), Polish( p l/p ol), Rom ania n( r o/ r on), Slovak(sk/slk), Slovenian(sl/slv) Group 3 Bela r usian(be/bel), Bulga r ian(bg/bul), Macedonian(mk/ mkd), Moldavian(mo/mol), Russian( r u/r us), Se r bia n(sr / s rp ), Uk r ainian(uk/uk r) Group 4 G r eek(el/ell) Group 5 Estonian(et/est), Ku r dish(ku/k ur ), Tu r kis h(t r /t u r ) 2/2 Engli sh Dol by True HD 9 6kHz 7. 1ch L C R L s R s L b R b LFE Audio î î Cu rr ent audio/Total numbe r of r ecor ded audio str eams Example: Audio ty p e Numbe r of channels Channels r eco r ded on disc 1 /4 Seconda r y Video î î Example: Cu rr ent secon da r y v ideo/Total numbe r of r ecor ded secondar y video str eams LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 26 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
27 En 04 Playback functions The functions that can be used diffe r ac cor ding to the typ e of disc and file. In some cases, some of the functions cannot be used. Check the usable functions on the table below. Functi on 1 1. Some functions may not wo r k fo r some discs o r files, even if indicated [ ï± ] on the table. Disc/file type BD- ROM BD-R /-RE DVD- Video DVD-R /-RW (VR format) AVCHD Video file Image file Audio file Audio CD Fo r wa r d and reve r se scanning 2 2. Fo r some discs, no r ma l p layback r esumes automatically when the cha p te r switches. ï± 3 3. No sound is pr oduced du r ing fo r war d a nd r ever se scanning. ï± 3 ï± 3 ï± 3 ï± 3 ï± 3 ï³ ï± 4 4. Sound is pr oduced du r ing fo r war d and r ever se scanning. ï± 4 Playing s p ecific titles, cha p te r s or tr acks ï±ï±ï±ï±ï± ï³ ï³ ï³ ï± Ski pp ing content ï±ï±ï±ï±ï±ï±ï±ï±ï± Playing in slow motion 2,5 5. ⢠No sound is out p ut du r ing sl ow motion p layback. ⢠It is not p ossible to switch the s p eed du r ing r eve r se slow motion p layback. ï±ï±ï±ï±ï± ï± 6 6. Reve r se slow motion p layback is not p ossible. ï³ï³ï³ Ste p fo r wa r d and ste p r eve r se 2 ï±ï±ï±ï±ï± ï± 7 7. Reve r se ste p p layback is not p ossible. ï³ï³ï³ Switching the came r a angles 8 8. Angle ma r k is dis p layed fo r scenes at which multi p le angles a r e r ecor ded if An gle/Secondary Indicator is set to On ( p age 39). ï± ï³ ï± ï³ï³ï³ï³ï³ï³ Switching the subti tles 9 9. ⢠The ty p es of r ecor ded su btitles dep end on the disc and file. ⢠In some cases the subtitle may switch o r the switching sc r ee n pr ovided on the disc may be dis p layed i mmediately, without the cu rr ent subtitle o r the total numbe r of subtitles r ecor ded on the disc being dis p layed. ï±ï±ï±ï±ï±ï± ï³ ï³ ï³ Switching the a udio 10 10. The ty p es of r ecor ded audio st r eams de p end on the disc and file. ï±ï±ï±ï±ï±ï± ï³ ï³ ï± Switching the secon da r y aud io 11 11. ⢠The ty p es of r ecor ded sec onda r y a udio st r eams de p end on the disc and file. ⢠In some cases the seconda r y audio may switch o r the s wi tching sc r een pr ovided on the disc may be dis p layed immediately, without the cu rr ent seconda r y audio o r the t otal numbe r of seconda r y audio st r eams r ecor ded on the disc being dis p layed. ⢠Seconda r y audio ma r k is dis p lay ed fo r scenes at whic h secon da r y audio is r ecor ded if Angle/Seco ndary Indicator is set to On ( p age 39). ï± 12 12. Some discs do not include s e conda r y audio. ï³ï³ï³ï³ï³ï³ï³ï³ Switching the secon da r y vi deo 13 13. ⢠In some cases the sec onda r y vide o may switch o r the switching sc r een pr ovided on the disc may be dis p la yed immediately, without the cu rr ent seconda r y video o r the total numbe r of seconda r y video st r eams r ecor ded on the disc being dis p layed. ⢠Seconda r y video ma r k is dis p layed fo r scenes at which seconda ry video is r ecor ded if Angle/Secondary Indicator is set to On ( p age 39). ï± 14 14. Some discs do not include s e conda r y video. ï³ï³ï³ï³ï³ï³ï³ï³ Dis p laying the disc info r mation ï±ï±ï±ï±ï±ï±ï± ï³ ï³ LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 27 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
04 28 En Using the Play Mode functions Playing from a specific time (Time Search) 1 During playbac k, press PLAY MODE to display the Play Mode screen. The Play Mode sc r een can also be dis p layed by selecting Play Mode f r om the TOOLS menu. 2 Select Time Se arch. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . 3 Input the time. Use the numbe r butt ons (0 to 9) o r ï©/ ïª to inp ut the time. Use ï« /ï¬ to mo ve the cu r so r . â¢T o p lay fr om 45 minutes, inp ut 0 , 0 , 4 , 5 , 0 and 0 , then pr ess ENTER . â¢T o p lay fr om 1 hour 20 minutes, inp ut 0 , 1 , 2 , 0 , 0 and 0 , then pr ess EN TER . â¢P r ess CLEAR to clear the values you have inp ut. 4 Starting pl ayback from the specified time. Use ï« /ï¬ to s elect Search , then pr ess ENTER . ï° Closing the Play Mode screen P r ess PLAY MODE o r HOME MENU. Playing a specific title, chapter or track (Search) 1 Press PLAY MODE to display th e Play Mode screen. The Play Mode sc r een can also be dis p layed by select ing Play Mode f r om the TOOLS menu. 2 Select the type of search. Use ï© /ïª to select, then pr ess ENTER . See the table on p age 30 fo r the sea r ch ty p es. 3 Input the number. Use the numbe r bu ttons (0 to 9) o r ï©/ ïª to inp ut the numbe r . Use ï« /ï¬ to move the cu r so r . â¢T o s e a r ch for title 32, inp ut 0 , 3 and 2 , then pr ess ENTER . â¢P r ess CLEAR to clear the values you have inp ut. 4 Starting playback from th e specified title, chapter or track. Use ï« /ï¬ to select Search , then pr ess ENTER . Playing a specific section within a title or track repeatedly (A-B Repeat) Use this pr ocedu r e to p lay a s p ecific section withi n a title o r t r ack re p eatedly. 1 During playback , press PLAY MODE to display the Play Mode scre en. The Play Mode sc r een can also be dis p layed by select ing Play Mode f r om the TOOLS menu. 2 Select A-B Repeat. Use ï© /ïª to select, then pr ess ENTER . 3 Select the star ting poin t for A-B Repe at. Use ï« /ï¬ to select A (Start) , then pr ess ENTER . 4 Select the end po int for A-B Repeat. Use ï« /ï¬ to select B (End) , then pr ess ENTER . A-B Re p eat p layback sta r ts. ï° To cancel A-B Repeat play â¢S e l e c t Off f r om the Re p eat/Random sc r een, then pr ess ENTER . â¢D u r ing p lay back, pr ess ï§ STOP or CLEAR . VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY OUTPUT RESOLUTION CLEAR ENTER ENTER PLAY PREV PAUSE STOP NEXT Time Search 1 2:45:00 Search Title Search 0 32 Title Search A-B Repeat A (Start) B (End) Off LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 28 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
29 En 04 Note â¢A - B R e p eat p lay is canceled in the following cases: â W hen the angle is switched (fo r BD-ROM and DVD- Video discs only). â W hen you sea r ch outside the r e p eat r ange. â W hen you sta r t othe r Re p eat Play o r Random Play. Playing repeatedly (Repeat Play) Use this pr ocedu r e to p lay the cu rr ently p laying disc, title, cha p te r , t r ack o r file r ep eatedly. 1 During playbac k, press PLAY MODE to display the Play Mode screen. The Play Mode sc r een can also be dis p layed by selecting Play Mode f r om the TOOLS menu. 2 Select Repeat/Random. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . 3 Select the type of Repeat Play. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . See the table on p a ge 30 fo r the ty p es of Re p eat Play. ï° To cancel Repeat Play ⢠Select Off f r om the Re p ea t/Random sc r een, then pr ess ENTER . â¢D u r ing p layback, pr ess ï§ STOP or CLEAR. Note â¢T h e t y p e of r ep eat modes dep ends on the disc and file being p laye d. See the table on p age 30. â¢R e p eat Play is canceled in the fo llowing cases: â W hen the angle is switched (fo r BD-ROM and DVD- Video discs only). â W hen you sea r ch outside the r e p eat r ange. â W hen you sta r t othe r Re p eat Play o r Random Play. Playing in random order (Random Play) Use this pr ocedu r e to p lay the t r acks o r files in r andom o r de r. 1 During playbac k, press PLAY MODE to display the Play Mode screen. The Play Mode sc r een can also be dis p layed by selecting Play Mode f r om the TOOLS menu. 2 Select Repeat/Random. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . 3 Select the Rando m Play. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . ï° To cancel Random Play ⢠Select Off f r om the Re p ea t/Random sc r een, then pr ess ENTER . â¢D u r ing p lay back, pr ess ï§ STOP or CLEAR . Note ⢠Random Play is canceled in t he following c ases: â When you use the sea r ch funct ion. â W hen you sta r t R e p eat Play. LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 29 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
04 30 En About Play Mode types The functions that can be used diffe r ac cor ding to the typ e of disc and file. In some cases, some of the functions cannot be used. Check the usable functions on the table below. Play Mode t ype Mark 1 1. The ty p e of Play M ode is indicated by the ma r k. Disc/file type BD- ROM 2 2. Fo r BD-ROM and DVD-Video discs, some of the funct ions cannot be used with some titles. BD-R /-RE DVD- Video 2 DVD-R /-RW (VR format) AVCHD Video file Image file Audio file Audio CD Re p eat Play Playing a s p ecific section within a title o r tr ack r ep eatedly (A-B Rep eat) ï±ï±ï±ï±ï±ï± ï³ ï³ ï± Playing a title r ep eatedly (Title Re p eat) ï±ï±ï±ï±ï±ï± ï³ ï³ ï³ Playing a c ha p ter r ep eated ly (Cha p te r Re p eat) ï± ï± ï± ï± ï± ï³ï³ï³ï³ Playing a t r ack o r fi le r ep eatedly (Tr ack Re p eat) ï³ï³ï³ï³ï³ï³ï³ ï± ï± Playing all the titles, t r acks o r files on the disc r ep eatedly (All Rep eat) ï³ï±ï³ ï± 3 3. The o r iginal titles a r e p layed r ep eatedly. Howeve r , the p laylist titles cannot be p layed r ep eatedly. ï³ ï± 4 4. The files in the folde r ar e p layed r ep eatedly. ï± 4 ï± 5 5. The files in the folde r or HM G Playlist a r e p layed r ep eatedly. ï± 6 6. The t r acks in the disc o r HMG Playlist a r e p layed r ep eatedly. Random Play Playing the t r acks o r files in r andom or de r (Random T r ack/File) ï³ï³ï³ï³ï³ï³ ï± ï± ï± Sea r ch Playing f r om a s p ecific time (Time Sea r ch) â ï±ï±ï±ï±ï±ï± ï³ ï³ ï± Playing a s p ecific title (Title Sea r ch) â ï± ï± ï± ï± ï± ï³ï³ï³ï³ Playing a s p ecific cha p ter (Cha p te r Sea r ch) â ï± ï± ï± ï± ï± ï³ï³ï³ï³ Playing a s p ecific t r ack (T r ack Sea r ch) â ï³ï³ï³ï³ï³ï³ï³ï³ ï± LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 30 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
31 En 04 Playing from the Home Media Gallery The Home Media Galle r y lets you dis p lay a list of th e titles, t r acks o r files r eco r ded on the disc. The discs that can be p layed fr om the Home Media G alle r y a r e as shown below (see also p age 7). â¢B D - R / - R E d i s c s ⢠DVD-R/-RW (VR fo r mat) discs ⢠Audio CDs (CD-DAs and DTS-CDs) ⢠DVDs/CDs on which only data files of video, image o r audio files, etc. a r e r ecor ded Playing discs 1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY to display the Home M edia Gall ery. The Home Media Galle r y can also be dis p layed by selecting Home Media Gallery f r om the Home Menu then pr essing ENTER . 2 Select the disc. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . 3 Select the title o r track to be played. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . Playback sta r ts. ï° Closing the Home Media Gallery P r ess HOME MEDIA GALLERY o r HOME MENU. Note ⢠When p laying an audio C D (CD-DA o r DTS-CD), t he Now Playing sc r een is dis p layed. ⢠Some BD-R/-RE discs have p layback pr otection. To cancel the pr otection, in p ut th e p asswor d set fo r the disc. â¢T o p lay DVD-R/-RW (VR for mat) p laylists, switch to the p laylist using t he Original/P lay List command on the TOOLS menu ( p age 20). Playing video files 1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY to display the Home Media Gallery. The Home Media Ga lle r y can also be dis p layed by selecti ng Home Media Gallery f r om Home Menu then pr essing ENTER . 2 Select the disc. Use ï© /ïª to select, then pr ess ENTER . 3 Select Mo vies. Use ï© /ïª to select Movies , then pr ess ENTER . 4 Select Fold ers or All Movies. Use ï© /ïª to select, then pr ess ENTER . ⢠Folders â The files in the selected folde r a r e dis p layed. ⢠All Movi es â All th e r eco r ded files a r e dis p layed. If you have selected All Movies , pr oceed to ste p 6. 5 Select the folder con taini ng the file you want to play. Use ï© /ïª to select, then pr ess ENTER . A list of the files and folde r s in the selected folde r is dis p layed. 6 Select and set the fil e you want to play. Use ï© /ïª to select, then pr ess ENTER . Pla y back sta r ts f r om th e selected file, and continues until the end of the list is r eached. Use ï¯ /ï° to p lay the pr evious o r next file. Note ⢠It may take a few seconds befo r e p layback star ts. This is no r mal. ⢠It may not be p ossible to p lay some files pr o pe r ly. â¢T h e n u m b e r of views may be r estr ic ted (p age 9). Playing image files 1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY to display the Home Media Gallery. The Home Media Ga lle r y can also be dis p layed by selecti ng Home Media Gallery f r om the Home Menu then pr essing ENTER . 2 Select the disc. Use ï© /ïª to select, then pr ess ENTER . HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER TV CONTROL AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE FL DIMMER INPUT SELECT CH VOL PLAY PREV PAUSE STOP NEXT BD-R BDAV My F avorite TV Program 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 items Morning serial drama News at noon Evening movie Midnight variety show Playback protection W orld heritage Drama: Blank time Music and us LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 31 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
04 32 En 3 Select Pho tos. Use ï© /ïª to select Photos , then pr ess ENTER . 4 Select Folder s or All Pho tos. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . ⢠Folder s â The files in the selected folde r a r e dis p layed. ⢠All Photos â All the r eco r ded files a r e dis p layed. If you have selected All Photos , pr oceed to ste p 6. 5 Select the fold er containi ng the file you want to play. Use ï© /ïª /ï« /ï¬ to select, then pr ess ENTER . A list o f the files and folde r s in the selected folde r is dis p layed. 6 Select and set the file you want to play. Use ï© /ïª /ï« /ï¬ to select, then pr ess ENTER . A slideshow sta r ts f r om the selected file, and continues until the end of the list is r eached. Use ï¯ /ï° to dis p lay the pr evious o r ne xt file. ï° About Slideshow A dis p lay of the files on the disc o r in the folde r that switches automatically. ï° Rotating images ï¦ Pr ess ANGL E while playing a slidesh ow. ⢠The image rotates each ti me the button is pressed (90ð ï¤ 180ð ï¤ 270ð ï¤ 0ð ï¤ ... ). The image can also be r otated by select ing Rotate f r om the TOOLS menu. Playing audio files 1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY to display the Home M edia Gall ery. The Home Media Galle r y can also be dis p layed by selecting Home Media Gallery f r om the Home Menu then pr essing ENTER . 2 Select the disc. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . 3 Select Music. Use ï© /ïª to select Music , then pr ess ENTER . 4 Select Folders o r All Songs. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . ⢠Folder s â The files in the selected folde r a r e dis p layed. ⢠All Songs â All the r eco r ded files a r e dis p layed. If you have selected All Songs , pr oceed to ste p 6. 5 Select the folder con taini ng the file you want to play. Use ï© /ïª to select, then pr ess ENTER . A list of the files and folde r s in the selected folde r is dis p layed. 6 Select and set the fil e you want to play. Use ï© /ïª to select, then pr ess ENTER . Pla y back sta r ts f r om th e selected file, and continues until the end of the list is r eached. Use ï¯ /ï° to p lay the pr evious o r next file. The Now Playing scr een (shown below) is dis p layed. Playing in the desired order (HMG Playlist) The discs that can add t r acks and files to the HMG (Home Media Galle r y) Pla ylist a r e as shown below. ⢠Audio CDs (CD-DAs and DTS-CDs) ⢠DVDs/CDs on which audio files a r e r ecor ded ï° Adding tracks/files Use this pr ocedu r e to add t r acks and file s, and c r eate the HMG Playlist. 1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY to display the Home Media Gallery. The Home Media Ga lle r y can also be dis p layed by selecti ng Home Media Gallery f r om the Home Menu pr essing ENTER . 2 Select the disc. Load the disc befo r ehand. Use ï© /ïª to select, then pr ess ENTER . 3 Select the track/f ile to be add ed. Use ï© /ïª to select. 4 Press TOOLS to display the TOOLS menu. My Folder DVD-RW/Photos/Folders 99 items Musi c 001.mp3 DATA DISC 0.05.34 0.02.33 Play Cu rr ently p laying file Total file p laying time Ela p sed time LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 32 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
33 En 04 5 Select Add to HMG Playlist. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . The t r ack o r file selected in ste p 3 is added to the HMG Playlist. To add mo r e t r acks o r files, r ep eat ste ps 3 to 5. ï° To add the currently playing track/ file to the HMG Playlist 1 While the trac k/file is playing, p ress TOOLS to display the TOOLS menu. 2U s e ï© /ïª to select Add to HMG Playlist, then press ENTER. Note ⢠A maximum of 24 t r acks/files can be added to the HMG Playlist. ⢠The HMG Playlist is clea r ed in the following cases: â When the p ower is tu r ned off. â When the disc t r ay is o p ened. ï° Playing the HMG Playlist 1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY to display the Home M edia Gall ery. The Home Media Galle r y can also be dis p layed by selecting Home Media Gallery f r om the Home Menu pr essing ENT ER . 2 Select HMG Playlist. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . 3 Select the track/file to be played. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . Playback sta r ts f r om the selected t r ac k/file, and continues u ntil the end of the list is r eached. Use ï¯ / ï° to p lay the pr evious o r next tr ack/file. The Now Playing sc r een (shown below) is dis p layed. ï° Deleting tracks/files from the HMG Playlist 1 Select the track/file t o be deleted, then press TOOLS to displa y the TOOLS menu. 2U s e ï© /ïª to select Delete from HM G Playlist, th en press ENTER. Folders CD-ROM/Musi c 15Items Musi c001.mp3 Musi c002.mp3 Musi c003.mp3 Musi c004.mp3 Musi c005.mp3 Musi c006.mp3 Musi c007.mp3 Musi c008.mp3 Play from Beginning Add to HMG Playlist Now Playing BD PLAYER TOOLS Musi c 001.mp3 DATA DISC 0.05.34 0.02.33 Play HMG Cu rr ently p laying t r ack/file Total t r ack/file p laying time Ela p sed time LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 33 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
05 34 En Chapter 5 Adjusting audio and video Adjusting the video The quality of the p layback p ictur e can be adjusted acco r ding to the TV you a r e using. 1 During playb ack, press VIDEO ADJUS T to display the Video Ad just screen. The Video Adjust sc r een can also be dis p layed by selecting Video Adjust f r om the TOOLS men u. 2 Select a pr eset. Select using ï« /ï¬ acco r ding to th e TV being used. ⢠Pioneer PDP â S elect this when connected to a Pionee r p lasm a TV. ⢠Pioneer LCD â Select this when connected to a Pionee r liquid c r ystal dis p lay TV. ⢠Pioneer Pro jector â Select this when connec ted to a Pionee r f r ont pr ojecto r . ⢠PDP â Select this when connected to a p las ma TV of anothe r b r an d. ⢠LCD â Sele ct this when connected to a liquid c r ystal dis p lay of anothe r b r and. ⢠Projector â Select this when connected to a f r ont pr ojecto r of another br and. ⢠Professional â With this setting, video signal pr ocessi ng is r estr ained. Sel ect this when connected to a pr ofessional m onito r . ⢠Memory1 to 3 â Pictu r e quality settings with adjusted p ar amete r s can b e sto r ed in th e memo r y. Fo r a desc r ip tion of the p ar amete r s, see When Memory1, 2 or 3 is s elected below. ï° When Memory1, 2 or 3 is selected 1 Select Adjustments. Use ïª to select Adjustments , then pr ess ENTER . A detailed settings sc r een a pp ea r s. 2 Select the item to be ad justed. Use ï© /ïª to select. 3 Adjust the picture quality. When ï« /ï¬ a r e pr essed, the adjustmen ts can be mad e viewing the p ictur e. The de tailed se ttings sc r een r ea pp ear s when ENTER is pr essed. ⢠Prog.Mot ion â Adjust acco r ding to the ty p e of image (moving o r still imag e). This is effe ctive mainly when out p utting video mate r ials as pr og r essive images. ⢠Pure Cinema â This setting o p tim izes the o pe r ation of the pr og r essive scanning ci r cuit fo r p laying film mate r ials. No r mall y set it to Auto1 . If the p ictur e seems unnatu r a l, switch this to Auto 2 , On o r Off ( p age 35). ⢠YNR â Reduces noise in the lumin ance (Y) signal. ⢠CNR â Reduc es noise in the c h r oma (C) signal. ⢠BNR â Reduces the block noise (block-sha p ed disto r tion gene r ated u p on MPEG com pr ession). ⢠MNR â Reduces the mosquito noise (disto r tion along the contou r s of the p ictur e gene r ated u p on MPEG com pr ession). ⢠Detail â Adjusts the p ictu r eâÂÂs c ontou r s. ⢠White Level â Adjusts the level of the white po r tions. ⢠Black Level â Adjusts the level of the black po r tions. ⢠Black Setup â Select the black level as the setu p level. No r mally select 0 IRE . If the black is too dense and all the da r k colo r s a r e dis p laye d in a unifo r m black due to the comb ination wi th the conn ected TV, s elect 7.5 IRE . ⢠Gamma C o rrection â Adjusts how the da r k p or tions of the p ictur e look. ⢠Hue â Adjusts the balance between g r een and r ed. ⢠Chroma Level â Adjusts the density of the colo r s. Note ⢠Prog.Mot ion and Pure Cinema have the effect only fo r p ictu r es r eco r ded i n the inte r laced scan fo r mat (576i/480i o r 1080i signals). TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN PLAY PREV PAUSE STOP NEXT RED GREEN YELLOW BLUE VIDEO ADJUST ENTER Adjustments Video Adjust PDP Prog. Motion Pure Cinema YNR CNR BNR MNR Detail White Level Video Adjust [ Memory1 ] Motion Still Auto1 Off Max Off Max Off Max Off Max Soft Fine Min Max Motion Still Prog. Motion LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 34 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
35 En 05 ⢠Prog.Moti on is disabled when Pure Cinema is set to On . ⢠Black Setup has the effect only fo r p ictu r es o ut p ut f r om the VIDEO out p ut te r minals, and fo r NTSC signals out p ut. ⢠YNR , CNR , BNR and MNR have no effect on 1080/24 p video signals out p ut f r om the HDMI OUT te r minal. ï° Closing the Video Adjust screen P r ess HOME MENU. ï° About Pure Cinema The r e a r e two ty p es of video signals: ⢠Video materi al â Video signals r eco r ded at 25 o r 30 f r ames/second ⢠Film material â Video signals r eco r ded at 24 f r ames/ second âÂÂPu r e Cinemaâ uses signal pr ocessing suited fo r âÂÂfilm mate r ialâ when conve r ting 576i/480i o r 1080i inte r laced video signals into pr og r essive video signals, r esulting in clea r p ictu r e r e pr oduction without losin g the qual ity of the mate r ial. is dis p layed on the disc info r mation sc r een when p laying the âÂÂfilm m ater ialâ p ictur es of BD-ROM, BD-R/-RE and DVD-Video discs ( p age 26). Adjusting the audio Adjusting the Audio DRC Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Cont r ol) has the effect of p laying loud sounds softly and soft sounds loudly. Adjust the setting fo r exam p le when viewing movies late at night and the di alogs a r e difficult to hea r . 1 During playback, display the TOOLS menu. P r ess TOOLS. 2 Select and set Audio Adjust. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . 3 Select and set Audio DR C. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . 4 Adjust the setting. Use ï« /ï¬ to s witch between Off , Low , Medium, High and Auto . ï° Closing the Audio DRC screen P r ess ENTER o r HOME MENU. Note ⢠This only affects the Dol by T r ueHD, Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby Digital au dio signals of BDs, DVDs and video files. ⢠When Auto is selected, the setting has the same effect as High o r Off fo r Dolb y T r ueHD signals, de p ending on the content. Fo r Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby Digital, the setting has the same effect as Off . ⢠Audio DRC affects the audio signals out p ut f r om the following a udio out p ut te r minal s: â Analog audio signals out p ut f r om the A UDIO OUT te r minal s. âÂÂL i n e a r PCM audio signals outp ut fr om the DIGITAL OUT te r minal or HDMI OUT te r minal. ⢠The effect may be weak fo r some discs. Adjusting the audio delay (Lip Sync) Adjust the audio delay fo r the selected video out p ut te r minal if the video and audio a r e not synch r onized. 1 During playba ck, display the TOOLS menu. P r ess TOOLS. 2 Select and set Au dio Adjust. Use ï© /ïª to select, then pr ess ENTER . 3 Select and set Lip Sync. Use ï© /ïª to select, then pr ess ENTER . 4 Select Auto or Manual. Use ï« /ï¬ to select. â¢A u t o â The p layer automatically adjusts the timing of the video and audio when connected to a device equi pp ed with the HDMI Auto Li p sync Co rr ection featu r e using an HDMI ca ble. â¢M a n u a l â Adjust ma nually while viewing the video. If you have selected Manual , pr oceed to ste p 5. 5 Adjusting th e amount of audio delay. P r ess ïª , then use ï«/ ï¬ to adjust . The audio delay ca n be adjusted f r om 0 to 250 ms in ste p s of 5 ms. Note â¢T h e Lip Sync adjustment is only a pp licable to the out p ut te r minal set at Output Terminal ( p age 43). ⢠The sound m ay be inte rr u p te d while setting the delay. ï° Closing the Lip Sync screen P r ess ENTER o r HOME MENU. TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER Lip Syn c Manual 100 ms 0 50 150 100 200 250 LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 35 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
06 36 En Chapter 6 Advanced settings Changing the settings Operating the Initial Setup screen 1 When playba ck is stopped, display the Home Menu screen. P r ess HOME MENU. 2 Select and set Initial Se tup. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . 3 Select the it em and change the setting. Use ï© /ïª /ï« /ï¬ to select, then pr ess ENTER . Example (U.K. models): ï° Closing the Initial Setup screen P r ess HOME MENU. VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY OUTPUT RESOLUTION CLEAR ENTER ENTER PLAY PREV PAUSE STOP NEXT î 16:9 (Widescreen) î F ull î Letter Box î On Initial Setup BD PLAYER TV Aspect Ratio 4:3 Video Out DVD 16:9 Video Out NTSC on P AL TV Video Out Audio Out HDMI Network Language Playback Data Management Setup Navigator LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 36 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
37 En 06 Note ⢠Items that cannot be changed a r e indi cated in g r ay. The items that can be selected de p end o n the p layer âÂÂs status. ⢠In O p tions, the facto r y default sett ings a r e indicated in bold. Setting Options Explanatio n Video Out TV As p ect Ratio 16:9 (Widescreen ) Select this when con nected to a wide (16:9) TV. 4:3 (Standa r d) Select this when connected to a conv entional TV. 4:3 Video Out Full 4:3 p ictu r es a r e d is p layed ove r th e enti r e sc r een. No r mal 4:3 p ictur es ar e disp layed with ve r tica l black bar s along the sides. Select this when you cannot switch the as p ect r atio to 4:3 on t he TV. 4:3 Vide o Out is only valid when TV Aspect R atio is set to 16:9 (Widescr een) . DVD 16:9 Vi deo Out Lett er Box 16:9 p ictu r es a r e dis p layed with black ba r s at the to p and bottom when viewing on a 4:3 sc r een. Pan & Scan The p ictur e is disp layed over the enti r e scr een, with the left and r ight sides of the 16:9 p ictur e c r o pp ed. Select th is to view 4:3 p ictur es ove r the enti r e sc r een. Fo r some discs, the p ictu r e will be dis p layed in th e Letter Box mode even if Pan & Scan is set. ⢠DVD 16:9 Video Out is only val id when TV Aspect Rat io is set to 4:3 (Sta ndard) . ⢠DVD 16:9 Video Out is only valid when p laying 16:9 p ictu r es of DVD-V ideo o r DVD-R/-RW (VR fo r mat) discs. When othe r 16:9 p ictur es ar e p layed, they ar e outp ut in the Letter Box mo de. NTSC on PAL TV On Select this when conn ected to a PAL-only TV. The p ictur e is dis p layed co rr ectly on the PAL-on ly TV even when p laying a sou r ce with a f r ame/fiel d r ate other t han 50 Hz. Off Select this when connected to an NTSC -com p atible TV . ⢠The facto r y defa ult setting is On for U.K. models, Off for other models. ⢠Many r ecent PAL T Vs su pp o r t the in p ut of NTSC signals, in which case th is can be set to Off . Also check you r TVâÂÂs op er ating inst r uctions . Audio Ou t Dolby Di gital Out * Only valid fo r the DIGITA L OUT te r minal. Dolby Digital 1 Dolby Digi tal audio signals a r e outp ut. With BD-ROMs, the secondar y audio and inte r ac tive audi o ar e mixed for outp ut. Dolby Digital 2 Dolby Digi tal audio signals a r e out p ut. With BD-ROMs, the signals a r e out p ut without mixing the seconda r y audio and inte r active audio signals. Dolby Digital ï¤ PCM Select this when the connected AV r ece ive r o r am p lifie r , etc., is not com p atible with Dol by Digital audio signals. The Dolby Digita l audio signals a r e conve r te d into linea r PCM audio signals fo r out p ut. DTS Out * Only valid fo r the DIGITA L OUT te r minal. DTS 1 DTS Digital Su rr ound audio signals a r e out p ut. With BD-ROMs, the seconda r y au dio and inte r active audio a r e mixed fo r ou t p ut. DTS 2 DTS Digital Su rr ound audio signals a r e outp ut. With BD-ROMs, the signals a r e out p ut without mixing the se conda r y audio and inte r active audio signals. DTS ï¤ PCM Select this when the connected AV r ece ive r o r am p lifie r , etc., is not com p atible with DTS Digital Su rr o und audio signal s. The DTS Digita l Su rr ound au dio signals a r e conve r ted into linea r PCM audio sign als fo r out p ut. AAC Out * Only valid fo r the DIGITA L OUT te r minal. AAC Select this when the connected AV r ecei ve r o r am p lifie r , etc., is com p atible with AAC audi o signals. The AAC audio signals a r e out p ut. AAC ï¤ PCM Select this when the connected AV r ece ive r o r am p lifie r , etc., is not com p atible with AAC audio sign als. The AAC audio signals a r e conve r ted into linea r PCM audio sign als fo r out p ut. DTS Downm ix St ereo DTS-HD Maste r Audio signals, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio signals or DTS Digital Su rr ound audio signals conve r ted to lin ea r PCM audio signals a r e conve r te d into 2-channel ( ste r eo) signa ls fo r out p ut. Lt/Rt DTS-HD Maste r Audio signals, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio signals o r DTS Digital Su rr ound audio signals conve r ted to lin ea r PCM audio signals a r e conve r ted into 2-channel signals com p atible with Dolby Su rr ound fo r out p ut (when the connected AV r eceive r o r am p lifie r , etc., is com p atible with Dolby P r o Logic, the AV r ec eive r o r am p lifie r out p uts t he linea r PCM audio signals as su rr ound audio signals). LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 37 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
06 38 En HDMI HDMI High S p eed T r ansmission On Select this when connected with a High S p eed HDMI⢠cable ( p age 13) . Off Select this when connecte d with a Standa r d HDMI⢠cable ( p age 13) . The p layer âÂÂs setting scr een is clos ed if the outp u t video r esolution is switched by changing the HDMI High Speed Transm ission setting. HDMI Colo r Sp ace Au to Select this to automatically switch the vide o out p ut betwe en YCbC r an d RGB signals acco r ding t o the connected equ i p me nt. YCbC r 4:4:4 Select this to out p ut the video signals as YCbC r 4:4:4 si gnals. YCbC r 4:2:2 Select this to out p ut the video signals as YCbC r 4:2:2 si gnals. RGB (16 to 235) Select this to out p ut the video signals as RGB si gnals . Choose this if the colo r s seem too den se and all the da r k colo r s a r e dis p layed in a unifo r m black when RGB (0 to 2 55) is selected. RGB (0 to 255) Select th is to out p ut the video signals as RGB si gn als. Choose this if the colo r s seem too fa int and th e black seems too b r ight when RGB (16 to 2 35) is selected. No r mally it is r ecommended to set this to Au to . When set to Auto , the o p timum video signals fo r you r TV a r e out p ut. HDMI Audio Out Auto The signals a r e out p ut with as many audio channels as p ossible. In cases when the numbe r of chan nels does not decr ease when the si gnals ar e outp ut as such without conve r ti ng them to linea r PCM, they a r e out p ut as such ( p age 45) . PCM Select this when you wa nt the seconda r y audio and int e r active audio signals to be mixed fo r out p ut o r when you want to out p ut pr ior itizing sam p ling f r equency o ve r the numbe r of channels ( p age 45). Off Select this when you do not want to out p ut the au dio f r om the HDMI out p ut te r minal. KURO LINK On Select this to cont r ol the p layer with the r emote con t r ol of the AV device connected using an HDMI cable. Also r efer to About KURO LINK function on p age 14. Off Select this when yo u do not want to cont r ol the p layer with the r emote cont r ol of the AV device connect ed using an HDMI cable. Dis p lay Powe r On * Only valid when KURO LINK is set to On . On Select this when you want th e TV to tu r n on each time p layback is sta r ted o r the Home Menu o r Home Media Galle r y is dis p laye d on the p layer . Off Select this whe n you do not want the T V to tu r n on each time p layback is sta r ted o r the Home Menu o r Home Media Ga lle r y is dis p layed on the p layer . Dis p lay Powe r Off * Only valid when KURO LINK is set to On . On Se lect this when you want the p layer âÂÂs p ower to tur n off together with the TVâÂÂs p ower . Off Select this when y ou do not want the p layer âÂÂs p ower to tur n o ff togethe r with the TVâÂÂs p ower . PQLS * Only valid when KURO LINK is set to On . Auto Enables PQLS function ( p age 14) . Off Disa bles PQLS functi on ( p age 14) . Netwo r k IP Add r ess Select this to set the IP add r ess of the p layer and DNS se r ver ( p age 41 ). P r oxy Se r ve r Only set the pr oxy se r ver if so inst r ucted by you r Inte r net se r vice pr ovider ( p age 41 ). Dis p lay Netwo r k Configu r ation Select this to dis p lay a list of the netwo r k settings ( p age 41 ). Connection Test Select this to test the netwo r k conn ection ( p age 4 2). Setting Options Explanatio n LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 38 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
39 En 06 Langua ge OSD Language English Select this to set t he language of the on-sc r een dis p lays to English. available l anguages Choos e a langua ge fo r the on-sc r een dis p lays f r om the listed la nguages. Audio Language * Fo r some discs, it may not be p ossible to change to the selected language. English Select this to set both the BD-ROM and DVD-Video defa ult audio language to English. available l anguages Choos e a langua ge f r om the listed languages to set t he default audio language fo r BD-ROM and DV D-Video p layback. Othe r Continue to t he next sc r een to set th e default audi o language fo r BD-ROM and DVD-V ideo p layback. You can selec t the language name o r ente r the code numbe r (se e on p age 4 7 fo r the code table). If a language n ot r ecor ded on the BD/DVD is set, one of th e r ecor ded language s is automatically selected and p layed . Subtitle L anguage * Fo r some discs, it may not be p ossible to change to the selected language. English Select this to set t he default subti tle language fo r BD-ROM and DVD-Vi deo p layback to English. available l anguages Choos e a langua ge f r om the listed languages to set t he default subtitle language fo r BD-ROM and DV D-Video p layback. Othe r Continue to th e next sc r een to se t the defau lt subtitle la nguage fo r BD-ROM and DVD-V ideo p layback. You can selec t the language name o r ente r the code numbe r (se e on p age 4 7 fo r the code table). If a language n ot r ecor ded on the BD/DVD is set, one of th e r ecor ded language s is automatically selected and p layed . BDMV/DVD-Video Menu Lang. * Fo r some discs, it may not be p ossible to change to the selected language. w/Subtitle Language Sets the language of BD-ROM and DVD-Vide o menus to the same as that set fo r the subtitle language. available l anguages Choose a language f r om the listed langua ges to set the default languag e fo r BD-ROM and DVD-Video menus. Othe r Continue to t he next sc r een to set the default menu langua ge fo r BD-ROM and DVD-Video men us. You can select the language nam e o r ente r the code numbe r (see on p ag e 47 fo r the code table). If a language n ot r ecor ded on the BD/DVD is set, one of th e r ecor ded language s is automatically selected and p layed . Subtitle D is p lay On Se lect this to disp lay the subtitles. Off Select th is if you do not want to dis p lay the subtitles. Note th at on some discs the subtitles a r e dis p layed by fo r ce. Playback Still Pict u r e Field This eliminates instability of the p ictur e when p layback is p aused. F r ame This makes p ictu r es clea r when p layback is p aused, but instability may be obse r ved. Auto Field o r Frame is switched automatically acco r ding to the disc or file be ing p layed. Angle/Seco nda r y Indicato r On Select this to dis p lay the a ngle ma r k, seconda r y video ma r k and seconda r y audio ma r k on the TV sc r een ( p ages 25 and 26). Off Select this if you do not want to dis p lay the angle mar k, secondar y video mar k and second a r y au dio ma r k on the TV sc r een. DivX VOD Regist r ation Code Dis p lays the p layer âÂÂs r egistr ation code r equir ed to p lay DivX VOD files ( p age 9). Hyb r id Disc Playback BD Th e BD laye r of hyb r id discs with two o r mo re laye r s (BD and DVD o r CD) is p layed. DVD The DVD laye r of hyb r id discs with two o r mo r e laye r s (BD and DVD) is p layed. If the r e is no DVD laye r , the BD laye r is p layed. CD The CD laye r of hyb r id discs with two o r mo r e laye r s (BD and CD) is p layed. If the r e is no CD laye r , the BD laye r is p layed. Remove the disc f r o m the disc t r ay when changin g the setting. BDMV/BDAV Playback P r io r ity BDMV Select this to p lay the B DMV fo r mat on BD-R/-RE discs containing b oth BDMV and BDAV fo r mats. BDAV Select this to p lay the BDAV f or mat on BD-R/-RE discs co ntaining both BDMV and BDAV fo r mats. Remove the disc f r o m the disc t r ay when changin g the setting. Setting Options Explanatio n LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 39 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
06 40 En Data Manage ment Individual/Sha r ed Data E r ase Use this to dis p lay the list of data used fo r th e BD-LIVE and BONUSVIE W functions and to e r as e the data ( p age 42). Remove the disc f r o m the disc t r ay when changin g the setting. A pp lication Data E r ase Use th is to e r ase bookma r ks, high sco r es of games and othe r data ( p age 42). Remove the disc f r o m the disc t r ay when changin g the setting. Sto r age Fo r mat Select this to fo r mat the sto r age device on which th e data used by the BD-LIVE an d BONUSVIE W functions i s sto r ed ( p age 4 2). Remove the disc f r o m the disc t r ay when changin g the setting. Setu p Navigato r Sta r t making the setting s using the Setu p Navigato r menu. Fo r details, see Making settings using the Setup Navigator menu on p ag e 18. Pa r ental Lock Set Passwo r d (Ch ange Passwo r d) Registe r (change) th e p asswo r d fo r p ar ental lock settin gs o r fo r unlocking to p lay DV D-Video with p ar ental lock featu r e ( p age 43). DVD-Vide o Pa r ental Lock Change the p layer âÂÂs p ar ental lock level ( p age 43) . BDMV Pa r ental Lock Change the r estr icte d age ( p age 43) . Count r y Code Change the Count r y/Ar ea code (p age 43). O p tions Out p ut Te r minal Set the te r minals f r om which the p laye r âÂÂs video and audio signals a r e to be out p ut ( p age 43). On Sc r een Dis p lay On Se lect this to disp lay the o p er ation indicato r s (Play, Sto p , etc.) on the TV sc r een. Off Select this if you do not want to dis p lay the o p er ation indicato r s (Play, Sto p , etc.) on the TV s c r een. Sc r een Save r On The sc r een save r is automati cally activated if th e r e is no o p er ation fo r ove r 1 minute afte r p layback is sto pp ed o r p aused. The sc reen save r is automatically activa ted if the r e is no o p er ation f o r ove r 1 minute afte r t he Home Men u or Home Media Galler y is disp layed while p laying a BD or DVD. With audio CDs a nd audio fi les, the sc r een save r is automatically a ctivated if no button is o p er ated fo r ove r 1 minute , even whil e the audio CD o r aud io file is p laying. The sc r een save r tu r ns of f when an o p eration is p er for med on the p layer or r emote contr ol. Off The sc r ee n save r is not a ctivated. Auto Powe r Off On Se lect this to tu r n the p ower off aut omatically (the p ower tu r ns off automatically if no o p er at ion is p er for med fo r ove r 30 mi nutes). Off Select this if you do not want the p ower to tu r n off aut omatically. Softwa r e U p date The Softwa r e U p date function can check fo r and do wnload u p dated system softwa r e f r om the netwo r k ser ve r ( p age 44). Setting Options Explanatio n LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 40 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
41 En 06 ï° Setting the IP address 1 Select and set Network ï¤ IP Add ress ï¤ Next Screen. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . 2 Set IP address. Use ï© /ïª /ï« /ï¬ to set the IP add r ess of the p layer o r DNS se r ve r , then pr ess ENTER . ⢠Auto Set IP Address On â The p layer âÂÂs IP addr ess is obtained automatically. Select this when using a b r oadband r outer or br oadband modem that has a DHCP (Dynamic Host Confi gu r ation P r otocol) se r ver function. This p la yer âÂÂs IP add r ess will automatically be allocat ed f r om the DHCP se r ver . Off â The p layer âÂÂs IP addr e ss must be s et manually. Use the numbe r buttons (0 to 9) to in p ut the IP add r ess, subnet mask and default gateway. ⢠Aut o Set DNS Server Address On â The DNS se r ver âÂÂs IP add r ess is obtained automatically. Off â The DNS se r ve r âÂÂs IP add r ess must be set manually. Use the numbe r b u t t o n s ( 0 t o 9 ) t o i n p ut the DNS se r ver âÂÂs IP add r ess sti p ulated by you r Inte r net se r vice pr ovide r . Note â¢W h e n Auto Set IP Address i s set to Off , Auto Set DNS Server Address is also set to Off . â¢F o r infor mation on DHCP ser ver fun ction, r efer to the netwo r k deviceâÂÂs o p er ating inst r uctions. ⢠You may need to con tact you r Inte r net se r vice pr ovide r or networ k administr ator when inp utting the IP add r ess manually. ï° Setting the proxy server Only s et the pr oxy se r ve r if so inst r ucted by you r Inte r net se r vice pr ovide r . 1 Select and set Network ï¤ Proxy Server ï¤ Next Screen. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . 2 Select and set Us e or Not use at Proxy Serve r. Use ï« /ï¬ to change, then pr ess ïª . ⢠Use â Select this when using a pr oxy se r ve r. ⢠Not use â Select this when not using a pr oxy se r ve r. If you have selected Use , pr oceed to ste p 3. 3 Select and set Serve r Select Method. Use ï« /ï¬ to change, then pr ess ïª . ⢠IP Addre ss â In p ut the IP add r ess. ⢠Server Name â In p ut the se r ve r name. 4 Input IP Address or Server Name. Use the numbe r buttons (0 to 9) to in p ut the numbe r if you select IP add r ess by ste p 3. Use ï« /ï¬ to move the cu r sor . Use the numbe r buttons (0 to 9) to in p ut cha r acter s if you select S e r ver Name by ste p 3. The cha r acter s that can be in p ut fo r the se r ver name a r e listed on the table below. P r essing a button r ep eatedly cycles th r ough the cha r acter s shown. ⢠If you want to ente r two cha r acter s in succession that a r e both on the same button (f o r exa m p le a P and an R ), pr ess ï¬ afte r inp utting the fir st char acter th en in p ut the second cha r ac te r . â¢U s e CLEAR to del e te the last cha r acter . â¢U s e ï« /ï¬ to move the dis p layed c har acte r s when all the in p ut cha r acter s cannot be dis p layed. 5 Input Port Number . P r ess ïª , use the numbe r bu ttons (0 to 9) to inp ut the numbe r . 6 Press ENTER to set. ï° Displaying the network settings ï¦ Select and set Network ï¤ Display Network Configuration ï¤ Next Screen. Use ï© /ïª to select, then pr ess ENTER . IP Address Auto Set IP Address IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Auto Set DNS Ser ver Address DNS Server (Primary) DNS Server (Secondar y) Off Network BD PLAYER ï£ï ï ï ï ï ï ï ï ï ï ï Off ï¤ Key Characters Key Characters 1 1 . â 6 m n o 6 2 a b c 2 7 p q r s 7 3 d e f 3 8 t u v 8 4 g h i 4 9 w x y z 9 5 j k l 5 0 0 ï£ï ï ï ï ï ï ï ï ï ï ï Use ï¤ P roxy Ser ver P roxy Ser ver Ser ver Select Method Ser ver Name P ort Number Ser ver Name Network BD PLAYER LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 41 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
06 42 En The MAC add r ess, IP add r ess, subnet mask , default gateway and DNS se r ver ( pr imar y and seconda r y) settings a r e dis p layed. When Auto Set IP Address is set to On , the values obtained a utomatica lly a r e dis p layed. Note ⢠âÂÂ0.0.0.0â is dis p layed when each IP add r ess ha s not been set. ï° Testing the network connection ï¦ Select and set Network ï¤ Connection Test ï¤ Start. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . âÂÂNetwo r k connection test com p leted successfully.â is dis p layed once the test is com p leted . If any othe r messag e is dis p layed, check the connections a nd/o r settings ( p ages 17 and 41). ï° Changing to other language at language setting 1 Select and set Language . Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . 2 Select and set Audio Langu age, Subtitle Language or BDMV/DVD -Video Menu Lang. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . 3 Select and set Other. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . 4 Change the languag e. Use ï« /ï¬ to ch ange, then pr ess ENTER . ⢠The la nguage can also be chang ed using the numbe r buttons . Use ï© /ïª to m ove the cu r sor to Number , use the numbe r bu tt on s ( 0 t o 9 ) t o i np ut the numbe r , then pr ess ENTER . Refe r to Lang uage Code Table and Country/Area Code Table on p age 47. Note ⢠If a language not r ecor ded on the BD/DVD is set, one of the r ecor ded languages is automatically selected and p layed. ï° Erasing data that has been ad ded to BDs and application data Use this pr ocedu r e to e r ase data that has been added t o BDs (data downlo aded with the BD-LIVE functi on and data used w ith the BON USVIEW fun ction) and a pp licati on data. Caution â¢S o m e t i m e i s r equi r ed to e r ase the data. ⢠Do not un p lug the p ower co r d while data is bei ng e r ased. â¢T h i s o p e r ation does not wor k when a disc is loaded. 1 Select and set Da ta Management. Use ï© /ïª to select, then pr ess ENTER . 2 Select and set the erase menu. Use ï© /ïª to select, then pr ess ENTER . ⢠Individual /Shared Data Erase Use this pr ocedu r e to select and e r ase data downloaded with the BD-LIV E function and data used with the BONUSVIEW func tion ( p age 8). Select Next Screen , the n pr ess ENTER . The list sc r een a pp ea rs. When a disc name is selected, the data downloaded with the BD-LIVE function and data used with the BONUSVIEW is e r ased. When Shared Data is selected, all the data downloaded with the BD-LIVE function and not associated to discs is e r ased. Use ï© /ïª to selec t the data to be e r ased, then pr ess ENTER . ⢠Application Data Eras e Use this pr ocedu r e to e r ase BD-ROM a pp li cation data (high sco r es of games, bookma r ks da ta, etc.). Select Start , then pr ess ENTER . ⢠Storage Format Use this pr ocedu r e to fo r mat the sto r age in which the data downloaded with the BD-LIVE function and data used with the BONUSVIEW function i s sto r ed ( p age 8). When this i s done, all the data on th e external storage device is erased. Select Start , then pr ess ENTER . 3 Select Yes, then press ENTER. Use ï« /ï¬ to select, then pr ess ENTER . Number Audio Language Initial Setup BD PLAYER Language Video Out Audio Out HDMI Network Language Playback Data Management Setup Navigator English 05 1 4 Individual/Shared Data Erase BD PLAYER 15 items Shared Data Disc Name 1 Disc Name 2 Disc Name 3 Disc Name 4 Disc Name 5 Disc Name 6 Disc Name 7 LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 42 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
43 En 06 ï° Registering or Changing the password Use this pr ocedu r e to r egister or change the code numbe r r equi r ed fo r the Pa r ental Lock settings. 1 Select and set Parental Lock ï¤ Set Password ï¤ Next Screen. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . 2 Input the password. Use the numbe r button s (0 to 9) o r ï©/ ïª to in p ut the numbe r , then pr ess EN TER to set. Use ï« /ï¬ to mo ve the cu r so r . 3 Re-input the password. Use the numbe r button s (0 to 9) o r ï©/ ïª to in p ut the numbe r , then pr ess EN TER to set. Use ï« /ï¬ to mo ve the cu r so r . â¢T o c h a n g e t h e p asswor d, in p ut the pr eviou sly r egister ed p ass w o r d, then in p ut the new p asswo r d. Note â¢W e r ecommend making a note of the p asswor d. ⢠If you fo r get th e p asswor d, r eset the p layer to the facto r y default setting, then r egiste r the passwo r d again ( p age 44). ï° Changing the Parental Lock level for viewing DVDs Some DVD-Video discs containing scenes of violence, fo r exam p le, have Pa r ental Lock lev els (check the indicati ons on the discâÂÂs jacket o r elsewhe r e). To r estr ict viewing these discs, set the p layer âÂÂs level to the level lowe r than the discs. 1 Select and set Parental Lock ï¤ DVD-Video Parental Lock ï¤ Next Screen. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . 2 Input the password. Use the numbe r button s (0 to 9) o r ï©/ ïª to in p ut the numbe r , then pr ess EN TER to set. Use ï« /ï¬ to mo ve the cu r so r . 3 Change the level. Use ï« /ï¬ to ch ange, then pr ess ENTER to set . Note ⢠The level can be set to Off o r between Level1 and Level8 . When set to Off , viewing is not r estr icted. ï° Changing the Age Restriction for viewing BD-ROMs Fo r BD-ROMs containing scenes of violence, fo r exam p le, viewing can be r estr icted by setting an age r estr iction fo r the BD-ROM s. 1 Select and set Parental Lock ï¤ BDMV Parental Lock ï¤ Next Screen. Use ï© /ïª to select, then pr ess ENTER . 2 Input the password. Use the numbe r bu ttons (0 to 9) o r ï©/ ïª to inp ut the numbe r , then pr ess ENTER to set. Use ï« /ï¬ to move the cu r so r . 3 Change the age. Use the numbe r bu ttons (0 to 9) o r ï©/ ïª to inp ut the numbe r , then pr ess ENTER to set. Use ï« /ï¬ to move the cu r so r . Note ⢠When Age Restriction is set to 255 , viewing is not r estr icted. ï° Changing the Country/Area code 1 Select and set Parental Lock ï¤ Country Code ï¤ Next Screen. Use ï© /ïª to select, then pr ess ENTER . 2 Input the password. Use the numbe r bu ttons (0 to 9) o r ï©/ ïª to inp ut the numbe r , then pr ess ENTER to set. Use ï« /ï¬ to move the cu r so r . 3 Change the country/ area code. Use ï« /ï¬ to change, then pr ess ENTER to set. ⢠The the count r y/ar ea code can also be chang ed using the numbe r buttons. Use ï© /ïª to move the cu r sor to Number , use the numbe r buttons (0 to 9) to inp ut the numbe r , then pr ess ENTER . Refe r to Language Code Table and Country/Area Co de Table on p age 47. ï° Setting the output terminals Set the te r minals f r om which the p lay er âÂÂs video and audio signals a r e to be out p ut. 1 Select and set Op tions ï¤ Output Terminal ï¤ Next Screen. Use ï© /ïª to select, then pr ess ENTER . 2 Select and set the vi deo and audio output terminals. Select the actually connected video and audio out p ut te r minals. Use ï© /ïª /ï« /ï¬ to select, then pr ess ENTER . Fo r details on the settings, r efe r to ste p 4 o n p age 18. When COMPON ENT VIDEO o r VIDEO is selected fo r Video , no so und is out p ut fr om the HDMI OUT te r minal (a wa r ning message is dis p laye d). LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 43 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
06 44 En Software updating The softwa r e of the p layer ca n be u pdated by connecting it to the Int e r net using a LA N cable. Befo r e u p dating th e softwa r e, make su r e th at you have connected the p layer to the netwo rk and made the necessa r y settings ( p ages 17 and 41). Caution â¢D o n o t u n p lug the p ower cor d dur ing softwar e u p dating. Othe r wise, the u p dating will be abo r ted and malfunction may occu r with the p layer . â¢T h e r e ar e two pr ocesses for softwar e up dating, downloading and u p da ting. Both pr ocesses may take a ce r tain p er iod o f time. â¢D e p ending on the In ter net connection conditions, downloading may take a l ong time. â¢O t h e r op e r ations ar e defea ted du r i ng softwa r e u p dating. Fu r the r mo r e u p dating pr ocess cannot be canceled. â¢W h e n t h e f r ont p anel disp lay is off, tur n it on with FL DIMMER . When u p dating the p layer âÂÂs sof twa r e with the f r ont p anel d is p lay off, do not un p lug the p ower co r d until the FL OFF indica tor tu r ns off. Note â¢S t e p s 1 to 4 a r e the o p er ations p er fo r med by the use r (they a r e intended to download the softwa r e f r om the Inte r net). â¢S t e p s 5 to 7 a r e the o p er ations p er fo r med (automa tically) b y the p laye r (they a r e intend ed to u p date the softwa r e). 1 When playba ck is stopped, display the Home Menu screen. P r ess HOME MENU. 2 Select and set Initial Se tup. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . 3 Select and set Options ï¤ Software Update ï¤ Start. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . â¢I f t h e p laye r is al r eady r unning the latest softwar e, the message âÂÂThe p layerâÂÂs softwa r e is u p to date and does not need u p dating.â is dis p layed. 4 Select and set Yes. Use ï« /ï¬ to s elect Yes , then pr ess ENTER . â¢T h e h e l p menu is disp layed if the p laye r cannot co nnec t to the Inte r ne t. Check the connections and settings ( p ages 17 and 41). 5 Downloa ding of th e software start. The softwa r e download status is dis p layed o n the sc r een. â¢D e p ending on the In ter net connection conditions, softwa r e downlo ading may tak e a ce r tain p er iod of time. 6 Updating starts. The f r ont p anel dis p l a y shows messages such as âÂÂDATA CHECKâ , âÂÂWRT SYS1â , âÂÂWRT DRVâ and âÂÂWRT FLCâ . ⢠S o f t w a r e up dating may ta ke a cer tain p er iod o f time. 7 Updating completes. The f r ont p anel dis p l a y shows âÂÂDOWNLOAD OKâ and the p laye r tu r ns off auto matically. Restoring all the settings to the factory default settings 1 Check that the playerâÂÂs pow er is turned on. 2 When a di sc is playing , press ï§ to stop playback. Eject the disc f r om the p layer . 3 While pr essing ï§ , press ïµ STANDBY/ON. O pe r ate using the butto ns on the p laye r âÂÂs f r ont p anel. Note â¢A f t e r r esto r ing all the settin gs to th e factor y default settings, use Setup Navigator to r eset the p layer ( p age 18). ⢠When all the settings a r e r estor ed to the facto r y defaults, al l the data fo r the seconda r y video (Pictu r e- in-Pictu r e), secon da r y audio, bookma r ks, etc., is e r ased. LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 44 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
45 En 06 About the audio output settings The audio signals that a r e out p ut diffe r acco r ding to the audio fo r mat r ecorded on the disc and the p layer âÂÂs settings. Check on the table below. Caution â¢W h e n ANALOG AUDIO is select ed at Output Terminal , no audio signals a re out p ut f r om the HDMI OUT te r min al o r DIGIT AL OUT te r minal ( p ages 18 and 43). â¢W h e n HDMI o r DIGITAL AUDIO is selected at Output Terminal , linea r PCM audio signals (2 channels) a r e out p ut f r om all te r minals othe r than the ones selected at Output Terminal ( p ages 18 and 43). ⢠The output from all termin als other than the ones select ed for Audio does not sound as intended by the content provider. Audio form at AUDIO OUT terminals DIGITAL OUT terminal HDMI OUT terminal Converted t o linear PCM audio 1 1. When Dolby Digi tal Out is set to Dolby Digital ï¤ PCM , DTS Out is set to DTS ï¤ PCM , o r AAC Out is set to AAC ï¤ PCM ( p age 37). Not converted to linear PCM audio 2 2. When Dolby Digi tal Out is set to Dolby Digital 1 / Dolby Digital 2 , DTS Out is set to DTS 1 /DTS 2 o r AAC Out is set to AAC ( p age 37). PCM 3 3. When HDMI Audio Out is set to PCM o r Auto ( p age 38). Auto 3 BD- ROM Dolby Digital Conve r ted t o 2-channel a udio Conve r ted t o 2-channel a udio Dolby Digital 4 4. When out p utting Dolby Digital o r DTS Digita l Su rr ound bitst r eam with settings of Dolby Digital 2 at Dolby Digi tal Out , DTS 2 at DTS Out , the seconda r y audio and inte r active audio signals a r e not mixed fo r out p ut. 5.1-channe l audio Dolby Digital 5,6 5. When out p utting the bitst r eam of Dolby T r ueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby Digital, DTS-HD Maste r Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio o r DTS Digit al Su rr ound, the seconda r y audio and inte r acti ve audio s ignals a r e not mixed for outp ut. 6. If the co nnected HDMI de vice is not com p atible with Dolby T r ueHD o r Dolby Digital Plus bitst r eam, the signals a r e out p ut in linea r PCM (7.1 channels) o r Dolby Digital bitst r eam. If the connec ted HDMI device is not com p atible with Dolby Digital bitst r eam , the signals a r e out p ut in linea r PCM (2 channels). Dolby Digital Plus 7.1-channe l audio Dolby Digital Plus 5,6 Dolby T r ueHD 7.1-channel audio 7 7. When the out p ut vide o r esolution is set to 576i/480i or 576 p /480p , the signals may be outp ut in linear P C M ( 2 c h a n n e l s ) , d e p ending on HDMI High Sp eed Tran smiss ion setting and/o r the connected HDMI device ( p ag e 13). Dolby T r ueHD 5,6,8 8. When the out p ut video r esolution is set to 576i/480i or 576p /480p , the signals may be outp ut in linear PCM (2 channels) or Dolby Digital bitst r eam, de p ending on HDMI High Speed Transmission setting and/o r the conn ected HDMI devic e ( p age 13). DTS Digital Su rr ound DTS Digital Su rr ound 4 7.1-channe l audio DTS Digital Su rr ound 5,9 DTS-HD Hig h Resolution Audio 7.1-channel audio 7 DTS-HD High Resolution Audio 5,7,9 DTS-HD Maste r Audio DTS-HD Maste r Audio 5,9,10 Linea r PCM Conve r ted to 2- channel audio 7.1-channel audio 7 BD-R/ -RE Dolby Digital Conve r ted t o 2-channel a udio Conve r ted t o 2-channel a udio Dolby Digital 5.1-channe l audio Dolby Digital 6 MPEG-2 AAC MPEG-2 AAC MPEG-2 AAC MPEG 2-channel a udio Linea r PCM DVD- Video Dolby Digital Conve r ted t o 2-channel a udio Conve r ted t o 2-channel a udio Dolby Digital 5.1-channe l audio Dolby Digital 6 DTS Digital Su rr ound DTS Digital Su rr ound DTS Digital Su rr ound 9 MPEG 2-channel a udio Linea r PCM DVD-R/ -RW (VR fo r mat) Dolby Digital Conve r ted to 2-channel a udio Conve r ted t o 2-channel a udio Dolby Digital 5.1-channel audio Dolby Digital 6 MPEG 2-channel a udio Linea r PCM LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 45 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
06 46 En Note â¢O n l y c o m p atible with 7.1-channel su rr ound bac k. 6.1-channel surr ound back is o utp ut in 7.1 channels. In o ther cases, out p u t as audio signals of 5.1-ch annels o r less. â¢W h e n o u t p utting linear PCM audio si gnals, if the numbe r of com p atible cha nnels of the co nnected HDMI d evice is lowe r , the si gnals a r e out p ut with the numbe r of chann els fo r which the device is com p atible. ⢠The audio signals out p ut f r om the DIGITAL OUT te r minal have a sam p ling f r equency of 48 kHz (44.1 kHz fo r audio CDs). 9. If the connec ted HDMI device is not com p atible wi th DTS-HD Maste r Audio o r DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, the sig nals a r e out p ut in linea r PCM (2 channels) o r DTS Digital Su rr ound bitst r ea m. If the connec ted HDMI device is not com p atible with DTS Digital Su rr ound bitst r eam, the signals a r e out p ut in linea r PCM (2 channels). 10. When the out p ut video r esolution is set to 576i/4 80i o r 576 p /480p , the signals may be out p ut in linea r PCM (2 channels) o r DTS Digital Su rr ound, de p ending on HDMI High Speed Tr ansmis sion setting and/o r the connec ted HDMI device. LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 46 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
47 En 06 Language Code Table and Country/Area Code Table ï° Language Code Table Language name, language code, input code ï° Country/Area Code Table Count r y/Ar ea name, Country/Area code, input code Abkhazian, ab/abk, 0102 Afa r , aa/aar, 0101 Af r ikaans, af/afr, 0106 Albanian, sq/sqi, 1917 Amha r ic, am/amh, 0113 A r abic, ar/ara, 01 18 A r menian, hy/hye, 0825 Assamese, as/asm, 0119 Ayma r a, ay/aym, 0125 Aze r baijani, az/aze, 0126 Bashki r , ba/bak, 0201 Basque, eu/eus, 0521 Bela r usian, be/bel, 0205 Bengali, bn/ben, 0214 Biha r i, bh/bih, 0208 Bislama, bi/bis, 0209 B r eton, br/bre, 02 18 Bulga r ian, bg/bul, 0207 Bu r mese, my/mya, 1325 Catalan, ca/cat, 030 1 Cent r al Khme r , km/kh m, 1113 Chinese, zh/zho, 2608 Co r sican, co/cos, 0315 C r oatian, hr/hrv, 0818 Czech, cs/ces, 0319 Danish, da/dan, 0401 Dutch, nl/nld, 1412 Dzongkha, dz/dzo, 0426 English, en/eng, 0514 Es p er anto, eo/epo, 0515 Estonian, et/est, 052 0 Finnish, fi/fin, 0609 Fijia n, fj /fij, 0610 Fa r oese, fo/fao, 061 5 F r ench, fr/fra , 0618 Galician, gl/glg, 0712 Geo r gian, ka/kat, 1101 Ge r man, de/deu, 0405 G r eek, el/ell, 0512 Gua r ani, gn/grn, 0714 Guja r ati, gu/guj, 0721 Hausa, ha/hau, 0801 Heb r ew, iw/heb, 0923 Hindi, hi/hin, 0809 Hunga r ian, hu/hun, 0821 Icelandic, is/i sl, 0919 Indonesi an, in/ind, 0914 Inte r lingua, ia/ina, 0901 Inte r lingue, ie/ile, 0905 Inu p iaq, ik/ipk, 0911 I r ish, ga/gle, 070 1 Italian, it/ita, 0920 Ja p anese, ja/jpn, 1001 Javanese, jw/jav, 1023 Kalaallisut, kl/kal, 1112 Kannada, kn/kan, 1114 Kashmi r i, ks/kas, 1 119 Kazakh, kk/kaz, 1111 Kinya r wanda, rw/kin, 1823 Ki r ghiz, ky/kir, 112 5 Ko r ean, ko/kor, 1115 Ku r dish, ku/kur, 1121 Lao, lo/lao, 1215 Latin, la/ lat, 1201 Latvia n, lv/lav, 1222 Lingala, ln/lin, 1214 Lithuanian, lt/lit, 1220 Macedonian, mk/mkd, 1311 Malagasy, mg/mlg, 1307 Malay, ms/msa, 1319 Malayalam, ml/mal , 1312 Maltese, mt/m lt, 1320 Mao r i, mi/mri, 1309 Ma r athi, mr/mar, 1318 Mongolian, mn/mon, 1314 Moldavian, mo/mo l, 1315 Nau r u, na/nau, 1401 Ne p ali, ne/nep, 1405 No r wegian, no/nor, 1415 Occitan, oc/oci, 15 03 O r iya, or/ori, 1518 O r omo, om/orm, 15 13 Panjabi, pa/pan, 1601 Pe r sian, fa/fas, 0601 Polish, pl/pol, 1612 Po r tugu ese, pt/por, 1620 Pushto, ps/pus, 1619 Quechua, qu/que, 1721 Romanian, ro/ron, 1815 Romansch, rm/roh, 1813 Rundi, rn/run, 1814 Russian, ru/rus, 1821 Samoan, sm/smo, 1913 Sango, sg/ sag, 1907 Sansk r it, sa/san, 1901 Scottish Gaelic, gd/gla, 0704 Se r bian, sr/srp , 1918 Se r bo-C r oatian, sh/- --, 1908 Shona, sn/sna, 1914 Sindhi, sd/snd, 1904 Sinhalese, si/sin, 190 9 Sl o vak, s k/slk, 1911 Slovenian, sl/slv, 1912 Somali, so/som, 19 15 Sotho, Southe r n, st/sot, 1920 S p anish, es/spa, 0519 Sundanese, su/sun, 1921 Swahili, sw/swa, 1923 Swati, ss/ssw, 1919 Swedish, sv/s we, 1922 Tagalog, tl/tgl, 2012 Tajik, tg/tgk, 2007 Tamil, ta/tam, 2001 Tata r , tt/tat, 202 0 Telugu, te/tel, 2005 Thai, th/tha, 2008 Tibetan, bo/bod, 0215 Tig r inya, ti/tir, 2009 Tonga (Tonga Islands), to/ton, 2015 Tsonga, ts/tso, 2019 Tswana, tn/tsn, 2014 Tu r kmen, tk/tuk, 2011 Tu r kish, tr/tur, 2018 Twi, tw/twi, 2023 Uk r ainian, uk/ukr, 2111 U r du, ur/urd, 2118 Uzbek, uz/uzb, 2126 Vietnamese, vi/vie, 2209 Vola p ük, vo/vol, 2215 Welsh, cy/cym, 032 5 Weste r n F r isian, fy/f ry, 0625 Wolof, wo/wol, 2315 Xhosa, xh/xho, 2408 Yiddish, ji/yid, 1009 Yo r uba, yo/yor, 251 5 Zulu, zu/zul, 2621 Anguilla, ai, 0109 Antigua and Ba r buda, ag, 0107 A r genti na, ar, 0118 A r menia, am, 0113 Aust r alia, au, 0121 Aust r ia, at, 0120 Aze r baijan, az, 0126 Bahamas, bs, 0219 Ba r bados, bb, 0202 Bela r us, by, 0225 Belgium, be, 0205 Belize, bz, 0226 Be r muda, bm, 0213 B r azil, br, 0218 Bulga r ia, bg, 0207 Canada, ca, 0301 Cayman Islands, ky, 1125 Chile, cl, 0312 China, cn, 0314 Colombia, co, 0315 C r oatia, hr, 0818 Cy pr us, cy, 0325 Czech Re p ublic, cz, 0326 Denma r k, dk, 0411 Dominica, dm, 0413 Dominican Re p ublic, do, 0415 Estonia, ee, 0505 Finland, fi, 0609 F r ance, fr, 0618 Geo r gia, ge, 0705 Ge r many, de, 0405 G r eec e, g r, 0718 G r eenland, gl, 0712 G r enada, gd, 0704 Guyana , gy, 0725 Haiti, ht, 0820 Hong Kong, hk, 0811 Hunga r y, hu, 0821 Iceland, is, 0919 India, in, 0914 Indonesi a, id, 0904 I r eland, ie, 0905 Is r ael, il, 0912 Italy, it, 0920 Jamaica, jm, 1013 Ja p an, jp, 1016 Kazakhstan, kz, 1126 Ko r ea, Re p ublic of, kr, 1118 Ky r gyzstan, kg, 1107 Latvia, lv, 1222 Liechtenstein, li, 120 9 Lithuania, lt, 1220 Luxembou r g, l u, 1221 Macedonia, the Fo r mer Yugoslav Re p ublic of, mk, 1311 Malaysia, my, 1325 Malta, mt, 1320 Mexico, mx, 1324 Moldova, Re p ublic of, md, 1304 Monaco, mc, 1303 Montse rr at, ms, 1319 Nethe r lands, nl, 1412 New Zea land, nz, 1426 No r way, no, 1415 Pakistan, pk, 1611 Pe r u, p e , 1605 Phili pp ines, ph, 1608 Poland, pl, 1612 Po r tugal, pt, 1620 Pue r to Rico, pr, 16 18 Romania, ro, 1815 Russian Fede r ation, ru, 1821 Saint Kitts and Nevis, kn, 1 114 Saint Lucia, lc, 1203 Saint Vincent and the G r enadines, vc, 2203 San Ma r ino, sm, 1913 Singa p or e, sg, 1907 Slovakia, sk, 1911 Slovenia, si, 1909 S p ain, es, 0519 Su r iname, sr, 1918 Sweden, se, 1905 Switze r land, ch, 0308 Taiwan, P r ovince of China, tw, 2023 Tajikistan, tj, 2010 Thailand, th, 2008 T r inidad and Tobago, tt, 2020 Tunisia, tn, 2014 Tu r key, tr, 2018 Tu r kmenistan, tm, 2013 Tu r ks and Caicos Islands, tc, 2003 Uk r aine, ua, 2101 United Kingdom, gb, 0702 United States, us, 2119 U r uguay, uy, 2125 Uzbekistan, uz, 2126 Venezuela, ve, 2205 Vi r gin Islands, B r itish, vg, 220 7 LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 47 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
07 48 En Chapter 7 Additional information Licenses The licenses fo r the softwa r e used on this p laye r a r e shown below. ï° libxml2 The MIT License Co p yr ight é <yea r > <co p yr ight holde r s> Pe r mission i s he r eby g r anted, f r ee of cha r ge, to any p er son obtaining a co p y of t his softwa r e and associated documentation fi les (the âÂÂSoftwa r eâÂÂ), to deal in the Softwa r e with out r estr iction, including withou t limitation the r ights t o us e, co p y, modify, me r ge, p ublish, dist r ibute , sublicense, and/o r sell co p ies of the Softwa r e, and to p er mit p er sons to whom the S oftwar e is fur nished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above co p yr ight notice and this p er mission notice shall be included in all co p ies o r substantial p or tions of the Softwa r e. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED âÂÂAS ISâÂÂ, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPR ESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNE SS FOR A PA RTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY C LAIM, DAMAGES OR O THER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR O T HERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEAL INGS IN THE SOFTWARE. ï° OpenSSL The O p enSSL toolkit stays unde r a dual license, i.e. both the conditions of the O p enSSL License and the o r iginal SSLeay license a pp ly to the toolkit. See belo w fo r the actual license te xts. Actually both licenses a r e BSD-style O p en Sou r ce licenses. In case of any license issues r elated to O p en SSL p lease contact o p enssl- co r e@o p enssl.o r g. OpenSSL License Co p yr ight é 199 8-2007 The O p enSSL P r oject. All r ights r eser ved. Redist r ibution and use in sou r ce and bina r y f o r ms , with o r without m odification, a r e p er mitted pr ovided tha t the following conditions a r e met: 1. Redist r ibutions of sou r ce code must r etain the above co p yr ight notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaime r . 2. Redist r ibutions in bina r y fo r m must r e pr oduc e the above co p yr igh t notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaime r in the documentation and/o r othe r mate r ials pr ovided with the dist r ibution. 3. All adve r tising mate r ials m entioning featu r es o r use of this softwa r e must dis p lay the follo w ing acknowledgment: âÂÂThis pr oduct in cludes softwa r e develo p ed by the O p enSSL P r oject f o r us e in the O p enSSL Toolkit. (htt p ://www.o p enssl.o r g/)â 4. The names âÂÂO p enSSL Toolkitâ and âÂÂO p enSSL P r ojectâ must not b e used t o endo r se o r pr omote pr oduct s de r ived f r om this softwa r e without pr io r w r itten p er mission. For wr itten p e r mission , p lease contact o p ens sl-co r e@ o p enssl.o r g. 5. P r oducts de r ived f r om this softwa r e may not be called âÂÂO p enSSLâ no r may âÂÂO p enSSLâ a pp ea r in thei r names without pr io r w r itten p er mission of the O p enSSL P r oject. 6. Redist r ibutions of any fo r m whatsoeve r must r etain the following acknowledgment: âÂÂThis pr oduct includes softwa r e develo p ed by the O p enSS L P r ojec t fo r use in the O p enSSL Toolkit (htt p ://www.o p enssl.o r g/)â THIS SOFTWARE IS P ROVIDED BY THE O p enSSL PROJECT âÂÂAS ISâ AND ANY EXPRESS ED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FO R A PARTICULAR PURPO SE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE O p enSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSE QUENTIAL DAMAGE S (INCLUDING , BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRU PTION) HOWEVER CAUS ED AND ON ANY THEO RY OF LIAB ILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT , STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLI GENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILIT Y OF SUCH DAMAGE. This pr oduct in cludes c r yp togr ap hi c softwa r e w r itte n by E r ic Young (eay@c ry p tsoft.com).Th is pr oduct includes softwa r e w r itten by Tim Hudson (tj h@ c r yp tsoft.com). Original SSLeay License Co p yr ight é 1995-1998 E r ic Y oung (eay@cr yp tsoft.com ) All r ights r ese r ved. This p ackage is an SSL im p lementation w r itten by E r ic Young (eay@c r yp tsof t.com). The im p lementation was w r itten so as to co nfo r m with Netsca p es SSL. This lib r ar y is f r ee fo r comme r cial and non-comme r cial use as long as the following condition s a r e ahea r ed to. The following condi tions a pp ly to all code found i n this dist r ibution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; n ot just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this dist r ibution is cove r ed by the same co p yr ight t e r ms ex ce p t that the holde r is Tim H udson (tjh @c r yp tsof t.com). Co p yr ight r emains Er ic YoungâÂÂs, and as such any Co p yr ight notices in the code a r e not to be r emoved. If this p ackage is used in a pr oduct , E r ic Young should be given att r ibution as the autho r of the p ar ts of the lib r ar y used. This can be in the fo r m of a textual message at pr og r am sta r tu p o r in documentation (online o r textual) pr ovided with th e p ackage. Redist r ibution and use in sou r ce and bina r y fo r ms, with o r without modification, a r e p er m itted pr ovided that the following condi tions a r e met: 1. Redist r ibutions of so u r ce code must r etain the c o p yr igh t n otice, this list of conditions and the following disclaime r . 2. Redist r ibutions in bina r y fo r m mu st r e pr oduce the above co p yr ight notice, this list of conditions and the followin g disclaime r in the do cumentatio n and/o r othe r mate r ials pr ovided with the dist r ibution. 3. All adve r tising mate r ials mentioning featu r es o r use of this sof twa r e must dis p lay the following acknow ledgement : âÂÂThis pr oduct include s c r yp togr ap hic softwa r e w r itten by E r ic Young ( eay@c r yp tsoft.com)â The wo r d âÂÂc r yp togr ap hicâ can be le ft out if the r ouines f r om the lib ra r y being used a r e not c ry p tog ra p hic r el ated :- ). 4. If you include any Windows s p ecific code (o r a de r ivative the r eof) f r om t he a pp s di r ector y (a pp lication code) you must include an acknowledgement: âÂÂThis pr oduct includes softwa r e w r itten by Tim Hudson (tjh@c r yp tsoft.com)â THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG âÂÂAS ISâ AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRAN TIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTI ES OF MERCHANT ABILITY AND FI TNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PUR POSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDI RECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL D AMAGES (INCLUDING, B UT NOT LIMITED T O, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON AN Y THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCL UDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The licence and dist r ibution te r ms fo r any p ublically available ve r sion o r de r ivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code can not sim p ly be co p ied and p ut unde r anothe r dist r ibution licence [including the GNU Public Licenc e.] ï° zlib This softwa re is based in p ar t on zlib see http ://ww w.zlib.net fo r info r mation. ï° FreeTy pe2 The FreeType Project LICENSE 2006-Jan-2 7 Co p yr ight 1996-2002, 20 06 by David Tu r ner , Robe r t Wilhel m, and We r ner Lembe r g Int r oduction The F r eeTy p e P r oject i s dist r ibuted in seve r al a r ch ive p ackages; some of them may co ntain, in addition to the F r eeTy p e font engine, va r ious tools and cont r ib utio ns which r ely on, o r r elate to, the F r eeT y p e P r ojec t. This license a pp lies to all files found in such p ackages, and which do not fall unde r thei r own ex p licit license. The license affects thus the F r eeTyp e font engine , the test pr og r ams, documentation and makefiles, at the ver y leas t. This license was ins p ir ed by th e BSD, A r tistic, and IJG (Inde p end ent JPEG G r ou p ) licenses, w hich all encou r age inclusion a nd use of f r ee softwa re i n comme r c ial and f r eewa r e pr oducts ali ke. As a consequen ce, its main p oints a r e that: â¢W e d o n â t pr om ise that this softwa r e wo r ks. Howeve r , we will be inte r ested in any kind of bu g r ep or ts.(â as isâ dist r ibution) â¢Y o u c a n u s e t h i s s o f t w a r e for whateve r you want, in p ar ts o r full fo r m, without having to p ay u s.(â r oyalty-f r eeâ usage) â¢Y o u m a y n o t pr etend that you w r ote this so ftwa r e. If yo u use it, o r only p ar ts of it, in a pr og r am, you must acknowledge somewhe r e in you r documentation that you have use d the F r eeTyp e code.(âÂÂc r editsâÂÂ) We s p ecifically p er mit and encou r age the inclusion of this softwa r e, with o r with out modifications, in comm e r cial pr oducts. We disclaim all wa rr anties cove r ing The Fr eeTyp e P r oject and assume no liability r elated to The F r eeTyp e P r oject. Finall y, many p eop le asked us fo r a pr efe rr ed fo r m fo r a c r edit/disclaime r to use in com p liance with this licens e. We thus encou r age you to use the followin g text: Po r tions of this softwa r e a r e co p yr ight é <yea r > The F r eeTy p e P r oject (www.f r eety p e.o r g). All r ights r ese r ved. Please r ep lace <yea r > with th e value f r om the F r eeTyp e ve r sion you actually use. Legal Te r ms 0. De f initions Th r oughout this license, the ter ms â p ackageâÂÂ, âÂÂF r eeTy p e P r ojectâÂÂ, and âÂÂF r eeTy p e a r chiveâ r efer to the set of files o r iginally dist r ibuted by the autho r s (Da vid Tu r ne r , Robe r t Wilhel m, and We r ner Lembe r g) as the âÂÂF r eeTyp e P r ojectâÂÂ, be th ey named as a l p ha, beta o r final r elease. âÂÂYouâ r efe r s to the lice nsee, o r p er son using the pr oject, whe r e âÂÂusingâ is a gene r ic te r m including com p iling the pr ojectâÂÂs sou r ce code as well as linking it to for m a â pr og r amâ o r âÂÂexecutable âÂÂ. This pr og r am is r efe rr ed t o as âÂÂa pr og r am using the F r eeT yp e engineâÂÂ. This license a pp lies to all files dist r ibuted in the o r iginal F r eeTy p e P r oject, incl uding all sou r ce code, bin a r ies a nd document ation, unles s othe r wise stated in the file in its o r iginal, unmodified fo r m as dist r ibuted in the o r iginal a r chive. If you a r e unsur e wheth er or not a p ar ticular file is cove r ed by this license, you must conta ct us to ve r ify this. The F r eeTyp e P r oject is co p yr ight (C) 1996 -2000 by David Tu r ne r , Robe r t Wilhelm, and We r ne r Lembe r g. All r ights r eser ved excep t a s sp ecified below. 1. No Wa rr anty THE FREETYPE PROJECT IS PROVIDED âÂÂAS ISâ W I THOUT W ARRAN TY OF AN Y KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIE D, INCLU DING, BU T NOT LIMIT ED TO, WARRANT IES OF MERCHA NTABILITY AN D FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE, OF THE FREETYPE PROJECT. 2. Redist r ibution This license g r ants a wo r ldwide, r oyalty-fr ee, p e rp etual and i rr evoca ble r ight and license to use, execute, p er for m, comp ile , disp lay, cop y, cr eate der ivative wor ks of, dist r ibute and sublicense the F r ee Ty p e P r oject (in both sou r ce and obje ct code fo r ms) and de r ivative wo r ks the r eof fo r any p u rp ose; an d to autho r ize othe r s to exe r cise some o r all of the r igh ts g r anted he r ein, sub ject to the following c onditions: â¢R e d i s t r ibution of sour ce code mu st r etain this license file (âÂÂFTL.T XTâÂÂ) una lte r ed; any additions, deletions o r changes to the o r igin al files must be clea r ly indicated in accom p anying documentati on. The co p yr ight notices of th e unalte r ed, o r iginal files must be pr ese r ved in all cop ies of sour ce fi les. â¢R e d i s t r ibution in binar y for m must pr ovide a disclaime r that states that the softwa r e is based in p ar t of the wo r k of the F r ee Ty p e Team, in the dist r ibution documentati on. We also encou r age you to p ut an URL to the F r eeTyp e web p age in you r documenta tion, though thi s isnâÂÂt mandato r y. These conditions a pp ly to any softwa r e de r ived f r om o r based on the F r eeTyp e P r oject, not just the unmodified files. If you use ou r wo r k, you must acknowledge us. Howeve r , no fee need be p aid to us. 3. Adve r tising Neithe r th e F r ee Ty p e autho r s and cont r ibuto r s no r you shall use the nam e of the othe r fo r comme r cial, adve r tising, o r pr omotional p u rp oses without s p ec ific pr io r wr itten p er mission. We suggest, but do not r equir e, th at you use one o r mo r e of the following p hr ases to r efer to t his softwar e in your document ation o r adve r tising mat e r ials: âÂÂF r eeTyp e P r ojectâÂÂ, âÂÂF r eeT y p e EngineâÂÂ, âÂÂF reeTy p e lib r ar yâÂÂ, o r âÂÂF r eeTy p e Dist r ibutionâÂÂ. As you have n ot signed this license, you a r e n o t r equir ed to acce p t it. Ho weve r , as the F r eeTyp e P r oject is LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 48 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
49 En 07 co p yr ighted mate r ial, only this license, o r anot he r one cont r acted with the autho r s, g r ants you the r ight to use, dist r ibute, and modify it. The r ef o r e, by using, dist r ibuting, o r modifyin g the F r eeTy p e P r oject , you indicate t hat you unde r stand and acce p t all the te r ms of this license. 4. Contacts The r e a r e two mailing lists r elated t o F r eeTyp e: â¢f r eetyp e@no ngnu.o r g Discusses gene r al u se and a pp lications of Fr eeTyp e, as well as futu r e and wanted additions to the lib r ar y and dist r ibutio n. If you a r e looking fo r su pp o r t, s ta r t in this list if you havenâÂÂt f ound anything to hel p you in the documentation. â¢f r eetyp e -devel@nong nu.o r g D iscusses bugs, as well as engine inte r nals, design issues, s p ecific licenses, p or ting, etc. Ou r home p age can be found at htt p ://www .f r eety p e.o r g ï° libpng COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DIS CLAIMER, and LICENSE: If you modify lib p ng you may inse r t additional no tices immediately following this sentence. lib p ng ve r sions 1.2.6, August 15, 2004, th r ough 1.2.26, A pr il 2, 2008, a r e Co p yr ight é 2 004, 2006-2008 Gl enn Rande r s- Peh r son, and a r e dist r ibuted acco r ding to the same disclaime r and license as lib p ng-1.2.5 with the fo llowing individual added to the list of Cont r ibuting Autho r s Cosmin T r uta lib p ng ve r sions 1. 0.7, July 1, 2000, th r ough 1.2.5 - Octobe r 3, 2002, a r e Co p yr ight é 2000-200 2 Glenn Rande r s- Peh r son, and a r e dist r ibuted acco r ding to the same disclaime r and license as lib p ng-1.0.6 with the fo llowing individuals added to the list of Cont r ibuting Autho r s Simon-P ie rr e Ca dieux E r ic S. Raymond Gilles Vollant and with the following additions to the disclaime r : The r e is no wa rr anty against int e r fe r enc e with you r enj oyment of the lib r ar y or against infr ingement. Ther e is no wa rr anty that ou r effo r ts o r the lib r ar y will fulfill any of you r p ar ticular p u rp oses or needs. This libr ar y is pr ovided with all faults, and the enti r e r isk of satisfacto r y quality, p er for mance, acc u r ac y, and effo r t is with the use r . lib p ng ve r sions 0.97 , Janua r y 1998, th r ough 1.0. 6, Mar ch 20, 2000 , a r e Co p yr ight é 1998, 1999 Glenn Rande r s- Peh r son, and a r e dist r ibuted acco r ding to the same disclaime r and license as lib p ng-0.96, with the following in divid uals added to the list of Cont r ibuting Autho r s: Tom Lane Glenn R ande r s-Pehr son Willem van Schaik lib p ng ve r sions 0.89 , June 199 6, th r ough 0.96, May 1997, a r e Co py r ight é 1996, 1997 And r eas Dilger Distr ibuted acco r ding to the same disclaime r an d license as lib p ng- 0.88, with the following indivi duals added to the l ist of Cont r ibuting Autho r s: John Bow le r Kevin B r acey Sam Bu shell Magnu s Holmg r en G r eg Roelofs Tom Tanne r lib p ng ve r sions 0.5, May 1995, th r ough 0.88, Januar y 1996, a r e Co py r ight é 1995, 1996 Gu y E r ic Sch alnat, G r oup 42, Inc. Fo r the p u rp oses of this co p yr ight and license, âÂÂCont r ibuting Autho r sâ is defined as the following set of individuals: And r eas Dilge r Da v e Ma r tindale Guy E r ic Schalnat Paul Schmidt Tim Wegne r The PNG Refe r en ce Lib r ar y is su pp lied âÂÂAS ISâÂÂ. The Cont r ibuting Autho r s and G r ou p 42, Inc. d isc laim a ll wa rr anties, ex pr essed o r im p lied, including, without limitation, the wa rr antie s of me r chantability and of fitness fo r any p u rp ose. The Cont r ibuting Autho r s and G r ou p 42, Inc. assume n o liability fo r di r ect, indi r ect, incidental, s p ecial, exem p la r y, o r consequent ial damage s, which ma y r esult fr om the use of the PNG Refer ence Libr ar y, even if advised of the p ossibility of such damage. Pe r mission is he r eby g r ante d to use, co p y, modify, an d dist r ibute this sou r ce code , o r p or tio ns he r eof , fo r any p u rp ose, with out fee, subject to the following r estr ictions: 1. The o r igin of this sou r ce code must not be mis r e pr esented. 2. Alte r ed ve r sions must be p lainly ma r ked as such and must not be m is r e pr esented as being th e o r iginal sou r ce. 3. This Co p yr ight notice may not b e r emove d o r alte r ed f r om any sou r ce o r alte r ed sou r ce dist r ib uti on. The Cont r ibuting Autho r s and G r oup 42, Inc. s p ecifically p er mit, without fee , and encour a ge the us e of thi s sour ce code as a com p onen t to su pp o r ting the PNG file fo r mat in comme r cial pr oducts. If yo u use this sou r ce code in a pr oduct, a cknowledgment is not r equir ed but would be a ppr eciated. A â p ng_get_cop yr ightâ function is av ailable, fo r convenient use in âÂÂaboutâ boxes and the like: pr intf(âÂÂ%sâÂÂ, p ng_get_cop yr ig ht(NULL));Also , the PNG log o (i n PNG fo r ma t, of cou r se) is su pp lied in the files â p ngba r. p ngâ and â p ngba r .j p g (88x31 ) and â p ngnow.p ngâ (98x31). Lib p ng is OSI Ce r tified O p en Sou r ce So ftwa r e. OSI Ce r tified O p en Sou r ce is a ce r tification ma r k of the O p en Sou r ce Initiative. Glenn Rand e r s-Pehr son glenn rp at use r s.sou r cefo r ge.net 2-A pr -08 ï° libjpg The Inde p endent JPEG G r oup âÂÂs JPEG softwa r e README fo r r elease 6b of 27-Ma r -1998 This dist r ibu tion contains the si xth p ublic r elease of the Inde p endent JPEG G r ou p âÂÂs f r ee JPE G softwa r e. You a r e welcome t o r ed istr ibute this softwa r e and to use it fo r any p u rp ose, subject to the conditio ns under LEGAL ISSUES, below. Se r ious use r s of this softwa r e ( p ar ticula r ly those inco rp o r ating it into la r ge r pr og r ams) should contac t IJG at j p eg-info@uunet.uu.net to be added to ou r ele ct r on ic mailing list. Mailing list membe r s a r e notified of u p dates and have a chance to p ar ticip ate in technical discussions, etc. This softwa r e is t he wo r k of Tom Lane, Phili p Gladstone, J im Bouche r , Lee C r ocke r , Julia n Minguillon, Luis O r ti z, Geo r ge Philli p s, Davide Rossi, Guido Vollbeding, Geâ Weije r s, and othe r membe r s of the Inde p enden t JPEG G r ou p . IJG is not affiliated with the official ISO JPEG standa r ds committee. DOCUMENTATION ROADMAP This file contains the f ollowing sections: OVERVIEW Gene r al desc r ip tion of JPEG and the IJG soft wa r e. LEGAL IS SUES Co p yr ight, l ack of wa rr anty, te r ms of dist r ibution. REFERENCES Whe r e to lea r n mo r e about JPEG . ARCHIV E LOCATIONS Whe r e to find newe r ve r sions of this sof twa r e. RELATED SOFTWAR E Othe r stuff you should get. FILE FORMAT WARS Softwa r e *not* to get. TO DO Plans fo r futu r e IJG r eleases. Othe r documentation files in the dist r i bution a r e: Use r documentation: install.doc How to configu r e an d install the IJG sof twa r e. usage.doc Usage inst r uctions f o r cj p eg, dj p eg, j p egt r an, r dj p gcom, and w rj p gcom. *.1 Unix-style man p ages fo r pr ogr ams (same info as usage.do c). wiza r d.doc Advanced usage inst r uctions fo r JPEG wiza r ds only. change.log Ve r sion-to-ve r sion change highlights. P r og r amm e r and inte r nal doc umentation : libj p eg.doc How to use the JPEG lib r ar y in y ou r own pr og r ams. exam p le.c Sam p le code fo r calling the JPEG lib r ar y. st r uctu r e.doc Ove r view of the JPEG lib r ar yâÂÂs inte r nal st r uctu r e. fil e list.doc Road m a p of IJG fi les. code r ules.doc Coding style r ules --- p lease r ead if you cont r ibute c ode . Please r ead at least the files install.doc and usage.doc. Usefu l info r mation can al so be found in the JPEG FAQ (F r equently A sked Questions) a r ticle. See A RCHIVE LOCATIONS below to find ou t whe r e to obtain the FAQ a r ticle. If you want to un de r stand how the JPEG code wo r ks, w e suggest r eading one o r mo r e of the REFERENCES, th en looking at the documentation files (in r ou ghly the o r der listed) befo r e diving in to the code. OVERVIEW This p ackage contains C softwa r e to i m p lement JPEG image com pr ession and de com pr ession. JPEG ( pr onounced âÂÂjay- p egâÂÂ) is a standa r dized com pr es sion method fo r full-colo r and g r ay-scale images. J PEG is intended fo r com pr essing r eal-wor ld sc en es; line d r awin gs, ca r toons an d othe r non- r eali stic images a r e n ot its st r ong suit. JPEG is lossy, meaning that the out p ut image is n ot exactly identical to the in p ut image. Hence you mu st not use JPEG if you ha ve to have ident ical out p ut bits. How eve r , on ty p ical p hotogr ap hic images, ve r y good co m pr ession levels can be obtained with no visible change, and r emar kably h igh com pr ession leve ls a r e p ossible i f you can tole r ate a low-quality image. Fo r mo r e details, se e the r efer ences, or just e xp er iment with var ious com pr ession settings. This softwa r e im p lements JPEG bas eline, extended- sequential, and pr og r essive com pr ession pr ocesses. P r ovision is made fo r su ppo r ting all va r iants of these pr ocesses, although so me uncommon p ar ameter settings a r enâÂÂt im p lemen ted yet. Fo r legal r e asons, we a r e not dist r ibuting code fo r the a r ithmetic-coding va r iants of JPEG; se e LEGAL ISSUES. We hav e made no pr ovision fo r su pp o r ting the hie ra r chical o r lossless pr ocesses defined in the standa r d. We pr ovide a set of lib r ar y r outines fo r r eading an d w r iting JPEG image files, p lus two sam p le a pp lications âÂÂcj p egâ and âÂÂdj p egâÂÂ, whic h use the lib r ar y to p er fo r m conve r sion between JPEG and some othe r p op ular image file for mats. The lib r ar y is intended to be r eused in oth e r a pp lications. In o r der to su pp o r t file co n ve r sion and viewing softwa r e, we have inclu ded conside r able func tionality b eyond the ba r e JPEG coding/decoding c a p ability; fo r exam p le, the colo r quantization modules a r e not st r ictly p ar t of JPEG decoding, but they a r e ess ential fo r out p ut to colo r ma pp ed file fo r mats o r colo r ma pp ed disp lays. These extr a functions can be com p iled out of th e lib r ar y if not r equir ed fo r a p ar ticular a pp lication. We ha ve also included j p egtr an, a utility fo r lo ssless t r anscoding between diffe r ent JPEG pr ocesses, and â r dj p gcomâ and âÂÂw r jp gcomâÂÂ, two sim p le a pp licat ions fo r in se r ti ng and ext r ac ting textual comments in JFIF files. The em p hasis in designing th is softwa r e has be en on achieving p or tability and flexibility, while also making it fast enough to b e usefu l. In p ar ticular , the softwa r e is not intended to be r ead as a tuto r ial on JPEG. (S ee the REFERENCES secti on fo r int r oductor y mate r ial.) Rathe r , it is intended to be r eliable, p or table, indust r ial-str engt h code. We do not clai m t o have achieved that goal in eve r y as p ect of the softwa r e, but we st r ive fo r it. We welcome the use of t his softwa r e as a com p onen t of comme r cial pr oducts. No r oyalty is r equ ir ed, but we do ask fo r an acknowledgement in pr oduct documen tation, as desc r ibed unde r LEGAL ISSUE S. LEGAL ISSUES In p lain English: 1. We donâÂÂt pr omise that this softwa r e wo r ks. (But if you f i nd any bugs, p lease let us know!) 2. You c an use thi s softwa r e fo r whateve r you want. You donâÂÂt have to p ay us. 3. You may not pr etend that y ou w r ote this softwa r e. If you use it in a pr og r am, you must acknowledge somewhe r e in you r docume ntation tha t youâÂÂve u sed the IJG code. In legalese: The autho r s make NO WARRANTY o r r e pr esentation, either ex pr ess o r im p lied, with r es p ect to this softwa r e, its quality, accu r acy, me r ch antability, o r fitness fo r a pa r ticula r p u rp ose. This soft wa r e is pr ovided âÂÂAS ISâÂÂ, and you, its use r , assume the enti r e r isk as to its quality and accu r acy. This softwa r e is co p yr ight é 1 991-1998, Thomas G. La ne. All Rights Res e r ved exce p t as s p ecified below. Pe r m ission is he r eby g r anted to use, co p y, modif y, and dist r ibute this softwa r e (o r p or tions the r eof) for any p u rp ose, without fee, subject to these conditions: (1)If any p ar t of the sou r ce code f o r th is softwa r e is dist r ibuted, then thi s README file mu st be included, with this co p yr ight and no-wa rr anty notice unalte r ed; and any additions, deletions, o r changes to the o r iginal files must be clea r ly indicated in accom p anying document ation. (2)If only ex ecutable c ode is dist r ibuted, then the accom p anying documentation must state that âÂÂthis softwa r e is based in p ar t on the wo r k of the Inde p en dent JPEG G r oup âÂÂ. (3)Pe r mission fo r use of t hi s sof tw a r e is g r anted only if the use r acce p ts full r es p onsibility fo r an y u ndesi r able conseque nces; the autho r s acce p t NO LIABILITY fo r damages of any kind. These conditions a pp ly to an y softwa r e de r ived f r om o r based on the IJG code, not just to the unmo dified lib r ar y. If you use ou r wo r k, you ought to acknowledge us. Pe r mission is NOT g r anted fo r the use of any IJG autho r âÂÂs name o r com p any name in adve r tising o r p ublicity r elating to this softwa r e o r pr oducts de r ived f r om it. This soft wa r e may be r efe rr ed to only as âÂÂthe Ind e p endent JPEG G r ou p âÂÂs softwa r eâÂÂ. We s p ecific ally p er mit and encou r age the use of this softwa r e as the basis of comme r ci al pr oducts, pr ovided that all wa rr an t y o r liability claims a r e assumed by the pr oduct vendo r . ansi2kn r .c is included in this dist r ibution by p er mission of L. Pete r Deutsc h, sole pr o pr iet o r of its co p yr ight holde r , Aladdin Ente rpr ises of Men lo Pa r k, CA . ansi2kn r .c is NOT cove r ed by the above co p yr ight and conditions, but instead by the usual di st r ibut ion te r ms of the F r ee Softwa r e Foundation; pr inci p ally, that you must include sou r ce code if you r edistr ibute it. (See the file ansi2kn r .c fo r full details.) Howeve r , since ansi2kn r .c is not needed as p ar t of any pr og r am gener ated fr om the IJG code, th is does not limit you mo r e th an the fo r egoing p ar agr ap hs do. Th e Un ix configu r ation sc r ip t âÂÂconfigu r eâ wa s pr oduced with GNU Autoconf. It is co p yr ight by the F r ee Soft wa r e Foundation but is f r eely dist r ibutable. The same holds for its su pp o r ting sc ri p ts (config.gu ess, config.sub, l tconfig, ltmain.sh). Anothe r su pp o rt sc r i p t, install-sh, is co p yr ight by M.I.T. but is also f r eely dis t r ibutable. LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 49 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
07 50 En It a pp ea r s that the a r ithmetic coding o p tion of the JPEG s p ec is cove r ed by p atents owne d by IBM, AT&T, and Mitsubishi . Hence a r ithmetic coding cannot legally be used without o btaining one o r mo r e licenses. Fo r th is r eason , su pp o r t for ar ithmetic codi ng has been r emoved f r om the f r ee JPEG softwa r e. (Since a r ithmetic coding pr ovides o nly a ma r ginal gain over the unp atented Huffman mode, it is unlikely that ve r y many im p lementati ons will su pp o r t it.) So fa r as we a r e awa r e, the r e a r e no p atent r estr ictions on the r emaining c ode. The IJG dist r ibution for mer ly included code to r ead and w r ite GIF files. To avoid entanglement with the Unisys LZW p atent, GIF r ea ding su pp or t has been r em oved altogethe r , and the GIF w r iter has been sim p lified to pr oduce uncom pr essed G IFs. This technique doe s not use the LZW algo r ithm; the r esulting GIF files a r e la r ge r than usual, but a r e r eadable by all standa r d GIF decode r s. We a r e r equir ed to state that âÂÂThe G r ap hics Inte r change Fo r mat(c) is the Co p yr ight pr o pe r ty of Com p uSe r ve Inco rp o r ate d. GIF(sm) is a Se r vice Ma r k pr o pe r ty of Com p uSe r ve I nco rpo r ated.â REFERENCES We highly r ecommend r eading one o r mo r e of these r ef e r en ces befo r e t r ying to unde r stand the inna r ds of the JPEG sof twa r e. The best sho r t technical int r oduction to the JPEG com pr ession algo r ithm is Wallace, G r egor y K. âÂÂThe JPEG Still Pictu r e Com pr ession Standa r dâÂÂ, Communications of the ACM, A pr il 1991 (vol. 34 no. 4), pp . 30-44. (Adjacent a r ticles in that issue discuss MPEG motion p ictur e com pr ession, a pp lications of JPEG, and r elated to p ics.) If you don âÂÂt have the CACM issue handy, a PostSc r ip t file conta ining a r evi sed ve r si on of WallaceâÂÂs a r ticle is available at ft p ://ft p .uu.net/g ra p hics/j p eg/ wallace. p s.gz. The file (actually a pr e pr int fo r an a r ticle that a pp ea r ed in IEEE T r ans. Consume r Elect r onics) omits the sam p le images that a pp ea r ed in C ACM, but it includes co rr ections and some added mate r ial. Note: the Wallace a r ticle is co py r ight ACM and IEEE, and it may not be used fo r comme r cial p u rp oses. A somewhat less technical, mo r e leisu r ely int r oduction to JPEG can be found in The Data Com pr ession Book by Ma r k Nelson and Jean-lou p Gailly, p ublished b y M&T Bo oks (New Yo r k), 2nd e d. 1996, ISBN 1-5585 1-434-1. This book pr ovides good ex p lanations and exam p le C code fo r a multitude of com pr ession methods inclu ding JPEG. It is an excellent sou r ce if yo u a r e comfo r table r eading C code but donâÂÂt know much about data com pr ession in gene r al. The bookâÂÂs JPEG sam p le code is far f r om industr ial-str ength, but when you a r e r eady to look at a full im p lementation, youâÂÂve got one he r e... The best ful l desc r ip tion of JPEG is the textbook âÂÂJPEG Still Image Data Com pr essio n Standa r dâ by William B. Pennebake r and Joan L. Mitchell, p ublished by Van Nost r and Reinhold, 19 93, ISBN 0-442-01272-1. P r ice US$59.95, 63 8 pp . The book includes the com p lete text of the ISO JPEG st anda r ds (DIS 10918-1 and d r aft DIS 10918- 2). This is by fa r the mo st com p lete ex p osition of JPEG in existence, and we highly r ec ommend it. The JPEG standa r d itself is not available el ect r onically; you must o r der a p ap er co p y th r ou gh ISO o r ITU. ( Unless you feel a ne ed to own a ce r tified offic ial co p y, we r ecommend buying the Pennebak e r and Mitchell book instead; itâÂÂs much chea p er and includes a g r eat deal of us eful ex p lanato r y mate r ial.) In the USA, co p ies of the standa r d may be o r der ed f r om ANSI Sales a t (212) 642- 4900, o r fr om Global E nginee r ing Docum ents at (8 00) 854 -7179. (AN SI doesnâÂÂt take c r edit ca r d o r de r s , but Global do es.) ItâÂÂs not chea p : as of 1992, ANSI was cha r ging $95 fo r Par t 1 and $47 fo r Pa r t 2, p lus 7% shi pp ing/handling. The standa r d is divided into two p ar ts, Pa r t 1 being the ac tual s p ecification, while Pa r t 2 cove r s com p liance testing methods. Pa r t 1 is titled âÂÂDigital Com pr ession and Coding of Cont inuous-tone Still Images, Pa r t 1: Requi r em ents and guidel inesâ an d has document numbe r s ISO/IEC IS 10918-1, ITU-T T.81 . Pa r t 2 is titled âÂÂDigital Com pr ession and Coding of Cont inuous-tone Still Images, Pa r t 2: Com p liance testingâ and has document numbe r s ISO/IEC IS 10918-2, ITU-T T.83. Some extens ions to the o r iginal JPEG standa r d a r e defined in JPEG Pa r t 3, a newe r ISO standa r d numbe red ISO/IEC IS 10918-3 and ITU-T T. 84. IJG cu rr ently does not su pp o r t an y Pa r t 3 extensions . The JPEG standa r d do es not s p ecify all details of an inte r c hangeable file fo r ma t. Fo r the omitted details we follow the â JFIFâ conve ntions, r ev ision 1.02. A c o p y of the JFIF s p ec is available f r om: Lite r atu r e De p ar tment C-Cube Mic r osystems, I nc. 1778 McCa r thy Blvd. Mil p itas, CA 95035 p hone (408) 94 4-6300, fax (408) 944-631 4 A Post Sc r ip t ve r sion of this document is available by FTP at ft p ://ft p .uu.net/g r ap hics/j p eg/ jfif. p s.gz. The r e is also a p lain text ve r sion at ft p ://ftp .uu. net/gr ap hic s/jp eg/jfif.txt.gz, but it is missing the figu r es. The TIFF 6.0 file fo r mat s p ecification c an be obtained by FTP f r om ft p ://ft p .sgi.com/g r ap hics/tiff/TIF F6. p s.gz. The JPEG inco rp o r ation scheme foun d in the TIFF 6. 0 s p ec of 3-June- 92 has a numbe r of se r iou s pr oblems. IJG d oes not r ecomm end use of the TI FF 6.0 desi gn (TIFF Co m pr ession tag 6). Instead, we r ecommend the JPEG design pr o p osed by TIFF Tech nical Note #2 (C om pr ession tag 7). Co p ies of this Note can be obtained f r om ft p .sgi.c om o r f r om ft p :// ft p .uu.net/g r ap hics/j p eg/. It is ex p ec ted that the nex t r evision of the TI FF s p ec will r ep lace the 6.0 JPEG design with the NoteâÂÂs de sign. Although IJGâÂÂs own c ode does not su pp o r t TIFF/JPEG , the f r ee libtiff lib ra r y uses ou r lib ra r y to im p lement TIFF/JPEG p er the Note. libtiff is available f r om ft p ://ft p .sgi .com/g r ap hics/tiff/. ARCHIVE LOCATIONS The âÂÂofficialâ a r ch ive site fo r this softwa r e is ft p .uu.net (Inte r net ad d r e ss 192.48.96.9 ). The most r ec ent r elea sed ve r sion can always be found the r e in di r ecto r y g r ap hics/ j p eg. This pa r ticul a r ve r sion will be a r chi ved as ft p :// ft p .uu.net/g r ap hics/j p eg/j p eg sr c.v6 b.tar .gz. If you donâÂÂt have di r ect Int e r net access, UUNETâÂÂs a r ch ives a r e also available via UUCP; contact hel p @uun et.uu.net fo r info r mation o n r et r ieving files that way. Nume r ous I nte r net sites maintain c o p ies of the UUNET files. Howeve r , only ft p .uu.net is gua r anteed to hav e the latest official ve r sion. You can also obtain this softwa r e in DOS-co m p atible âÂÂzi p â a r chive fo r mat f r om the Sim Tel a r ch i ves (ft p :// ft p .simtel.net/ p ub/simtelnet/msdos/g r ap hic s/), o r on Com p uSe r ve in the G r ap hics Su pp or t for um (GO CIS:GRAPHSUP), lib r ar y 12 JPEG Tools. Again, these ve r sions may sometimes l ag behind the ft p .uu.net r ele ase. The JPEG FAQ (F r equently Aske d Questions) a r ticle is a useful s ou rce of gene r al info r mation about JPEG. It is u p dated constantly and the r efo r e is not included in this dist r ibution. The FAQ is p os ted eve r y two weeks to Usen et newsg r ou p s com p .g r ap hics.misc, new s.answe r s, and othe r g r ou p s. It is available on the Wo r ld Wide Web at htt p :/ /www.faqs.o r g/faqs/j p eg-faq/ and othe r news.ans we r s a r chi v e sites, including the official news.answe r s a r chive at r tfm.mit. edu: ft p ://r tfm.mit.edu/ p ub /usenet/ne ws.answer s/ j p eg-faq/. If you do nâÂÂt have Web o r FTP access, send e-mail to mail-se r ver @ r tfm.mit.edu with body send usenet/n ews.answe r s/jp eg-faq/p ar t1 send usenet/n ews.answe r s/jp eg-faq/p ar t2 RELATED SOFTWA RE Nume r ous viewing and image mani p ulation pr og r ams now su pp o r t JPEG. (Quite a few of them use this lib ra r y to do so.) The JPEG FAQ desc r ibed above lists some of the mo r e p op ular fr ee and shar ewa r e viewer s, and tells whe r e to obtain them on Inte r net. If you a r e on a Unix machine, we highly r ecommend Jef Poskanze r âÂÂs f r ee PBMPLUS softwa r e, which pr ov ides many useful o p er ations on PPM-fo r mat imag e files. In p ar ticular , it can conv e r t PPM images to and f r om a wide r ange of othe r fo r mats, thus making cj p eg/djp eg conside r ably mo r e useful. The latest ve r sion is dist r ibuted by the Net PBM g r ou p , and is available f r om nume r ous sites, notably ft p :// wua r chive. wustl. edu/g r ap hics/g r ap hics/ p ackages/ NetPBM/. Unfo r tunate ly PBMPLUS/NET PBM is not nea r ly as p or table as the IJG softwa r e is; you a r e likely to have difficulty m aking it wo r k on any non-Unix machine. A diffe r ent f r ee JPEG im p leme ntation, w r itten by the PVRG g r ou p at Stanfo r d, is available f r om ft p :// ha v efun.stanf o r d.edu/ p ub/j p eg/. This pr og r am is designed fo r r esea r ch and ex p er imentation r athe r th an pr oduction use; it is slowe r , ha r der to use, and less p o r table than the IJG code, but it is ea sie r to r ead and modify. Also, the PVRG code su pp o r ts lossless JPEG, which we do not. (On the othe r hand, i t doesnâÂÂt do pr og r essive JPEG.) FILE FORMA T WARS Some JPEG pr og r ams pr oduce files that a r e not co m p atible with ou r lib r ar y. The r oot of the pr oblem is that the ISO JPEG committee failed to s p ecify a conc r ete f ile fo r mat. Some vendo r s âÂÂfilled in the blanksâ on thei r own, c r eating pr opr ieta r y for ma ts that no one else c ould r ea d. (Fo r exam p le, none of the ea r ly comm e r cial J PEG im p lementations fo r the Macint osh we r e able to exchange com pr essed files.) The file fo r mat we hav e ado p ted is called JFIF (see REFERENCES). T his fo r mat has been ag r eed to by a numbe r of majo r comme r cial JPEG ven do r s, and it has become the de facto standa r d. J FIF is a minimal o r âÂÂlow endâ r e pr esentation. We r ecommend the use of TIFF/JPEG (TIFF r evision 6.0 as m odified by TIFF Techn ical Note #2) fo r âÂÂhigh endâ a pp lications that need to r ec or d a lot of additional data about an image. TIFF/JPEG is fai r ly new and not yet widely su pp o r ted, unfo r tunat ely. The u p coming JPEG Pa r t 3 standa r d defines a file fo r mat called SPIFF. SPIFF is inte r op er able with JFIF, in the sense that most JFIF decode r s should be able to r ead the mo st common va r iant of S PIFF. SPIFF has some technical advantages ove r JFIF, but its majo r claim to fame is sim p ly that it is an official standa r d r ather t han an infor mal one. A t this p oin t it is unclea r whethe r SPIFF will su p er sede JFIF o r whethe r JFIF will r emain t he de-facto standa r d. IJG inten ds to su pp o r t SPIFF once th e standa r d is f r ozen, but we have not decided whethe r it sh ould become ou r default out p ut fo r mat o r not. (In any case, ou r decode r will r emain ca p able of r eading JFIF indefinitely.) Va r ious pr o pr ieta r y file fo r mats inco rp o r ating J PEG com pr ession also exist. We h ave little o r no sym p athy fo r the existence of these fo r mats. Indee d, one of the o r iginal r easons for develop ing thi s fr ee so ftwa r e was to he l p fo r ce conve r gence on common, o p en f o r mat standa r ds fo r JPEG files. DonâÂÂt use a pr o pr iet a r y file fo r mat! TO DO The majo r th r us t fo r v7 w ill pr obably be im pr ovement of visual quality. The cu rr ent method fo r scaling the quantization tables is known n ot to be ve r y good at low Q values. We also intend to investigate block bounda r y smoot hing, â p oor manâÂÂs va r iable quantizationâÂÂ, and o t he r means of im pr oving quality-vs-file-size p er for mance without sac r ificing com p atibility. In futu r e ve r sions, we a r e conside r ing s u pp o r tin g some of the u p coming JPEG Pa r t 3 extensions --- pr inci p ally, va r iable quantization and the SPIFF file fo r mat. As alway s , s p eeding things u p is of g r eat inte r est. Please send bug r ep or ts, offe r s of he l p , et c. to j p eg- info@uune t.uu.net. ï° libupnp Co p yr ight (c) 2000-2003 Intel Co rp o r ation All r ights r ese r ved. Redist r ibution and use in sou r ce and bina r y fo r ms, with or without modification, a r e p er mitted pr ovided that the following conditions a r e met: *R e d i s t r ibutions of sour ce code m ust r etain the above co p yr ight notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaime r . *R e d i s t r ibutions in binar y for m must r e pr oduce the above co p yr ight notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaime r in the documentation and/o r othe r mate r ials pr ovided with the dist r ibution. *N e i t h e r name of Inte l Co rp or ation nor the names of its cont r ibuto r s may be used to endo r se o r pr om ote pr odu cts de r ived f r om this softwa r e with out s p ecific pr io r wr itten p er mission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS âÂÂAS ISâ AND ANY EXPRESS OR IM PLIED WARRANT IES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMI TED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES O F MERCH ANTABILITY AN D FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLA IMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL INTEL OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRE CT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCL UDING, BUT NOT LIMI TED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SER VICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGE NCE OR O THERW ISE) ARI SING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. ï° AVC/H.264 THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLI O LICENSE FOR THE P ERSONAL AND NON- COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (âÂÂAVC VIDEOâÂÂ) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONS UMER ENGAGED IN A PE RSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. No LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE HTTP://MPEGLA.COM. ï° GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Ve r sion 2, June 1991 Co p yr ight é 1989, 1991 F r ee Soft wa r e Fo undation, Inc., 51 F r anklin St r eet, Fi fth Floo r , Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA Eve r yone is p er mitted to co p y and dist r ibute ve r batim co p ies of this license document , but changing it is not allowed. Preamble The licens es fo r most softwa r e a r e designed to take away you r f r eedom to sha r e and c hange it. By cont r ast, the GNU Gene r al Public License is intended to gua r antee you r f r eedom t o sha r e and ch ange f r ee softwa r e - to make su r e the softwa r e is f r ee fo r all its use r s. This Gene r al Public License a pp lies to m ost of the F r ee Softwa r e Foundati onâÂÂs softwa r e and to any othe r pr og r am whose autho r s commit to using it. (Some othe r Fr ee Softwa r e Fo undation softwa r e is cove r ed by the GNU Lesse r Gene r al Public License inste ad.) You ca n a pp ly it to you r pr ogr ams, too. When we s p eak of f r ee softwa r e, we a r e r efe rr ing to f r eedom, not pr ice. Ou r Gene r al Public L icenses a r e LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 50 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
51 En 07 designed to make su r e that you have the f r ee dom to dist r ibute co p ies of f r ee soft wa r e (and cha r ge fo r this se r vice if you wish) , that you r eceive sou r ce code o r can get it if you want it, that you can change the softw a r e o r use p ieces of it in new fr ee pr ogr ams; and that you know you can do these things. To pr otect you r r ights, we need to make r es t r ict ions that fo r bid anyone to deny you these r ights or to ask you to su rr ende r the r ight s. Th ese r estr ictions t r anslate to ce r tain r esp onsibilities for you if yo u dist r ib ute co p ies of the softwa r e, o r if you modify it. Fo r exam p le, if you dist r ibute co p ies of such a pr og r am, whethe r g r atis o r fo r a f ee, you must give the r ecip ients all the r ig hts that you have. You must ma ke su r e that they, too, r eceive or can get the sour ce code. And y ou must show them the se te r ms so they know thei r r ights. We pr otect you r r ights with two ste p s: (1) co p yr ight the softwa r e, and (2) offe r you this license which gives you legal p er mission to cop y, distr ibute and/or modify the softwar e. Also, fo r each autho r âÂÂs pr otection and ou r s, we want to make ce r tain that ev er yone und e r stands that the r e is no wa rr anty fo r this f r ee soft wa r e. If the s oftwa r e is modified by someone else and p assed on, we want its r ecip ie nts t o know that w hat they have is n ot the o r iginal, so that any pr oblems int r odu c ed by othe r s will n ot r eflect o n the o r iginal autho r sâ re p utations . Finally, any f r ee pr ogr am is th r eatened co nstantly by softwa r e p atents. We wish to avoid the dang e r that r edistr ibutor s of a fr ee pr ogr am will individually obtain p atent licenses, in effect making the pr ogr am pr o pr ietar y. To pr event this, we have made it clea r th at any p atent must be licensed fo r ever yon eâÂÂs fr ee use or not licensed at all. The pr ecise t e r ms and conditions fo r co p ying, dist r ibution and modification follow. TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0. This License a pp lies to any pr og r am o r oth e r wo r k which contains a noti ce p laced by the co p yr ig ht ho lde r sa ying it may be dist r ibuted unde r the te r ms of this Gene r al Public License. The âÂÂP r ogr amâÂÂ, below, r efer s to any such pr og r am or wor k, an d a âÂÂwor k based on the Pr ogr amâ means eithe r the P r ogr am o r any de r ivative wo r k unde r co p yr ight law: that is to say, a w o r k containing the P r og r am o r a po r tion of it, eithe r ve r batim o r with modifications and/o r tr a nslated into anothe r language. (He r einafte r , t r anslation is included without limitation in the te r m âÂÂmodificationâÂÂ.) Each licensee is add r essed as âÂÂyouâÂÂ. Activities othe r than co p ying, dis t r ibu t ion and modification a r e not cove r ed by this License; they a r e outside its sco p e. The act of r unn ing the P r ogr am is not r estr icted, and the outp ut f r om the P r ogr am is cover ed only if its conten ts constitute a w o r k based on the P r og r am (inde p endent of having been made by r unning the P r ogr am) . Whethe r that is t r ue de p ends on what the P r og r am does. 1. You may co p y and dist r ibute v e r batim co p ies o f the P r og r amâÂÂs sou r ce code as you r eceive it, in any medium , pr ovided tha t you cons p ic uously a nd appr opr iat ely p ublish on each cop y an a ppr o pr iate cop yr ight noti ce and disclaime r of wa rr an ty; kee p i ntact all the notices that r efe r to this License and t o the absence of any wa rr anty; and give any othe r r eci p ients of the P r og r am a co p y of this License alo ng with the P r og r am. You may cha r ge a fee for the p hysical act of tr ansfe rr ing a co p y, and you m ay at you r op tion offe r wa rr anty pr otection in excha nge fo r a fee. 2. You may modify you r co p y o r co p ies of th e P r ogr am o r any p or tion of it, t hus fo r ming a wo r k based on the P r og r am, an d co p y and dist r ibute such modification s o r wo r k unde r the te r ms of Section 1 above, pr ovided that you also meet all of th ese conditions: a) You must cause the modified files to ca rr y pr omin en t notices stating that you chan ged the files and the date of any change. b) You must cause any wo r k that you dist r ibute o r p ublish, that in whole or in p ar t contain s o r is de r ived f r om the P r og r am o r any pa r t the r eof, to be licensed as a whole at no cha r ge to all thi r d p a r ties und e r the te r ms of thi s License. c) If the modified pr og r am no r mally r eads comma nds inte r actively when r un , you mu st cause i t, when sta r ted r unni ng fo r such inte r active use in the most o r dina r y way, to pr int o r dis p lay an announcement including an a ppr opriate co p yr ight notice and a notice that the r e is no wa rr an ty (o r else , saying that you pr ovide a wa rr anty) and that use r s may r edi str ibute the pr og r am under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a co p y of this Li cense. (Exce p tion: if the P r og r am itself is inte r active but does not no r mally pr int such an anno uncement, you r wo r k based on the P r og r am is not r equi r ed to pr int an announcem ent.) These r equi r ements a pp ly to the modified w or k as a whole. If identifiable sections of that wo r k a r e not de r ived f r om the P r og r am, and can be r easonably conside r ed inde p endent and se p ar ate wo r ks in themselves, then this License, and its te r ms, do no t a pp ly to those sections when you dist r ibute them as se p ar at e wo r ks. Bu t when you dist r ibute the same sect ions as p ar t of a whole wh ich is a wo r k based on the P r ogr am, the dist r ibution of the whole must be on the te r ms of this License, whos e p er missions for other licensees extend to th e entir e whole, and thus to eac h and eve r y p ar t r egar dless of who w r ote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim r ights o r contest yo u r r ights to wor k wr itte n enti r ely by you; r ather , the intent is to exe r cise the r ight to co nt r ol the dist r ibution of de r ivative o r collec tive wo r ks based on the P r og r am. In addition, me r e agg r egation of an othe r wo r k not based on the P r ogr am with the P r ogr am ( o r with a wo r k based on the P r ogr am) on a volume of a sto r age o r dist r ibution medium does not b r ing the othe r wo r k unde r the sco p e of this L icense. 3. You may co p y and dist r ibute the P r ogr am (o r a wo r k based on it, unde r Sect ion 2) in object code o r executable fo r m unde r the te r ms of Sections 1 and 2 above pr ovi ded that you also do one of the following: a) A ccom p any it with th e com p lete co rr es p onding machine- r eadabl e sour ce code, which mu st be dist r ibuted und e r the te r ms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customa r ily used fo r softwa r e inte r change; o r , b) Accom p any it with a w r itten o ffe r , valid fo r at least th r ee yea r s, to give any thi r d p ar ty, fo r a cha r ge no mo r e than you r cost of p hysica lly p er for ming sou r ce dist r ibution, a com p lete machine- r eadable co p y o f the co rr es p ond ing sou r ce code, to be dist r ibuted unde r the te r ms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customa r ily used fo r softwa r e inte r change; o r , c) Accom p any it with the info r mation you r eceived as to the offe r to dist r ibute co rr es p onding sou r ce c ode. (This alt e r native is a llowed only fo r noncomme r cial dist r ibution and on ly if you r eceived the pr og r am in object code o r executable fo r m with such an o ffe r , i n acco r d with Subsection b above.) The sou r ce code fo r a wo r k means the pr efe rr ed fo r m of the wo r k fo r making modifica tions to it. Fo r an executable wo r k, com p lete sou r ce code m eans all the sou r ce co de fo r all modules it contains, p lus any associated inte r face definition files, p lus the sc r ip ts used to co nt r ol com p ilation and installation of the executable. Howeve r , as a s p ecial exce p tio n, the sou r ce code dist r ibut ed need not inclu de anything that is no r mally distr ibuted (in eithe r sou r ce o r bina r y fo r m) with the majo r com p onents (com p ile r , ke r nel, and so on) of the o p er ati ng syste m on which the executable r uns, unless that com p onent it self ac com p anie s the executable. If dist r ibution of ex ecutab le o r object code is made by offe r ing access to co p y f r om a designated p lace, then offe r ing equivalent access to co p y th e sou r ce code f r om the same p l a c e c o u n t s a s d i s t r ibution of the sou r ce code , even thoug h thi r d p ar ties a r e not com p elled to co p y the sou r ce along wi th the obje ct code. 4. You may not co p y, mod ify, sublicense, o r dist r ibute the P r og r am exce p t as ex pr essly pr ovided unde r this License. Any attem p t othe r wise to co p y, mo dify, sublicense o r dist r ibute the P r ogr am is void, and will automatically te r min ate you r r i ghts unde r th is License. Howeve r , p ar ties who ha ve r ec eiv ed co p ies, o r r ights, f r om you unde r this License will not have thei r licenses te r minated so long as such p ar ties r emain in full com p lia nce. 5. You a r e not r equ i r ed to acce p t this License , since you have not sig ned it. Howeve r , nothing else g r an ts you p er mission t o modify or distr ibute the Pr ogr am o r its de r ivative wo r ks. These act ions a r e pr ohibited by law if you do not acce p t th is License. The r efo r e, by modifyin g o r dist r ibuting the P r og r am (o r any wo r k based on the P r og r am), you indica te you r acce p tan ce of this License to do so, a nd all its te r ms and conditions fo r cop yin g, dist r ibu ting o r modifying the P r ogr am o r wo r ks ba sed on it. 6. Each time you r edistr ibu te the P r ogr am (or any wo r k based on the P r ogr am), the r ecip ient automatically r eceives a license fr om t he o r iginal licenso r to co p y, dist r ibute o r modify the P r ogr am subject to these te r ms and conditions. You may not im p ose an y fu r ther r estr ictions on the r eci p ientsâ exer cis e of the r ights g r anted he r ein. You a r e not r esp onsible fo r enfo r cing com p liance by thi r d p ar ties to thi s License. 7. If, as a cons equence of a cou r t ju dgment o r allegation of p atent infr ingement or for any other r ea son (no t limit ed to p atent issues), c onditions a r e im p osed on you (whethe r by cou r t o r de r , ag r eement o r othe r wise) that cont r adict the conditions of th is License, they do not excuse you f r o m the condi tions of th is License. If you cannot d ist r ibute so as to satisfy simu ltaneously you r obligations unde r this License and any othe r p er tinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not dist r ibute the P r og r am at all. Fo r exam p le, if a p atent license w ould not p er mit r oyalty-fr ee r ed istr ibu tion o f the P r og r am by all those who r eceive co p ies di r ectly or indi r e ctly th r o ugh you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to r efr ain enti r ely f r om dist r ibution of the P r og r am. If any p or t ion of this section is held invalid o r unenfo r ce able unde r any p ar ticula r ci r cumstance, th e balance of the section is intended to a pp ly and the section as a whole is intended to a pp ly in othe r ci r cumstances. It is not the p u rp ose of this section to induce you to inf r inge any p atents o r othe r pr op er ty r ight claims o r to contest validity of any such c laim s; this section has the sole p u rp ose of pr otecting the integ r ity of the f r ee softwa r e dist r ibution system, which is im p lemented by p ublic license pr actices. Many p eop le have made gene r ou s cont r ibu tions to the wide r ange of softwa r e dist r ibuted th r o ugh tha t syst em in r eliance on consistent a pp lication of that system; it is u p to the autho r /dono r to decide i f he o r she is willing t o dist r ibute softwa r e th r ough any othe r system and a licensee cannot im p ose that choice. This section is intended to make tho r oughly clea r wh at is believed to be a consequence of the r est o f this License. 8. If the dist r ibution and/o r use of the P r og r am is r est r icted in ce r tain count r ies eithe r by p aten ts o r by co p yr ighted inte r faces, the o r iginal co p yr ight ho lde r who p laces the P r og r am unde r this License may add an ex p licit geog r ap hical dis t r ibu t ion limitation excluding those count r ies, so that dist r ibution is p er mitted only in o r among count r ies not thus exclu ded. In such case, this License inco rp o r ates the limitation as if w r itten in the body of this License. 9. The F r ee Softwar e Foundation may p ublish r evised and/ o r new ve r sions of the Gene r al Public License fr om time to time. Such new ve r sions will be simila r in s p ir it to the pr esent ve r sion, but may differ in detail to addr ess new pr oblems o r concer ns. Each ve r sion is given a distinguishing ve r sio n numbe r . If the P r ogr am s p ecifies a ve r sion numbe r of this Lice nse which a pp lies to it and âÂÂany late r ve r sionâÂÂ, you ha ve the o p tion of following t he te r ms and conditions eithe r of that ve r sio n o r of any late r ve r sion p ublished by the F r ee Softwa r e Foundation. If the P r ogr am does not s p ecify a ve r sion numbe r of this Lice nse, you may choose any ve r sion eve r p ublished by the F r ee Softwa r e Foundation. 10.If y ou wish to inco rp o r ate p ar ts of the Pr ogr am into other f r ee pr og r ams whose dist r ibution conditions a r e diffe r ent, w r ite to the autho r to ask fo r p er mission. Fo r softwa r e whic h is co p yr ighted by the F r ee Sof twa r e Foundatio n, w r ite to the F r ee Softwa r e Fou ndation; we someti mes make exce p tions fo r this. Ou r decision will be guided by th e two goals of pr es e r ving the f r ee status of all de r ivatives of ou r f r ee softwa r e and of pr omoting the sha r ing and r euse of softwa r e gene r ally. NO WARRANTY 11.BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR T HE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COP YRIGHT HOLDERS AND/ OR OTHER PARTIES PR OVIDE THE PROGRAM âÂÂAS ISâ WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES O F MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERF ORMANCE OF THE PROGR AM IS WIT H YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY S ERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 12.IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRI TING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERA L, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABIL ITY TO US E THE PROGRAM (INCLUDI NG BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WI TH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs If you deve lo p a n ew pr og r am, and you want it to be of the g r eatest p ossib le use to the p ublic, the best way to achieve this is to make it f r ee softwa r e which eve r yone can r edistr ibute and change unde r thes e te r ms. To do so, attach the following notices to the pr og r am. It is safest to attach them to the sta r t of ea ch sou r ce file to most effective ly convey the exclusion of wa rr anty; and each file LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 51 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
07 52 En should have at least the âÂÂco p y r ightâ line and a p ointer to whe r e the full notice is found. <one line to give the pr og r amâÂÂs name and a b r ief idea of what it does.> Co p yr ight é <yea r > <name of autho r > This pr og r am is fr ee softwar e; yo u can r edistr ibute it and/ o r modify it unde r the te r ms of the GNU Gene r al Public License as p ublishe d by the F r ee Softwa r e Foundation; eithe r ve r sion 2 of the License, o r (at you r o p tion) any late r ve r sion. This pr og r am is dist r ibuted in the ho p e that it will b e useful, but WIT HOUT ANY WARRAN TY; without even the im p lied wa rr anty of MERCHANTABILITY o r FITNESS FO R A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. S ee the GNU Gene r al Public License fo r mo r e details. You should have r eceived a co p y of the GNU Gene r al Public License along with this pr og r am; if n ot, wr ite to the F r ee Softwa r e Found ation, Inc ., 51 F r anklin St r eet, Fifth Floo r , Bost on, MA 02110-1301 USA. Also ad d info r mation on how to c ontact you by e lect r onic and p ap er mail. If the pr og r am is inte r active, make it out p ut a sho r t notice like this when it sta r ts in an in te r active mo de: Gnomovision ve r sion 69, Co p yr ight é yea r name of autho r Gnomovision comes wi th ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; fo r details ty p e âÂÂshow w âÂÂ. This is f r ee softwa r e, and you a r e welcome to r edist r ibute it und e r ce r t ain conditions; ty p e âÂÂshow câ fo r de ta ils. The hy p othet ical commands âÂÂshow wâ and âÂÂshow câ should show the a ppr o pr iate p ar ts of the Gene r al Public License. Of co u r se , the commands you us e may be called some thing othe r than âÂÂshow wâ and âÂÂshow câÂÂ; th ey could even be mouse-c licks o r m enu items - whateve r suits you r pr og r am. You should also get you r em p loyer (if you wo r k as a pr og r ammer ) or your sc hool, if any , to sign a âÂÂc op yr ight disc laim e r â fo r the pr og r am, if necessa r y. He r e is a sam p le; alte r the names: Yoyodyne, I nc., he r eby disclaims all co p yr ight inte r est in the pr og r am âÂÂGnom ovisionâ (whic h makes p asses at com p ile r s) w r itten by Ja mes Hack e r . <signatu r e of Ty Coon>, 1 A pr il 1989 Ty Coon, P r esident of Vic e This Gene r al Publi c License does not p er mit inco rp or ating you r pr og r am in to pr opr ieta r y pr ogr ams. If you r pr ogr am is a sub r outine lib r ar y, you may conside r it mo r e use ful to p er mit linking pr o pr ietar y a pp lications with the libr ar y. If this is what you want to do, use th e GNU Lesse r Gene r al Public License instead of this License. ï° GNU LESSER GENERA L PUBLIC LICENSE Ve r sion 2.1, Fe b r ua r y 1999 Co p yr ight é 1991, 199 9 F r ee Softwa r e Founda tion, Inc. 51 F r anklin St r eet, Fifth Floo r , Boston , MA 02110-1301 USA Eve r yone is p er mitte d to co p y and dist r ibute ve r batim co p ies of this license document, but changing it is not allow ed. [This is the fi r st r eleased ve r sion of the Lesse r GPL. It also counts as the suc cesso r of the GNU Lib r ar y Public License, ve r sion 2, hence the ve r sion numbe r 2.1.] Preamble The licenses fo r most softwa r e a r e designed to take away you r f r eedom to sha r e and change it. By cont r ast, the GNU Gene r al Public Licenses a r e intended t o gua r antee you r f r eedom to sha r e and ch ange f r ee softwa r e - to make sur e the soft wa r e i s f r ee fo r all its use r s. This license , the Lesse r Gene r al Public License, a pp lies to so me s p ecially designated softwa r e p ackages - ty p ically lib r ar ies - of th e F r ee Softwa r e Foun dation and othe r autho r s who decide to use it. You can us e it too, but we su ggest yo u fi r st think ca r efully about whet he r this license o r the o r dinar y Gene r al Public License is the bette r st r ategy to use in any p ar ticular case, based on the ex p lanations be low. When we s p eak of f r ee softw a r e, we a r e r efe rr ing to f r eedom o f use, no t pr ice. Ou r Gene r al Public Licenses a r e designed to make su r e that yo u have the f r eedom to dist r ibute co p ies of f r ee softwa r e (a nd cha r ge fo r this se r vice if you w ish); that you r ec eive so u r ce code o r can get it if you want it; that you can change the softwa r e and use p ieces of it in new fr ee pr og r ams; and that you ar e inf or med that you c an do these things . To pr otect y ou r r ights , we need to m ake r estr ictions that fo r bid dist r ibuto r s to deny yo u these r ights o r to ask you to su rr ende r th ese r ights. These rest r ictions t r an slate to ce r tain r esp onsibilities for you if you distr ibute cop ies of the lib r ar y o r if you modify it. Fo r exam p le, if you dist r ibute co p ies of the lib r ar y, wh ethe r g r atis o r fo r a fee, you mus t give the r ecip ien ts all the r ights that we gav e you. You must make su r e that they, too, r eceive or can get the sour ce code. If you lin k othe r code with the lib r ar y, y ou must pr ovide com p lete object files to the r eci p ients, so that they can r elink them with the lib r ar y afte r making change s to the lib r ar y and r ecomp ilin g it. An d you must show them these te r ms s o t he y k n ow t h e ir r ights. We pr otect y ou r r ights with a two-ste p method: ( 1) we co p yr ight the lib r ar y, and (2) we offe r you t his license, which gives you legal p er mission to co p y, dist r ibute and/o r modify the lib r ar y. To pr ot ect each dist r ibu to r , we want to make it ve r y c lea r that the r e is no wa rr anty fo r the f r ee lib r ar y. Also, if th e lib r ar y is modified by someone else and p assed on, the r ecip ients should know that what they have is not the o r iginal ve r sion, so that the o r iginal autho r âÂÂs r e p utation will not be affect ed by pr oblems that might be int r oduced by othe r s. Finally, softwa r e p atents p ose a constant thr eat to the existence of any f r ee pr ogr am. We wish to make sur e that a com p any cannot effect ively r estr ict the use r s of a f r ee pr og r am by obtaining a r estr ictive license fr om a p atent holde r . The r efo r e , w e i n s i s t t h a t a n y p at ent license obtained fo r a ve r sion of the lib r ar y must be con sistent with the full f r eedom of use s p ecified in this license. Most GNU softwa r e, including some lib r ar ies, is cove r ed by the o r dinar y GNU Gene r al Public License. This license, the GNU Lesse r Gene r al Public License, a pp lies to ce r tain designated lib r ar ies, and is quite diffe r ent f r om the o r dinar y Gene r al Public License. We use this license fo r ce r tain lib r ar ies i n o r de r to p er mit linking those lib r ar ies into non- f r ee pr og r ams. When a pr og r am is linked with a lib r ar y, whet he r statically o r using a sha r ed l ib r ar y, the combination of the two is legally s p eaking a combined wo r k, a de r ivative of the o r iginal lib ra r y. The o r dina r y Ge ne r al Public License the r efo r e p er mits such linking only if the enti re combination fits its c r iter ia of f r eedom. The Lesse r Ge ne r al Public Licens e p er mits mo r e lax c r iter ia fo r linkin g othe r code with t he lib r ar y. We call this license the âÂÂLesse r â Gene r al Public License because it does Less to pr ot ect the use r âÂÂs f r eedom than the o r dina r y Gene r a l P ubl ic L ice nse . It als o pr ovides othe r f r ee softwa r e develo p er s Less of an advantage ove r co m p et ing non-f r ee pr og r ams. The se disadvantages a r e the r eason we use the o r dina r y Gener al Public License for many libr ar ies. Howeve r , the Lesse r license pr ov ides adv antages in ce r tain s p ecial ci r cumsta nces. Fo r exam p le, on r ar e occasions, the r e may be a s p ecia l need to encou r age th e widest p ossible use of a ce r tain lib r ar y, so that it becomes a de-facto standa r d. To ac hieve this, non-f r ee pr ogr ams must be allowed to use the lib r ar y. A mo r e f r equent case is that a f r ee lib r ar y do es the same job as widely used non-f r ee li b r ar ies. In this case, the r e is little to gain by limiting the f r ee lib r ar y to f r ee softwa r e only, so we use the Lesse r Gene r al Public License. In othe r cases, p er m ission to use a p ar ticular lib r ar y in non - f r ee pr og r ams enables a g r eate r numbe r of p eo p le to use a la r ge body of f r ee softw a r e. Fo r exam p le, p er mission to use the GNU C Lib r ar y in non-f r ee pr ogr ams enables many mo r e p eo p le to use the whole GNU o p er ating system, as well as its va r iant, the GN U Linux o p er ating system. Although the Lesse r Gene r al Public License is Less pr otective of the use r sâ f r ee dom, it does ensu r e that the use r of a pr og r am that is linked with the Lib r ar y has the f r eedom and the whe r ewithal to r un that pr og r am using a modified ve r sion of the Lib r ar y. The pr ecise t e rms and conditions fo r co p ying, dis t r ibution and modification follow. Pay close atten tion to the diffe r ence betwe en a âÂÂwo r k based on the lib r ar yâ an d a âÂÂwo r k that uses the lib r ar yâÂÂ. The fo r me r contains code de r ived f r om the lib r ar y, whe r eas the latte r must be combined with the lib r ar y in or der to r un. TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0. This Li cense Ag r eement a pp lies to any softwa r e libr ar y or ot he r pr ogr am which contai ns a notice p laced by the co p yr ight holde r o r othe r autho r ized p ar ty saying it may be dist r ibuted unde r th e te r ms of this Lesse r Gene r al Public License ( also called âÂÂthis LicenseâÂÂ). Each licensee is add r essed as âÂÂyouâÂÂ. A âÂÂlib r ar yâ means a collection of softwa r e functions and/ o r data pre pa r ed so as to be conveniently linked with a pp lication pr og r ams (whic h use some of those functions and data) to fo r m executables. The âÂÂLib r ar yâÂÂ, bel ow, r efer s to any such softwa r e lib r ar y o r wo r k which has bee n dist r ibuted unde r these te r ms. A âÂÂwo r k based on the Lib r ar yâ means ei the r th e L ib r ar y o r any de r ivative wo r k unde r co p yr ight law: that is to say, a wo r k containing the Lib r ar y o r a p or tion o f it, eithe r ve r batim o r with modifications and/o r t r anslated st r aightfo r wa r dly into anothe r langu age. (Her eina fter , t r anslation is inclu ded without limitatio n in the te r m âÂÂmodificationâÂÂ.) âÂÂSou r ce codeâ fo r a wo r k means the pr efe rr ed fo r m of the wo r k fo r making modifications to it. Fo r a lib r a r y, com p lete sou r ce code means all the so u r ce code fo r all modules it co ntains, p lus any associated inte r face definition files, p lu s the sc r ip ts used to cont r ol com p ilation and installation of the lib r ar y. Activities othe r than co p ying, dist r ibut ion and modification a r e not cove r ed by this Licens e; they a r e outside its sco p e. The act o f r unning a pr og r am using the Lib r ar y is not r es t r icted, and out p ut f r om such a pr og r am is cove r ed only if its contents c onstitute a wo r k based on the Lib r ar y (inde p endent of the us e of the Lib r ar y in a tool fo r w r iting it). Whethe r that is tr ue de p end s on what the Lib r ar y does and what the pr og r am that uses t he Lib r ar y does. 1. You may co p y and dist r ibute ve r batim co p ies of the Lib r ar yâÂÂs com p lete sou r ce code as you r eceive it, in any medium, pr ovided that you cons p icuously and a ppro pr iately p ublish on each co p y an a ppro pr iate co p yr ight notice and dis claime r of wa rr anty; kee p in tact all the notices that r efer to this License and to the absence of any wa rr anty; and dist r ibute a co p y of this License along with the Lib r ar y. You may cha r ge a fee fo r the p hysical act of t r ansfe rr ing a co p y, and you may at you r o p tion offer wa rr anty pr otection in exchan ge fo r a fee. 2. You may mo dify you r co p y o r co p ies o f th e Lib r ar y o r an y p or tio n of it, thus fo r ming a wo r k based on the Lib r ar y, and co p y and dist r ibute su ch modificat ions o r wo r k unde r the te r ms of Sec tion 1 above, pr ovided t hat you also meet all of these condit ions: a) The modified wo r k must itself be a softwa r e lib r a r y. b) You m ust caus e the fil es modif ied to ca rr y pr omine nt notices stating that you chan ged the files and the date of any change. c) You must cause the wh ole of the wo r k to be licensed at no cha r ge to all thi r d p ar ties un de r the te r ms of this License. d) If a facility in the modified Lib r ar y r efer s to a functio n o r a table of data to be su pp lied by an a pp lica tion pr og r am that uses the facility, othe r than as an a r gument p assed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effo r t to ensur e that , in the event an a pp lication does n ot su pp ly such function o r t a ble, the fac ility stil l o p er ates, and p e r for ms what eve r p ar t of its p u rp ose r emains meaningful. (For examp le , a function in a lib r ar y to com p ute squa r e r oots has a p u rp ose that is entir ely well-define d indep ende nt of the a pp lication. The r efor e, Subsection 2d r equir es that any a pp lication-su pp lied function o r ta ble used by this function must be o p tional : if the a pp lication does not su pp ly it, the squa r e r oot function must still comp ute squa r e r oots.) These r equi r eme nts a pp ly to the modified wo r k as a whole. If identifiable sections of that wo r k a r e no t de r ived f r om t h e Lib r ar y, and c an be r easonably conside r ed inde p endent and se p ar ate wo r ks in themselves, th en this License, and its te r ms, do not a pp ly to those sections when you dist r ibute them as se p ar ate wo r ks. But when you dist r ibute the same section s as p ar t of a whole w hich is a wo r k based on the Lib r ar y, the dist r ibution of the whole must be on th e te r ms of this License, whose p er missions for other licensees extend to th e entir e whole, and thus to eac h and eve r y p ar t r egar dless of who w r ote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim r ights o r contest y ou r r ights to wo r k w r it ten enti r ely by yo u; r ather , the intent is to exe r cise the r i ght to cont r ol t he dist r ibution of de r ivative o r collective wo r ks based on the Lib r ar y. In addition, me r e agg r egation of an othe r wo r k not based on the Li b r ar y with the Lib r ar y (o r with a wo r k based on the Lib r ar y) on a volum e of a sto r age o r dist r ibution medium does no t b r ing the othe r wo r k unde r the sco p e of this L icense. 3. You may o p t to a pp ly the te r ms of th e o r dinar y GNU Gene r al Public License instead of this License to a given co p y of the Lib r ar y. To do this, you must a lte r all the notices that r efer to this License, so that they r efer to the o r dina r y GNU Gene r a l Pu blic Lic ens e, v er si on 2 , instead o f t o t h i s L i c e n s e . ( I f a n e w e r ve r sio n than ve r sion 2 of the o r dina r y GNU Gene r al Public Lice nse has a pp ea r ed, then you can s p ecify that ve r sio n instead if you wish .) Do not make any othe r change in the se notices. Once this change is made in a given co p y, it is i rr eve r sible fo r that co p y, so the o r dina r y GNU Gene r al Public Licens e a pp lies to all subsequent co p ies and de r ivative wo r ks made f r om that co p y. This o p tion is useful when y ou wish to co p y p ar t of the code o f the Lib r ar y into a pr og r am that is not a lib r ar y. 4. You may co p y and dist r ibute the Lib r ar y (o r a p or tio n or de r iv ative of it, unde r Section 2) in object code o r executable fo r m under the ter ms of Sections 1 and 2 above pr ovided that you accom p any it with the comp lete co rr es p onding mac hine- r eadable sou r ce cod e, which must be dist r ib uted unde r the te r ms of Sec tions 1 and 2 above on a me dium customa r ily used fo r softwa r e inte r change. If dist r ibution of object code is made by offe r ing access to co p y f r om a designated p lace, then offe r ing equiv alent access to co p y the sou r ce code f r om the s ame p lace satisfies the r equir ement to dist r ibute the sou r ce code, even thoug h thi r d p ar ties a r e not com p elled to co p y the sou r ce along wi th the obje ct code. LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 52 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
53 En 07 5. A pr og r am that contains no de r ivative of any p or tion of the Lib r ar y, but is designed to wo r k with the Lib r ar y by being com p iled o r linked with it, is called a âÂÂwo r k th at uses the Lib r ar yâÂÂ. Such a wo r k, in isolation, is not a de r ivative wo r k of the Lib r ar y, and the r efo r e falls outside the sco p e of this License. Howeve r , linking a âÂÂwor k that uses the Libr ar yâ w ith the Lib r ar y c r eates an executable that is a de r ivative of the Lib r ar y (bec ause it contains p or tions of the Li b r ar y), r ather than a âÂÂwor k th at uses the libr ar yâÂÂ. The executable is the r efor e cove r ed by this License. Section 6 states te r ms fo r dis t r ibution of such exec utables . When a âÂÂwo r k that uses the Lib r ar yâ uses mate r ial f r om a heade r file that is p ar t of the Lib r ar y, the object c ode fo r the wo r k may be a de r ivative wo r k of the Lib r ar y even though the sou r ce code is not . Whethe r this is tr ue is es p ecially significant if the w o r k can be linked without the Lib r ar y, o r if the wo r k is itself a lib r ar y. The th r eshold fo r this to be t r ue is not pr ecisely defined by law. If such an object file uses only nume r ic al p a r ameter s, data st r uctur e layouts and accesso r s, and small mac r os and small inline functions (ten li nes o r less in length), then the us e of the object file is un r estr icte d, r egar dle ss of w hethe r it is legally a de r ivative wo r k. (Executables containing this object cod e p lus p or tions of the Lib r ar y will s till f all un de r Sec tion 6.) Othe r wi se, if th e wo r k is a de r ivative of the Lib r ar y, you may dist r ibute the object code fo r the wo r k unde r the te r ms of Sec tion 6. Any executable s containing that wo r k also fall unde r Section 6, whet he r or not they a r e linked di r ectly with the Lib r ar y itself. 6. As an exce p tion to the Sec tions above, yo u may also combine o r link a âÂÂwo r k tha t uses the L ib r ar yâ with the Lib r ar y to pr oduce a wo r k containing p or tions of the Lib r ar y, and dist r ibute that wo r k unde r te r ms of you r cho ice, pr ovided that the te r ms p er mit modificatio n of the wo r k fo r the custome r â s own use and r ever se enginee r ing fo r debugging such modifications. You must giv e pr ominent no tice with each co p y of th e wo r k that the Lib r ar y is used in it and that the Lib r ar y and its use a r e cove r ed by thi s License. You mus t su pp ly a co p y o f t h i s L i c e n s e . I f t h e w o r k du r ing executi on dis p lays co p yr ight notice s, you must include the co p yr ight no tice fo r the Lib r ar y among them, as well as a r efe r ence di r ecting the use r to the co p y of this License. Also , you must do one of these things: a) Accom p any the wo r k wi th the com p lete co rr es p onding machine- r eadable so u r ce code fo r the Lib r ar y including whateve r changes we r e used in th e wo r k (which must be dist r ibuted unde r Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the wo r k is an executable linked with the Lib r ar y, with the co m p lete machine- r eadable âÂÂwo r k that uses the Lib r ar yâÂÂ, as obje ct code and/ o r sou r ce code, so that the use r can mo dify the Lib r a r y and then r elink to pr oduce a modified executable containing the modified Lib r ar y. (It is under stood that the us e r wh o changes the cont ents of definitions files in the Lib r ar y will not necessa r ily be able to r ecomp ile the a pp lication to use the modified definitions .) b) Use a suitable sha r ed lib r ar y mec hanism fo r linking with the Lib r ar y. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at r un time a co p y of the lib r ar y al r ea dy pr ese nt on the use r âÂÂs comp uter system, r ather than cop ying lib r ar y functions in to the executable , and (2) will o pe r ate pro pe r ly w i th a m o di fi ed v e r sion of the lib ra r y, if the use r installs one, as long as the modified ve r sion is inte r face -comp at ible with the ve r sion that the wo r k was made with. c) Accom p any the wo r k with a w r itten offe r , valid fo r at least th r ee yea r s, to give the same use r the mate r ials s p ecified in Subsection 6a, above, fo r a ch a r ge no mo r e than the cost of p er fo r ming this dist r ibution. d) If dist r ibution of the wor k is made by offer ing access to co p y f r o m a designated p lace, offe r equivalent acc ess to co p y the ab ove s p ecified mate r ials f r om the same p lace. e) Ve r ify that the use r ha s al r eady r eceived a co p y of these mate r ials o r t hat you have al r eady sent this us e r a co p y. Fo r an executable, the r eq uir ed for m of the âÂÂwor k that uses the Lib r ar yâ must include any data and util ity pr og r ams needed for r e pr oducing the executable fr om it. Howeve r , as a sp ecial excep tion, the mater ials to be dist r ibuted need no t include anythin g that is no r ma lly dist r ibuted (in eit he r sou r ce o r bina r y fo r m) with the majo r com p on ents (com p iler , ke r nel , and so on) of the o pe r ating system on which the executable r uns, unless that c om p onent itself accom p anies the executable . It may ha pp en that this r equir ement cont r adicts the license r est r ictions of othe r pr o pr ieta r y lib r ar ies that do not no r mally a ccom p any the o p er ating system. Such a cont r adiction means you ca nnot use both th em and the Lib r ar y togethe r in an executable that you dist r ibute. 7. You may p lace lib r ar y facilities that a r e a wo r k based on the Lib r ar y side-by-side in a single lib r ar y togethe r with othe r lib r ar y facilities not cove r ed by this License, and dist r ibute such a combined lib r ar y, pr o v ided that the se p ar ate dist r ibution of the wo r k based on the Lib r ar y and of the othe r lib r ar y facilities is o the r wise p er mitted, and pr ovided that yo u do these two things: a) Accom p any the combined lib r ar y wi th a co p y of the same wo r k based on the Lib r ar y, uncomb ined with any othe r lib r ar y facilities. This must be dist r ibuted unde r the te r ms of the Secti ons abov e. b) Give pr ominent notice w ith the combined lib r ar y of the fact that p ar t of it is a wo r k based on the Lib r ar y, and ex p laining whe r e to find the ac com p anying uncombined f o r m of the s ame wo r k. 8. You may not co p y, modify, sub license, link with, o r dist r ibu te the Lib r ar y e xce p t as ex pr essly pr ovided unde r this License. Any attem p t o the r wise to co p y, m odify, sublicense, link with, o r dist r ibute the Lib r ar y is void, and will automatically te r minate you r r ights unde r this License. Howe ve r , p ar ties who have r eceived co p ies, o r r ights, fr om you under this License will not have their licenses te r minated so long as such p ar tie s r emain in full com p lia nce. 9. You a r e not r equ i r ed to acce p t this License , since you have not sig ned it. Howeve r , nothing else g r an ts you p er mission t o modify or distr ibute the Libr ar y or its de r iv ative wo r ks. These action s a r e pr ohibited by law if you do not acce p t th is License. The r efo r e, by modifyin g o r dist r ibuting the Lib ra r y ( o r any wo r k based on the Lib r ar y), you indicate you r accep tanc e of this Li cense to do so, and all its te r ms and cond itions fo r co p ying, dist r ibuting o r modifying the Li b r ar y o r wo r ks based on it. 10.Each time you r edistr ibute the Lib r ar y (o r any wo r k based on the Li b r ar y), the r ecip ient automatically r eceives a license f r om the o r iginal licenso r to co p y, dist r ibute, link with o r modif y the Lib r ar y subject to these ter ms and c o nditions. You may not im p ose any fu r th e r r est r ictions on the r ecip ientsâ exe r cise of the r ights g r anted he r ein. You a r e not r esp onsible fo r enfo r cing com p liance by thi r d p ar ties with this License. 11.If, as a cons equence of a cou r t judgment o r allegation of p atent infr ingement or for any other r ea son (no t limit ed to p atent issues), c onditions a r e im p osed on you (whethe r by cou r t o r de r , ag r eement o r othe r wise) that cont r adict the conditions of th is License, they do not excuse you f r o m the condi tions of th is License. If you cannot d ist r ibute so as to satisfy simu ltaneously you r obligations unde r this License and any othe r p er ti nent obl igations, t hen as a consequence you may no t dist r ibute the Lib r ar y at all. Fo r exam p le, if a p atent license wo uld not p er mit r o yalty-fr ee r edistr ibution of the Lib r ar y by all those who r eceive co p ies di r ectly o r indi r ectly th r ough yo u, then the o nly way you c ould satisfy both it and this License would be to r efr ain enti r ely f r om dist r ibution of the Lib ra r y. If any po r tion of this section is held invalid o r un enfo r ceabl e unde r any p ar ticular cir cumsta nce, the bala nce of the sectio n is intended to a pp ly, and the section as a whole is intended to a pp ly in othe r ci r cum stances. It is not the p u rp ose of this section to induce you to inf r inge any p aten ts o r ot he r pr op er ty r ight claims o r to contest vali dity of any such claim s; this se ction has th e sole p u rp ose of pr otecting the inte g r ity of the f r ee softwa r e dist r ibution system which is im p lemented by p ublic license pr actices. Many p eop le have made gene r ous cont r ibutions to the wide r ange of softwa r e dist r ibuted th r ough that system in r eliance o n consistent a pp lication of that system; it is u p to t he autho r dono r to decide if he o r she is willing to dist r ibute softwa r e th r ough any othe r system and a li censee cannot im p ose that choice . This section is intended to m ake tho r oughly clea r what is believed to be a consequence of the r est of t his License. 12.If the dist r ib ution and/o r use of the Lib r ar y is r estr ic ted in ce r tain coun t r ies eithe r by p atents o r by co p yr ighted inte r faces, the o r iginal co p yr ight holde r who p laces the Lib r ar y unde r this License may add an ex p licit geog r ap hical dist r ibution limitat ion excluding those count r ies, so that dist r ibution is p er mitted only in o r among count r ies n ot thus excluded. In such ca se, this License i nco rp o r ates the limitation as if w r itten in the body of th is License. 13.The F r ee Soft wa r e Foundation may p ublish r evised and/ o r new ve r sions of the Lesse r Ge ne r al Public Licens e f r om time to time. Such new ve r sions will be simila r in s pi r it to the pr esent ve r sio n, but may diffe r in detail to add r ess new pr oblems o r conce r ns. Each ve r sion is given a distinguishing ve r sion numbe r . If the Lib r ar y s p ecifies a ve r sion numbe r of this Licens e which a pp lies to it and âÂÂany late r ve r sionâ , you have the o p tion of following the te r ms and conditions eithe r of that ve r sion o r of any late r ve r sion p ublished by t he F r ee Softwa r e Found ation. If the Lib r a r y does not s p ecify a license ve r sion numb e r , yo u may choose any ve r sion eve r p ublished by the Fr ee Softwar e Fo undation . 14.If you w ish to inco rp o r ate pa r ts of th e Lib r ar y into othe r f r ee pr og r am s whose dist r i bution c onditions a r e incom p atible with these, w r ite to the autho r to ask fo r p er mission. For softwar e which is cop yr ighted by the F r ee Softwa r e Fo undation, w r ite to the F r ee Softw a r e Foundation; we sometimes make e xce p tions fo r this. Ou r decision will be gui ded by the two goals of pr ese r ving the f r ee status of all de r ivatives of ou r f r ee softwa r e and of pr omoti ng the sha r ing and r euse of softwar e gener ally. NO WARRANTY 15.BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PE RMITTED BY APPLICABL E LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVID E THE L IBRAR Y âÂÂAS I Sâ WITHO UT W ARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMI TED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES O F MERCHA NTABILITY AN D FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. T H E ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY P ROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 16.IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRI TING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMI TTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAG ES, INCLUDING ANY GENER AL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUEN TIAL DAMAGES ARISIN G OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DA TA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOS SES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE) , EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries If you deve lo p a n ew lib r ar y, and you wan t it to be of the g r eat est p ossi ble use to the p ublic, we r ecommend making it f r ee softwa r e that eve r yo ne can r ed istr ibute and change. You can do so by p er mitting r edis tr ibutio n unde r these te r ms (o r , alter natively, unde r the te r ms of the o r dinar y Gene r al Public License). To a pp ly these te r ms, attach the following notices to th e lib r ar y. It is safest to attach them to the sta r t of each sou r ce file to most effectively convey t he exclusion of wa rr anty; and each file should have at least the âÂÂco p yr ightâ line and a p ointe r to wher e the full notice is found. <one line to giv e the lib r ar yâÂÂs n ame and a b r ief idea of what it does.> Co p yr ight é <yea r > <name of autho r > This lib r ar y is f r ee softwa r e; y ou can r edistr ibute it and/o r modify it unde r the te r ms of the GNU Lesse r Gene r al Public License as p ublishe d by the F r ee Sof twa r e Founda tion; eithe r ve r sion 2.1 of the License, o r (at you r o p tion) any late r ve r sion. This lib r ar y is dist r ibuted in the ho pe that it will be useful, but WI THOUT A NY WAR RANTY; w ithout e ven the i m p lie d wa rr anty of MERCHANTABILITY o r FITN ESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesse r Gene r al Public License fo r mo r e deta ils. You should have r eceived a co p y of the GNU Lesse r Gener al Public License along with this lib r ar y; if not, w r ite to th e F r ee Softwa r e Fou ndation, Inc., 51 F r anklin St r eet, Fifth Floo r , Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA Also add info r mation on how to contact you by elect r onic and p ap er mail. You should als o get you r em p loyer (if y ou wo r k as a pr og r ammer ) or your school, if any, to sign a âÂÂcop yr ight disclaime r â fo r the lib r ar y, if necessa r y. He r e is a sam p le; alte r the names: Yoyodyne , Inc., he r eby disclaims all co p yr ight inte r est in the lib r ar y âÂÂF r obâ (a lib r ar y fo r tweaking knobs) w r itten by James Random Hacke r . <signatu r e of Ty Coon>, 1 A pr il 1990 Ty Coon, P r esident o f Vice ThatâÂÂs all the r e is to it! ï° [Notice on GNU Gen eral Public License] This pr oduct include the softwa r e licensed fo r use unde r the te r ms of a GNU Gene r al Public License. A co p y of the co rr es p ond ing sou r ce code can be obtaine d by being cha r ged the fee fo r di st r ibution. To obtain a c o p y, contact y ou r loca l Pionee r Custom e r Su pp o r t Cente r. See the GNU website ( htt p ://w ww.gnu.or g) fo r details of the GNU Gene r al Public License. LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 53 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
07 54 En Cautions on use Moving the player If you need to move this unit, fi r st r emove the disc if the r eâÂÂs one loaded, and close the disc t r ay. Next, pr ess ïµ STANDBY/ON to switch the p ower to standby, checking th at the POWER OFF indication on the f r ont p anel disp la y goes off. Wait at least 10 seconds. Lastly, disconnect the p ower co r d. Neve r lift o r move the unit du r ing p layback â discs r otate at a high s p eed and may be damaged. Place of installation Select a stable p lace nea r the TV and AV system to which the unit is connected. Do not p lace the p layer on to p of a TV o r colo r monito r . Kee p it away f r om cassette de cks o r othe r com p onents easily affected by magnetism. Avoid the following ty p es of p laces : â¢P l a c e s e x p osed to dir ec t sunlight â¢H u m i d o r p oor ly ventilated p laces â¢E x t r emely hot o r cold p lac es ⢠Places subject to vib r ation â¢D u s t y p laces â¢P l a c e s e x p osed to soo t, steam o r heat (in kitchens, etc.) ï° Do not place objects on top Do not p lace obj ects on to p of th e p layer . ï° Do not obstruct the ventilation holes Do not use the p layer on a shaggy r ug, bed, o r sofa, and do not cove r the p layer with a c loth, etc. D oing so will pr event heat dissi p ation an d could lead to dama ge. ï° Keep away from heat Do not p lace the p layer on to p of an amp lifie r or othe r device gene r ating heat. When inst alling in a r ack, to avoid the heat gene r ated by the am p lifier and othe r devices, p lace it o n a shelf below th e amp lifier whenever p ossible. Turn the power off when not using the player De p ending on the conditions of the TV b r oa dcast signals, st r ip ed p atter ns may a pp ear on the scr een when the TV is tu r ned on while the p laye r âÂÂs p ower is tur ned on. This is not a malfu nction with the p layer or TV. If this ha pp ens, tu r n the p laye r âÂÂs p owe r off. In the same way, noise ma y be hea r d in the sound of a r adio. Condensation If the p layer is moved suddenly f r om a cold p lace into a wa r m r oom (in winte r , fo r exam p le) o r if th e tem p er atu r e in the r oom in which the p layer is installed r ises suddenly due to a heate r , etc., wate r d r op lets (condensation) may fo r m insi de (on o p er ating p ar ts and the lens). When condensation is pr esent, the p la yer will not o p er ate pr o pe r ly and p layba ck is not p ossibl e. Let th e p laye r stand at r oom tem p eratu r e fo r 1 o r 2 hou r s with the p owe r tu r ned on (t he t ime de p ends on the extent of condensation). The wate r dr op lets will dissi p ate and p layback will become p ossible. Condensati on can also occu r in the summe r if the p layer is ex p osed to the di r ect wind f rom an ai r -conditioner . If this ha pp ens, move the p layer to a d iffe r ent p lace. Cleaning the player No r mally, wi p e the p laye r with a soft cloth. Fo r tough di r t, a pp ly some neut r al dete r gent diluted in 5 to 6 pa r ts wate r to a soft cloth, w r ing out tho r ough ly, wi p e off the di r t, then wi p e again with a d r y cloth. Note that ge tting alcoho l, thinne r , benzen e o r insectic ide on the p layer could cau se the pr int an d coatin g to p eel o ff. Also, avoid leav ing r ubber or vinyl pr oducts in contact with the p layer fo r lo ng p er iods of time, as this could damage the cabinet. When using che mical-im pr egnated wi p es, etc., r ea d the wi p eâÂÂs cautions ca r efully. Un p lug the p owe r co r d f r om the powe r outlet when cleaning the p layer . Caution for wh en the unit is installed in a rack with a glass door Do not pr ess the ï¨ OPEN/CLOSE on the r emote cont r ol to o p en the disc t r ay while the glass doo r is c losed. The doo r will ham p er the movement of the disc t r ay, and t he unit could be damaged. Cleaning the pickup lens The p laye r âÂÂs lens s hould not b ecome di r ty in no r mal use, but if fo r some r eason it should malfuncti on due to dust o r di r t, consult you r nea r est Pionee r autho r ized se r vice cente r . Although lens cleane r s fo r p laye r s a r e comme r cially availa ble, we advise against using them since some may damage the lens. Handling discs Do not use damaged (c r acked o r wa rp ed) discs. Do not sc r atch the discâÂÂs signal su r fac e o r let it ge t di r ty. Do not load mo re than one disc into the p layer at a time. LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 54 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
55 En 07 Do not glu e p ap er or p ut sticke r s on to the disc , o r use a p encil, ball-p oint p en or other sha rp -ti pp ed w r iting inst r ument. These co uld all damage the disc. ï° Storing discs Always sto r e discs in thei r cases, and place the cases ve r ticall y, avoiding p laces ex p osed to high tem p er atu r e o r humidity, di r ec t sunlight or extr emely low temp er atur es. Be su r e to r ead the cautions included with the disc. ï° Cleaning discs It may not be p ossible to p lay the disc if the r e a r e finge rp r ints o r dust on it. In this case, using a cleanin g cloth, etc. , to wi p e the disc ge ntly f r om the cente r towa r d the oute r edge. Do not use a di r ty cleaning cloth. Do not use benzene, thinne r or othe r volatile chemicals. Also do not u se r ecor d s pr ay o r antistatic agents. Fo r tough di r t, a pp ly some wate r t o a s o f t c l o t h , w r in g out tho r oughly, wi p e off the di r t, then wi p e off the moistu r e with a d r y cloth. ï° Specially shaped discs S p ecially sha p ed discs (hea r t-sha p ed, hexagonal, etc.) cannot be used on this p layer . Neve r use such discs, as they will damage the p laye r . ï° Condensation on discs If the disc is moved suddenly f r om a cold p lace into a wa r m r oom (in winte r , fo r ex am p le), wate r d r op lets (conde nsation) may fo r m on the disc su r face. Discs will not p lay pr o pe r ly if the r e is condensatio n on them. Ca r efully wi p e off the wa te r d r op lets f r om the disc su r face befo r e using the disc. Troubleshooting Inco rr ect o p er ation is ofte n mistaken fo r t r ouble o r malfun ction. If you th ink that the r e is somethin g w r ong wi th this com p onent, check the p oints below. Sometimes the t r ouble may lie in anothe r com p onent. Ins p ect the othe r com p onents and elect r ical a pp liances being used. If the t r ouble cannot be r ectified even afte r checking the p oints below, ask you r nea r est Pion ee r autho r ized se r vice cente r or you r deale r to ca rr y o ut r ep air wo r k. Playback Problem Check Remedy ⢠Disc does not p lay. ⢠Disc t r ay o p ens automatic ally. Is the disc one that is p layable on this p layer ? Check whethe r the disc is one that c an be p layed on th is p layer ( p age 7). Is the file one tha t is p layable on this p layer ? ⢠Check whethe r the fi le is one that can be p layed on this p layer ( p age 9). ⢠Check whethe r or not the file is damage d. Is the disc sc r atched? I t may not be p ossi ble to p lay sc r atched discs. Is the disc di r ty? Clean the disc (above) . Is the r e a p iece of p ap er or sticke r attached to the dis c? The disc may be wa rp ed an d un p layable. Is the disc pr o pe r ly set in the disc t r ay? ⢠Set the disc with the pr inted side faci ng u p . ⢠Set the disc pr o pe r ly in the depr ession in the disc t r ay. Is the r egion num be r co rr ect? See About region numbers on p age 9 fo r the r egion numbe r s of discs that can be p layed on th is p layer . LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 55 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
07 56 En No p ictur e is disp layed or the p ictur e is not disp layed pr o pe r ly. Is the video cable pr o pe r ly connected? ⢠Conne ct the cable pr o pe r ly acco r din g to the connected devices ( p age 13) . ⢠Inse r t the cable fi r mly and all the wa y in. Is the video cable dam aged? If the cable is damaged, r ep lace it with a new one. Is the in p ut setting on the connected T V o r AV r eceiv er o r am p lifie r r ight ? Read the o p e r ating inst r uctions of the connected com p onents an d switch to the pr o pe r in p ut. A r e you viewing the p ictu r e f r om the vi deo out p ut te r minal selected with VIDEO SELECT ? P r ess VIDEO SELECT to switch the video out p ut t e r minal to be viewed ( p age 21) . Is the out p ut vi deo r esolu tion pr o pe r ly set? Use OUTPUT RESOLU TION t o s w i t c h t o a r esolution at which the vid eo and audio s ignals a r e out p ut ( p age 21). ⢠Is the p layer connected with an HDMI cable othe r than a Hi gh S p eed HDMI⢠cable (with a Standa r d HDMI⢠cable)? ⢠A r e you using an HDMI cable with built-in equalize r ? 1080 p o r Dee p Colo r video signals m ay not be out p ut pr op er ly, de p ending on the HDMI cable being used o r the p layer âÂÂs settings. P r ess ï§ while pr essing ï¤ on the p la ye r âÂÂs f r ont p anel to r esto r e the video out p uts to the facto r y default settin gs. Afte r this, if you wish to out p ut the video signa ls with 1080 p or Dee p Colo r , connect the TV using a H igh S p eed HDMI⢠cable with out built-in equalize r , then r eset the p laye r using the Setup Navigator ( p age 18). Does the co nnected TV su pp o r t the f r ame r ate of the video sig nal being out p ut by the p laye r ? If the p ictur e is not dis p layed when p la ying a disc with a f r ame r ate that is not su pp o r ted, th e p ictu r e will not be dis p layed eve n when p layback is sto pp ed. In this case, use the pr ocedu r e below to switch the fr ame r ate of the vid eo signals out p ut f r om the p layer . Eject the disc and close th e disc t r ay. Then, pr ess ï¨ OPEN/CL OSE while pr essing ï¤ on the p laye r âÂÂs f r ont p anel to sw itch to a f r ame r ate su pp o r ted b y the connected T V. Is NTSC on PAL TV pro pe r ly set? When viewing the video signals out p ut fr om the p layer âÂÂs S-Video or Video te r minal, set NTSC on PAL TV pro pe r ly ( p age 37). Is a DVI device c onnected? The p ictur e may not be dis p layed pr op er ly if a DVI device is conne cted. Is HDMI Color Space pr o pe r ly set? Change the HDMI Color Space setting ( p age 38) . Pictu r e f r eezes and th e f r ont p anel and r emote contr ol buttons sto p wo r king. ⢠P r ess ï§ STOP to sto p p layback, then r estar t p layback. ⢠If the p layback cannot be sto pp ed, pr ess ïµ STANDBY/ON on the p layer âÂÂs fr ont p anel to tur n off the p ower , th en tur n the p ower back on. ⢠If the p ower cannot be tu r ned off, pr ess and hold ïµ STANDBY/ON on the p layer âÂÂs fr ont p anel fo r ove r 5 seconds. The p ower will tu r n off. Motion is unna tu r al o r p ictur e is not clear . Change the Pur e Cinema sett ing ( p age 34). No p ictu r e is dis p layed o r p ictur e is not outp ut in high definition when p laying BD s. With so me discs, it m ay not be p ossible to out p ut the video sign als f r om the VIDEO out p ut te r minal o r the COMPONENT VIDEO out p ut te r minals. In this case, connect using an H D MI cable ( p age 13). ⢠Pictu r e is distu r bed du r ing p layback. ⢠Pictu r e is da r k. ⢠This p laye r su pp o r ts Mac r ovision analog co p y pr otection techn ology. With some TVs (such as with b uilt-in video de ck), the p ictur e will not be dis p layed pr o pe r ly when the co p y pr otected DVD title is p layed. This is not a malfunct ion. ⢠If the p layer and TV a r e connected via a DVD r ecor de r /video deck, etc., the p ictur e will not be dis p layed pr op er ly d ue to analog co p y pr otection. Co nnect the p layer and TV d i r ectly. Problem Check Remedy LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 56 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
57 En 07 ⢠Pictu r e is st r etched. ⢠Pictu r e is c r o pp ed. ⢠As p ect r atio cannot be switched. Is the TVâÂÂs as p ect ratio pr o pe r ly set? Read the TVâÂÂs o p er at ing inst r uctions and set the TVâÂÂs as p ect r atio pr o pe r ly. Is TV Aspect Ratio pro pe r ly set? Set TV Aspect Ratio pro pe r ly ( p age 37). Is 4:3 Video Out pro pe r ly set? Set 4:3 Video O ut pro pe r ly ( p age 37). Is DVD 16:9 Video Out pr o pe r ly set? Set DVD 16: 9 Video Out pro pe r ly ( p age 37). When video signals with a r esolution of 1080/50i, 1080/50p , 720/50p , 1080/24 p , 1080/60i, 1080/60 p o r 720/60 p a r e being out p ut f r om the HDMI OUT te r minal o r the COMPONENT VIDEO out p ut te r minals, they may be out p ut with an as p ect r atio of 16:9 even if TV Aspect Ra tio is set to 4:3 (Standar d) ( p age 37). Pictu r e is inte rr u p ted. The p ictu r e may be inte rr u p ted when the r esolut ion of the r ecor de d video signal switches. P r ess OUTPUT RESOLUTION to select a setting othe r than Auto o r So urce Direc t (p age 21) . The subtitles cannot be switched. The subtitles cannot be switched fo r discs r eco r ded on a DVD o r BD r ecor der . Sound and p ictur e a r e not synch r onized. Is Outpu t Terminal pr o pe r ly set? Set Output T erminal pro pe r ly ( p ages 18 an d 43). Is Lip Sync pro pe r ly set? Adjust the amount of audio delay wit h the Lip Sync setting ( p age 35) . ⢠No sound is out p ut. ⢠Sound is no t out p ut pr o pe r ly. Is the disc p layed back in slow motion? Is the disc p layed back in fast fo r wa r d o r fast r ever se? No sound is out p ut du r ing slow motion p lay and for war d and r eve r se scanning. A r e the audio cables pr o pe r ly connected? ⢠Conne ct the cable pr o pe r ly acco r din g to the connected devices ( p age 13) . ⢠Inse r t the cable fi r mly and all the wa y in. Is the audio ca ble damaged? If the cable is damaged, r ep lace it with a new one. A r e the connect ed com p onents (AV r eceive r o r am p lifie r , etc.) pr o pe r ly set? Read the o p e r ating inst r uctions of the connected com p onents an d check the volume, in p ut, sp eaker settings, etc. A r e you t r yin g to listen to th e sound of the HDMI OUT te r minal while wat ching the p ictur e fr om the COMPONENT VIDEO o r VIDEO out p ut te r minals? Audio signals a r e not o ut p ut f rom the HDMI OUT te r minal when vide o signals a r e being out p ut f r om the COMPONENT VIDEO o r VIDEO out p ut te r minals. When watching the p ictur e of the COMPONENT VIDEO o r VIDEO out p ut te r minals, co nnect an o p tical digi tal audio cable o r r egular aud io cables to listen to the sound ( p age 16). Once connections a r e comp leted, u se Setup Na vigator to make the p layer âÂÂs settings ( p age 18). Is HDMI A udio Out pro pe r ly set? Set HDMI Audio Out to Auto o r PCM. ( p age 3 8). Is Outpu t Terminal pr o pe r ly set? When ANALOG AUDIO is selected at Output Terminal , no audi o signals a r e out p ut f r om the HDMI OUT o r DIGITAL OUT te r minal ( p age 43) . Is the out p ut vi deo r esolu tion pr o pe r ly set? Use OUTPUT RE SOLUTION to switch to th e r esolutio n at which the video and audi o signals a r e out p ut ( p age 21) . Is a DVI device connected? The sound will not be out p ut f r om the HDMI OUT te r minal if a DVI device is connected. Connect the device to a DIGITAL OUT te r minal o r the AUDIO OUT te r minals ( p age 16). Fo r some BDs, audio signals ar e only out p ut f r om DIGITAL OUT te r minal o r the HDMI OUT te r minal. Problem Check Remedy LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 57 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
07 58 En Multi-channel sou nd is not out p ut. Is Outpu t Terminal pr o pe r ly set? Linea r PCM (2-channe l) audio signals a r e out p ut fr om outp ut ter minals othe r than the one set at Output Terminal unde r Audio Out . Set Output Terminal pro pe r ly ( p age 4 3). Is the audio ou t p ut of the connected A V r eceiver or am p lifie r , etc., pr o pe r ly set? Read the o p e r ating inst r uctions of the connected AV r eceive r o r am p lifi e r and check the a udio out p ut settings of AV r eceiver or am p lifi e r . Is multi-channel sound selected? Use the menu sc r ee n or AUDIO to switch the discâÂÂs sound to multi- channel. Noise can be hea r d when out p utting D TS Digital Su rr ound signals f r om the DIGITAL OUT te r minal. Is the connected AV r eceiver o r am p lifie r com p atible with DTS Digi tal Su rr ound? If an AV r eceiver or am p lifier that is not com p atib le with DTS Digital Su rr ound is connec ted to the DIGITAL OUT te r minal, set DTS Out to DTS ï¤ PCM ( p age 37). 192 kHz o r 96 kHz digital audio signals ca nnot be out p ut f r om the DIGITAL OUT te r minal. It is not p ossibl e to out p ut 192 kHz o r 96 kHz digital audio signals f r om this p laye r âÂÂs DIGITAL OUT te r minal. The signals a r e auto matically conve r ted to 48 kHz o r less fo r out p ut . Seconda r y audio o r inte r active audi o is not out p ut. Is HDMI A udio Out pro pe r ly set? When listening to the soun d f r om an HDMI OUT te r mina l, set HDMI Audio Ou t to PCM ( p age 38) . A r e Dolby Digita l Out and DTS Out pro pe r ly set? When listening to the sound f r om an DIGITAL OUT te r minal, set Dolby Digital Out to Dolby Digital 1 , DTS Out to DTS 1 ( p age 37). Sound is fast o r slow. When an HDMI cable is connected, a r e audio signals being ou t p ut f r om devices connected wi th cables othe r than HDMI cables? When a Pion ee r AV r eceiver or am p lifier com p atib le with the PQLS function is connected di r ectly to the p layer âÂÂs HDMI OUT te r minal using an HDMI cable, the PQLS func tion is activated when p laying discs. Because of this, the sound out p ut fr om comp onents other than the ones connected by HDMI cable may be fast o r slow. If this ha pp ens, set PQLS to Off ( p age 38). Afte r a disc is inse r ted, Loading stays dis p layed and p layback does not star t. A r e the r e too many files r ecor ded on th e disc? When a disc on which files a r e r ecor ded is inser ted, dep ending on the numbe r of files r eco r ded on the disc, loading may take se ve r al dozen minutes. ï§ is dis p layed in file names, etc. The cha r acter s that cannot be dis p layed on th is p layer are dis p layed in ï§ . A message indicating low memo r y a pp ea r s while p laying a BD-ROM disc. ⢠Pe r for m Individual/Sh ared Data Erase o r Storag e Format ( p age 42) . ⢠Pe r for m Applic ation Data Eras e ( p age 42) . The DVD la ye r of BD and DVD hyb r id discs cannot be p layed. Is Hybrid Disc Playb ack pr o pe r ly set? Set Hybrid Disc Pl ayback to DVD ( p age 39). The CD laye r of BD and CD hyb r id discs cannot be p layed. Is Hybrid Disc Playb ack pr o pe r ly set? Set Hybrid Disc Pl ayback to CD ( p age 39). The BDMV fo r mat on BD-R/ -RE discs cannot be p layed. To p lay the BDMV fo r mat on BD-R/-RE discs containing both BDMV and BDAV fo r ma ts, set BDMV/BDAV Play back Priority to BDMV ( p age 39) . Problem Check Remedy LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 58 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
59 En 07 KURO LINK Network Problem Check Remedy KURO LINK func tion does not wo r k. Is the HDMI cable pr o pe r ly connected? To use the KURO L INK function, connect t he Flat Sc r een TV, and AV system (AV r ece ive r o r am p lifie r , etc.) and HD AV Conve r te r to the HDMI OUT te r minal ( p age 1 5). Is the HDMI ca ble you a r e using a High S p eed HDMI⢠cable? Use a High S p eed HDMI⢠ca ble. The KURO LINK function may not wo rk pr o pe r ly if HDMI cable othe r than a High S p eed HDMI⢠cable is used. A r e you connected to th e TV using an HDMI ca ble to watch the p ictur e? If video signals a r e being out p ut f r om a te r minal othe r than the HDMI OUT te r minal, the KURO LINK function does not wo r k. Connect to the TV using a n HDMI cable and pr ess VIDEO SELECT to switch to the HDMI OUT te r minal ( p ages 1 5 and 21). Is KURO LINK set to On on the p laye r ? Set KURO LINK to On on the p layer (p age 38). Does the connected device su pp o r t the KURO LINK function? ⢠The KURO LINK function will not wo r k with devices of othe r br an ds that do not su pp o r t the KURO LINK function, even when conne cted using an H DMI cable. ⢠The KURO LINK function will not wo r k if devices that do not su pp o r t the KURO LINK fu nction a r e connecte d between the KURO LINK- com p atible device and the p laye r . ⢠See About connections to components of other makes support ing the KURO LINK function on p age 15. ⢠Even when con nected to a Pionee r product com p atible with the KURO LINK fu nction, some of the func tions may not wo r k. Also r efe r to the o p er ating inst r uctions of the connected device. Is KURO LINK set to On on the connected device? Set KURO LINK to On on the co nnected device. The KURO LINK function o p e r ates when KURO LINK is set to On for al l devices connected to the HDMI OUT te r minal. Once connections and settin gs of all the devices a re finished, be su r e to check that t he p layer âÂÂs p ictur e is ou t p ut to the Flat Sc r een TV. (Also check afte r changing the conne cted de vices and connec ting and/o r disconnect ing HDMI cables.) I f the p layer âÂÂs p ictur e is not be ing out p ut to the Flat Sc r e en TV, the KURO LINK function may not wo r k pr o pe r ly. Fo r details, refe r to the o p er ating i nst r uctions of the c onnected device. A r e multi p le p laye r s connected? The KURO LINK func tion may not wo r k if th r ee o r mo r e p layer s, including this p layer , a r e connected by HDMI ca ble. The in p ut does not switch automatica lly on the Flat Sc r een TV and AV system (AV r eceiver or amp li fie r , etc.) when p layb ack is sta r ted on the p laye r o r the Home Menu o r Home Media Galle r y is dis p layed. Is Display Power On set to Off on the p layer ? Set Display Power On to On ( p age 38). Problem Check Remedy ⢠BD-LIVE function (connection t o the Inte r net) cannot be use d. ⢠âÂÂConnection to t he softwa r e u p dating se r ve r failedâ is dis p layed when you t r y to u p date the softwa r e. Pe r fo r m Connection Te st ( p age 42). If âÂÂNetwo r k connection test com p leted successfully.â is dis p layed, check the pr oxy se r ve r settin gs ( p age 41). Als o the r e may b e a pr oblem with the Inte rnet connection . Contact you r Inte rnet se r vic e pr ovide r . âÂÂOK to g r ant net w o r k access to BD a pp lications?â is dis p layed when a B D-LIVE com p atible disc is r ead. This is dis p layed if the BD-R OM does not have valid BD-LIVE netwo r k access a ppr oval. Select No if you do not want to autho r ize access to the netwo r k. LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 59 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
07 60 En Others Softwa r e u p dating is slow. De p ending on the Inte r net connect ion and othe r conditions , some time may be r equir ed to u p date th e softwa r e. ⢠âÂÂWRT NG ****â is dis p layed on the f r ont p anel dis p lay du r ing softwa r e u p dating. (**** meaning any cha r acte r s) ⢠âÂÂWRT FAILEDâ is dis p layed on the f r ont p anel dis p lay du r ing softwa r e u p dating. The message is d is p layed wh en softwa r e u p dating has failed. Check again whethe r it can be u p dated pr op er ly. A message othe r th an âÂÂNetwo r k connection test com p leted successfullyâ is dis p layed whe n Connection Test is p er for med. Is âÂÂLAN cable not connec tedâ dis p layed? Check that this p laye r and Ethe r n et hub (o r r outer with hub functionality) a r e pr op er ly connected. ⢠Is âÂÂIP add r ess ca nnot be obtained.â dis p layed? ⢠Is âÂÂNo r esp onse f r om the gateway.â dis p layed? ⢠If the I P add r ess is obtai ned using the DHCP se r ver function , check the setting is co rr ect at th e Display Network Configuration ( p age 41). Fo r details on the DHC P se r ve r function, see the o p er ating inst r uctions of th e Ethe r net hub (o r r oute r with hub functi onality). ⢠Set the I P add r ess manually. Is âÂÂIP add r ess is o ve r la pp ed .â dis p layed? ⢠Check the o p e r ation and settings of the DHCP se r ver function of the Ethe r net hub (o r r outer with hu b functionality). Fo r deta ils on the DHCP se r ve r function, see the o p er ating inst r uctions of the Ethe r net hub (o r r outer with hub functionali ty). ⢠If this p layer âÂÂs has been set manually , r eset the IP ad d r ess of this p layer or other comp onents. Is the Ethe r net hu b (o r r outer with hub func tionality) o pe r ating pro pe r ly? ⢠Check the settings an d o p er ation the Ethe r ne t hub (o r r outer with hub functionality). Fo r details, see the o p er ating inst r ucti ons of t he Ethe r net hub. ⢠Reboot the Ethe r net hub (o r r outer with hub functiona lity). Problem Check Remedy The p laye r âÂÂs p owe r tu r ns off automatic ally. Is Auto Power Off set to On ? If Auto Power Off is set to On , the p laye râÂÂs p owe r tu r ns off automatica ll y if no o p er ation is p er fo r me d for over 30 minu tes ( p age 40) . Is Display Power Off set to On ? The p laye r âÂÂs p owe r may tu r n off togethe r w ith the p owe r of the TV connected to the HDMI OUT te r minal. If you do not want the p layer âÂÂs p ower to tur n off when the TVâÂÂs p ower is tu r ne d off, set Disp lay Power Off to Off ( p age 38). The p laye r âÂÂs p owe r tu r ns on automatic ally. Is KURO LINK set to On ?T h e p layer âÂÂs p ower may tur n on together with the p ower of the TV connected to the HDMI OUT te r minal. If you do not want the p layer âÂÂs p ower to tur n on when the TVâÂÂs p ower is tu r ned on, set KURO LINK to Off ( p age 38). Playe r cannot be o p er ated with r emote cont r ol . Is an AV r eceiver or am p lifier connected t o the CONTROL IN te r minal on the p laye r âÂÂs r ear p anel? O pe r ate with the r emo te cont r ol of the device connec ted to the CONTROL IN te r mina l. A r e you o pe r ating the r emote cont r ol f r om a p oint too fa r away f r om the p layer ? O pe r ate f r om wi thin 7 m of the r emote cont r ol senso r . A r e the batt e r ies dead? Re p lace the batt e r ies ( p age 6 ). In p ut of connect ed TV, an d AV system and HD AV Conve r te r switches automatic ally. Is KURO LINK set to On ?T h e i n p ut of the TV, an d AV system (AV r eceiver or amp lifier , etc.) and HD AV Conve r ter connected to the HD MI OUT te r minal may automatically switc h to the p layer when p layback sta r ts on the p layer o r the menu sc r een (Home Media Galle r y, etc.) is dis p layed. If you do not want the in p uts of the connected TV, and AV system (AV r ece iver or am p lifi e r , e tc.) and HD AV Conve r te r to switch automatically, set KURO LINK to Off ( p age 38). âÂÂP r ocessing failed.â is dis p layed. If the mes sage a pp ea r s r ep eatedly, p lease ask you r nea r est Pionee r autho r ized se r vice ce nte r or yo u r deale r to ca rr y out r ep ai r wo r k. Problem Check Remedy LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 60 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
61 En 07 Glossary ï° Angle (Multi angle) U p to 9 ca me r a angl es can be r eco r ded simultaneous ly on BD- ROM o r DVD-Video discs, le tting you view the same scene f r om diffe r ent angles. ï° AVCHD (Advanced Video Codec High Definition) See Playing DVDs on p age 9 . ï° BDAV Of the BD fo r mat, the Audio Visual For mat Sp ecifications for HD digital b r oadcast r ecor ding is r efe rr ed to as BDAV on this p layer and in this o p er ating inst r uct ions. ï° BD-J See Playing BDs on p age 8. ï° BD-LIVE See Playing BDs on p age 8. ï° BDMV Of the BD fo r ma t, the Audio Visua l For mat Sp ecifications designed fo r pr e- p ackaged high definitio n (HD) movie contents is r efe rr ed to a s BDMV on this p layer and in this o p er at ing inst r uctions. ï° BONUSVIEW See Playing BDs on p age 8. ï° Compon ent video ou tput This video out p ut te r minal pr ovides clea r er p ictur es when connecte d to a TV eq ui pp ed wit h com p onent in p uts. Co m p on ent video signals consist of t h r ee sign als, Y , P B and P R . ï° Deep Color See About HDMI on p age 13. ï° Default Gateway A default gateway is a communication device such as a r outer which p asses data b etween ne two r ks. It is used to di r ec t data to netwo r ks on which th e destination gateway is n ot ex p licitly s p ecified. ï° DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol ) This pr otocol pr ovides configu r at ion p ar amete r s (IP add ress , etc.) fo r com p uter s and othe r devices connec ted to the ne two r k. ï° DivX See Supported video file formats on p age 9. ï° DNS (Domain Name System) This is a system fo r associating In te r net host names with IP add r esses. ï° Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is an au dio fo r mat to r ec or d the sound in u p to 5.1 channels with a f r action of the am ount of data as com p ar ed to linea r PCM audio signals. Settings you have made have been clea r ed. ⢠Have you di sconne cted the p ower cor d while the p la ye r âÂÂs p ower was on? ⢠Has the r e been a p ower failu r e? Always pr ess ïµ STANDB Y/ON on the p laye r âÂÂs f r ont p anel o r ïµ STANDBY/ON on the r emote contr ol an d check that POWER OFF has tu r ned off f r om the p layer âÂÂs f r ont p anel dis p lay befo r e disconn ecting t he p ower co r d. Be p ar ti cular ly car efu l when the p ower co r d is connecte d to the AC outl et on anothe r device because the p layer tur ns off in conjunction with th e device. EXT does not ligh t on the p layer âÂÂs fr ont p an el dis p lay when a USB (exte r nal sto r age) devi ce is connected. Is the exte r nal sto r ag e device pr o pe r ly connected? ⢠Tu r n the p layer âÂÂs p ower off, then t u r n the p ower back on. ⢠Tu r n the p layer âÂÂs p ower off, then r ec onnect the e xte r nal sto r age device ( p age 16) . A r e you using a USB cable that is longe r than 2 mete r s? Use a USB cabl e with a length of 2 mete r s or less. Is the p ower of th e exte r nal ha r d disk tu r ned on? Tu r n the p la ye r âÂÂs p owe r off, then tur n the exter nal har d diskâÂÂs p ower on. Is the exte r nal sto r ag e device connecte d to the USB p or t via a memo r y ca r d r eader o r USB hub? Exte r nal sto r age device may not wo r k if connected to the USB po r t via a memo r y car d r eader or USB hu b. Does the e xte r nal sto r age device contain multi p le p ar titions? Exte r nal sto r age devices may not be r ecognized if t hey contain multi p le p ar titions. Some exte r na l sto r age devices may not o p er at e. EXT flashes on th e p layer âÂÂs f r ont p anel d i s p lay when a USB (exte r nal sto r age) device is connected. Is the exte r nal sto r ag e device w rite- pr otected? Tu r n the p laye r âÂÂs p owe r off, then disable the w r ite- protection. Is the exte r nal sto r ag e deviceâÂÂs file system FA T16 o r FAT32? Only exte r nal sto r age devices with a FAT16 o r FAT32 file system can be used. They m ay be usable if they a r e fo r matted fr om the p layer ( p age 42) . Tu r n the p laye r âÂÂs p owe r off, then tu r n the powe r back on. Problem Check Remedy LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 61 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
07 62 En ï° Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Pl us is an audio fo r mat fo r high-definition media. Built on Dolb y Digital, it combines the ef ficiency and flexibility to pr ovide high quality multi-channel audio. With BD-ROMs, u p to 7.1 channels of digital sound can be r ecor ded. ï° Dolby TrueHD Dolby T r ueHD is an audio fo r mat using lossless coding. With BD- ROMs, u p to 8 channels can be r ecor ded at 96 kHz/24 bits, o r up to 6 channels at 192 kHz/24 bits. ï° DRM A technology fo r pr otecting co p yr ighted digital data. Digitized videos, image s and audio r etain the s ame quality even when th ey a r e co p ied o r t r ansfe rr ed re p eatedly. D RM is a technology fo r r estr icting the distr ibution or p layb ack of such digita l data without the autho r ization of the co p yr ight holde r . ï° DTS Digital Surround DTS Digi tal Su rr ound is an audio fo r mat to r ecor d 48 kHz/ 24 bits audio signals in 5.1 channels. ï° DTS-HD High Resolution Audio DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is an audio fo r mat u sing lossy coding. It can r ecor d 7.1 channels at 96 kHz/24 bits. ï° DTS-HD Master Audio DTS-HD Maste r Audio is an audio fo r mat using lossle ss coding. With BD-ROMs, 7.1 channels can be r ecor ded at 96 kHz/24 bits, o r 5.1 channels at 192 kHz/24 bits. ï° Ethernet A standa r d fo r local ar ea networ ks (LANs) used to connect multi p le com p ute r s, etc. in the same loca tion. This p layer su pp o r ts 100BASE -TX. ï° Frame s and fields A f r ame is the un it fo r one of the sti ll p ictur es which com p ose motion p ictur es. One fr ame consists of a p ictur e of odd lines and a p ictur e of even lines ca lled fields in video sign al with inte r laced scan method (576i, 1080i, etc.). ï° HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) See About HDMI on p age 13. ï° Interactive audio The audio s ignals r ecor ded in the titles of BD-ROMs. They includ e fo r exam p le the clicking soun d made when the menu sc r ee n is o pe r ated. ï° Interlaced scan With this method, one p ictur e is dis p layed by scann ing it twice. The odd line s a r e dis p layed in the fi r st p ass, the even lin es a r e dis p layed in th e second, to fo r m a single p ictur e (f r ame). Inte r laced scan is indi cated in this p laye r an d o p er ating inst r uctio ns by an âÂÂiâ afte r the r esolution valu e (fo r exam p le, 576i). ï° IP address An add r ess tha t identifies a com p uter or othe r de vice con nected to the Int e r net o r local a r ea netwo r k. It is r e pr esented a numbe r in fou r sections. ï° Linear PCM This is r efe rr ed as the audio signals that a r e not com pr essed. ï° MAC (Media Access Control) address A ha r dwar e identification nu mbe r assigned s p ecifically to the netwo r k device (LAN ca r d, etc.). ï° MPEG (Moving Picture Expe rts Group) The name of a family of standa r ds used to encode video a nd audio signals in a digital com pr essed fo r mat. The vi deo encoding standa r ds include MPEG-1 Video, MP EG-2 Video, MPEG-4 Visu al, MPEG-4 AVC, et c. The audio encoding standa r ds include MPEG- 1 Audio, MPEG-2 Audio, MPEG-2 AAC, etc. ï° Parent al Lock See Changing the Parental Lock level for viewing DVDs and Changing the Age Restrict ion for viewing BD-ROMs on p age 43. ï° Picture-in-Picture (P-in-P) This is a function fo r sup er imp osing a sub video on the main video. Some BD-ROMs include seconda r y video, which can be su p er im p osed on the pr ima r y video. ï° Port nu mber This is a sub-add r ess pr ovided below t he IP add r ess fo r simultaneously connecting to multi p le p ar ties du r ing Inte r net communications. ï° Progr essive scan With this method , one p ictur e is consisted of a sin gle p ictur e, without divi ding it in two p ictur es. P r ogr essive sca n pr ovid es clea r p ictu r es with no flicke r , in p ar ticula r fo r still pictu r es that conta in much text, g r ap hics, o r ho r izontal lines. P r ogr essive scan is indicated in this p layer and o p er ating inst r uctions by a â p â afte r the r esolution value (fo r exam p le, 576 p ). ï° Proxy se rver This is a r elay se r ver fo r en su r ing fast access and safe communicatio ns when connecting to the In te r ne t f r om an inte r nal netwo r k. ï° Region nu mber See About region numbers on p age 9. ï° Second ary audio Some BD-ROMs include sub audio st r eams mixed with the main audio st r eam. These sub audio st r eams a re called âÂÂseconda r y audioâÂÂ. On some discs this seconda r y audio is r ecor de d as the audio fo r the seconda r y video. ï° Second ary video Some BD-ROMs include sub videos su p er imp osed on the main videos using the Pictu r e-in-Pictur e function. These su b videos a r e called âÂÂseconda r y videoâÂÂ. ï° Subn et mask This is used to ident ify which p ar t of th e IP add r ess co rr es p onds to the subnet (a se p ar ately managed netwo r k). The subnet mask is ex pr essed as âÂÂ255.255.255. 0âÂÂ. ï° USB(Universal Serial Bus) USB is the indust r y standar d fo r connecting p e r ip her als to PCs. ï° VC-1 A video codec develo p ed by Mic r osof t and standa r dized by the Society of Motion Pictu r e and Televisio n Enginee r s (SMPTE ). Some BDs include videos encoded in this codec. ï° x.v. Color See About HDMI on p age 13. LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 62 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
63 En 07 Specifications Note â¢T h e s p ecifications and design of this pr oduc t a r e subject to change without notice. â¢T h i s pr oduct includes FontAvenue î fonts licenced by NEC Co rp o r ation. FontAvenue is a r egiste r ed t r adema r k of NEC Co rp o r ation. Model BDP-LX52 Type Blu- r ay Disc PLAYER Rated voltage Europe, Australia and New Zealand mode ls: AC 220 V to 24 0 V Others: AC 110 V to 240 V Rated frequ ency 50 Hz/60 Hz Power consumption 32 W Power consumpt ion (standby) 0.3 W Weight 3.6 kg External dime nsions (in cluding project ing parts) 420 mm (W) x 83 mm (H) x 287 mm (D) Tolerable opera ting temperatur e 5 ðC to 35 ðC Tolerable ope ra ting humidity 5 % to 85 % (no condensation) Output terminal s HDMI 1 set, 19- p in: 5 V, 250 mA Video outp uts Video 1 set, RCA jack: 1.0 V p - p (75 é) Compone nt video 1 set, RCA jacks: Y: 1.0 V p -p (75 é ) P B , P R : 0.7 V p- p (75 é) Audio outputs 2-channel ( left/right) 1 set, RCA jacks Audio output level 200 mV r ms (1 kHz, âÂÂ20 dB) Frequenc y response 4 Hz to 88 kHz (192 kHz sam p ling) Digital audio output s Optical 1 set, O p tical digital jack LAN 1 set, Ethe r net jack (100BASE-T X) Control Input 1 set, Minijack (3.5 ø) USB 1 set, Ty p e A LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 63 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Printed in <VRB1514-A> Published b y Pioneer Cor poration. Cop yr ight é 2009 Pioneer Cor poration. All rights reser ved. PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. 178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V. Blvd.Manuel A vila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Me xico,D .F . 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 K002_B_En Please ref er to our website for inf ormation regarding software updates and ser vice to this product. Contact inf ormation: U .K. Pioneer GB L TD . Hollybush Hill, Stok e P oges Slough, Buckinghamshire SL2 4QP UNITED KINGDOM 0870 600 1539 http://www .pioneer .co.uk/uk/content/support/suppor t/upgrade .html A ustralia, Ne w Zealand and other Oceania area Pioneer Electronics A ustralia Pty Ltd 2211 Princes Highwa y , Mulgrav e, VIC 3170, A ustralia 1800 988 268 http://www .pioneer .com.au Hong K ong Pioneer (HK) Limited - Customer Ser vice Center Unit 2, 17/F , V anta Industr ial Centre, 21-33 T ai Lin P ai Road, Kwai Chung, Hong K ong (852) 3583 3288 https://www .pioneerhongkong.com.hk Singapore Pioneer Electronics AsiaCentre Pte Ltd 253 Ale xandra Road (K omoco Building)#04-01, Lobby 2 Singapore 159936 (65) 6472-7555 http://www .pioneer .com.sg/firmwaredownload Malaysia Pioneer T echnology (Mala ysia) Sdn Bhd 16th Floor , Menara Uni. Asia, 1008, Jalan Sultan Ismail 50250, Kuala Lumpur , Malaysia (03) 2697-2920 http://www .pioneer .com.sg/firmwaredownload Thailand Pioneer Electronics (Thailand) CO .,L TD 91/1 Floor 1&7 Chaiyo Building, Rama 9 Road, Hua ykwang District Bangkok 10320, Thailand (662) 6439-444 http://www .pioneer .com.sg/firmwaredownload T aiwan Pioneer High Fidelity T aiwan Co . Ltd 13th Floor , No .44, Chung Shan Nor th Road, Sec.2 T aipei, T aiwan (886 2) 2521-3166 http://www .pioneer-twn.com.tw Indonesia PT . Adab Alam Electronic Jl. K.H. Zainul Ar ifin No . 13A Jakarta-Pusat Indonesia (21) 6331-924 http://www .pioneer .com.sg/firmwaredownload LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 64 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (ser vicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated âÂÂdangerous voltageâ within the productâÂÂs enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. CAUTION: TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE P ARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN IMPOR T ANT D3-4-2-1-1_A1_En Thank you f or b uying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will kno w how to operate y our model proper ly . After you ha ve finished reading the instructions, put them away i n a s a fe place for future ref erence . CAUTION This product is a class 1 laser product, but this product contains a laser diode higher than Class 1. To ensure continued safety , do not remove any covers or attempt to gain access to the inside of the product. Refer all servicing to qualified personnel. The following caution label appears on your unit. Location : inside of the unit D3-4-2-1-8*_C_En CAUTION ATTENTION ADVARSEL VARNING VORSICHT PRECAUCIÃÂN VARO! CLASS 3B VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN, AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM. RADIATIONS LASER VISIBLES ET INVISIBLES DE CLASSE 3B QUAND OUVERT. ÃÂVITEZ TOUT EXPOSITION AU FAISCEAU. KLASSE 3B SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTRàLING VED àBNING. UNDGàUDSÃÂTTELSE FOR STRàLING. KLASS 3B SYNLIG OCH OSYNLIG LASERSTRàLNING NÃÂR DENNA DEL ÃÂR ÃÂPPNAD. UNDVIK ATT UTSÃÂTTA DIG FÃÂR STRàLEN. BEI GEÃÂFFNETER ABDECKUNG IST SICHTBARE UND UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG DER KLASSE 3B IM GERÃÂTEINNEREN VORHANDEN. NICHT DEM LASERSTRAHL AUSSETZEN! CUANDO SE ABRE HAY RADIACIÃÂN LÃÂSER DE CLASE 3B VISIBLE E INVISIBLE. EVITE LA EXPOSICIÃÂN A LOS RAYOS LÃÂSER. AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA NÃÂKYVÃÂLLE JA NÃÂKYMÃÂTTÃÂMÃÂLLE LUOKAN 3B LASERSÃÂTEILYLLE. ÃÂLàKATSO SÃÂTEESEEN. 注æÂ ãÂÂãÂÂãÂÂéÂÂãÂÂ㨠CLASS 3B ã®å¯è¦Â㋼ã¶å ÂÃ¥ÂÂã³ä¸Âå¯è¦Â㋼㶠å ÂãÂÂåºã¾ãÂÂãÂÂãÂÂã¼ã ãÂÂç´æÂ¥è¦ÂãÂÂãÂÂãÂÂ触ãÂÂãÂÂãÂÂãÂÂãªãÂÂãÂÂã¨ã î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î "îÂÂ#%îÂÂ)îÂÂ!'îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ%îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ% îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ"îÂÂ!"'îÂÂ#îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ!*îÂÂ!îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂ&"(%îÂÂîÂÂ&îÂÂîÂÂ&(îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ&îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ'îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ!îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ"!îÂÂ'îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂ$(îÂÂ# îÂÂ!'îÂÂî î î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ! VENTILATION CAUTION When installing this unit, make sure to leave space around the unit for ventilation to improve heat radiation (at least 10 cm at top, 10 cm at rear, and 10 cm at each side). WARNING Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the product, and to protect it from overheating. To prevent fire hazard, the openings should never be blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers, table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the equipment on thick carpet or a bed. D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ&îÂÂîÂÂ$(îÂÂ# îÂÂ!'îÂÂîÂÂ&îÂÂ!"'îÂÂ*îÂÂ'îÂÂ%#%""îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî "îÂÂ#%îÂÂ)îÂÂ!'îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ% îÂÂî "%îÂÂ&îÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ-îÂÂ%îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ"îÂÂ!"'îÂÂ#îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ!,îÂÂîÂÂ"!'îÂÂîÂÂ!îÂÂ%îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî *îÂÂ'îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ$(îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ!îÂÂîÂÂ%îÂÂ'îÂÂîÂÂ&îÂÂîÂÂ$(îÂÂ# îÂÂ!'îÂÂîÂÂ&(îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ&îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ)îÂÂ&îÂÂîÂÂ"%î îÂÂîÂÂ"*îÂÂ%îÂÂ#"'îÂÂîÂÂ"%îÂÂî #"&îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ'îÂÂ'"îÂÂîÂÂ%îÂÂ##îÂÂ!îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ&#îÂÂîÂÂ&îÂÂîÂÂ!îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ%îÂÂîÂÂ!î "%î "îÂÂ&'(%îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ! Before plugging in for the first time, read the following section carefully . 2 En LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 2 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Operating Environment Operating environment temperature and humidity : 5 ðC to 35 ðC ( 41 ðF to 95 ðF); less than 85 %RH (cooling vents not blocked) Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or strong artificial light) D3-4-2-1-7c*_A1_En CAUTION The îÂÂîÂÂST ANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not completely shut off all power from the AC outlet. Since the power cord ser ves as the main disconnect device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from the AC outlet to shut down all power . Therefore, make sure the unit has been installed so that the power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC outlet in case of an accident. T o avoid fire hazard, the power cord should also be unplugged from the AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation). D3-4-2-2-2a_A_En îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ$î îÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ!îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ$îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ$îÂÂîÂÂ$îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂî !îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ!îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ$îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ!îÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ$îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ!îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ#îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ"îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂ!îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî î î îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî POWER-CORD CAUTION Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cords. The power cords should be routed such that they are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check the power cord once in a while. When you find it damaged, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized ser vice center or your dealer for a replacement. S002*_En This product incor porates cop yr ight protection technology that is protected by method claims of cer tain U .S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned b y Macrovision Cor poration and other rights owners. Use of this cop yr ight protection technology must be authorized b y Macrovision Cor poration, and is intended f or home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macro vision Cor poration. Re verse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. F or U .K. model: Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified ser vice personnel. D3-4-2-1-2-2_B_En IMPORTANT: THE MOULDED PLUG This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience. A 5 amp fuse is fitted in this plug. Should the fuse need to be replaced, please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of 5 amps and that it is approved by AST A or BSI to BS1362. Check for the AST A mark or the BSI mark on the body of the fuse. If the plug contains a removable fuse cover , you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced. If you lose the fuse cover the plug must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained. A replacement fuse cover can be obtained from your local dealer . If the fitted moulded plug is unsuitable for your socket outlet, then the fuse shall be removed and the plug cut off and disposed of safely. There is a danger of severe electrical shock if the cut off plug is inserted into any 13 amp socket. If a new plug is to be fitted, please obser ve the wiring code as shown below . If in any doubt, please consult a qualified electrician. IMPORT ANT : The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: Blue : Neutral Brown : Live As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows ; The wire which is coloured BL UE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. How to replace the fuse: Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse. For Australia Model C67-7-3_En 3 En LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 3 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Information for users on collection and disposal of old equipment and used batteries These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste. For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection points in accordance with your national legislation. By disposing of these products and batteries correctly , you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling. For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local municipality , your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items. These symbols are only valid in the European Union. For countries outside the European Union: If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal. K058a_A1_En Symbol examples for batteries Symbol for equipment Pb 4 En LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 4 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
5 En Contents 01 Before you start WhatâÂÂs in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Putting the batte r ies in the r emote cont r ol. . . . . . . . . . 6 Ty p es of discs/files that can be p layed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Playable discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Playable files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Pa r t Names and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Remote Cont r ol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 0 F r ont Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 F r ont Pa nel Dis p lay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Rea r Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 02 Connecting up Connecting using an HDMI cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 About HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 About KURO LINK function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Connecting an AV r eceiver o r amp lifie r . . . . . . . . . . . 1 5 Connecting video and a udio cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Connecting a TV using a video/audio cable . . . . . . . . 16 Connecting an AV r eceiver o r am p li fier using an o p tical digital audio cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Connecting com p onents to the USB p or t . . . . . . . . . . . 16 About USB (exte r nal sto ra ge) devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Connecting the USB (exte r nal sto r age) device. . . . . . 1 7 Netwo r k connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Connecting via an Ethe r n et hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Connecti ng the p ower co r d. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 7 03 Getting Started Making settings using the Setu p Navigato r menu . . . . 18 O pe r ating the TV with the p laye r âÂÂs r emote con t r ol . . . . 1 9 TV P r eset code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Using the TOOLS menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 0 Switchin g the vid eo out p ut te r minal to be viewed . . . . 21 Switchin g the out p ut video r esolu tion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 04 Playback Playing discs o r f iles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Fo r wa r d and reve r se scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Playing s p ecific titles, cha p te r s o r t racks . . . . . . . . . . 25 Ski pp ing conte nt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Playing in slow motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Ste p fo r wa r d and ste p r eve r se . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Switching the came r a angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 5 Switching the subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Switching the audio and seconda r y audio . . . . . . . . . 26 Switching the seconda r y video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Dis p laying the disc info r mation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Playback functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 7 Using the Play Mode functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Playing f r om a s p ecific time (Time Sea r ch) . . . . . . . . 28 Playing a s p ecif ic title, cha p ter or tr ack (Se a r ch) . . . 28 Playing a s p ecif ic section w ithin a t itle o r tr ack r ep eatedly (A-B Rep eat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 8 Playing r ep eatedly (Re p eat Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Playing in r andom o r der (Random Play) . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Abou t P lay Mode ty p es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Playing f r om the Home Media Galle r y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Playing discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Playing video files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Playing image files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Playing audio files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Playing in the desi r ed o r der (HMG Playlist) . . . . . . . . 32 05 Adjusting audio and video Adjusting the video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Adjusting the audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Adjusting the Audio DRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Adjusting the audio delay (Li p Sync) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 06 Advanced settings Changing the settin gs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 O pe r ating th e Initial Set u p sc r een . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Softwa r e u p dating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Resto r ing all the settings to the facto r y defa ult settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 About the audio ou t p ut settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Language Code Table and Count r y/Ar ea Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 07 Additional information Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Cautions on use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Moving th e p layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Place of installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Tu r n the p owe r off when not using the p laye r . . . . . . 54 Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Cleaning the p layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Caution fo r whe n the unit is installed in a r ack with a glass doo r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Cleaning the p ickup lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Handling discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 T r oubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 KURO LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Netwo r k . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Othe r s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Glossa r y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 S p ecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 5 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
01 6 En Chapter 1 Before you start WhatâÂÂs in the box â¢R e m o t e c o n t r ol x 1 ⢠Video/audio cable (yellow/white/ r ed p lugs) x 1 ⢠AA/R6 d ry cell batte r ies x 2 â¢W a rr anty ca r d â¢O p er ating instr uctions (this document) ⢠U.K., Australia and New Zealand models: Powe r co r d x 1 Others: Powe r co r d x 2 Putting the batteries in the remote control 1 Open the rear cover. 2 Insert the batteries (AA/R6 x 2). Inse r t as indicated by the ï« /ïª ma r ks into the batte r y com p ar tment. 3 Close the rear cover. Close secu r ely (a click should be hea r d). Caution ⢠Do not use any batte r ies othe r than th e ones s p ecified. Also, do not use a new batte r y togethe r with an old one. ⢠When loadin g the batte r ies into the r emote cont r ol, set them in the pr o pe r di r ection, as i ndicated by the p olar ity mar ks ( ï« and ïª ). ⢠Do not heat batte r ies, disassemble them, o r th r ow them into fl ames o r wate r . ⢠Batte r ies may have diffe r ent voltages, even if they look simila r . Do not use diffe r ent kinds of batte r ies togeth e r . â¢T o pr event lea kage of batte r y fluid, r emove the batte r ies if you do not p la n to use the r emo te cont r ol fo r a long p er iod of time (1 month o r mo r e). If the fluid should leak, w i p e it ca r efully off the inside of the case, then inse r t new batte r ies. If a batte r y should leak and the fluid shou ld get on you r skin, flush it off with la r ge quantities of wate r . ⢠When dis posing of used batte r ie s, p lease comp ly with gove r nmental r egulations o r envi r onme ntal p ublic institutio nâÂÂs r ules that a pp ly in you r count r y/a r ea. ⢠WARNING Do not use o r sto r e batte r ies in dir ect sunlight o r othe r excessively hot p lace, such as inside a ca r o r nea r a heate r . This can cause batte r ies to leak, ove r heat, ex p lode o r ca tch fi r e. It can also r educe the life o r p er for mance of batte r ies. D3-4-2-3-3_En P r ess lightly on this p ar t and slide into the di r ection of the a rr ow. Inse r t the negative ( ïª ) side fi r st. LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 6 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
7 En 01 Types of discs/files that can be played Playable discs Discs with the lo go marks below indicated on the disc la bel, package or jacket can be played. âÂÂBlu-ray Discâ and are trademarks. is a trademark of DVD Form at/Logo Li censing Corporation. Disc typ e Logo Applicatio n format BDMV 1 1. Inc luding the AVCHD fo r mat. BDAV DVD-Video DVD VR CD-DA DTS-CD DATA-DIS C 2 2. Discs on which video, image o r audio files a r e r ecor ded. BD 3 3. Incl uding dual-laye r ed di scs. BD-ROM ï± ï± ï³ï³ï³ï³ BD-R 4 4. Finalize (close) them befo r e p laying them on this p layer . ï± ï± ï³ï³ï³ï³ BD-RE ï± ï± ï³ï³ï³ï³ DVD DVD-ROM ï±ï³ï±ï³ ï³ï± DVD-R 3 , 4,5 5. DVD -R fo r Autho r ing discs (3.95 and 4.7 GB) cannot be p layed. ï±ï³ï± ï±ï³ï± DVD-RW 4,6 6. Ve r sion 1.0 DVD -RW discs cannot be p layed. ï±ï³ï± ï±ï³ï± DVD R 3,4 ï±ï³ï±ï³ ï³ï± DVD RW 4 ï±ï³ï±ï³ ï³ï± CD CD-DA (Audio CD) ï³ï³ï³ï³ ï± ï³ CD-R 4 ï³ï³ï³ï³ ï± ï± CD-RW 4 ï³ï³ï³ï³ ï± ï± CD-ROM ï³ï³ï³ï³ ï± ï± LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 7 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
01 8 En ï° Discs that cannot be played ⢠HD DVDs â¢D V D A u d i o d i s c s â¢D V D - R A M d i s c s â¢S A C D s â¢V i d e o C D s â¢S V C D s It is p ossible that some discs ot he r than th e ones listed above may not be p layable eithe r . Note ⢠Some discs cannot be p layed, even if one of the logo ma r ks on the pr evious p age is indicated. â¢T o p lay 8 cm discs, set the disc in the 8 cm disc de pr ession in the cente r of the disc t r ay. N o ada p te r is necessa r y. 8 cm BD-ROMs cannot be p layed. ï° About audio formats The following audio f o r mats a r e su pp o r ted on th is p laye r: â¢D o l b y T r ueHD â¢D o l b y D i g i t a l P l u s â¢D o l b y D i g i t a l â¢D T S - H D M a s t e r Audio â¢D T S - H D H i g h R e s o l u t i o n A u d i o ⢠DTS Digital Su rr ound â¢M P E G ⢠MPEG-2 AAC â¢L i n e a r PC M To enjoy the su rr o und sound of Dolby T r ueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-HD Maste r Audio and DTS-HD High Resolutio n Audio, it is r ecommended to connect th e p layer to an AV r eceiver or amp lifie r comp atible with these audio fo r mats using an HDMI cable. Afte r loading a BD containing sound in one o f these audio fo r mats, select the audio fo r mat on the menu sc r een. See About the audio output se ttings on p age 45 fo r the out p ut condit ions of the diffe r ent fo r mats. Manufactured under licens e from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the d ouble-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Manufactured under lic ense under U.S. Patent #âÂÂs: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974 ,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,392,195; 7,272,56 7; 7,333,929; 7,2 12,872 & other U.S. and worldwid e patents issued & pending. DTS is a registered trademark and th e DTS log os, Symbol, DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master Audio | Essential are trademarks of DTS, Inc. é 19 96-2008 DTS, Inc. Al l Rights Reserved. ï° Playing BDs ⢠BDs (BDMV) com p atible with the fo r mats bel ow can be p layed. âÂÂB l u - r ay Disc Read-Only (ROM) For mat Ver sion 2 âÂÂB l u - r ay Disc Recor dable (R) For mat Ver sion 2 âÂÂB l u - r ay Disc Rewr itable (RE) For mat Ver sion 3 This p laye r su pp o r ts BD-ROM P r ofile 2. BONUSVIEW functions suc h as p layback of seconda r y video (Pictu r e-in-Pictu r e) and seconda r y audio can be used. The data used with th e BONUSVIEW functions (the seconda r y video (Pictu r e-in-Pictu r e) and seconda r y audio data) m ay be sto r ed in the stor age. Fo r details on seconda r y video and seconda r y audio p layback, r efer to the discâÂÂs inst r uc tions. âÂÂBONUSVIEWâ is trademark of Blu-ray Disc Association. BD-LIVE functions such as downloading movie t r aile r s o r additional audio and su btitle languages and p laying o n-line games can be enjo yed ove r th e Inte r net. The da ta download ed with th e BD-LIVE function (t r aile r s, etc.) is sto r ed in the stor age. Ref e r to the discâÂÂs inst r uctions fo r de tails about BD- LIVE functions. âÂÂBD-LIVEâ logo is trad emark of Blu-ray Disc Association. With BD-ROMs, it is possible to use BD-J (Java) a pp licatio ns to c r eate high ly inte r active titles, fo r exam p le incl uding games . Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or regist ered trademarks of Sun Microsys tems, Inc. in the U.S. and ot her countri es. The p layer âÂÂs inter nal stor age has a maximum c ap acity of r oughly 1 GB. Use an exter nal stor age connected to the USB po r t if you want to sto r e la r ge quantities of data ( p age 16). If a message saying the r e is not enough sto r age s p ace a pp ea r s, e r ase an y unnecessa r y data ( p age 42). ⢠BDs (BDAV) com p atible with the fo r mats b elow can be p layed. âÂÂB l u - r ay D i sc Reco r da ble (R) Fo r mat Ve r sion 1 âÂÂB l u - r ay Disc Rewr itable (R E) For mat Ver sion 2 LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 8 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
9 En 01 ï° Playing DVDs This label indic ates playback compatibil ity with DVD-RW discs recorded in VR format (Video Recordin g format). However, for discs recorded with a record-only-once encrypted program, playbac k can only be achieved using a CPRM co mpatible device. The AVCHD is a high definition (HD) digital video came r a r ecor der fo r mat r ecor ding high-definition onto ce r tain media by using highly efficient codec technolo gies. âÂÂAVCHDâ and t he âÂÂAVCHDâ logo ar e trademarks of Panasonic Corporation and Sony Corporation. ï° About region numbers Blu- r ay Disc Playe r and BD-ROM o r DVD-Video discs a r e assigned r egion numbe r s acco r ding to the r egion in which they a r e sold. This p laye r âÂÂs r egion numbe r s a r e: â¢B D - R O M : â U.K., Australia and New Zealand models: B â Other s : A â¢D V D - V i d e o : â U.K. models : 2 â Australia and New Zealand models : 4 âÂÂO t h e r s : 3 Discs not including thes e numbe r s cannot be p layed. Discs p layable on this p laye r a r e as shown below. â¢B D s : â U.K., Australia and New Zealand models: B (including B) and ALL â Other s : A (including A) and ALL â¢D V D s : â U.K. models: 2 (including 2) and ALL â Australia and New Zealand models : 4 (including 4) and ALL â Other s: 3 (inclu ding 3) and ALL ï° Playing CDs Rega r ding co p y pr otected CDs: This p la yer is designed to confo r m to the s p ecifications of the Audio CD fo r mat. This p laye r does not su pp o r t the p layback o r function of discs that do not confo r m to these s p ecifications. ï° DualDisc playback A DualDisc is a new two-side d disc, one side of whic h contains DVD content â video, audio, etc. â while the othe r side co ntains non-DVD co ntent such as digita l audio mate r ial . The DVD side of a DualD isc can be p layed on this p lay er (excluding any DVD-Audio content). The non-DVD, audio side of the disc is not com p atible with this p layer . It is p ossible that when loading o r ejecting a DualDisc, the o pp osite side to that being p layed will be sc r atched. Sc r atched discs may not be p layable. Fo r mo r e detailed info r mation on the DualDisc s p ecificatio n, p lease r efe r to the disc manufactu r er o r disc r e taile r . ï° Playing discs created on computers or BD/DVD recorder s â¢I t m a y n o t b e p ossible to p lay discs r ecor ded using a com p ute r due to the a pp lication settings o r com p ute r âÂÂs envi r onment settings. Reco r d discs in a fo r mat p layable on this p layer . For detail s, contac t the deale r . â¢I t m a y n o t b e p ossible to p lay discs r ecor ded using a com p ute r o r a BD/DVD r eco r de r , if bu r n qual ity is not good due to cha r acter istics of the disc, sc r atches, di r t on the disc, di r t on the r ecor der âÂÂs lens, etc. Playable files Video, image and audio files r ecor ded on DVDs and CDs can be p layed. Caution ⢠In DVD, only the one r eco r ded by the ISO 9660 file system can be p layed. ⢠Some files may not be p layable. â¢F o r some f iles, it may not be p ossible to use cer tain functions du r ing p layback. ⢠It may not be p ossible to p lay some files, even if they have the extension of a file p layable on this p layer . â¢F i l e s pr otected by DRM (Digital Rights Management) cannot be p la yed (not including DivX VOD file s). ï° Supported video file formats â¢D i v X DivX î is a digital video f o r mat c r eated by DivX, Inc. This is an offi cial DivX Ce r tified o r DivX Ult r a Ce r tifi ed device that p lays DivX video. Confo r m to the size unde r 720 x 576 p ixels/720 x 480 p ixels. DivX files encoded with GMC/Q p el o p tion cannot be p layed. Only audio si gnals wit h MP3 o r Dolby Digital (AC3) fo r mat a r e out p ut. Note that files othe r than the ones con taining DivX video cannot be p layed, even if they have the extension âÂÂ.aviâÂÂ. DivX î is a registered trademar k of DivX, In c., and is used under license. âÂÂP l a y s D i v X î video LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 9 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
01 10 En Note â¢T h i s D i v X î Ce r tified device must be r egister ed in o r de r to p lay DivX Video-on-De mand (VOD) content. Fi r st gene r ate the DivX VOD r egist r ation code fo r you r device and submit it du r ing the r egistr atio n pr ocess. [Im p or ta nt: DivX VOD content is pr otected by a DivX DRM (Digital Rights Management) system that r estr icts p layback to r egiste r ed DivX Cer tified devices. If you t r y to p lay DivX VO D content not autho r ized fo r you r device, the message Authorization Er ror will be dis p layed and you r content will not p lay.] Lea r n mo r e at www.divx.com/vod. âÂÂT h i s p layer âÂÂs DivX VOD r egistr atio n code can be checked at Initial Set up ï¤ Playback ï¤ DivX VOD ï¤ Reg i stration Code ( p ag e 39). â The numbe r of views is r estr icted fo r some DivX VOD files. When such files a r e p layed on this p layer , the r ema ining number of views is disp layed. Files fo r which the r emaining numbe r of views has r eached 0 cannot be p layed ( Rental Expired is dis p layed). Files fo r which the numbe r of views is not r est r icted can be p la yed as many times as you like (the r emaining numbe r of views is not dis p layed). ï° Supported image file formats ⢠JPEG File fo r mat: JFIF Ve r . 1.02/Exif Ve r . 2.2 Resoluti on: U p to 4096 x 4096 p ixels Only baseline JPEG files a r e su pp o r ted. ï° Supported audio file formats ⢠Windows Med ia⢠Audio 9 (WMA9 ) Bit r ate: U p to 192 kb p s Sam p ling f r equencies: 22.05 kHz, 32 kHz, 4 4.1 kHz and 48 kHz Windows Media is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsof t Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. This product includ es technology owned by Microsoft Corporation and cann ot be used or distribute d without a license from Microsof t Licensing, Inc. ⢠MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3) Bit r ate: U p to 320 kb p s Sam p ling f r equencies: 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 1 2 kHz, 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz ï° Playable file extensions ⢠Video files .divx and .avi ⢠Image f iles .j p g and .j p eg ⢠Audio files .wma and .m p 3 Part Names and Functions Remote Control 1 ïµ STANDBY/ON â P r ess to tur n the p ower on and off. 2 TV CONTROL â ( p age 19) 3 AUDIO â ( p age 26) 4S U B T I T L E â ( p age 25) 5 Number buttons â Use these to select and p lay the title/cha p te r /t r ack you want to view o r listen to and to select items f r om menus. CLEAR â P r ess to clear the numer ic number , etc. ENTER â P r ess to execute the selected item or enter a setting that has been changed, etc. 6 SECON DARY AUDIO â ( p age 26) SECONDARY VIDEO â ( p age 26) STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE FL DIMMER CLEAR ENTER VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN BD PLAYER PLAY PREV PAUSE STOP NEXT RED GREEN BLUE YELLOW VIDEO ADJUST INPUT SELECT TV CONTROL CH VOL AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY OUTPUT RESOLUTION ENTER 10 7 8 4 12 13 1 2 3 5 6 9 11 14 18 20 17 19 21 15 16 22 23 LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 10 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
11 En 01 7 VIDEO SELECT â ( p age 21) 8 HOME MEDIA GALLERY â ( p age 31) 9T O P M E N U â P r ess to dis p lay the to p menu of the BD- ROM o r DVD-Video . 10 ï© /ïª /ï« /ï¬ â Use to select items, change settings and move the cu r sor . ENTER â P r ess to execute the selected item or enter a setting that has been changed, etc. 11 HOME MENU â ( p age 36) 12 ï¤ PLAY â ( p age 24) ïÂÂ¥ PAUSE â ( p age 24) ï§ STOP â ( p age 24) ï¯ PR EV/ï° NEXT â ( p age 25) ï /ï± / â ( p age 25) / ï²/ ï® â ( p age 25) 13 R ED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE â Use these to navigate BD-ROM menus. 14 VIDEO ADJUST â ( p age 34 ) 15 ï¨ OPEN/CLOSE â P r ess to o p en and close the disc t r ay. 16 FL DIMMER â W hen pr essed, the b r ightness of the p layer âÂÂs fr ont p anel disp lay and the status of the indicato r s on the p laye r âÂÂs f r ont p ane l change s. 17 ANGLE â ( p age 25) 18 OUTPUT RESO LUTION â ( p age 21) 19 PLAY MODE â ( p age 28) 20 POP UP MENU/MENU â P r ess to dis p lay the BD- ROM o r DVD-Video menus. 21 DISPLAY â ( p age 26) 22 TOOLS â ( p age 20) 23 RETURN â P r ess to r etur n to the pr evious sc r een. Front Panel 1 ïµ STANDBY/ON â P r ess to tur n the p ower on a nd off. When the p ower is on , the indica to r is lit. 2 FL OFF indicator â Lights when the p layer âÂÂs f r ont p anel disp lay is tur ned off pr essing FL DIMMER . 3 ï¯/ ï â P r ess to skip to the beginning of the pr evious title/cha p ter /tr ack/file . Pr ess and hold to sta r t r eve r se scanning ( p age 25). ï® /ï° â P r ess to skip to the beginning of the next title/cha p te r /t r ack/file . P r ess and hold to sta r t fo r war d scanning ( p age 25). ïÂÂ¥ â P r ess dur ing p layback to p ause. Pr ess agai n to r estar t p la yback. ï§ â P r ess to stop p layback. When the p ower is on, the above button indicato r s a r e lit. 4 Remote control sensor â Point the r emote cont r ol to this, then o p er ate i t within a ppr ox imately 7 m. The p layer may have tr ouble cap tur ing r emote contr ol signals if the r e is a fluo r escent light nea r by. If this ha pp ens, move the p laye r away f r om the fluo r escent light. 5 Disc tray 6 Blu-ray in dicator â Lights when the p ower is tu r ned on. 7 ï¨ OPEN/CLOSE â P r ess to op en and close the disc t r ay. 8 Front panel display 9P Q L S i n d i c a t o r â ( p age 14) 10 HDMI indicator â ( p age 13) 11 ï¤ â P r ess to sta r t p layback. Front panel display Indicators Front panel buttons Blu-ray PQLS HDMI 1 1. This lights when an H DMI-com p atible device is connected to an HDMI OUT te r mina l ( p age 13). FL OFF B r ight Lit B r ight Lit Lit Off Medium Lit B r ight Lit Lit Off Da r kL i tD a r kL i t L i t O f f O f fO f fO f fO f fO f f L i t 1 11 5 4 2 7 8 6 9 3 10 LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 11 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
01 12 En Front Panel Display 1 ï¤ â ( p age 24) 2 ïÂÂ¥ â ( p age 24) 3H D â This lights when an HD MI cable is c onnected and video signals a r e being out p ut with a r esolution of 1080/50i, 1080/50 p , 720/50 p , 1080/24 p , 1080 /60i, 1080/60 p o r 720/60 p . It also lights when a com p onent video cable is connected and video sig nals a r e being out p ut with a r esolu tion of 1080/60i o r 720/60 p . 4L A N â ( p age 17) 5 Character disp lay â Dis p lays the title/cha p ter /tr ack numbe r , ela p sed time, etc. 6 24HZ/ 50HZ/60H Z â The f r equency of the video f r am e o r field being out p ut lights. 7E X T â ( p age 16) 8C O N T R O L â ( p age 14) Rear Panel 1 AUDIO OUT te rminals â ( p age 16) 2 VIDEO OUT terminals VIDEO â ( p age 16) COMPONENT VIDEO â ( p age 16) 3A C I N â ( p age 17) 4 CONTROL IN terminal â Use to cont r ol this p layer f r om the r emote senso r of anothe r Pionee r com p onent with a CONTROL OUT te r minal and bea r ing the ï± ma r k. Connec t the CO NTROL OUT te r minal of the ot he r com p onent to CONTROL IN on this p laye r using a mini- p lug co r d (comme r cially available). Caution â¢B e s u r e to connect cables for outp utting the a udio and video signals. ⢠When connected via System Cont r ol , p oint the r emote contr ol towar d the connected comp onent (such as an AV r eceiver or am p li fie r ). The r em ote will not wo r k co rr ectly when p ointed at this p layer . ⢠You cannot use System Cont r ol with com p onents that do not have a System Con t r ol te r minal o r with com p onents manuf actu r ed by com p anies othe r than Pionee r . 5 DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL) terminal â ( p age 16) 6 HDMI OUT terminal â ( p age 15) 7U S B (BD ST ORAGE) port â ( p age 16) 8 LAN (100) terminal â ( p age 17) 9 RS-232C termin al â This te r minal is not used. LAN HD 24HZ 50HZ 60HZ CONTROL EXT 1 5 6 7 8 2 4 3 AC IN LAN (100) HDMI OUT OUTPUT COMPONENT VIDEO DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL CONTROL IN Y R AUDIO VIDEO L P B P R RS-232 C USB (BD STORAGE) 3 8 7 6 5 4 2 1 9 LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 12 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
13 En 02 Chapter 2 Connecting up Be su r e to tu r n off the p ower and un p lug the p ower co r d f r om the p owe r outlet whenev e r making o r chang ing connection s. Afte r connecting, make the settings a t the Setup Navigato r menu acco r ding to the typ e of cable connected ( p a ge 18). Also r efe r to the op er ating instr uctions of the device being connected. Connecting using an HDMI cable The audio and v ideo signals can be t r ansfe rr ed to HDMI- com p atible devices as digital signals with no loss of sound o r video quality. Note ⢠Make the settings at the Setup Navigator menu acco r ding to connected HDM I-com p atible devi ce ( p age 18). â¢T h e HDMI indicator on the p lay er âÂÂs f r ont p anel lights when an HDMI-com p atible device i s connected to an HDMI OUT te r minal ( p age 11). ⢠1080 p video si gnals ma y not be o ut p ut, de p ending on the HDMI cable being used. About HDMI This p laye r inco rp o r ates High-Defin ition Mult imedia Inte r face (HDMIâ¢) technology. HDMI, the HDMI Logo and High -Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or re gistered tradem arks of HDMI Licensin g, LLC. The p laye r su pp o r ts Dee p Colo r. The conventional p layer s can t r ansmit a video signal with 8 bit co lo r de p th in the YCbC r 4:4:4 o r RGB fo r mats, t he p layer s su pp or ting Deep Color can t r ansmit a video signal with a colo r bit de p th of g r eater than 8 bits p e r colo r com p onent. Subtle colo r g r adations can be r e pr oduced when conn ected to a TV that su pp or ts Deep Colo r . This pr oduct is com p atible with âÂÂx.v.Colo r â that have th e ca p ab ility to r ealize a wi de-gamut colo r sp ace based on the xvYCC s p ecifications. Playing video si gnals confo r ming to âÂÂxvYCCâ standa r ds on this p layer when connected to an âÂÂx .v.Colo r âÂÂ- com p atible TV, etc., ex p ands colo r r e pr oducti on ca p abilitie s, allowing natu r al colo r s to be r e pr oduced mo r e faithfully than eve r . âÂÂx.v.Colo r â is a pr omotio n name given to the pr oducts that have the ca p ability to r ealize a wide-gam ut colo r sp ac e based on the inte r na tional standa r d s p ecification s defined as xvYCC. âÂÂx.v.ColorâÂÂ, and are trademarks of Sony Corporation. ï° Audio signals that can be transferred with the playerâÂÂs HDMI OUT terminal â¢D o l b y T r ueHD â¢D o l b y D i g i t a l P l u s â¢D o l b y D i g i t a l â¢D T S - H D M a s t e r Audio ⢠DTS-HD High Resolution Audi o ⢠DTS Digi tal Su rr ound ⢠MPEG-2 AAC â¢L i n e a r PCM Linea r PCM audio signals meeting the following conditions can be out p ut: âÂÂS a m p ling fr equency: 32 kHz to 192 kHz âÂÂN u m b e r of channels: Up to 8 (up to 6 for a 192 kHz sam p lin g f r equency) Fo r details, see About the audio o utput settings on p age 45. ï° About the HDMI High Speed Transmission This p laye r out p uts 1080/50 p , 1080/60 p and Dee p Co lo r video signals. If you r TV su pp o r ts 108 0/50 p , 1080/60 p o r Dee p Colo r signals, use a High S p eed HD MI⢠cable in o r de r to take advantage of the max imum pe r fo r man ce the p layer and TV can offe r . Also set HDMI High Speed Transmission to On ( p age 38). High S p eed HDMI⢠cables a r e tested to ca rr y signals u p to 1080 p . 1080/50i, 1080/50 p , 720/50 p , 1080/24 p , 1080/60i, 1080/60 p and 720/60 p video signals that a r e ca p able of Dee p Colo r ca n also be ca rr ied. LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 13 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
02 14 En Note â¢S e t HDMI High Speed Transmission to Off when using an HDMI cable othe r than a High S p eed HDMI⢠cable (a Standa r d HDMI⢠cable). ⢠The follow ing r estr ictions a pp ly when HDMI High Speed Transmission is s et to Off : âÂÂD e e p Color signals ar e not outp ut. âÂÂI f t h e o u t p ut video r esolution is set to Auto , the signals a r e out p ut with a r esolution of 1080/50i o r 1080/60i when TVâÂÂs pr efe rr ed r esolution is 1080/50p o r 1080/60 p. â W hen the out p ut video r e solution is set to 576i/480i o r 576 p /480 p , Dolby T r ueHD and DTS-HD Maste r Audio audio signals a r e out put as Dolby Digital, DTS Digital Su rr ound o r lin ea r PCM signals. 96 kHz o r 192 kHz multi-channel audio signa ls a r e out p ut as linea r PCM 2-channel audi o signals ( p age 45). ⢠When an HDMI cable with a built-in eq ualize r is connected, it may not o p er ate pr op er ly. ï° When connected to a DVI device ⢠It is not possible to connect DVI devices (computer displays, for ex ample) that are not compatible wi th HDCP. HDCP is a s p ecific ation to pr otect audiovis ual conten t ac r oss the DVI/HDMI inte r face. ⢠No audi o signals a r e out p ut. Connect using an audio cable, etc. â¢T h i s p layer is designed for connectio n with HDMI- com p atible devices. W hen connected to a DVI device, it may not o p er ate pr op er ly de p ending on the DVI device. About KURO LINK function The functions listed below wo r k when a Pionee r KURO LINK-com p atible Flat Sc r een TV, AV system (AV r eceive r o r am p lifie r , etc.) o r HD A V C o n v er ter is connected to the p layer using an HDM I cable. Functions operated fro m the TV Such p layer o p er ations as star ting and sto pp ing p layback and dis p laying the menus can be p er for med f r om the Flat Sc r een TV. Auto-select function The in p ut switches automatically on the Flat Sc r een TV, AV system (AV r eceiver or am p lifier , etc.) and HD AV Conve r te r when p layback is sta r ted on the p laye r o r the Home Menu o r Home Media Galle r y is dis p layed. When the in p ut is switc hed, the p la yback p ict u r e, the Home Menu o r Home Media Galle r y a pp ea r s on the Flat Sc reen TV. Simultaneous po wer function When p la yback on the p la yer is star te d or the Home Menu o r Home Media Galle r y is dis p layed, if the Flat Sc r een TVâÂÂs p ower was off, its p ower tur ns on automatically. When the Flat Sc r ee n TVâÂÂs p ower is tur ned off, the p layer âÂÂs p ower automa tically tu r ns off. Unified language fun ction When the language info r mation f r om a connected Flat Sc r een TV is r eceived, you can h ave the p laye r âÂÂs on-sc r een dis p lay language change automatically to that of the Flat Sc r een TV. Th is function is ava ilable only when p layback is sto pp ed and the menu scr een is not dis p layed. Ca ut ion â¢A l s o r efe r to the op er ating instr uctions of the Fla t Sc r een TV, AV system (AV r eceive r o r am p lifie r , etc.) and HD AV Conve r ter . Note ⢠CONTROL on the p laye r âÂÂs f r ont p anel dis p lay light s when the KURO LINK function is activated ( p age 12). ï° To use the KURO LINK function ⢠The KURO LINK func tion only wo r ks wh en out p utting video signals f r om the HDMI OUT te r mina l. ⢠The KURO LINK function wo r ks when KURO LINK is set to On on the p layer (p age 38). ⢠The KURO LINK f unction o p er at e s wh e n K UR O L I NK is set to On fo r all devices connected with HDMI cables. Once connections and the settings of all the devices a r e finished, be su r e to check that the p la yer âÂÂs p ictur e is outp ut to the Flat Scr een TV. (Also check afte r chang ing the connected devi ces and r econnecting HDMI cables.) The KURO LINK f unction may not o p er ate pr op er ly if t he p layer âÂÂs p ictur e is not pr o pe r ly out p ut to the Flat Sc r een TV. â¢U s e H i g h S p eed HDMI⢠cables when using the KURO LINK function. The KURO LINK function may not o p er ate pr op er ly if othe r HDMI cables a r e u sed. â¢F o r some m odels, the KURO LINK function may be r efe rr ed to as âÂÂHDM I Contr olâÂÂ. â¢T h e S i m u l t a n e o u s p ower functi on is activat ed when the p laye r is set as follows ( p age 38): Display Power On : On Display Power Off : On ï° About PQLS function The PQLS (P r ecisio n Quar tz Lock System ) is a tr ansfer cont r ol technolo gy using the KURO LINK function . The p layer âÂÂs outp ut signals ar e contr olled fr om the AV r eceiver or amp lifi er to achieve high quality sound p layback using the quar tz oscillator of AV r eceiver or am p lifie r . Th is eliminates the influence of the jitte r gene r ated u p on tr ansfe r which can adve r sely affect the sound quality. â¢T h e p layer su pp or ts the âÂÂP QLS 2ch Audioâ function that is only activated when p laying a udio CDs (CD- DAs), and the âÂÂPQLS Multi S u rr ou ndâ function that is activated when p laying all disc s (BDs, DVDs, etc.) with audio out p ut i n linea r PCM. LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 14 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
15 En 02 ⢠The âÂÂPQLS 2ch Audioâ f uncti on is only activated when a Pionee r AV r eceiver o r am p li fier com p atible with the âÂÂPQLS 2ch Audioâ function is connected di r ectly to the p laye r âÂÂs HDMI OUT te r minal using an HDMI cable, and when the p layer is set as follows ( p age 38): KURO LINK : On PQLS : Auto ⢠The âÂÂPQLS Mu lti Su rr oundâ function is only activate d when a Pionee r AV r eceiver or am p lif ier com p atible with the âÂÂPQLS Multi Su rr oundâ f unction is connected di r ectly to the p layer âÂÂs HDMI OUT te r minal using an HDMI ca ble, and when the p laye r is set as follows ( p age 38): HDMI Audio Out : PCM KURO LINK : On PQLS : Auto â¢A l s o r efer to th e op er ating instr uctions of AV r eceiver o r am p li fi e r . ⢠Please see the Pionee r website fo r AV r eceiver s o r am p lifie r s th at su pp o r t the PQLS function. Caution â¢I f t h e o u t p ut video r esolution is switched, the PQLS function may not wo r k. The function will wo r k again once p layback has been sto pp ed then r esta r ted. Note â¢T h e PQLS indica tor on the p la ye r âÂÂs f r ont p anel lights when the PQLS function i s activated ( p age 12). ï° About connections to components of other makes supporting the KURO LINK function The functions listed below wo r k when a TV o r AV syst em (AV r eceive r o r amp li fie r , etc.) su pp o r ting the p laye r âÂÂs KURO LIN K function is co nnected to the p layer using an HDMI cable. (De p ending on you r TV o r A V system (AV r eceiver or amp li fier , etc.), it cou ld ha pp en that not all of the functions will wo r k.) ⢠Functions o p e r ated f r om the TV ⢠Auto-select function ⢠Simultaneous p owe r functio n ⢠Unified language fun ction Please see the P ionee r website fo r the latest in fo r mation on b r ands and model numbe r s of othe r br an ds that su pp o r t the KU RO LINK fu nction. Connecting a TV See Connecting an AV receiver or ampli fier below to connect an AV r eceiver o r amp lifier usi ng an HDMI cable. Caution â¢H o l d t h e p lug when connecting and disconnecting the cable. ⢠Placing a load on the p lug cou ld r esult in faulty contact and no video signals being out p ut. Connecting an AV receiver or amplifier Connect to an A V r eceiver or am p lifier in o r der to enjoy the su rr oun d sound of Dolby T r ueHD, D olby Digita l Plus, Dolby Digital, DTS-HD Maste r Audio, DTS-HD High Resolutio n Audio o r DTS Digita l Su rr ound. Fo r inst r uction s on connec ting the TV a nd s p eake r s to the AV r eceiver o r amp lifier , r efer to the op er ating instr uctions of AV r eceive r o r am p lifie r . Caution â¢H o l d t h e p lug when connecting and disconnecting the cable. â¢P l a c i n g a l o a d o n t h e p lu g could r esult in faulty contact and no video signals being out p ut. LAN (100) HDMI OUT OUTPUT COMPONENT VIDEO DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL CONTROL IN Y R AUDIO VIDEO L P B P R RS-232 C USB (BD STORAGE) Playe r âÂÂs r ea r p anel TV Match t he di r ection of the p lug to the ter minal and inse r t st r aight. To HDMI in p ut te r minal HDMI cabl e (comme r cially available) It is also p ossible to connect t o an AV r eceive r o r am p lifie r using an HDMI cable (below). Di r ection of signal flow LAN (100) HDMI OUT OUTPUT COMPONENT VIDEO DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL CONTROL IN Y R AUDIO VIDEO L P B P R RS-232 C USB (BD STORAGE) Playe r âÂÂs r ea r p anel To HDMI in p ut te r minal F r om HDMI out p ut te r minal AV r eceiv e r o r am p lifie r To HDMI in p ut te r minal TV HDMI cabl e (comme r cially available) Match the di r ection of the p lug to the te r minal and inse rt st r aight. Di r ection of signal flow HDMI cabl e (comme r cially available) LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 15 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
02 16 En Connecting video and audio cables Note ⢠Make the settings in the Setup Navigator menu acco r ding to the ty p e of cable connected ( p age 18). â¢T o o u t p ut video signals f r om this p layer , connect using one of the following (not inc luding when connected using an HDMI cable): a com p onen t video cable o r a video cable. Connecting a TV using a video/audio cable Caution ⢠Connect the playerâÂÂs vide o output directly to your TV. This p laye r su pp o r ts analog co p y pr otection technology . The r efo r e the p ictur e ma y not be dis p layed pr o pe r ly if connected to a TV via a DVD r ecor der /video deck or whe n p laying the p layer âÂÂs out p ut mate r ial that is r eco r ded by a DVD reco r de r / video deck. Fu r ther mo r e, the p ictur e ma y not be dis p layed pr o pe r ly due to th e co p y pr otection when the p laye r is conne cted to a TV with a buil t-in video deck. Fo r details, contact the manufactu r er of you r TV. Note â¢V i d e o s i g n a l s a r e outp ut with a r esolutio n of 576/50i o r 480/60i when connected using a video cable. ⢠When connected to the TV using a com p onent video cable, video signals a r e not out p ut with a resolutio n of 1080/50i, 1080/50 p , 720/50 p , 1080/24 p or 1080/60 p . â¢D e p ending on the outp ut video r esolution setting, the p ictur e may not be outp ut (p age 21). Connecting an AV receiver or amplifier using an optical digital audio cable Note ⢠To switch the video f r om the AV r eceiver or am p li fier , also conne ct the video out p ut te r min als. Connecting components to the USB port The data downloaded with the BD-LIVE function and the data used wit h the BON USVIEW fun ction when p laying BD-ROMs can be sto r ed on a device con nected to the USB po r t (exte r nal sto r age). About USB (external storage) devices The USB (exte r nal sto r age) devices that can be connected to the p layer ar e as shown below. â¢U S B 2 . 0 - c o m p at ible memor y devices or har d disks ⢠FAT16 o r FAT32 file system, minimum 1 GB ca p acity (2 GB o r mo r e r ecommended) Note ⢠Devices fo r matted with a file system othe r than t h e above cannot be used. Such devices may howeve r be usable if they a r e fo r matted f r om the p layer . â¢E x t e r nal sto r age devices may not be r ecognize d if they contain multi p le p ar titions. ⢠Some exte r nal sto r age devices ma y not o p er ate with this p lay e r . â¢O p er ation of exter nal stor age devices (USB memor y devices, exte r nal ha r d di sks, etc.) is not gua r anteed. OUTPUT COMPONENT VIDEO CONTROL IN Y R AUDIO VIDEO L P B P R TV Playe r âÂÂs r ea r p anel To com p onent video in p ut te r minals A com p onent cable o r th r ee comme r cially available video cables can be used instead of the video cable (yellow p lug) of the included video/audio cable fo r connection. Di r ection of signal flow Red White It is also p ossible to connect to an AV r eceiver or am p lifier . Connect the audio signals using an o p tical digital audio cable o r an audio cable (2 channels) (below). To video/audio in p ut te r minals Video/audio cable (included) Yellow LAN (100) HDMI OUT OUTPUT COMPONENT VIDEO DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL CONTROL IN Y R AUDIO VIDEO L P B P R RS-232 C USB (BD STORAGE) Playe r âÂÂs r ea r p anel To audio in p ut te r minal s AV r eceiv e r o r am p lifie r Red White Di r ection of signal flow 2-channel analog audio can also be connected. To o p tical digital audio in p ut te r minal O p tical digital audio cable (comme r cially available) Video/audio cable (included) LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 16 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
17 En 02 Connecting the USB (external storage) device Caution â¢B e s u r e to tur n the p layer âÂÂs p ower o ff befor e connecting o r disconnecting exte r nal sto r age devices. â¢U s e e m p ty exter nal stor age devices (on which nothing is sto r ed). ⢠When using an exte r nal ha r d disk as the exte r nal sto r age device, be su r e to tu r n on the ha r d diskâÂÂs p ower befor e tur ning on the p layer âÂÂs p ower . â¢I f t h e e x t e r nal stor age device is wr it e- pr otected, be su r e to disable the w r ite- pr otection. ⢠When connecting the USB cable, hold onto the p lug, set the p lug in the pr o pe r di rection fo r the p or t and ins e r t i t ho r izontally. ⢠Placing excessive loads on the p lug ma y r esult in p oor contact, making it imp ossible to wr ite data on the exte rnal sto r age device. â¢T h e p layer is equi pp ed with an inte r nal s to r age. This inte r nal sto r age cannot be used when an ex te r nal sto r age device is connected. â¢W h e n a U S B m e m o r y device or exter nal har d disk is connected and the p layer âÂÂs p ower is tur ned on, do not un p lug the p owe r co r d. Note â¢T h e EXT in dicato r on the p layer âÂÂs fr ont p anel disp lay lights when data can be sto r ed on the exte r nal sto r age ( p age 12). ⢠Devices may not wo r k i f connected to the USB p or t via a me mo r y ca r d r eader or USB hub. ⢠Use a USB cable with a lengt h of 2 mete r s o r less. Network connection BD-LIVE funct ions such as downloading mov ie t r ailer s o r additional audio and su btitle languages a nd p l aying on-line games can be enjoyed ove r the Inte r net. Th e p layer âÂÂs softwar e can also be u p dated ove r the Inte r net ( p age 44). Connect an Ethe r net hub (o r a r outer with hub functionalit y) that is connected to the Inte r net to the p laye r . Be su r e to use a 100BASE-TX com p atible Ethe r net hub o r r outer . Connecting via an Ethernet hub The p laye r can be connecte d to an Ethe r net hub using a LAN cable. Note ⢠LAN on the p laye r âÂÂs f r ont p anel dis p la y lights when the r e is an active local a r ea netwo r k (LAN) co nnection ( p age 12). â¢I f t h e r e is an available DHC P ser ver in your local ar ea netwo r k, the I P add r ess is obtained automatically. Othe r wise, set IP add r ess manually ( p age 41). â¢F o r some Inter net ser vice pr ovide r s, you may ha ve to set the individual netwo r k configu r ation manua lly. In this case, see p age 41. â¢P i o n e e r is not r esp onsible for any m alfunction of the p layer due to communication e rr or /malfunctions associated with you r netwo r k connection and/o r you r connected equi p ment. Please con t act you r Inte r net se r vice pr ovide r o r netwo r k device manufactu r er . Connecting the power cord Connect the p ower co r d afte r all the connectio ns between devices have been com p let ed. LAN (100) HDMI OUT OUTPUT COMPONENT VIDEO DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL CONTROL IN Y R AUDIO VIDEO L P B P R RS-232 C USB (BD STORAGE) USB memo r y device, etc. Ha r d disk, etc. Playe r âÂÂs r ea r p anel USB cable (comme r cially available) LAN (100) HDMI OUT OUTPUT COMPONENT VIDEO DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL C Y R AUDIO VIDEO L P B P R RS-232 C USB (BD STORAGE) 1 LAN 2 3 WAN LAN cabl e (comme r cially available) Ethe r net hub ( r oute r with hub functionality) Modem Inte r net Playe r âÂÂs r ea r p anel AC IN U T N T VIDEO CONTROL IN VIDEO P R Playe r âÂÂs rea r p anel Powe r co r d (included) To wall o utlet LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 17 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
03 18 En Chapter 3 Getting Started Making settings using the Setup Navigator menu Be su r e to p er for m these settings whe n using the p layer fo r the fi r st time . Caution â¢B e f o r e tur ning on the p ower , check that the connections between the p layer and othe r devices a r e co rr ect. Also, tu r n on the p owe r of the devices connected to the p la yer befo r e tu r ning on the p layer âÂÂs p ower . ⢠When using a Pione e r Flat Sc r een TV o r fr ont pr ojecto r com p atible with th e KURO LINK fu nction, set KURO LINK to On on the connected device befo r e tu r ning on the p laye r âÂÂs p owe r . â¢T h e s c r ee n in step 11 and test tones ar e outp ut simultaneously acco r d ing to the sett ings in ste p s 4 to 7. Lowe r the volume of the devices connected with the p layer . Note â¢W h e n a P i o n e e r Flat Scr een TV or fr ont pr ojector com p atible with the KURO LINK functi on is connect ed to the p layer using an HDMI cabl e, the p layer is automatically set to the op timum p ictur e quality fo r the connected de vice. 1 Turn on the TVâÂÂs power and switch the input. See the TVâÂÂs o p er ating inst ruction s fo r inst r uctions on o pe r ating the TV. 2 Turn on the playerâÂÂs po wer. P r ess ïµ STANDBY/ON. Check that the Setup Navigator menu is dis p layed. ï° If the Setup Navigator menu is not displayed ï¦ Press HOME ME NU to display the Home Menu, select In itial Setup ï¤ Setup Navigator ï¤ Start, then press ENTER. 3 Select the OSD language. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . Example ( U.K. mode ls): When a Pionee r Flat Sc r een TV that is com p atible wit h KURO LINK is connected to this p layer âÂÂs HDMI OUT te r minal, lan guage setti ngs a r e im p or ted f r om the Pionee r Flat Sc r een TVâÂÂs language settings befo r e Setup Navigator begins. 4 Select and set the vi deo and audio output terminals. Select the actually connected video and audio out p ut te r minals. Use ï© /ïª /ï« /ï¬ to select, then pr ess ENTER . Caution ⢠When HDMI is selected fo r Video , no video signals a r e out p ut f r om the COMPON ENT VIDEO o r VIDEO out p ut te r min als. ⢠When COMPONENT VIDEO o r VIDEO is selected at Video , no video signals a r e outp ut fr om the HDMI OUT te r minal. ⢠The video and audio signals out p ut fr om the set ou t p ut te r min als a r e out p ut synch r on ously (li p synch r onization). ⢠When COMPONENT VIDEO o r VIDEO is selected at Video , no sound is out p ut if HDMI is selected at Audio . Follow the pr ocedu r e below to r edo the connections, then select the pr o pe r connection at the setu p sc r een. â W hen connecting using com p onent video cables o r a video cable to wa tch the p ictu r e, connect to an AV r eceiver o r amp lifier , or a TV using either analog audio cables, an o p tical digit a l audio cable ( p age 16). TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER Setting item Output termina l name Video HDMI HDMI OUT COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO OUT COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO Audio HDMI HDMI OUT DIGITAL AUDIO DIGITAL OUT ANALOG AUDIO AUDIO OUT Setup Navigator BD PLAYER Please select the on-screen display language. Audio, subtitle and BDMV/DVD- Video menu language will also be set. LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 18 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
19 En 03 â T o listen to audio with the p layer connected to an AV r eceive r o r amp lifie r with an HDMI cable, connect the TV to the AV r eceiver o r am p lifier using an HDMI cable ( p age 15). â¢W h e n HDMI o r DIGITAL AUDIO is selected at Audio , linea r PCM au dio sign als (2 channel s) a r e out p ut f r om all te r minals othe r than the ones selected at Audio . â¢W h e n ANA LOG AUDIO is selected at Audio , no audio signals a r e out p ut f r om the HDMI OUT o r DIGITAL OUT te r minals . For steps 5 to 8, the step to which you should proceed depends on the comb ination of the Video and Audio settings. 5 Select and set the HDMI High Speed Transmission setting for the HD MI OUT terminal. Use ï« /ï¬ to selec t, then pr ess ENTER . When HDMI High Speed Transmissi on fo r the HDMI OUT te r minal is set to On , use a High S p eed HDMI ⢠cable. The p ict u r e and sound may not be out p ut pr o pe r ly if any othe r HDMI cable ( fo r exam p le a sta nda r d HDMI⢠cable) o r an HDMI cable wi th built-in equalize r is used. 6 Select the output vi deo resolution from the COMPONENT VIDEO output terminals. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . Fo r details on the r esolution settings, see Switching the output video resol ution on p age 21. 7 Select the aspect ratio of your TV. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . 8 Select the PQLS. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . Note ⢠Only when a Pionee r AV r eceiver or amp lifie r is connected , PQLS Sc r een a pp ea r s. ⢠The PQLS function wo r ks when linea r PCM audio signals a r e out p ut. Th e r efor e th e linea r PC M audio signals obt ained by dec oding all au dio signals a r e out p ut f r om HDMI OUT te r minal. Fo r details , see About the audio output settings on p age 45. â¢W h e n Use is select, the p layer is set to the settings below. HDMI Audio Out : PCM KURO LINK : On PQLS : Auto â¢F o r det ails on th e PQLS f unction, About PQLS function on p age 14. 9 Check the settings. Select Proceed , then pr ess ENTER . 10 Ou tput test tones. Use ï« /ï¬ to s elect Yes , then pr ess ENTER . 11 F inish the Setup Navigator menu. Use ï« /ï¬ to s elect Finish , then pr ess ENTE R . To r edo the settings f r om the sta r t, select Go Back . De p ending on the out p ut te r minal setting of ste p 4 o r the H D MI cable be ing used, it may ha pp en that no p ictur e and/o r sound is out p ut. If this ha pp ens, the setu p r etur ns to ste p 4 if the r e is no o p er ation fo r ove r 30 seconds. Once the setu p r etur ns to step 4, r edo the settings accor ding to the connected devices and the HDM I cable being used. 12 Checking the picture quality s ettings or setting the picture quality. If a Pionee r Flat Sc r een TV o r pr ojecto r is connected to the p layer and HDMI is selected for Video in step 4, the p layer sets the p ictur e quality auto matically. The automatic p ictu r e quality setting sc r een a pp ea r s. P r ess ENTER . When the automatic p ictur e quality se tting sc r een does not a pp ea r , the m anual p ictu r e quality setting sc r een a pp ea r s. U se ï©/ ïª to select the connected com p onent, then pr ess ENTE R . Operating the TV with the playerâÂÂs remote control When the manufactu r e r code fo r you r br and of TV is set on the p layer âÂÂs r emote con t r ol, the TV can be o p er ated using the p layer âÂÂs r em ote cont r ol. Caution â¢F o r some models it may not be p ossible to op er ate the TV with the p layer âÂÂs r emote cont r ol, even fo r TVs of b r ands listed on the manufac tu re r code list. â¢T h e s e t t i n g m a y b e r esto r ed to the default afte r the batte r ies a r e r ep laced. If this ha pp ens, r eset it. 1 Input the 2-digit manu facturer code. P r ess the numbe r buttons (0 to 9) to in p ut the code while pr essing TV CONTROL ïµ . Note â¢T h e f a c t o r y setting is 00 (PIONEER). ⢠If you make a mistake when in p utting the code, r elease T V CONTROL ïµ then st a r t ove r fr om th e beginning. TV CONTROL STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE FL DIMMER ENTER INPUT SELECT CH VOL AUDIO VIDEO OUTPUT RESOLUTION CLEAR LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 19 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
03 20 En â¢W h e n t h e r e ar e multip le c odes for a manu factur er , tr y in p utting them in the indicat ed o r de r until the TV can be o p er ated. 2 Check that the TV can be operated . O pe r ate th e TV using TV CONTROL. ïµ â P r ess to tur n the TVâÂÂs p ower on and off. INPUT SELECT â P r ess to switch the TVâÂÂs in p ut . CH /â â P r ess to select the TV channel. VOL /â â P r ess to adjust the volume. TV Preset code list Manufactur er Code(s) Using the TOOLS menu Va r ious functions can be calle d out acco r ding to the p layer âÂÂs op er ating status. PIONEER 00, 31, 32, 07, 36, 42, 51, 22 ACURA 44 ADMIRAL 31 AIWA 60 AKAI 32, 35, 42 AKURA 41 ALBA 07, 39, 41, 44 AMSTRAD 42, 44, 47 ANITECH 44 ASA 45 ASUKA 41 AUDIOGONIC 07, 36 BASIC LINE 41, 44 BAUR 31, 07, 42 BEKO 38 BEON 07 BLAUPUNKT 31 BLUE SKY 41 BLUE STAR 18 BPL 18 BRANDT 36 BTC 41 BUSH 07, 41, 42, 44, 47, 56 CASCADE 44 CATHAY 07 CENTURION 07 CGB 42 CIMLINE 44 CLARIVOX 07 CLATRONIC 38 CONDOR 38 CONTEC 44 CROSLEY 32 CROWN 38, 44 CRYSTAL 42 CYBERTRON 41 DAEWOO 07, 44, 56 DAINICHI 41 DANSAI 07 DAYTON 44 DECCA 07, 48 DIXI 07, 44 DUMONT 53 ELIN 07 ELITE 41 ELTA 44 EMERSON 42 ERRES 07 FERGUSON 07 , 36, 51 FINLANDIA 35, 43, 54 FINLUX 32, 07, 45, 48, 53, 54 FIRSTLINE 40, 44 FISHER 32, 35, 38, 45 FORMENTI 32, 07, 42 FRONTECH 31, 42, 46 FRONTECH / PROTECH 32 FUJITSU 48 FUNAI 40, 46, 58 GBC 32, 42 GE 00, 01, 08, 07, 10, 11 , 17, 02, 28, 18 GEC 07, 34, 48 GELOSO 32, 44 GENERAL 29 GENEXXA 31, 41 GOLDSTAR 10, 23, 21, 02, 07 , 50 GOODMANS 07, 39, 47, 48, 56 GORENJE 38 GPM 41 GRAETZ 31, 42 GRANADA 07, 35, 42, 43, 48 GRADIENTE 30, 57 GRANDIN 18 GRUNDIG 31, 53 HANSEATIC 07, 42 HCM 18, 44 HINARI 07, 41, 44 HISAWA 18 HITACHI 31, 33, 34, 36, 42, 43 , 54, 06, 10, 24, 25, 18 HUANYU 56 HYPSON 07, 18, 46 ICE 46, 47 IMPERIAL 38, 42 INDIANA 07 INGELEN 31 INTERFUNK 31, 32, 07, 42 INTERVISION 46, 49 ISUKAI 41 ITC 42 ITT 31, 32, 42 JEC 05 JVC 13, 23 KAISUI 18, 41, 44 KAPSCH 31 KENDO 42 KENNEDY 32, 42 KORPEL 07 KOYODA 44 LEYCO 07 , 40, 46, 48 LIE SENK & TTER 07 LOEWE 07 LUXOR 32, 42, 43 M - ELECTR ONIC 31, 44 , 45, 54, 56, 07, 36, 51 MAGNADYNE 32, 49 MAGNAFON 49 MAGNAVOX 07, 10, 03, 12, 29 MANESTH 39, 46 MARANTZ 07 MARK 07 MATSUI 07, 39, 40, 42, 44, 47, 48 MCMICHAEL 34 MEDIATOR 07 MEMOREX 44 METZ 31 MINERVA 31, 53 MITSUBISHI 09, 10, 02, 21 , 31 MULTITECH 44, 49 NEC 59 NECKERMANN 31, 07 NEI 07, 42 NIKKAI 05, 07, 41, 46, 48 NOBLIKO 49 NOKIA 32, 42, 52 NORDMENDE 32, 36, 51, 52 OCEANIC 31, 32, 42 ORION 32, 07, 39, 40 OSAKI 41, 46, 48 OSO 41 OSUME 48 OTTO VERSAND 31, 32, 07, 42 PALLADIUM 38 PANAMA 46 PANASONIC 31, 07, 08, 42, 22 PATHO CINEMA 42 PAUSA 44 PHILCO 32, 42 PHILIPS 31, 07, 34, 56, 68 PHOENIX 32 PHONOLA 07 PROFEX 42, 44 PROTECH 07, 42, 44, 46, 49 QUELLE 31, 32, 07, 42 , 45, 53 R - LINE 07 RADIOLA 07 RADIOSHACK 10, 23, 21, 02 RBM 53 RCA 01 , 10 , 15, 16, 17 , 18, 61, 62, 09 REDIFFUSION 32, 42 REX 31, 46 ROADSTAR 41, 44, 46 SABA 31, 36, 42, 51 SAISHO 39, 44, 46 SALORA 31, 32, 42, 43 SAMBERS 49 SAMSUNG 07, 38, 44, 46, 69, 70 SANYO 35, 45, 48, 21 , 14, 91 SBR 07, 34 SCHAUB LORENZ 42 SCHNEIDER 07, 41, 47 SEG 42, 46 SEI 32, 40, 49 SELECO 31, 42 SHARP 02, 19, 27, 67, 90 SIAREM 32, 49 SIEMENS 31 SINUDYNE 32, 39, 40, 49 SKANTIC 43 SOLAVOX 31 SONOKO 07, 44 SONOLOR 31, 35 SONTEC 07 SONY 04 SOUNDWAVE 07 STANDARD 41, 44 STERN 31 SUSUMU 41 SYSLINE 07 TANDY 31, 41, 48 TASHIKO 34 TATUNG 07, 48 TEC 42 TELEAVIA 36 TELEFUNKEN 36, 37, 52 TELETECH 44 TENSAI 40, 41 THOMSON 36, 51, 52, 63 THORN 31, 07, 42, 45, 48 TOMASHI 18 TOSHIBA 05, 02, 26, 21, 53 TOWADA 42 ULTRAVOX 32, 42, 49 UNIDEN 92 UNIVERSUM 31, 07, 38, 42, 45, 46, 54 VES TEL 07 VI CTOR 13 VOXSON 31 WALTHAM 43 WATSON 07 WATT RADIO 32, 42, 49 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 07 YOKO 07, 42, 46 ZENITH 03, 20 TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 20 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
21 En 03 1 Display the TOOLS men u. P r ess TOOLS. 2 Select and set the item. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . Note ⢠Items th at cannot be changed a r e dis p layed in gr ay. The items that c an be selected d e p end on the p la yer âÂÂs status. ï° To change the setting of the selected item Use ï« /ï¬ to ch ange. ï° To close the TOOLS menu P r ess TOOLS o r RETURN. ï° TOOLS menu item list Switching the video output terminal to be viewed Use the pr ocedu r e below to switch the video out p ut signal to be viewed between the HDMI OUT te r minal and an analog ou t p ut te r minal ( COMPONENT VIDEO o r VIDEO out p ut te r minals). Caution â¢T h e p ictur e may n ot be disp layed for a while when the video out p ut te r minal is switched. ⢠When the HDMI OUT te r m inal is selec ted, no video signals a r e ou t p ut f r om the othe r video o ut p ut te r minals. ⢠When a video out p ut te r minal othe r than the HDMI OUT te r minal is selected, no audio and video signals a r e out p ut f r om the HDMI OUT te r minal. ï¦ Press VIDEO SELECT. â¢T h e c u rr ent video out p ut ter minal is disp layed on the TV sc r een and on the p la yer âÂÂs f r ont p anel d is p lay. To switch the video out p ut te r minals, pr ess ï© /ïª . â¢T h e v i d e o o u t p ut ter minal setting can also be switche d by pr essing ï¯ï / ï®ï° on th e p layer âÂÂs fr ont p anel. Switching the output video resolution Use the pr ocedu r e below to switch the out p ut vi deo r esolution fr om the var ious video outp ut ter minals. Caution ⢠On some devices (TV, AV r eceiver or am p lif ier , etc.), the video o r audio may not be out p ut pr op er ly when the r esolution is switched. If this h a pp ens, us e OUTPUT RESOLUTION to set a r esolution at which the video and a udio a r e pr op er ly out p ut. ⢠When video signals a r e being out p ut with a r esolution of 1080/50i, 1080/50 p , 720/50 p , 1080/24 p , 1080/60i, 1080/60 p o r 720/60 p f r om the HDMI OUT te r minal o r COMPONEN T VIDEO out p ut te r minals, the p ictur e may be out p ut with an a s p ect r atio of 16:9, even if the TV Aspect Ratio is set to 4:3 (Standard) . Item Description Play f r om Be ginning Play the select ed title, t r ack o r fil e f r om the sta r t. Slideshow Play a slideshow of th e image files on the selected disc o r folde r . Play Mode Dis p lay the Play Mo de sc r een ( p age 28). Video Adjust Dis p lay the p ictur e qu ality adjustment sc r een ( p age 34). Seconda r y Video Switch the BD-ROMâÂÂs seconda r y vide o (Pictu r e-in-Pictu r e) ( p age 26). Subtitle Switch the subtitles ( p age 25). Angle Switch the BD-ROM/DV D-Video discâÂÂs came r a angles ( p ag e 25). Rotate Rotate the im age while p laying a slideshow ( p age 32). Audio Adjust Dis p lay the aud io adjus tment me nu ( p age 35). Audio Switch the audio ( p age 26). Seconda r y Audio Switch the BD-R OMâÂÂs seconda r y audio ( p age 26). Now Playing Dis p lay the p layback sc r een of the cu rr ently p laying t r ack o r file. O r iginal/Play List Switch the DVD-R/-RWâÂÂs (VR fo r ma t) list sc r een betwe en the o r iginal list and the p laylist. Add to HMG Playlist Add the selected t r ack o r file to the HMG Playlist ( p age 32). Delete f r om HMG Playlist Delete the selected t r ack o r file f r om the HMG Playlist ( p age 33). Out p ut Video Resolution Switch the out p ut video r esolution f r om the va r ious out p ut te r minals ( p age 21). Angle Audio Subtitle Audio Adjust Video Adjust BD PLAYER TOOLS VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY O UTPUT RESOLUTION HDMI (Source Direct) ï¡ ï¢ Video Output T erminal Out p ut video r esolution setting of selected vi deo out p ut te r minal Example: LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 21 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
03 22 En â¢T h e p ictur e may n ot be disp layed for a while when the r esolution is switched. ï¦ Press OUTPUT RESOLUTION. â¢T h e c u rr ent out p ut video r esolution setting is dis p layed on the TV sc r een and on the p laye r âÂÂs f r ont p anel disp lay. To switch the out p ut video r esolution, pr ess OUTPUT RESOLUTION again o r pr ess ï© /ïª . â¢T h e o u t p ut video r esolution dep ends on th e video out p ut te r mi nal ( p age 23). â¢T h e o u t p ut video r esolution setting can also be switched by selecting Output Video Re solution f r om the TOOLS menu. ï° About the frame/field frequency and NTSC/PAL TV systems U.K., Australia and New Zealand models: By facto r y default setting, the f r ame/field f r equency is set fo r an out p ut of 50 Hz, and the video signal out p ut f r om the VIDEO out p ut te r minals is set to be out p ut in the PAL TV sys tem fo r mat. When s ou r ces with a f r ame/field f r equency of 60 Hz o r 24 Hz a r e p layed, the outp ut fr ame/field fr equency automatically switches to 60 Hz (o r 24 Hz fo r HDM I, de p ending on the setting), and the TV system fo r mat fo r the video signal out p ut f r om the VIDEO out p ut te r minals de p ends on the NTSC on PAL TV setting. Other s: By facto r y defau lt settin g, the fr ame/field f r equency is set fo r an out p ut of 60 Hz, and the TV system fo r mat fo r the video signal out p ut f r om the VIDEO out p ut te r mi n als de p ends on the NTSC on PAL TV sett ing. When sou r ces with a f r ame/field f r equency of 50 Hz a r e p layed, the out p ut f r ame/field f r equency automatically switc hes to 50 Hz, and the video signal ou t p ut f r om the VIDEO out p ut te r minals is set to be out p ut in the PAL TV sy stem fo r mat. When p layback is sto pp ed, the fr ame/field f r equency and TV system settings r emain at the settings last used. The f r ame/field f r equency and TV system settings do not change even when the p ower is tu r n ed off. They only switch when a video mate r ial with a diffe r ent f r ame/field f r equency is p layed. If the p ictur e is not dis p layed on the TV when a sou r ce with a diffe r ent f r ame/field f r equency is p layed, use the pr ocedu r e bel ow to switch the f r am e/field f r equency and TV system settings fo r the signa l out p ut f r om the p layer . Eject the disc, then pr ess the ï¨ OPEN/CLOSE butt on on the f r ont p anel while pr essing the ï¤ button to switch to a diffe r ent f r ame/field f r equency. The f r ame/field f r equ ency switches between 50 Hz and 60 Hz each time this o pe r ation is p e r fo r med. The indicato r fo r the f r ame f r equencyâÂÂs cu rr ent settin g lights on the f r ont p anel dis p lay ( p age 12). ï° About Film material The film mate r ial is a video signal with a f r ame r ate o f 24 f r ames/second. Fo r exam p le, these mate r ials inc lude 1080/24 p , 720/24 p , etc. ï° To output film mater ial To out p ut 1080/24 p film m ate r ial f r om HDMI OUT te r minal, set the out p ut video r esolutio n to eithe r Auto o r Source Dire ct . Caution ⢠1080/24 p signals can only be out p ut f r om the HDMI OUT te r minal. They cannot be outp ut fr om other video te r min als. ⢠When Auto is selected , the p ictu r e is out p ut at 60 f r ames/second if you r TV is not com p atible with 1080/ 24 p signals. ⢠When Source Direct is selected, the signals a r e out p ut as such, even if you r TV is not com p atible with 1080/24 p signals. If the p ictu r e is n ot dis p layed pr o pe r ly, use OUTPUT RESOLUTION to set an out p ut video r esolution at which the video and audio signals a r e pro pe r ly o u t p ut. ⢠Even if Auto o r Source Direct is selected, 7 20/24 p video signals a r e out p ut at 60 fr ames/second. CLEAR ENTER VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY OUTPUT RESOLUTION Auto ï¡ ï¢ Output Video R esolution Source : 1080/50i Current Output : 1080/50i Video r esolution of the cu rr ently p laying disc Out p ut video r esolution f r om the p laye r Example: LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 22 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
23 En 03 ï° About the output video resolution The out p ut video r eso lution setting and the r esolution of the p ictur e that is ac tually out p ut diffe r fo r the diffe r ent te r minals. See the table below. The table belo w shows the out p ut video r esolution fo r the diffe r ent te r minals when the f r ame/field f r equency of the p layback sou r ce is 50 Hz on the u ppe r line, the r esolutions when the sou r ceâÂÂs f r ame/field f r equency is 60 Hz and 24 Hz on the lowe r line. Output video resoluti on setting HDMI 1 1. The video out p ut te r minal set at Video in the Setup Navigator ( p age 18) o r the video out p ut te r minal selected with VIDEO SELECT ( p age 21). COMPONENT VIDEO/VIDEO 1 HDMI OUT te rminal COMPONENT VIDEO/VIDEO output te rminals HDMI OUT terminal CO MPONENT VIDEO output terminals 2 2. De p ending on the BD, the p ictu r es may not be out p ut. VIDEO output terminal 2 (TV system) Auto 3 3. This cannot be selected when the video out p ut te r minal is set to COMPONENT VIDEO / VIDEO. Resolutio n pr efe rred by TV 4,5,6 4. The p ictu r es a r e out p ut with the pr efe rr ed out p ut r esolution of the device (TV, AV r ec eive r o r am p lifie r , etc.) connected to HDMI OUT te r minal. 5. Fo r details on the out p ut of film mate r ial (1080/24 p o r 720/24 p video signals), see To output film materi al on p age 22. 6. Sou r ces with a r esolution of 720/50 p , 720/60 p and 72 0/24 p a r e out p ut at 1080/50i o r 1080/60i ev en if the TVâÂÂs r ecommended r esolution is 1080/50 p o r 1080/60 p . No video signals a r e out p ut No video signals a r e out p ut âÂÂâ â 576i o r 480i 576/50i 576/50i 576/50i PAL 480/60i 48 0/60i 480/60i ïª 7 7. De p ends on the NTSC on PAL TV setting ( p age 37). 576 p o r 480 p 576/50 p 576/50 p 576/50i PAL 480/60 p 480/60 p 480/60i ïª 7 1080i 1080/5 0i 576/50 p 576/50i PAL 1080/60i 1080/60i 8,9 8. DVD-Video o r DVD-R/-RW (VR fo r mat) may be out p ut at 480/60 p . 9. BD-ROM o r BD-R/-RE may be out p ut at 480/60 p . 480/60i ïª 7 1080 p 3 1080/50 p 10,11 10. De p endi ng on the co nnected HD MI cable, the video signals may not be out p ut. 11. Sou r ces with a r esolution of 720/50 p , 720/60 p and 720/24 p a r e out p ut at 1080/50i o r 1080/60i. âÂÂâ â 1080/60 p 10,11 Sou r ce Di r ect Resolution r eco rded on disc 5,12,13 12. De p ending on the connected TV, the video signals may not be out p ut. 13. 720/24 p film mate r ial is out p ut at 720/60 p . Resolution r eco r ded on disc 9,12,13,14 14. 1080/24 p film mate r ial is out p ut at 1080/60i. 576/50i PAL 480/60i ïª 7 LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 23 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
04 24 En Chapter 4 Playback Playing discs or files This section desc r ibes the p layer âÂÂs main o p er atio ns. Fo r the ty p es of discs that can be p layed, see Playable discs on p ag e 7. Fo r the ty p es of files that can be p layed, see Playable fi les on p age 9. Video, im age and audio files r ecor ded o n disc s ar e p layed with the Home M edia Galle r y ( p age 31). 1 Press ïµ STANDBY /ON to tu rn on the power. Tu r n the TVâÂÂs p owe r on and switch its inp ut befor ehand. 2 Press ï¨ OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray and load the disc. Note ⢠Load the disc with the pr inted side facing u p. ⢠Seve r al doze n seconds a re r equi r ed to r ead the disc. Once r eading is com p leted, the ty p e of disc is dis p layed on the p la ye r âÂÂs f r ont p anel disp la y. 3 Press ï¤ PLAY to play the disc. ï¤ on the p layer âÂÂs fr ont p anel disp lay li ghts dur ing p layback. â¢T o p ause, pr ess ïÂÂ¥ PAUSE dur ing p layback. ïÂÂ¥ on the p layer âÂÂs fr ont p anel disp lay lights when p layback is p aused. â¢T o s t o p , pr ess ï§ STOP dur ing p layback. Note ⢠Some discs sta r t p laying automatically when the disc t r ay is closed. ⢠DVD-Video discs have p ar enta l lock featu r es. In p ut the p asswo r d r egiste r ed in the p laye r âÂÂs s ettings to unlock the p ar ental lock . For details, see p age 43. â¢F o r some BD-R /-RE, p layback pr otection is se t fo r the disc o r titles. In p ut the code number set for the dis c to unlock th e pr otection. â¢C h e c k Troubleshooting on p age 55 if video or audio signals a r e no t being out p ut pr op er ly. ï° If the disc menu is displayed Fo r some discs, the disc menu is dis p layed automatica lly when p la yback star ts. T he conten ts of the disc menu a nd the way to o p er ate diff e r fr om disc to disc. ï° Resuming playback from where it was stopped (resume playback function) ⢠When ï§ STOP is pr essed du r ing p layback, the p oint at which the disc sto pp ed is sto r ed in the memo r y. When ï¤ PLAY is pr essed, p layback r esumes f r om that p oint. â¢F o r audio CDs and audio files, p layback star ts fr om the beginning of the t r ack/file that was p laying. â¢I f t h e s t o p mode was set while p laying a slideshow of image files, p layback sta r ts f r om the image file last dis p layed. ⢠To cancel the r esume p la yback function, pr ess ï§ STOP while p lay back is sto pp ed. Note â¢T h e r esum e p layback function is canceled automaticall y in the foll owing cases : âÂÂW h e n t h e d i s c t r ay is op ened. â When the file list window is switched. âÂÂW h e n t h e p ower is tu r ned off. (Fo r BDs and DVDs this does not cancel the r esu me p la yback function.) â¢T h e r esum e p layback function can not be used for some discs. TV CONTROL STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE FL DIMMER ENTER VIDEO SELECT SECONDARY PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN PLAY PREV PAUSE STOP NEXT RED GREEN YELLOW BLUE INPUT SELECT CH VOL AUDIO VIDEO OUTPUT RESOLUTION ENTER CLEAR LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 24 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
25 En 04 Forward and reverse scanning ï¦ During playback, press ï or ï® . ⢠The scanning s p eed switches each time the button is pr essed. The s p eed step s dep end on the disc o r file (the s p eed is dis p layed on the TV sc r een). â¢F o r war d or r ever se scanning is also p ossible by holding the button down. No r mal p la yback r esumes when the bu tton is r eleased. ï° To resume normal playback ï¦ Pr ess ï¤ PLAY. Playing specific titles, chapters or tracks ï¦ Input the number of the ti tle, chapter or track you want to play. ⢠Use the numbe r buttons (0 to 9) to in p ut the numbe r , then pr ess ENTER . â¢P r ess CLEAR to clear the values you have inp ut. Skipping content ï¦ Pr ess ï¯ PREV or ï° NEXT . â¢W h e n ï° NEXT is pr essed, the p layba ck ski p s ahead to the beginning of the next title/cha p ter /tr ack/ file. â¢W h e n ï¯ PREV is pr essed, the p layback skip s back to the beginning of the cu rr en tly p la ying title/cha p ter / t r ack/file . P r ess twice to ski p back to the beginning of the pr eviou s title/ch a p te r /t r ack/file. Playing in slow motion ï¦ While playback is paused, press and h old ï± / or / ï² . â¢T h e s p eed switches each time the button is pr essed (the s p eed is dis p layed on the TV sc r een). The s p eed ste p s de p end on the disc o r file. ï° To resume normal playback ï¦ Pr ess ï¤ PLAY. Step forward and step reverse ï¦ While playback is paused, press ï± / o r / ï² . â¢T h e p ictur e moves a step for war d or r ever se each time the button is pr essed. ï° To resume normal playback ï¦ Pr ess ï¤ PLAY. Switching the camera angles Fo r BD-ROM and DVD-Video discs on which multi p le angles a r e r ecor ded, the angles can be switched du r ing p layback. ï¦ During playback, press ANGLE. â¢T h e c u rr ent angle and total numbe r of r ecor ded angles a r e dis p layed on the TV sc r een and on the p layer âÂÂs fr ont p anel disp lay. To switch the a ngles, pr ess ANGLE again o r pr ess ï© / ïª . ⢠The angles can also be switched by selecti ng Angle f r om the TOOLS menu. â¢I f t h e a n g l e s a r e not switched when ANGLE is pr essed, switch them f r om the menu scr een. Switching the subtitles Fo r discs o r files on whic h multi p le s ubtitles a r e r ecor ded, the subtitles can be switched du r ing p la yback. Caution ⢠The subtitles cannot be switched fo r discs r ecor ded on a DVD o r BD r ecor der . Also r efer to the o p e r ating inst r uction s of the device used fo r r eco r ding. ï¦ During playback, press SUBTI TLE. â¢T h e c u rr ent subtitle and total numbe r of r ecor ded subtitles a r e d is p layed on the TV sc r een and on the p layer âÂÂs fr ont p anel disp lay. To switch t he subtitle , pr ess SUBT ITLE again o r pr ess ï© /ïª . ⢠The subtitles can also be swit ched by selecting Subtitle f r om the TOOLS menu. ⢠If the subtitles a r e not swi tched when SUBTITLE is pr essed, switch them f r om the menu scr een. ï° Turning the subtitles off ï¦ Press SUBTITLE, then press CLEAR. ï° About displaying external subtitle files while playing DivX media files In addition to the subtitles r ecor ded in DivX media fil es, this p laye r also su pp o r ts the dis p lay of exte r na l subtitle files. If a file h as the same name as a Di vX media file aside f r om the file extensio n and the extension is one of the extensions listed below, the file is t r eated as an ex te r nal subtitle fil e. Note that DivX media files and exte r nal 1 /4 î î Angle Example: Cu rr ent angle/Total numbe r of r ecor ded angles 1/2 English Subtitle ï¡ ï¢ Example: Cu rr ent subtit le/Total numbe r of r ecor ded subtitles LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 25 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
04 26 En subtitle files must be loc ated in the same folde r . Only one exte r nal subt itle file ca n be dis p layed on this p layer . Use a co mp uter , etc., to delete any exter nal subtitle files you do not want to dis p lay f r om the disc. .s r t, .sub, .txt, .smi, .ssa, .ass If the language code is s p ecified fo r the ex te r nal subtitle file, the subtit les a r e dis p layed with the font co rr es p onding to that language code . If no language code is s p ecified, t h e subtitles a r e dis p layed with the font co rr es p onding to the language code set at Subtitle Language ( p age 39). The sam e font is used fo r the all the languages i n each of the g r oup s below. Note â¢D e p ending on the file , the exter nal subtitles may not be dis p layed pr op er ly. Switching the audio and secondary audio Fo r discs o r files on which mu lti p le aud io st r eams/ channels a r e r ecor ded, audio st r eams/channels can be switched du r ing p lay back. Also us e this pr ocedu r e to switch the seconda r y audio fo r BD-ROMs on which seconda r y audio is r eco r ded. ï¦ During playback, press AUDIO. â¢T h e c u rr ent audio and total numbe r of r ec o r ded audio st r eams a r e dis p layed on the TV sc r een an d on the p layer âÂÂs fr ont p anel disp lay. To switch the audio, pr ess AUDIO again o r pr ess ï© / ïª . ⢠To switch the seconda r y audio, pr ess SEC ONDARY AUDIO . â¢T h e a u d i o / s e c o n d a r y audio can also be switched by selecting Audio o r Second ary Audio f r om the TO OL S menu. â¢I f t h e a u d i o / s e c o n d a r y audio is not switched when AUDIO / SECONDARY AUDIO is pr essed, switch it f r om the menu sc r een. ï° Turning the Secondary Audio off ï¦ Press SECON DARY AUDIO, then press CLEAR. Switching the secondary video Use the pr ocedu r e below to switch the seconda r y video (Pictu r e-in-Pictu r e) r eco r ded on the BD-ROM. ï¦ During playback, pr ess SECONDARY VIDEO. â¢T h e c u rr ent seconda r y video and total numbe r of r ecor ded secondar y video str eams ar e disp layed on the TV sc r een an d on the p layer âÂÂs f r ont p anel dis p lay. To switch the seconda r y video, pr ess SEC ONDARY VIDEO again o r pr ess ï© /ïª . â¢T h e s e c o n d a r y video can also be switched by selecting Secondary Video f r om the TOOLS menu. â¢I f t h e s e c o n d a r y video is not switched when SECONDARY VIDEO is pr e ssed, swi tch it f r om th e menu sc r een. ï° Turning the Secondary Video off ï¦ Press SECONDARY VIDEO, then press CLEAR. Displaying the disc information ï¦ Press DISPLAY. The disc info r mation a pp ea r s on the TV sc r een. The info r mation switches each time the button is pr essed. The info r mation dis p la y diffe r s d u r ing p layback and when p layback is sto pp ed. Group 1 Af r ikaans(af/af r ), Basque(eu/eus), Catalan(ca/cat), Danish(da/dan), Dutch(nl/nld), English(en/eng), Fa r oese(fo/fao), Finnish(fi/fin), F r ench(f r /f r a), Galician(gl/ glg), Ge r man(de/deu), Gua r ani(gn/g r n), Icel andic(is/isl), I r ish(ga/gle), Italian(it/ita), Latin(la/lat), No r wegian(no/ no r ), Po r tuguese( p t/ p or ), Rhaeto-Romance( r m/ r oh), Scots-Gaelic(gd/gla), S p anish(es/sp a), Swahili(sw/swa), Swedish(sv/swe), Zulu(zu/zul) Group 2 Albanian(sq/sqi), C r oatian(hr /h r v), Czech(cs/ces), Hunga r ian(hu/hun), Polish( p l/p ol), Rom ania n( r o/ r on), Slovak(sk/slk), Slovenian(sl/slv) Group 3 Bela r usian(be/bel), Bulga r ian(bg/bul), Macedonian(mk/ mkd), Moldavian(mo/mol), Russian( r u/r us), Se r bia n(sr / s rp ), Uk r ainian(uk/uk r) Group 4 G r eek(el/ell) Group 5 Estonian(et/est), Ku r dish(ku/k ur ), Tu r kis h(t r /t u r ) 2/2 Engli sh Dol by True HD 9 6kHz 7. 1ch L C R L s R s L b R b LFE Audio î î Cu rr ent audio/Total numbe r of r ecor ded audio str eams Example: Audio ty p e Numbe r of channels Channels r eco r ded on disc 1 /4 Seconda r y Video î î Example: Cu rr ent secon da r y v ideo/Total numbe r of r ecor ded secondar y video str eams LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 26 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
27 En 04 Playback functions The functions that can be used diffe r ac cor ding to the typ e of disc and file. In some cases, some of the functions cannot be used. Check the usable functions on the table below. Functi on 1 1. Some functions may not wo r k fo r some discs o r files, even if indicated [ ï± ] on the table. Disc/file type BD- ROM BD-R /-RE DVD- Video DVD-R /-RW (VR format) AVCHD Video file Image file Audio file Audio CD Fo r wa r d and reve r se scanning 2 2. Fo r some discs, no r ma l p layback r esumes automatically when the cha p te r switches. ï± 3 3. No sound is pr oduced du r ing fo r war d a nd r ever se scanning. ï± 3 ï± 3 ï± 3 ï± 3 ï± 3 ï³ ï± 4 4. Sound is pr oduced du r ing fo r war d and r ever se scanning. ï± 4 Playing s p ecific titles, cha p te r s or tr acks ï±ï±ï±ï±ï± ï³ ï³ ï³ ï± Ski pp ing content ï±ï±ï±ï±ï±ï±ï±ï±ï± Playing in slow motion 2,5 5. ⢠No sound is out p ut du r ing sl ow motion p layback. ⢠It is not p ossible to switch the s p eed du r ing r eve r se slow motion p layback. ï±ï±ï±ï±ï± ï± 6 6. Reve r se slow motion p layback is not p ossible. ï³ï³ï³ Ste p fo r wa r d and ste p r eve r se 2 ï±ï±ï±ï±ï± ï± 7 7. Reve r se ste p p layback is not p ossible. ï³ï³ï³ Switching the came r a angles 8 8. Angle ma r k is dis p layed fo r scenes at which multi p le angles a r e r ecor ded if An gle/Secondary Indicator is set to On ( p age 39). ï± ï³ ï± ï³ï³ï³ï³ï³ï³ Switching the subti tles 9 9. ⢠The ty p es of r ecor ded su btitles dep end on the disc and file. ⢠In some cases the subtitle may switch o r the switching sc r ee n pr ovided on the disc may be dis p layed i mmediately, without the cu rr ent subtitle o r the total numbe r of subtitles r ecor ded on the disc being dis p layed. ï±ï±ï±ï±ï±ï± ï³ ï³ ï³ Switching the a udio 10 10. The ty p es of r ecor ded audio st r eams de p end on the disc and file. ï±ï±ï±ï±ï±ï± ï³ ï³ ï± Switching the secon da r y aud io 11 11. ⢠The ty p es of r ecor ded sec onda r y a udio st r eams de p end on the disc and file. ⢠In some cases the seconda r y audio may switch o r the s wi tching sc r een pr ovided on the disc may be dis p layed immediately, without the cu rr ent seconda r y audio o r the t otal numbe r of seconda r y audio st r eams r ecor ded on the disc being dis p layed. ⢠Seconda r y audio ma r k is dis p lay ed fo r scenes at whic h secon da r y audio is r ecor ded if Angle/Seco ndary Indicator is set to On ( p age 39). ï± 12 12. Some discs do not include s e conda r y audio. ï³ï³ï³ï³ï³ï³ï³ï³ Switching the secon da r y vi deo 13 13. ⢠In some cases the sec onda r y vide o may switch o r the switching sc r een pr ovided on the disc may be dis p la yed immediately, without the cu rr ent seconda r y video o r the total numbe r of seconda r y video st r eams r ecor ded on the disc being dis p layed. ⢠Seconda r y video ma r k is dis p layed fo r scenes at which seconda ry video is r ecor ded if Angle/Secondary Indicator is set to On ( p age 39). ï± 14 14. Some discs do not include s e conda r y video. ï³ï³ï³ï³ï³ï³ï³ï³ Dis p laying the disc info r mation ï±ï±ï±ï±ï±ï±ï± ï³ ï³ LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 27 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
04 28 En Using the Play Mode functions Playing from a specific time (Time Search) 1 During playbac k, press PLAY MODE to display the Play Mode screen. The Play Mode sc r een can also be dis p layed by selecting Play Mode f r om the TOOLS menu. 2 Select Time Se arch. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . 3 Input the time. Use the numbe r butt ons (0 to 9) o r ï©/ ïª to inp ut the time. Use ï« /ï¬ to mo ve the cu r so r . â¢T o p lay fr om 45 minutes, inp ut 0 , 0 , 4 , 5 , 0 and 0 , then pr ess ENTER . â¢T o p lay fr om 1 hour 20 minutes, inp ut 0 , 1 , 2 , 0 , 0 and 0 , then pr ess EN TER . â¢P r ess CLEAR to clear the values you have inp ut. 4 Starting pl ayback from the specified time. Use ï« /ï¬ to s elect Search , then pr ess ENTER . ï° Closing the Play Mode screen P r ess PLAY MODE o r HOME MENU. Playing a specific title, chapter or track (Search) 1 Press PLAY MODE to display th e Play Mode screen. The Play Mode sc r een can also be dis p layed by select ing Play Mode f r om the TOOLS menu. 2 Select the type of search. Use ï© /ïª to select, then pr ess ENTER . See the table on p age 30 fo r the sea r ch ty p es. 3 Input the number. Use the numbe r bu ttons (0 to 9) o r ï©/ ïª to inp ut the numbe r . Use ï« /ï¬ to move the cu r so r . â¢T o s e a r ch for title 32, inp ut 0 , 3 and 2 , then pr ess ENTER . â¢P r ess CLEAR to clear the values you have inp ut. 4 Starting playback from th e specified title, chapter or track. Use ï« /ï¬ to select Search , then pr ess ENTER . Playing a specific section within a title or track repeatedly (A-B Repeat) Use this pr ocedu r e to p lay a s p ecific section withi n a title o r t r ack re p eatedly. 1 During playback , press PLAY MODE to display the Play Mode scre en. The Play Mode sc r een can also be dis p layed by select ing Play Mode f r om the TOOLS menu. 2 Select A-B Repeat. Use ï© /ïª to select, then pr ess ENTER . 3 Select the star ting poin t for A-B Repe at. Use ï« /ï¬ to select A (Start) , then pr ess ENTER . 4 Select the end po int for A-B Repeat. Use ï« /ï¬ to select B (End) , then pr ess ENTER . A-B Re p eat p layback sta r ts. ï° To cancel A-B Repeat play â¢S e l e c t Off f r om the Re p eat/Random sc r een, then pr ess ENTER . â¢D u r ing p lay back, pr ess ï§ STOP or CLEAR . VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY OUTPUT RESOLUTION CLEAR ENTER ENTER PLAY PREV PAUSE STOP NEXT Time Search 1 2:45:00 Search Title Search 0 32 Title Search A-B Repeat A (Start) B (End) Off LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 28 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
29 En 04 Note â¢A - B R e p eat p lay is canceled in the following cases: â W hen the angle is switched (fo r BD-ROM and DVD- Video discs only). â W hen you sea r ch outside the r e p eat r ange. â W hen you sta r t othe r Re p eat Play o r Random Play. Playing repeatedly (Repeat Play) Use this pr ocedu r e to p lay the cu rr ently p laying disc, title, cha p te r , t r ack o r file r ep eatedly. 1 During playbac k, press PLAY MODE to display the Play Mode screen. The Play Mode sc r een can also be dis p layed by selecting Play Mode f r om the TOOLS menu. 2 Select Repeat/Random. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . 3 Select the type of Repeat Play. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . See the table on p a ge 30 fo r the ty p es of Re p eat Play. ï° To cancel Repeat Play ⢠Select Off f r om the Re p ea t/Random sc r een, then pr ess ENTER . â¢D u r ing p layback, pr ess ï§ STOP or CLEAR. Note â¢T h e t y p e of r ep eat modes dep ends on the disc and file being p laye d. See the table on p age 30. â¢R e p eat Play is canceled in the fo llowing cases: â W hen the angle is switched (fo r BD-ROM and DVD- Video discs only). â W hen you sea r ch outside the r e p eat r ange. â W hen you sta r t othe r Re p eat Play o r Random Play. Playing in random order (Random Play) Use this pr ocedu r e to p lay the t r acks o r files in r andom o r de r. 1 During playbac k, press PLAY MODE to display the Play Mode screen. The Play Mode sc r een can also be dis p layed by selecting Play Mode f r om the TOOLS menu. 2 Select Repeat/Random. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . 3 Select the Rando m Play. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . ï° To cancel Random Play ⢠Select Off f r om the Re p ea t/Random sc r een, then pr ess ENTER . â¢D u r ing p lay back, pr ess ï§ STOP or CLEAR . Note ⢠Random Play is canceled in t he following c ases: â When you use the sea r ch funct ion. â W hen you sta r t R e p eat Play. LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 29 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
04 30 En About Play Mode types The functions that can be used diffe r ac cor ding to the typ e of disc and file. In some cases, some of the functions cannot be used. Check the usable functions on the table below. Play Mode t ype Mark 1 1. The ty p e of Play M ode is indicated by the ma r k. Disc/file type BD- ROM 2 2. Fo r BD-ROM and DVD-Video discs, some of the funct ions cannot be used with some titles. BD-R /-RE DVD- Video 2 DVD-R /-RW (VR format) AVCHD Video file Image file Audio file Audio CD Re p eat Play Playing a s p ecific section within a title o r tr ack r ep eatedly (A-B Rep eat) ï±ï±ï±ï±ï±ï± ï³ ï³ ï± Playing a title r ep eatedly (Title Re p eat) ï±ï±ï±ï±ï±ï± ï³ ï³ ï³ Playing a c ha p ter r ep eated ly (Cha p te r Re p eat) ï± ï± ï± ï± ï± ï³ï³ï³ï³ Playing a t r ack o r fi le r ep eatedly (Tr ack Re p eat) ï³ï³ï³ï³ï³ï³ï³ ï± ï± Playing all the titles, t r acks o r files on the disc r ep eatedly (All Rep eat) ï³ï±ï³ ï± 3 3. The o r iginal titles a r e p layed r ep eatedly. Howeve r , the p laylist titles cannot be p layed r ep eatedly. ï³ ï± 4 4. The files in the folde r ar e p layed r ep eatedly. ï± 4 ï± 5 5. The files in the folde r or HM G Playlist a r e p layed r ep eatedly. ï± 6 6. The t r acks in the disc o r HMG Playlist a r e p layed r ep eatedly. Random Play Playing the t r acks o r files in r andom or de r (Random T r ack/File) ï³ï³ï³ï³ï³ï³ ï± ï± ï± Sea r ch Playing f r om a s p ecific time (Time Sea r ch) â ï±ï±ï±ï±ï±ï± ï³ ï³ ï± Playing a s p ecific title (Title Sea r ch) â ï± ï± ï± ï± ï± ï³ï³ï³ï³ Playing a s p ecific cha p ter (Cha p te r Sea r ch) â ï± ï± ï± ï± ï± ï³ï³ï³ï³ Playing a s p ecific t r ack (T r ack Sea r ch) â ï³ï³ï³ï³ï³ï³ï³ï³ ï± LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 30 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
31 En 04 Playing from the Home Media Gallery The Home Media Galle r y lets you dis p lay a list of th e titles, t r acks o r files r eco r ded on the disc. The discs that can be p layed fr om the Home Media G alle r y a r e as shown below (see also p age 7). â¢B D - R / - R E d i s c s ⢠DVD-R/-RW (VR fo r mat) discs ⢠Audio CDs (CD-DAs and DTS-CDs) ⢠DVDs/CDs on which only data files of video, image o r audio files, etc. a r e r ecor ded Playing discs 1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY to display the Home M edia Gall ery. The Home Media Galle r y can also be dis p layed by selecting Home Media Gallery f r om the Home Menu then pr essing ENTER . 2 Select the disc. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . 3 Select the title o r track to be played. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . Playback sta r ts. ï° Closing the Home Media Gallery P r ess HOME MEDIA GALLERY o r HOME MENU. Note ⢠When p laying an audio C D (CD-DA o r DTS-CD), t he Now Playing sc r een is dis p layed. ⢠Some BD-R/-RE discs have p layback pr otection. To cancel the pr otection, in p ut th e p asswor d set fo r the disc. â¢T o p lay DVD-R/-RW (VR for mat) p laylists, switch to the p laylist using t he Original/P lay List command on the TOOLS menu ( p age 20). Playing video files 1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY to display the Home Media Gallery. The Home Media Ga lle r y can also be dis p layed by selecti ng Home Media Gallery f r om Home Menu then pr essing ENTER . 2 Select the disc. Use ï© /ïª to select, then pr ess ENTER . 3 Select Mo vies. Use ï© /ïª to select Movies , then pr ess ENTER . 4 Select Fold ers or All Movies. Use ï© /ïª to select, then pr ess ENTER . ⢠Folders â The files in the selected folde r a r e dis p layed. ⢠All Movi es â All th e r eco r ded files a r e dis p layed. If you have selected All Movies , pr oceed to ste p 6. 5 Select the folder con taini ng the file you want to play. Use ï© /ïª to select, then pr ess ENTER . A list of the files and folde r s in the selected folde r is dis p layed. 6 Select and set the fil e you want to play. Use ï© /ïª to select, then pr ess ENTER . Pla y back sta r ts f r om th e selected file, and continues until the end of the list is r eached. Use ï¯ /ï° to p lay the pr evious o r next file. Note ⢠It may take a few seconds befo r e p layback star ts. This is no r mal. ⢠It may not be p ossible to p lay some files pr o pe r ly. â¢T h e n u m b e r of views may be r estr ic ted (p age 9). Playing image files 1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY to display the Home Media Gallery. The Home Media Ga lle r y can also be dis p layed by selecti ng Home Media Gallery f r om the Home Menu then pr essing ENTER . 2 Select the disc. Use ï© /ïª to select, then pr ess ENTER . HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER TV CONTROL AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE FL DIMMER INPUT SELECT CH VOL PLAY PREV PAUSE STOP NEXT BD-R BDAV My F avorite TV Program 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 items Morning serial drama News at noon Evening movie Midnight variety show Playback protection W orld heritage Drama: Blank time Music and us LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 31 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
04 32 En 3 Select Pho tos. Use ï© /ïª to select Photos , then pr ess ENTER . 4 Select Folder s or All Pho tos. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . ⢠Folder s â The files in the selected folde r a r e dis p layed. ⢠All Photos â All the r eco r ded files a r e dis p layed. If you have selected All Photos , pr oceed to ste p 6. 5 Select the fold er containi ng the file you want to play. Use ï© /ïª /ï« /ï¬ to select, then pr ess ENTER . A list o f the files and folde r s in the selected folde r is dis p layed. 6 Select and set the file you want to play. Use ï© /ïª /ï« /ï¬ to select, then pr ess ENTER . A slideshow sta r ts f r om the selected file, and continues until the end of the list is r eached. Use ï¯ /ï° to dis p lay the pr evious o r ne xt file. ï° About Slideshow A dis p lay of the files on the disc o r in the folde r that switches automatically. ï° Rotating images ï¦ Pr ess ANGL E while playing a slidesh ow. ⢠The image rotates each ti me the button is pressed (90ð ï¤ 180ð ï¤ 270ð ï¤ 0ð ï¤ ... ). The image can also be r otated by select ing Rotate f r om the TOOLS menu. Playing audio files 1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY to display the Home M edia Gall ery. The Home Media Galle r y can also be dis p layed by selecting Home Media Gallery f r om the Home Menu then pr essing ENTER . 2 Select the disc. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . 3 Select Music. Use ï© /ïª to select Music , then pr ess ENTER . 4 Select Folders o r All Songs. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . ⢠Folder s â The files in the selected folde r a r e dis p layed. ⢠All Songs â All the r eco r ded files a r e dis p layed. If you have selected All Songs , pr oceed to ste p 6. 5 Select the folder con taini ng the file you want to play. Use ï© /ïª to select, then pr ess ENTER . A list of the files and folde r s in the selected folde r is dis p layed. 6 Select and set the fil e you want to play. Use ï© /ïª to select, then pr ess ENTER . Pla y back sta r ts f r om th e selected file, and continues until the end of the list is r eached. Use ï¯ /ï° to p lay the pr evious o r next file. The Now Playing scr een (shown below) is dis p layed. Playing in the desired order (HMG Playlist) The discs that can add t r acks and files to the HMG (Home Media Galle r y) Pla ylist a r e as shown below. ⢠Audio CDs (CD-DAs and DTS-CDs) ⢠DVDs/CDs on which audio files a r e r ecor ded ï° Adding tracks/files Use this pr ocedu r e to add t r acks and file s, and c r eate the HMG Playlist. 1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY to display the Home Media Gallery. The Home Media Ga lle r y can also be dis p layed by selecti ng Home Media Gallery f r om the Home Menu pr essing ENTER . 2 Select the disc. Load the disc befo r ehand. Use ï© /ïª to select, then pr ess ENTER . 3 Select the track/f ile to be add ed. Use ï© /ïª to select. 4 Press TOOLS to display the TOOLS menu. My Folder DVD-RW/Photos/Folders 99 items Musi c 001.mp3 DATA DISC 0.05.34 0.02.33 Play Cu rr ently p laying file Total file p laying time Ela p sed time LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 32 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
33 En 04 5 Select Add to HMG Playlist. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . The t r ack o r file selected in ste p 3 is added to the HMG Playlist. To add mo r e t r acks o r files, r ep eat ste ps 3 to 5. ï° To add the currently playing track/ file to the HMG Playlist 1 While the trac k/file is playing, p ress TOOLS to display the TOOLS menu. 2U s e ï© /ïª to select Add to HMG Playlist, then press ENTER. Note ⢠A maximum of 24 t r acks/files can be added to the HMG Playlist. ⢠The HMG Playlist is clea r ed in the following cases: â When the p ower is tu r ned off. â When the disc t r ay is o p ened. ï° Playing the HMG Playlist 1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY to display the Home M edia Gall ery. The Home Media Galle r y can also be dis p layed by selecting Home Media Gallery f r om the Home Menu pr essing ENT ER . 2 Select HMG Playlist. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . 3 Select the track/file to be played. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . Playback sta r ts f r om the selected t r ac k/file, and continues u ntil the end of the list is r eached. Use ï¯ / ï° to p lay the pr evious o r next tr ack/file. The Now Playing sc r een (shown below) is dis p layed. ï° Deleting tracks/files from the HMG Playlist 1 Select the track/file t o be deleted, then press TOOLS to displa y the TOOLS menu. 2U s e ï© /ïª to select Delete from HM G Playlist, th en press ENTER. Folders CD-ROM/Musi c 15Items Musi c001.mp3 Musi c002.mp3 Musi c003.mp3 Musi c004.mp3 Musi c005.mp3 Musi c006.mp3 Musi c007.mp3 Musi c008.mp3 Play from Beginning Add to HMG Playlist Now Playing BD PLAYER TOOLS Musi c 001.mp3 DATA DISC 0.05.34 0.02.33 Play HMG Cu rr ently p laying t r ack/file Total t r ack/file p laying time Ela p sed time LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 33 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
05 34 En Chapter 5 Adjusting audio and video Adjusting the video The quality of the p layback p ictur e can be adjusted acco r ding to the TV you a r e using. 1 During playb ack, press VIDEO ADJUS T to display the Video Ad just screen. The Video Adjust sc r een can also be dis p layed by selecting Video Adjust f r om the TOOLS men u. 2 Select a pr eset. Select using ï« /ï¬ acco r ding to th e TV being used. ⢠Pioneer PDP â S elect this when connected to a Pionee r p lasm a TV. ⢠Pioneer LCD â Select this when connected to a Pionee r liquid c r ystal dis p lay TV. ⢠Pioneer Pro jector â Select this when connec ted to a Pionee r f r ont pr ojecto r . ⢠PDP â Select this when connected to a p las ma TV of anothe r b r an d. ⢠LCD â Sele ct this when connected to a liquid c r ystal dis p lay of anothe r b r and. ⢠Projector â Select this when connected to a f r ont pr ojecto r of another br and. ⢠Professional â With this setting, video signal pr ocessi ng is r estr ained. Sel ect this when connected to a pr ofessional m onito r . ⢠Memory1 to 3 â Pictu r e quality settings with adjusted p ar amete r s can b e sto r ed in th e memo r y. Fo r a desc r ip tion of the p ar amete r s, see When Memory1, 2 or 3 is s elected below. ï° When Memory1, 2 or 3 is selected 1 Select Adjustments. Use ïª to select Adjustments , then pr ess ENTER . A detailed settings sc r een a pp ea r s. 2 Select the item to be ad justed. Use ï© /ïª to select. 3 Adjust the picture quality. When ï« /ï¬ a r e pr essed, the adjustmen ts can be mad e viewing the p ictur e. The de tailed se ttings sc r een r ea pp ear s when ENTER is pr essed. ⢠Prog.Mot ion â Adjust acco r ding to the ty p e of image (moving o r still imag e). This is effe ctive mainly when out p utting video mate r ials as pr og r essive images. ⢠Pure Cinema â This setting o p tim izes the o pe r ation of the pr og r essive scanning ci r cuit fo r p laying film mate r ials. No r mall y set it to Auto1 . If the p ictur e seems unnatu r a l, switch this to Auto 2 , On o r Off ( p age 35). ⢠YNR â Reduces noise in the lumin ance (Y) signal. ⢠CNR â Reduc es noise in the c h r oma (C) signal. ⢠BNR â Reduces the block noise (block-sha p ed disto r tion gene r ated u p on MPEG com pr ession). ⢠MNR â Reduces the mosquito noise (disto r tion along the contou r s of the p ictur e gene r ated u p on MPEG com pr ession). ⢠Detail â Adjusts the p ictu r eâÂÂs c ontou r s. ⢠White Level â Adjusts the level of the white po r tions. ⢠Black Level â Adjusts the level of the black po r tions. ⢠Black Setup â Select the black level as the setu p level. No r mally select 0 IRE . If the black is too dense and all the da r k colo r s a r e dis p laye d in a unifo r m black due to the comb ination wi th the conn ected TV, s elect 7.5 IRE . ⢠Gamma C o rrection â Adjusts how the da r k p or tions of the p ictur e look. ⢠Hue â Adjusts the balance between g r een and r ed. ⢠Chroma Level â Adjusts the density of the colo r s. Note ⢠Prog.Mot ion and Pure Cinema have the effect only fo r p ictu r es r eco r ded i n the inte r laced scan fo r mat (576i/480i o r 1080i signals). TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN PLAY PREV PAUSE STOP NEXT RED GREEN YELLOW BLUE VIDEO ADJUST ENTER Adjustments Video Adjust PDP Prog. Motion Pure Cinema YNR CNR BNR MNR Detail White Level Video Adjust [ Memory1 ] Motion Still Auto1 Off Max Off Max Off Max Off Max Soft Fine Min Max Motion Still Prog. Motion LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 34 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
35 En 05 ⢠Prog.Moti on is disabled when Pure Cinema is set to On . ⢠Black Setup has the effect only fo r p ictu r es o ut p ut f r om the VIDEO out p ut te r minals, and fo r NTSC signals out p ut. ⢠YNR , CNR , BNR and MNR have no effect on 1080/24 p video signals out p ut f r om the HDMI OUT te r minal. ï° Closing the Video Adjust screen P r ess HOME MENU. ï° About Pure Cinema The r e a r e two ty p es of video signals: ⢠Video materi al â Video signals r eco r ded at 25 o r 30 f r ames/second ⢠Film material â Video signals r eco r ded at 24 f r ames/ second âÂÂPu r e Cinemaâ uses signal pr ocessing suited fo r âÂÂfilm mate r ialâ when conve r ting 576i/480i o r 1080i inte r laced video signals into pr og r essive video signals, r esulting in clea r p ictu r e r e pr oduction without losin g the qual ity of the mate r ial. is dis p layed on the disc info r mation sc r een when p laying the âÂÂfilm m ater ialâ p ictur es of BD-ROM, BD-R/-RE and DVD-Video discs ( p age 26). Adjusting the audio Adjusting the Audio DRC Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Cont r ol) has the effect of p laying loud sounds softly and soft sounds loudly. Adjust the setting fo r exam p le when viewing movies late at night and the di alogs a r e difficult to hea r . 1 During playback, display the TOOLS menu. P r ess TOOLS. 2 Select and set Audio Adjust. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . 3 Select and set Audio DR C. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . 4 Adjust the setting. Use ï« /ï¬ to s witch between Off , Low , Medium, High and Auto . ï° Closing the Audio DRC screen P r ess ENTER o r HOME MENU. Note ⢠This only affects the Dol by T r ueHD, Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby Digital au dio signals of BDs, DVDs and video files. ⢠When Auto is selected, the setting has the same effect as High o r Off fo r Dolb y T r ueHD signals, de p ending on the content. Fo r Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby Digital, the setting has the same effect as Off . ⢠Audio DRC affects the audio signals out p ut f r om the following a udio out p ut te r minal s: â Analog audio signals out p ut f r om the A UDIO OUT te r minal s. âÂÂL i n e a r PCM audio signals outp ut fr om the DIGITAL OUT te r minal or HDMI OUT te r minal. ⢠The effect may be weak fo r some discs. Adjusting the audio delay (Lip Sync) Adjust the audio delay fo r the selected video out p ut te r minal if the video and audio a r e not synch r onized. 1 During playba ck, display the TOOLS menu. P r ess TOOLS. 2 Select and set Au dio Adjust. Use ï© /ïª to select, then pr ess ENTER . 3 Select and set Lip Sync. Use ï© /ïª to select, then pr ess ENTER . 4 Select Auto or Manual. Use ï« /ï¬ to select. â¢A u t o â The p layer automatically adjusts the timing of the video and audio when connected to a device equi pp ed with the HDMI Auto Li p sync Co rr ection featu r e using an HDMI ca ble. â¢M a n u a l â Adjust ma nually while viewing the video. If you have selected Manual , pr oceed to ste p 5. 5 Adjusting th e amount of audio delay. P r ess ïª , then use ï«/ ï¬ to adjust . The audio delay ca n be adjusted f r om 0 to 250 ms in ste p s of 5 ms. Note â¢T h e Lip Sync adjustment is only a pp licable to the out p ut te r minal set at Output Terminal ( p age 43). ⢠The sound m ay be inte rr u p te d while setting the delay. ï° Closing the Lip Sync screen P r ess ENTER o r HOME MENU. TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER Lip Syn c Manual 100 ms 0 50 150 100 200 250 LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 35 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
06 36 En Chapter 6 Advanced settings Changing the settings Operating the Initial Setup screen 1 When playba ck is stopped, display the Home Menu screen. P r ess HOME MENU. 2 Select and set Initial Se tup. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . 3 Select the it em and change the setting. Use ï© /ïª /ï« /ï¬ to select, then pr ess ENTER . Example (U.K. models): ï° Closing the Initial Setup screen P r ess HOME MENU. VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY OUTPUT RESOLUTION CLEAR ENTER ENTER PLAY PREV PAUSE STOP NEXT î 16:9 (Widescreen) î F ull î Letter Box î On Initial Setup BD PLAYER TV Aspect Ratio 4:3 Video Out DVD 16:9 Video Out NTSC on P AL TV Video Out Audio Out HDMI Network Language Playback Data Management Setup Navigator LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 36 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
37 En 06 Note ⢠Items that cannot be changed a r e indi cated in g r ay. The items that can be selected de p end o n the p layer âÂÂs status. ⢠In O p tions, the facto r y default sett ings a r e indicated in bold. Setting Options Explanatio n Video Out TV As p ect Ratio 16:9 (Widescreen ) Select this when con nected to a wide (16:9) TV. 4:3 (Standa r d) Select this when connected to a conv entional TV. 4:3 Video Out Full 4:3 p ictu r es a r e d is p layed ove r th e enti r e sc r een. No r mal 4:3 p ictur es ar e disp layed with ve r tica l black bar s along the sides. Select this when you cannot switch the as p ect r atio to 4:3 on t he TV. 4:3 Vide o Out is only valid when TV Aspect R atio is set to 16:9 (Widescr een) . DVD 16:9 Vi deo Out Lett er Box 16:9 p ictu r es a r e dis p layed with black ba r s at the to p and bottom when viewing on a 4:3 sc r een. Pan & Scan The p ictur e is disp layed over the enti r e scr een, with the left and r ight sides of the 16:9 p ictur e c r o pp ed. Select th is to view 4:3 p ictur es ove r the enti r e sc r een. Fo r some discs, the p ictu r e will be dis p layed in th e Letter Box mode even if Pan & Scan is set. ⢠DVD 16:9 Video Out is only val id when TV Aspect Rat io is set to 4:3 (Sta ndard) . ⢠DVD 16:9 Video Out is only valid when p laying 16:9 p ictu r es of DVD-V ideo o r DVD-R/-RW (VR fo r mat) discs. When othe r 16:9 p ictur es ar e p layed, they ar e outp ut in the Letter Box mo de. NTSC on PAL TV On Select this when conn ected to a PAL-only TV. The p ictur e is dis p layed co rr ectly on the PAL-on ly TV even when p laying a sou r ce with a f r ame/fiel d r ate other t han 50 Hz. Off Select this when connected to an NTSC -com p atible TV . ⢠The facto r y defa ult setting is On for U.K. models, Off for other models. ⢠Many r ecent PAL T Vs su pp o r t the in p ut of NTSC signals, in which case th is can be set to Off . Also check you r TVâÂÂs op er ating inst r uctions . Audio Ou t Dolby Di gital Out * Only valid fo r the DIGITA L OUT te r minal. Dolby Digital 1 Dolby Digi tal audio signals a r e outp ut. With BD-ROMs, the secondar y audio and inte r ac tive audi o ar e mixed for outp ut. Dolby Digital 2 Dolby Digi tal audio signals a r e out p ut. With BD-ROMs, the signals a r e out p ut without mixing the seconda r y audio and inte r active audio signals. Dolby Digital ï¤ PCM Select this when the connected AV r ece ive r o r am p lifie r , etc., is not com p atible with Dol by Digital audio signals. The Dolby Digita l audio signals a r e conve r te d into linea r PCM audio signals fo r out p ut. DTS Out * Only valid fo r the DIGITA L OUT te r minal. DTS 1 DTS Digital Su rr ound audio signals a r e out p ut. With BD-ROMs, the seconda r y au dio and inte r active audio a r e mixed fo r ou t p ut. DTS 2 DTS Digital Su rr ound audio signals a r e outp ut. With BD-ROMs, the signals a r e out p ut without mixing the se conda r y audio and inte r active audio signals. DTS ï¤ PCM Select this when the connected AV r ece ive r o r am p lifie r , etc., is not com p atible with DTS Digital Su rr o und audio signal s. The DTS Digita l Su rr ound au dio signals a r e conve r ted into linea r PCM audio sign als fo r out p ut. AAC Out * Only valid fo r the DIGITA L OUT te r minal. AAC Select this when the connected AV r ecei ve r o r am p lifie r , etc., is com p atible with AAC audi o signals. The AAC audio signals a r e out p ut. AAC ï¤ PCM Select this when the connected AV r ece ive r o r am p lifie r , etc., is not com p atible with AAC audio sign als. The AAC audio signals a r e conve r ted into linea r PCM audio sign als fo r out p ut. DTS Downm ix St ereo DTS-HD Maste r Audio signals, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio signals or DTS Digital Su rr ound audio signals conve r ted to lin ea r PCM audio signals a r e conve r te d into 2-channel ( ste r eo) signa ls fo r out p ut. Lt/Rt DTS-HD Maste r Audio signals, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio signals o r DTS Digital Su rr ound audio signals conve r ted to lin ea r PCM audio signals a r e conve r ted into 2-channel signals com p atible with Dolby Su rr ound fo r out p ut (when the connected AV r eceive r o r am p lifie r , etc., is com p atible with Dolby P r o Logic, the AV r ec eive r o r am p lifie r out p uts t he linea r PCM audio signals as su rr ound audio signals). LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 37 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
06 38 En HDMI HDMI High S p eed T r ansmission On Select this when connected with a High S p eed HDMI⢠cable ( p age 13) . Off Select this when connecte d with a Standa r d HDMI⢠cable ( p age 13) . The p layer âÂÂs setting scr een is clos ed if the outp u t video r esolution is switched by changing the HDMI High Speed Transm ission setting. HDMI Colo r Sp ace Au to Select this to automatically switch the vide o out p ut betwe en YCbC r an d RGB signals acco r ding t o the connected equ i p me nt. YCbC r 4:4:4 Select this to out p ut the video signals as YCbC r 4:4:4 si gnals. YCbC r 4:2:2 Select this to out p ut the video signals as YCbC r 4:2:2 si gnals. RGB (16 to 235) Select this to out p ut the video signals as RGB si gnals . Choose this if the colo r s seem too den se and all the da r k colo r s a r e dis p layed in a unifo r m black when RGB (0 to 2 55) is selected. RGB (0 to 255) Select th is to out p ut the video signals as RGB si gn als. Choose this if the colo r s seem too fa int and th e black seems too b r ight when RGB (16 to 2 35) is selected. No r mally it is r ecommended to set this to Au to . When set to Auto , the o p timum video signals fo r you r TV a r e out p ut. HDMI Audio Out Auto The signals a r e out p ut with as many audio channels as p ossible. In cases when the numbe r of chan nels does not decr ease when the si gnals ar e outp ut as such without conve r ti ng them to linea r PCM, they a r e out p ut as such ( p age 45) . PCM Select this when you wa nt the seconda r y audio and int e r active audio signals to be mixed fo r out p ut o r when you want to out p ut pr ior itizing sam p ling f r equency o ve r the numbe r of channels ( p age 45). Off Select this when you do not want to out p ut the au dio f r om the HDMI out p ut te r minal. KURO LINK On Select this to cont r ol the p layer with the r emote con t r ol of the AV device connected using an HDMI cable. Also r efer to About KURO LINK function on p age 14. Off Select this when yo u do not want to cont r ol the p layer with the r emote cont r ol of the AV device connect ed using an HDMI cable. Dis p lay Powe r On * Only valid when KURO LINK is set to On . On Select this when you want th e TV to tu r n on each time p layback is sta r ted o r the Home Menu o r Home Media Galle r y is dis p laye d on the p layer . Off Select this whe n you do not want the T V to tu r n on each time p layback is sta r ted o r the Home Menu o r Home Media Ga lle r y is dis p layed on the p layer . Dis p lay Powe r Off * Only valid when KURO LINK is set to On . On Se lect this when you want the p layer âÂÂs p ower to tur n off together with the TVâÂÂs p ower . Off Select this when y ou do not want the p layer âÂÂs p ower to tur n o ff togethe r with the TVâÂÂs p ower . PQLS * Only valid when KURO LINK is set to On . Auto Enables PQLS function ( p age 14) . Off Disa bles PQLS functi on ( p age 14) . Netwo r k IP Add r ess Select this to set the IP add r ess of the p layer and DNS se r ver ( p age 41 ). P r oxy Se r ve r Only set the pr oxy se r ver if so inst r ucted by you r Inte r net se r vice pr ovider ( p age 41 ). Dis p lay Netwo r k Configu r ation Select this to dis p lay a list of the netwo r k settings ( p age 41 ). Connection Test Select this to test the netwo r k conn ection ( p age 4 2). Setting Options Explanatio n LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 38 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
39 En 06 Langua ge OSD Language English Select this to set t he language of the on-sc r een dis p lays to English. available l anguages Choos e a langua ge fo r the on-sc r een dis p lays f r om the listed la nguages. Audio Language * Fo r some discs, it may not be p ossible to change to the selected language. English Select this to set both the BD-ROM and DVD-Video defa ult audio language to English. available l anguages Choos e a langua ge f r om the listed languages to set t he default audio language fo r BD-ROM and DV D-Video p layback. Othe r Continue to t he next sc r een to set th e default audi o language fo r BD-ROM and DVD-V ideo p layback. You can selec t the language name o r ente r the code numbe r (se e on p age 4 7 fo r the code table). If a language n ot r ecor ded on the BD/DVD is set, one of th e r ecor ded language s is automatically selected and p layed . Subtitle L anguage * Fo r some discs, it may not be p ossible to change to the selected language. English Select this to set t he default subti tle language fo r BD-ROM and DVD-Vi deo p layback to English. available l anguages Choos e a langua ge f r om the listed languages to set t he default subtitle language fo r BD-ROM and DV D-Video p layback. Othe r Continue to th e next sc r een to se t the defau lt subtitle la nguage fo r BD-ROM and DVD-V ideo p layback. You can selec t the language name o r ente r the code numbe r (se e on p age 4 7 fo r the code table). If a language n ot r ecor ded on the BD/DVD is set, one of th e r ecor ded language s is automatically selected and p layed . BDMV/DVD-Video Menu Lang. * Fo r some discs, it may not be p ossible to change to the selected language. w/Subtitle Language Sets the language of BD-ROM and DVD-Vide o menus to the same as that set fo r the subtitle language. available l anguages Choose a language f r om the listed langua ges to set the default languag e fo r BD-ROM and DVD-Video menus. Othe r Continue to t he next sc r een to set the default menu langua ge fo r BD-ROM and DVD-Video men us. You can select the language nam e o r ente r the code numbe r (see on p ag e 47 fo r the code table). If a language n ot r ecor ded on the BD/DVD is set, one of th e r ecor ded language s is automatically selected and p layed . Subtitle D is p lay On Se lect this to disp lay the subtitles. Off Select th is if you do not want to dis p lay the subtitles. Note th at on some discs the subtitles a r e dis p layed by fo r ce. Playback Still Pict u r e Field This eliminates instability of the p ictur e when p layback is p aused. F r ame This makes p ictu r es clea r when p layback is p aused, but instability may be obse r ved. Auto Field o r Frame is switched automatically acco r ding to the disc or file be ing p layed. Angle/Seco nda r y Indicato r On Select this to dis p lay the a ngle ma r k, seconda r y video ma r k and seconda r y audio ma r k on the TV sc r een ( p ages 25 and 26). Off Select this if you do not want to dis p lay the angle mar k, secondar y video mar k and second a r y au dio ma r k on the TV sc r een. DivX VOD Regist r ation Code Dis p lays the p layer âÂÂs r egistr ation code r equir ed to p lay DivX VOD files ( p age 9). Hyb r id Disc Playback BD Th e BD laye r of hyb r id discs with two o r mo re laye r s (BD and DVD o r CD) is p layed. DVD The DVD laye r of hyb r id discs with two o r mo r e laye r s (BD and DVD) is p layed. If the r e is no DVD laye r , the BD laye r is p layed. CD The CD laye r of hyb r id discs with two o r mo r e laye r s (BD and CD) is p layed. If the r e is no CD laye r , the BD laye r is p layed. Remove the disc f r o m the disc t r ay when changin g the setting. BDMV/BDAV Playback P r io r ity BDMV Select this to p lay the B DMV fo r mat on BD-R/-RE discs containing b oth BDMV and BDAV fo r mats. BDAV Select this to p lay the BDAV f or mat on BD-R/-RE discs co ntaining both BDMV and BDAV fo r mats. Remove the disc f r o m the disc t r ay when changin g the setting. Setting Options Explanatio n LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 39 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
06 40 En Data Manage ment Individual/Sha r ed Data E r ase Use this to dis p lay the list of data used fo r th e BD-LIVE and BONUSVIE W functions and to e r as e the data ( p age 42). Remove the disc f r o m the disc t r ay when changin g the setting. A pp lication Data E r ase Use th is to e r ase bookma r ks, high sco r es of games and othe r data ( p age 42). Remove the disc f r o m the disc t r ay when changin g the setting. Sto r age Fo r mat Select this to fo r mat the sto r age device on which th e data used by the BD-LIVE an d BONUSVIE W functions i s sto r ed ( p age 4 2). Remove the disc f r o m the disc t r ay when changin g the setting. Setu p Navigato r Sta r t making the setting s using the Setu p Navigato r menu. Fo r details, see Making settings using the Setup Navigator menu on p ag e 18. Pa r ental Lock Set Passwo r d (Ch ange Passwo r d) Registe r (change) th e p asswo r d fo r p ar ental lock settin gs o r fo r unlocking to p lay DV D-Video with p ar ental lock featu r e ( p age 43). DVD-Vide o Pa r ental Lock Change the p layer âÂÂs p ar ental lock level ( p age 43) . BDMV Pa r ental Lock Change the r estr icte d age ( p age 43) . Count r y Code Change the Count r y/Ar ea code (p age 43). O p tions Out p ut Te r minal Set the te r minals f r om which the p laye r âÂÂs video and audio signals a r e to be out p ut ( p age 43). On Sc r een Dis p lay On Se lect this to disp lay the o p er ation indicato r s (Play, Sto p , etc.) on the TV sc r een. Off Select this if you do not want to dis p lay the o p er ation indicato r s (Play, Sto p , etc.) on the TV s c r een. Sc r een Save r On The sc r een save r is automati cally activated if th e r e is no o p er ation fo r ove r 1 minute afte r p layback is sto pp ed o r p aused. The sc reen save r is automatically activa ted if the r e is no o p er ation f o r ove r 1 minute afte r t he Home Men u or Home Media Galler y is disp layed while p laying a BD or DVD. With audio CDs a nd audio fi les, the sc r een save r is automatically a ctivated if no button is o p er ated fo r ove r 1 minute , even whil e the audio CD o r aud io file is p laying. The sc r een save r tu r ns of f when an o p eration is p er for med on the p layer or r emote contr ol. Off The sc r ee n save r is not a ctivated. Auto Powe r Off On Se lect this to tu r n the p ower off aut omatically (the p ower tu r ns off automatically if no o p er at ion is p er for med fo r ove r 30 mi nutes). Off Select this if you do not want the p ower to tu r n off aut omatically. Softwa r e U p date The Softwa r e U p date function can check fo r and do wnload u p dated system softwa r e f r om the netwo r k ser ve r ( p age 44). Setting Options Explanatio n LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 40 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
41 En 06 ï° Setting the IP address 1 Select and set Network ï¤ IP Add ress ï¤ Next Screen. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . 2 Set IP address. Use ï© /ïª /ï« /ï¬ to set the IP add r ess of the p layer o r DNS se r ve r , then pr ess ENTER . ⢠Auto Set IP Address On â The p layer âÂÂs IP addr ess is obtained automatically. Select this when using a b r oadband r outer or br oadband modem that has a DHCP (Dynamic Host Confi gu r ation P r otocol) se r ver function. This p la yer âÂÂs IP add r ess will automatically be allocat ed f r om the DHCP se r ver . Off â The p layer âÂÂs IP addr e ss must be s et manually. Use the numbe r buttons (0 to 9) to in p ut the IP add r ess, subnet mask and default gateway. ⢠Aut o Set DNS Server Address On â The DNS se r ver âÂÂs IP add r ess is obtained automatically. Off â The DNS se r ve r âÂÂs IP add r ess must be set manually. Use the numbe r b u t t o n s ( 0 t o 9 ) t o i n p ut the DNS se r ver âÂÂs IP add r ess sti p ulated by you r Inte r net se r vice pr ovide r . Note â¢W h e n Auto Set IP Address i s set to Off , Auto Set DNS Server Address is also set to Off . â¢F o r infor mation on DHCP ser ver fun ction, r efer to the netwo r k deviceâÂÂs o p er ating inst r uctions. ⢠You may need to con tact you r Inte r net se r vice pr ovide r or networ k administr ator when inp utting the IP add r ess manually. ï° Setting the proxy server Only s et the pr oxy se r ve r if so inst r ucted by you r Inte r net se r vice pr ovide r . 1 Select and set Network ï¤ Proxy Server ï¤ Next Screen. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . 2 Select and set Us e or Not use at Proxy Serve r. Use ï« /ï¬ to change, then pr ess ïª . ⢠Use â Select this when using a pr oxy se r ve r. ⢠Not use â Select this when not using a pr oxy se r ve r. If you have selected Use , pr oceed to ste p 3. 3 Select and set Serve r Select Method. Use ï« /ï¬ to change, then pr ess ïª . ⢠IP Addre ss â In p ut the IP add r ess. ⢠Server Name â In p ut the se r ve r name. 4 Input IP Address or Server Name. Use the numbe r buttons (0 to 9) to in p ut the numbe r if you select IP add r ess by ste p 3. Use ï« /ï¬ to move the cu r sor . Use the numbe r buttons (0 to 9) to in p ut cha r acter s if you select S e r ver Name by ste p 3. The cha r acter s that can be in p ut fo r the se r ver name a r e listed on the table below. P r essing a button r ep eatedly cycles th r ough the cha r acter s shown. ⢠If you want to ente r two cha r acter s in succession that a r e both on the same button (f o r exa m p le a P and an R ), pr ess ï¬ afte r inp utting the fir st char acter th en in p ut the second cha r ac te r . â¢U s e CLEAR to del e te the last cha r acter . â¢U s e ï« /ï¬ to move the dis p layed c har acte r s when all the in p ut cha r acter s cannot be dis p layed. 5 Input Port Number . P r ess ïª , use the numbe r bu ttons (0 to 9) to inp ut the numbe r . 6 Press ENTER to set. ï° Displaying the network settings ï¦ Select and set Network ï¤ Display Network Configuration ï¤ Next Screen. Use ï© /ïª to select, then pr ess ENTER . IP Address Auto Set IP Address IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Auto Set DNS Ser ver Address DNS Server (Primary) DNS Server (Secondar y) Off Network BD PLAYER ï£ï ï ï ï ï ï ï ï ï ï ï Off ï¤ Key Characters Key Characters 1 1 . â 6 m n o 6 2 a b c 2 7 p q r s 7 3 d e f 3 8 t u v 8 4 g h i 4 9 w x y z 9 5 j k l 5 0 0 ï£ï ï ï ï ï ï ï ï ï ï ï Use ï¤ P roxy Ser ver P roxy Ser ver Ser ver Select Method Ser ver Name P ort Number Ser ver Name Network BD PLAYER LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 41 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
06 42 En The MAC add r ess, IP add r ess, subnet mask , default gateway and DNS se r ver ( pr imar y and seconda r y) settings a r e dis p layed. When Auto Set IP Address is set to On , the values obtained a utomatica lly a r e dis p layed. Note ⢠âÂÂ0.0.0.0â is dis p layed when each IP add r ess ha s not been set. ï° Testing the network connection ï¦ Select and set Network ï¤ Connection Test ï¤ Start. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . âÂÂNetwo r k connection test com p leted successfully.â is dis p layed once the test is com p leted . If any othe r messag e is dis p layed, check the connections a nd/o r settings ( p ages 17 and 41). ï° Changing to other language at language setting 1 Select and set Language . Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . 2 Select and set Audio Langu age, Subtitle Language or BDMV/DVD -Video Menu Lang. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . 3 Select and set Other. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . 4 Change the languag e. Use ï« /ï¬ to ch ange, then pr ess ENTER . ⢠The la nguage can also be chang ed using the numbe r buttons . Use ï© /ïª to m ove the cu r sor to Number , use the numbe r bu tt on s ( 0 t o 9 ) t o i np ut the numbe r , then pr ess ENTER . Refe r to Lang uage Code Table and Country/Area Code Table on p age 47. Note ⢠If a language not r ecor ded on the BD/DVD is set, one of the r ecor ded languages is automatically selected and p layed. ï° Erasing data that has been ad ded to BDs and application data Use this pr ocedu r e to e r ase data that has been added t o BDs (data downlo aded with the BD-LIVE functi on and data used w ith the BON USVIEW fun ction) and a pp licati on data. Caution â¢S o m e t i m e i s r equi r ed to e r ase the data. ⢠Do not un p lug the p ower co r d while data is bei ng e r ased. â¢T h i s o p e r ation does not wor k when a disc is loaded. 1 Select and set Da ta Management. Use ï© /ïª to select, then pr ess ENTER . 2 Select and set the erase menu. Use ï© /ïª to select, then pr ess ENTER . ⢠Individual /Shared Data Erase Use this pr ocedu r e to select and e r ase data downloaded with the BD-LIV E function and data used with the BONUSVIEW func tion ( p age 8). Select Next Screen , the n pr ess ENTER . The list sc r een a pp ea rs. When a disc name is selected, the data downloaded with the BD-LIVE function and data used with the BONUSVIEW is e r ased. When Shared Data is selected, all the data downloaded with the BD-LIVE function and not associated to discs is e r ased. Use ï© /ïª to selec t the data to be e r ased, then pr ess ENTER . ⢠Application Data Eras e Use this pr ocedu r e to e r ase BD-ROM a pp li cation data (high sco r es of games, bookma r ks da ta, etc.). Select Start , then pr ess ENTER . ⢠Storage Format Use this pr ocedu r e to fo r mat the sto r age in which the data downloaded with the BD-LIVE function and data used with the BONUSVIEW function i s sto r ed ( p age 8). When this i s done, all the data on th e external storage device is erased. Select Start , then pr ess ENTER . 3 Select Yes, then press ENTER. Use ï« /ï¬ to select, then pr ess ENTER . Number Audio Language Initial Setup BD PLAYER Language Video Out Audio Out HDMI Network Language Playback Data Management Setup Navigator English 05 1 4 Individual/Shared Data Erase BD PLAYER 15 items Shared Data Disc Name 1 Disc Name 2 Disc Name 3 Disc Name 4 Disc Name 5 Disc Name 6 Disc Name 7 LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 42 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
43 En 06 ï° Registering or Changing the password Use this pr ocedu r e to r egister or change the code numbe r r equi r ed fo r the Pa r ental Lock settings. 1 Select and set Parental Lock ï¤ Set Password ï¤ Next Screen. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . 2 Input the password. Use the numbe r button s (0 to 9) o r ï©/ ïª to in p ut the numbe r , then pr ess EN TER to set. Use ï« /ï¬ to mo ve the cu r so r . 3 Re-input the password. Use the numbe r button s (0 to 9) o r ï©/ ïª to in p ut the numbe r , then pr ess EN TER to set. Use ï« /ï¬ to mo ve the cu r so r . â¢T o c h a n g e t h e p asswor d, in p ut the pr eviou sly r egister ed p ass w o r d, then in p ut the new p asswo r d. Note â¢W e r ecommend making a note of the p asswor d. ⢠If you fo r get th e p asswor d, r eset the p layer to the facto r y default setting, then r egiste r the passwo r d again ( p age 44). ï° Changing the Parental Lock level for viewing DVDs Some DVD-Video discs containing scenes of violence, fo r exam p le, have Pa r ental Lock lev els (check the indicati ons on the discâÂÂs jacket o r elsewhe r e). To r estr ict viewing these discs, set the p layer âÂÂs level to the level lowe r than the discs. 1 Select and set Parental Lock ï¤ DVD-Video Parental Lock ï¤ Next Screen. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . 2 Input the password. Use the numbe r button s (0 to 9) o r ï©/ ïª to in p ut the numbe r , then pr ess EN TER to set. Use ï« /ï¬ to mo ve the cu r so r . 3 Change the level. Use ï« /ï¬ to ch ange, then pr ess ENTER to set . Note ⢠The level can be set to Off o r between Level1 and Level8 . When set to Off , viewing is not r estr icted. ï° Changing the Age Restriction for viewing BD-ROMs Fo r BD-ROMs containing scenes of violence, fo r exam p le, viewing can be r estr icted by setting an age r estr iction fo r the BD-ROM s. 1 Select and set Parental Lock ï¤ BDMV Parental Lock ï¤ Next Screen. Use ï© /ïª to select, then pr ess ENTER . 2 Input the password. Use the numbe r bu ttons (0 to 9) o r ï©/ ïª to inp ut the numbe r , then pr ess ENTER to set. Use ï« /ï¬ to move the cu r so r . 3 Change the age. Use the numbe r bu ttons (0 to 9) o r ï©/ ïª to inp ut the numbe r , then pr ess ENTER to set. Use ï« /ï¬ to move the cu r so r . Note ⢠When Age Restriction is set to 255 , viewing is not r estr icted. ï° Changing the Country/Area code 1 Select and set Parental Lock ï¤ Country Code ï¤ Next Screen. Use ï© /ïª to select, then pr ess ENTER . 2 Input the password. Use the numbe r bu ttons (0 to 9) o r ï©/ ïª to inp ut the numbe r , then pr ess ENTER to set. Use ï« /ï¬ to move the cu r so r . 3 Change the country/ area code. Use ï« /ï¬ to change, then pr ess ENTER to set. ⢠The the count r y/ar ea code can also be chang ed using the numbe r buttons. Use ï© /ïª to move the cu r sor to Number , use the numbe r buttons (0 to 9) to inp ut the numbe r , then pr ess ENTER . Refe r to Language Code Table and Country/Area Co de Table on p age 47. ï° Setting the output terminals Set the te r minals f r om which the p lay er âÂÂs video and audio signals a r e to be out p ut. 1 Select and set Op tions ï¤ Output Terminal ï¤ Next Screen. Use ï© /ïª to select, then pr ess ENTER . 2 Select and set the vi deo and audio output terminals. Select the actually connected video and audio out p ut te r minals. Use ï© /ïª /ï« /ï¬ to select, then pr ess ENTER . Fo r details on the settings, r efe r to ste p 4 o n p age 18. When COMPON ENT VIDEO o r VIDEO is selected fo r Video , no so und is out p ut fr om the HDMI OUT te r minal (a wa r ning message is dis p laye d). LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 43 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
06 44 En Software updating The softwa r e of the p layer ca n be u pdated by connecting it to the Int e r net using a LA N cable. Befo r e u p dating th e softwa r e, make su r e th at you have connected the p layer to the netwo rk and made the necessa r y settings ( p ages 17 and 41). Caution â¢D o n o t u n p lug the p ower cor d dur ing softwar e u p dating. Othe r wise, the u p dating will be abo r ted and malfunction may occu r with the p layer . â¢T h e r e ar e two pr ocesses for softwar e up dating, downloading and u p da ting. Both pr ocesses may take a ce r tain p er iod o f time. â¢D e p ending on the In ter net connection conditions, downloading may take a l ong time. â¢O t h e r op e r ations ar e defea ted du r i ng softwa r e u p dating. Fu r the r mo r e u p dating pr ocess cannot be canceled. â¢W h e n t h e f r ont p anel disp lay is off, tur n it on with FL DIMMER . When u p dating the p layer âÂÂs sof twa r e with the f r ont p anel d is p lay off, do not un p lug the p ower co r d until the FL OFF indica tor tu r ns off. Note â¢S t e p s 1 to 4 a r e the o p er ations p er fo r med by the use r (they a r e intended to download the softwa r e f r om the Inte r net). â¢S t e p s 5 to 7 a r e the o p er ations p er fo r med (automa tically) b y the p laye r (they a r e intend ed to u p date the softwa r e). 1 When playba ck is stopped, display the Home Menu screen. P r ess HOME MENU. 2 Select and set Initial Se tup. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . 3 Select and set Options ï¤ Software Update ï¤ Start. Use ï© /ïª to select, th en pr ess ENTER . â¢I f t h e p laye r is al r eady r unning the latest softwar e, the message âÂÂThe p layerâÂÂs softwa r e is u p to date and does not need u p dating.â is dis p layed. 4 Select and set Yes. Use ï« /ï¬ to s elect Yes , then pr ess ENTER . â¢T h e h e l p menu is disp layed if the p laye r cannot co nnec t to the Inte r ne t. Check the connections and settings ( p ages 17 and 41). 5 Downloa ding of th e software start. The softwa r e download status is dis p layed o n the sc r een. â¢D e p ending on the In ter net connection conditions, softwa r e downlo ading may tak e a ce r tain p er iod of time. 6 Updating starts. The f r ont p anel dis p l a y shows messages such as âÂÂDATA CHECKâ , âÂÂWRT SYS1â , âÂÂWRT DRVâ and âÂÂWRT FLCâ . ⢠S o f t w a r e up dating may ta ke a cer tain p er iod o f time. 7 Updating completes. The f r ont p anel dis p l a y shows âÂÂDOWNLOAD OKâ and the p laye r tu r ns off auto matically. Restoring all the settings to the factory default settings 1 Check that the playerâÂÂs pow er is turned on. 2 When a di sc is playing , press ï§ to stop playback. Eject the disc f r om the p layer . 3 While pr essing ï§ , press ïµ STANDBY/ON. O pe r ate using the butto ns on the p laye r âÂÂs f r ont p anel. Note â¢A f t e r r esto r ing all the settin gs to th e factor y default settings, use Setup Navigator to r eset the p layer ( p age 18). ⢠When all the settings a r e r estor ed to the facto r y defaults, al l the data fo r the seconda r y video (Pictu r e- in-Pictu r e), secon da r y audio, bookma r ks, etc., is e r ased. LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 44 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
45 En 06 About the audio output settings The audio signals that a r e out p ut diffe r acco r ding to the audio fo r mat r ecorded on the disc and the p layer âÂÂs settings. Check on the table below. Caution â¢W h e n ANALOG AUDIO is select ed at Output Terminal , no audio signals a re out p ut f r om the HDMI OUT te r min al o r DIGIT AL OUT te r minal ( p ages 18 and 43). â¢W h e n HDMI o r DIGITAL AUDIO is selected at Output Terminal , linea r PCM audio signals (2 channels) a r e out p ut f r om all te r minals othe r than the ones selected at Output Terminal ( p ages 18 and 43). ⢠The output from all termin als other than the ones select ed for Audio does not sound as intended by the content provider. Audio form at AUDIO OUT terminals DIGITAL OUT terminal HDMI OUT terminal Converted t o linear PCM audio 1 1. When Dolby Digi tal Out is set to Dolby Digital ï¤ PCM , DTS Out is set to DTS ï¤ PCM , o r AAC Out is set to AAC ï¤ PCM ( p age 37). Not converted to linear PCM audio 2 2. When Dolby Digi tal Out is set to Dolby Digital 1 / Dolby Digital 2 , DTS Out is set to DTS 1 /DTS 2 o r AAC Out is set to AAC ( p age 37). PCM 3 3. When HDMI Audio Out is set to PCM o r Auto ( p age 38). Auto 3 BD- ROM Dolby Digital Conve r ted t o 2-channel a udio Conve r ted t o 2-channel a udio Dolby Digital 4 4. When out p utting Dolby Digital o r DTS Digita l Su rr ound bitst r eam with settings of Dolby Digital 2 at Dolby Digi tal Out , DTS 2 at DTS Out , the seconda r y audio and inte r active audio signals a r e not mixed fo r out p ut. 5.1-channe l audio Dolby Digital 5,6 5. When out p utting the bitst r eam of Dolby T r ueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby Digital, DTS-HD Maste r Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio o r DTS Digit al Su rr ound, the seconda r y audio and inte r acti ve audio s ignals a r e not mixed for outp ut. 6. If the co nnected HDMI de vice is not com p atible with Dolby T r ueHD o r Dolby Digital Plus bitst r eam, the signals a r e out p ut in linea r PCM (7.1 channels) o r Dolby Digital bitst r eam. If the connec ted HDMI device is not com p atible with Dolby Digital bitst r eam , the signals a r e out p ut in linea r PCM (2 channels). Dolby Digital Plus 7.1-channe l audio Dolby Digital Plus 5,6 Dolby T r ueHD 7.1-channel audio 7 7. When the out p ut vide o r esolution is set to 576i/480i or 576 p /480p , the signals may be outp ut in linear P C M ( 2 c h a n n e l s ) , d e p ending on HDMI High Sp eed Tran smiss ion setting and/o r the connected HDMI device ( p ag e 13). Dolby T r ueHD 5,6,8 8. When the out p ut video r esolution is set to 576i/480i or 576p /480p , the signals may be outp ut in linear PCM (2 channels) or Dolby Digital bitst r eam, de p ending on HDMI High Speed Transmission setting and/o r the conn ected HDMI devic e ( p age 13). DTS Digital Su rr ound DTS Digital Su rr ound 4 7.1-channe l audio DTS Digital Su rr ound 5,9 DTS-HD Hig h Resolution Audio 7.1-channel audio 7 DTS-HD High Resolution Audio 5,7,9 DTS-HD Maste r Audio DTS-HD Maste r Audio 5,9,10 Linea r PCM Conve r ted to 2- channel audio 7.1-channel audio 7 BD-R/ -RE Dolby Digital Conve r ted t o 2-channel a udio Conve r ted t o 2-channel a udio Dolby Digital 5.1-channe l audio Dolby Digital 6 MPEG-2 AAC MPEG-2 AAC MPEG-2 AAC MPEG 2-channel a udio Linea r PCM DVD- Video Dolby Digital Conve r ted t o 2-channel a udio Conve r ted t o 2-channel a udio Dolby Digital 5.1-channe l audio Dolby Digital 6 DTS Digital Su rr ound DTS Digital Su rr ound DTS Digital Su rr ound 9 MPEG 2-channel a udio Linea r PCM DVD-R/ -RW (VR fo r mat) Dolby Digital Conve r ted to 2-channel a udio Conve r ted t o 2-channel a udio Dolby Digital 5.1-channel audio Dolby Digital 6 MPEG 2-channel a udio Linea r PCM LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 45 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
06 46 En Note â¢O n l y c o m p atible with 7.1-channel su rr ound bac k. 6.1-channel surr ound back is o utp ut in 7.1 channels. In o ther cases, out p u t as audio signals of 5.1-ch annels o r less. â¢W h e n o u t p utting linear PCM audio si gnals, if the numbe r of com p atible cha nnels of the co nnected HDMI d evice is lowe r , the si gnals a r e out p ut with the numbe r of chann els fo r which the device is com p atible. ⢠The audio signals out p ut f r om the DIGITAL OUT te r minal have a sam p ling f r equency of 48 kHz (44.1 kHz fo r audio CDs). 9. If the connec ted HDMI device is not com p atible wi th DTS-HD Maste r Audio o r DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, the sig nals a r e out p ut in linea r PCM (2 channels) o r DTS Digital Su rr ound bitst r ea m. If the connec ted HDMI device is not com p atible with DTS Digital Su rr ound bitst r eam, the signals a r e out p ut in linea r PCM (2 channels). 10. When the out p ut video r esolution is set to 576i/4 80i o r 576 p /480p , the signals may be out p ut in linea r PCM (2 channels) o r DTS Digital Su rr ound, de p ending on HDMI High Speed Tr ansmis sion setting and/o r the connec ted HDMI device. LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 46 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
47 En 06 Language Code Table and Country/Area Code Table ï° Language Code Table Language name, language code, input code ï° Country/Area Code Table Count r y/Ar ea name, Country/Area code, input code Abkhazian, ab/abk, 0102 Afa r , aa/aar, 0101 Af r ikaans, af/afr, 0106 Albanian, sq/sqi, 1917 Amha r ic, am/amh, 0113 A r abic, ar/ara, 01 18 A r menian, hy/hye, 0825 Assamese, as/asm, 0119 Ayma r a, ay/aym, 0125 Aze r baijani, az/aze, 0126 Bashki r , ba/bak, 0201 Basque, eu/eus, 0521 Bela r usian, be/bel, 0205 Bengali, bn/ben, 0214 Biha r i, bh/bih, 0208 Bislama, bi/bis, 0209 B r eton, br/bre, 02 18 Bulga r ian, bg/bul, 0207 Bu r mese, my/mya, 1325 Catalan, ca/cat, 030 1 Cent r al Khme r , km/kh m, 1113 Chinese, zh/zho, 2608 Co r sican, co/cos, 0315 C r oatian, hr/hrv, 0818 Czech, cs/ces, 0319 Danish, da/dan, 0401 Dutch, nl/nld, 1412 Dzongkha, dz/dzo, 0426 English, en/eng, 0514 Es p er anto, eo/epo, 0515 Estonian, et/est, 052 0 Finnish, fi/fin, 0609 Fijia n, fj /fij, 0610 Fa r oese, fo/fao, 061 5 F r ench, fr/fra , 0618 Galician, gl/glg, 0712 Geo r gian, ka/kat, 1101 Ge r man, de/deu, 0405 G r eek, el/ell, 0512 Gua r ani, gn/grn, 0714 Guja r ati, gu/guj, 0721 Hausa, ha/hau, 0801 Heb r ew, iw/heb, 0923 Hindi, hi/hin, 0809 Hunga r ian, hu/hun, 0821 Icelandic, is/i sl, 0919 Indonesi an, in/ind, 0914 Inte r lingua, ia/ina, 0901 Inte r lingue, ie/ile, 0905 Inu p iaq, ik/ipk, 0911 I r ish, ga/gle, 070 1 Italian, it/ita, 0920 Ja p anese, ja/jpn, 1001 Javanese, jw/jav, 1023 Kalaallisut, kl/kal, 1112 Kannada, kn/kan, 1114 Kashmi r i, ks/kas, 1 119 Kazakh, kk/kaz, 1111 Kinya r wanda, rw/kin, 1823 Ki r ghiz, ky/kir, 112 5 Ko r ean, ko/kor, 1115 Ku r dish, ku/kur, 1121 Lao, lo/lao, 1215 Latin, la/ lat, 1201 Latvia n, lv/lav, 1222 Lingala, ln/lin, 1214 Lithuanian, lt/lit, 1220 Macedonian, mk/mkd, 1311 Malagasy, mg/mlg, 1307 Malay, ms/msa, 1319 Malayalam, ml/mal , 1312 Maltese, mt/m lt, 1320 Mao r i, mi/mri, 1309 Ma r athi, mr/mar, 1318 Mongolian, mn/mon, 1314 Moldavian, mo/mo l, 1315 Nau r u, na/nau, 1401 Ne p ali, ne/nep, 1405 No r wegian, no/nor, 1415 Occitan, oc/oci, 15 03 O r iya, or/ori, 1518 O r omo, om/orm, 15 13 Panjabi, pa/pan, 1601 Pe r sian, fa/fas, 0601 Polish, pl/pol, 1612 Po r tugu ese, pt/por, 1620 Pushto, ps/pus, 1619 Quechua, qu/que, 1721 Romanian, ro/ron, 1815 Romansch, rm/roh, 1813 Rundi, rn/run, 1814 Russian, ru/rus, 1821 Samoan, sm/smo, 1913 Sango, sg/ sag, 1907 Sansk r it, sa/san, 1901 Scottish Gaelic, gd/gla, 0704 Se r bian, sr/srp , 1918 Se r bo-C r oatian, sh/- --, 1908 Shona, sn/sna, 1914 Sindhi, sd/snd, 1904 Sinhalese, si/sin, 190 9 Sl o vak, s k/slk, 1911 Slovenian, sl/slv, 1912 Somali, so/som, 19 15 Sotho, Southe r n, st/sot, 1920 S p anish, es/spa, 0519 Sundanese, su/sun, 1921 Swahili, sw/swa, 1923 Swati, ss/ssw, 1919 Swedish, sv/s we, 1922 Tagalog, tl/tgl, 2012 Tajik, tg/tgk, 2007 Tamil, ta/tam, 2001 Tata r , tt/tat, 202 0 Telugu, te/tel, 2005 Thai, th/tha, 2008 Tibetan, bo/bod, 0215 Tig r inya, ti/tir, 2009 Tonga (Tonga Islands), to/ton, 2015 Tsonga, ts/tso, 2019 Tswana, tn/tsn, 2014 Tu r kmen, tk/tuk, 2011 Tu r kish, tr/tur, 2018 Twi, tw/twi, 2023 Uk r ainian, uk/ukr, 2111 U r du, ur/urd, 2118 Uzbek, uz/uzb, 2126 Vietnamese, vi/vie, 2209 Vola p ük, vo/vol, 2215 Welsh, cy/cym, 032 5 Weste r n F r isian, fy/f ry, 0625 Wolof, wo/wol, 2315 Xhosa, xh/xho, 2408 Yiddish, ji/yid, 1009 Yo r uba, yo/yor, 251 5 Zulu, zu/zul, 2621 Anguilla, ai, 0109 Antigua and Ba r buda, ag, 0107 A r genti na, ar, 0118 A r menia, am, 0113 Aust r alia, au, 0121 Aust r ia, at, 0120 Aze r baijan, az, 0126 Bahamas, bs, 0219 Ba r bados, bb, 0202 Bela r us, by, 0225 Belgium, be, 0205 Belize, bz, 0226 Be r muda, bm, 0213 B r azil, br, 0218 Bulga r ia, bg, 0207 Canada, ca, 0301 Cayman Islands, ky, 1125 Chile, cl, 0312 China, cn, 0314 Colombia, co, 0315 C r oatia, hr, 0818 Cy pr us, cy, 0325 Czech Re p ublic, cz, 0326 Denma r k, dk, 0411 Dominica, dm, 0413 Dominican Re p ublic, do, 0415 Estonia, ee, 0505 Finland, fi, 0609 F r ance, fr, 0618 Geo r gia, ge, 0705 Ge r many, de, 0405 G r eec e, g r, 0718 G r eenland, gl, 0712 G r enada, gd, 0704 Guyana , gy, 0725 Haiti, ht, 0820 Hong Kong, hk, 0811 Hunga r y, hu, 0821 Iceland, is, 0919 India, in, 0914 Indonesi a, id, 0904 I r eland, ie, 0905 Is r ael, il, 0912 Italy, it, 0920 Jamaica, jm, 1013 Ja p an, jp, 1016 Kazakhstan, kz, 1126 Ko r ea, Re p ublic of, kr, 1118 Ky r gyzstan, kg, 1107 Latvia, lv, 1222 Liechtenstein, li, 120 9 Lithuania, lt, 1220 Luxembou r g, l u, 1221 Macedonia, the Fo r mer Yugoslav Re p ublic of, mk, 1311 Malaysia, my, 1325 Malta, mt, 1320 Mexico, mx, 1324 Moldova, Re p ublic of, md, 1304 Monaco, mc, 1303 Montse rr at, ms, 1319 Nethe r lands, nl, 1412 New Zea land, nz, 1426 No r way, no, 1415 Pakistan, pk, 1611 Pe r u, p e , 1605 Phili pp ines, ph, 1608 Poland, pl, 1612 Po r tugal, pt, 1620 Pue r to Rico, pr, 16 18 Romania, ro, 1815 Russian Fede r ation, ru, 1821 Saint Kitts and Nevis, kn, 1 114 Saint Lucia, lc, 1203 Saint Vincent and the G r enadines, vc, 2203 San Ma r ino, sm, 1913 Singa p or e, sg, 1907 Slovakia, sk, 1911 Slovenia, si, 1909 S p ain, es, 0519 Su r iname, sr, 1918 Sweden, se, 1905 Switze r land, ch, 0308 Taiwan, P r ovince of China, tw, 2023 Tajikistan, tj, 2010 Thailand, th, 2008 T r inidad and Tobago, tt, 2020 Tunisia, tn, 2014 Tu r key, tr, 2018 Tu r kmenistan, tm, 2013 Tu r ks and Caicos Islands, tc, 2003 Uk r aine, ua, 2101 United Kingdom, gb, 0702 United States, us, 2119 U r uguay, uy, 2125 Uzbekistan, uz, 2126 Venezuela, ve, 2205 Vi r gin Islands, B r itish, vg, 220 7 LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 47 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
07 48 En Chapter 7 Additional information Licenses The licenses fo r the softwa r e used on this p laye r a r e shown below. ï° libxml2 The MIT License Co p yr ight é <yea r > <co p yr ight holde r s> Pe r mission i s he r eby g r anted, f r ee of cha r ge, to any p er son obtaining a co p y of t his softwa r e and associated documentation fi les (the âÂÂSoftwa r eâÂÂ), to deal in the Softwa r e with out r estr iction, including withou t limitation the r ights t o us e, co p y, modify, me r ge, p ublish, dist r ibute , sublicense, and/o r sell co p ies of the Softwa r e, and to p er mit p er sons to whom the S oftwar e is fur nished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above co p yr ight notice and this p er mission notice shall be included in all co p ies o r substantial p or tions of the Softwa r e. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED âÂÂAS ISâÂÂ, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPR ESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNE SS FOR A PA RTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY C LAIM, DAMAGES OR O THER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR O T HERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEAL INGS IN THE SOFTWARE. ï° OpenSSL The O p enSSL toolkit stays unde r a dual license, i.e. both the conditions of the O p enSSL License and the o r iginal SSLeay license a pp ly to the toolkit. See belo w fo r the actual license te xts. Actually both licenses a r e BSD-style O p en Sou r ce licenses. In case of any license issues r elated to O p en SSL p lease contact o p enssl- co r e@o p enssl.o r g. OpenSSL License Co p yr ight é 199 8-2007 The O p enSSL P r oject. All r ights r eser ved. Redist r ibution and use in sou r ce and bina r y f o r ms , with o r without m odification, a r e p er mitted pr ovided tha t the following conditions a r e met: 1. Redist r ibutions of sou r ce code must r etain the above co p yr ight notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaime r . 2. Redist r ibutions in bina r y fo r m must r e pr oduc e the above co p yr igh t notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaime r in the documentation and/o r othe r mate r ials pr ovided with the dist r ibution. 3. All adve r tising mate r ials m entioning featu r es o r use of this softwa r e must dis p lay the follo w ing acknowledgment: âÂÂThis pr oduct in cludes softwa r e develo p ed by the O p enSSL P r oject f o r us e in the O p enSSL Toolkit. (htt p ://www.o p enssl.o r g/)â 4. The names âÂÂO p enSSL Toolkitâ and âÂÂO p enSSL P r ojectâ must not b e used t o endo r se o r pr omote pr oduct s de r ived f r om this softwa r e without pr io r w r itten p er mission. For wr itten p e r mission , p lease contact o p ens sl-co r e@ o p enssl.o r g. 5. P r oducts de r ived f r om this softwa r e may not be called âÂÂO p enSSLâ no r may âÂÂO p enSSLâ a pp ea r in thei r names without pr io r w r itten p er mission of the O p enSSL P r oject. 6. Redist r ibutions of any fo r m whatsoeve r must r etain the following acknowledgment: âÂÂThis pr oduct includes softwa r e develo p ed by the O p enSS L P r ojec t fo r use in the O p enSSL Toolkit (htt p ://www.o p enssl.o r g/)â THIS SOFTWARE IS P ROVIDED BY THE O p enSSL PROJECT âÂÂAS ISâ AND ANY EXPRESS ED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FO R A PARTICULAR PURPO SE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE O p enSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSE QUENTIAL DAMAGE S (INCLUDING , BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRU PTION) HOWEVER CAUS ED AND ON ANY THEO RY OF LIAB ILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT , STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLI GENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILIT Y OF SUCH DAMAGE. This pr oduct in cludes c r yp togr ap hi c softwa r e w r itte n by E r ic Young (eay@c ry p tsoft.com).Th is pr oduct includes softwa r e w r itten by Tim Hudson (tj h@ c r yp tsoft.com). Original SSLeay License Co p yr ight é 1995-1998 E r ic Y oung (eay@cr yp tsoft.com ) All r ights r ese r ved. This p ackage is an SSL im p lementation w r itten by E r ic Young (eay@c r yp tsof t.com). The im p lementation was w r itten so as to co nfo r m with Netsca p es SSL. This lib r ar y is f r ee fo r comme r cial and non-comme r cial use as long as the following condition s a r e ahea r ed to. The following condi tions a pp ly to all code found i n this dist r ibution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; n ot just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this dist r ibution is cove r ed by the same co p yr ight t e r ms ex ce p t that the holde r is Tim H udson (tjh @c r yp tsof t.com). Co p yr ight r emains Er ic YoungâÂÂs, and as such any Co p yr ight notices in the code a r e not to be r emoved. If this p ackage is used in a pr oduct , E r ic Young should be given att r ibution as the autho r of the p ar ts of the lib r ar y used. This can be in the fo r m of a textual message at pr og r am sta r tu p o r in documentation (online o r textual) pr ovided with th e p ackage. Redist r ibution and use in sou r ce and bina r y fo r ms, with o r without modification, a r e p er m itted pr ovided that the following condi tions a r e met: 1. Redist r ibutions of so u r ce code must r etain the c o p yr igh t n otice, this list of conditions and the following disclaime r . 2. Redist r ibutions in bina r y fo r m mu st r e pr oduce the above co p yr ight notice, this list of conditions and the followin g disclaime r in the do cumentatio n and/o r othe r mate r ials pr ovided with the dist r ibution. 3. All adve r tising mate r ials mentioning featu r es o r use of this sof twa r e must dis p lay the following acknow ledgement : âÂÂThis pr oduct include s c r yp togr ap hic softwa r e w r itten by E r ic Young ( eay@c r yp tsoft.com)â The wo r d âÂÂc r yp togr ap hicâ can be le ft out if the r ouines f r om the lib ra r y being used a r e not c ry p tog ra p hic r el ated :- ). 4. If you include any Windows s p ecific code (o r a de r ivative the r eof) f r om t he a pp s di r ector y (a pp lication code) you must include an acknowledgement: âÂÂThis pr oduct includes softwa r e w r itten by Tim Hudson (tjh@c r yp tsoft.com)â THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG âÂÂAS ISâ AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRAN TIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTI ES OF MERCHANT ABILITY AND FI TNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PUR POSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDI RECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL D AMAGES (INCLUDING, B UT NOT LIMITED T O, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON AN Y THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCL UDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The licence and dist r ibution te r ms fo r any p ublically available ve r sion o r de r ivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code can not sim p ly be co p ied and p ut unde r anothe r dist r ibution licence [including the GNU Public Licenc e.] ï° zlib This softwa re is based in p ar t on zlib see http ://ww w.zlib.net fo r info r mation. ï° FreeTy pe2 The FreeType Project LICENSE 2006-Jan-2 7 Co p yr ight 1996-2002, 20 06 by David Tu r ner , Robe r t Wilhel m, and We r ner Lembe r g Int r oduction The F r eeTy p e P r oject i s dist r ibuted in seve r al a r ch ive p ackages; some of them may co ntain, in addition to the F r eeTy p e font engine, va r ious tools and cont r ib utio ns which r ely on, o r r elate to, the F r eeT y p e P r ojec t. This license a pp lies to all files found in such p ackages, and which do not fall unde r thei r own ex p licit license. The license affects thus the F r eeTyp e font engine , the test pr og r ams, documentation and makefiles, at the ver y leas t. This license was ins p ir ed by th e BSD, A r tistic, and IJG (Inde p end ent JPEG G r ou p ) licenses, w hich all encou r age inclusion a nd use of f r ee softwa re i n comme r c ial and f r eewa r e pr oducts ali ke. As a consequen ce, its main p oints a r e that: â¢W e d o n â t pr om ise that this softwa r e wo r ks. Howeve r , we will be inte r ested in any kind of bu g r ep or ts.(â as isâ dist r ibution) â¢Y o u c a n u s e t h i s s o f t w a r e for whateve r you want, in p ar ts o r full fo r m, without having to p ay u s.(â r oyalty-f r eeâ usage) â¢Y o u m a y n o t pr etend that you w r ote this so ftwa r e. If yo u use it, o r only p ar ts of it, in a pr og r am, you must acknowledge somewhe r e in you r documentation that you have use d the F r eeTyp e code.(âÂÂc r editsâÂÂ) We s p ecifically p er mit and encou r age the inclusion of this softwa r e, with o r with out modifications, in comm e r cial pr oducts. We disclaim all wa rr anties cove r ing The Fr eeTyp e P r oject and assume no liability r elated to The F r eeTyp e P r oject. Finall y, many p eop le asked us fo r a pr efe rr ed fo r m fo r a c r edit/disclaime r to use in com p liance with this licens e. We thus encou r age you to use the followin g text: Po r tions of this softwa r e a r e co p yr ight é <yea r > The F r eeTy p e P r oject (www.f r eety p e.o r g). All r ights r ese r ved. Please r ep lace <yea r > with th e value f r om the F r eeTyp e ve r sion you actually use. Legal Te r ms 0. De f initions Th r oughout this license, the ter ms â p ackageâÂÂ, âÂÂF r eeTy p e P r ojectâÂÂ, and âÂÂF r eeTy p e a r chiveâ r efer to the set of files o r iginally dist r ibuted by the autho r s (Da vid Tu r ne r , Robe r t Wilhel m, and We r ner Lembe r g) as the âÂÂF r eeTyp e P r ojectâÂÂ, be th ey named as a l p ha, beta o r final r elease. âÂÂYouâ r efe r s to the lice nsee, o r p er son using the pr oject, whe r e âÂÂusingâ is a gene r ic te r m including com p iling the pr ojectâÂÂs sou r ce code as well as linking it to for m a â pr og r amâ o r âÂÂexecutable âÂÂ. This pr og r am is r efe rr ed t o as âÂÂa pr og r am using the F r eeT yp e engineâÂÂ. This license a pp lies to all files dist r ibuted in the o r iginal F r eeTy p e P r oject, incl uding all sou r ce code, bin a r ies a nd document ation, unles s othe r wise stated in the file in its o r iginal, unmodified fo r m as dist r ibuted in the o r iginal a r chive. If you a r e unsur e wheth er or not a p ar ticular file is cove r ed by this license, you must conta ct us to ve r ify this. The F r eeTyp e P r oject is co p yr ight (C) 1996 -2000 by David Tu r ne r , Robe r t Wilhelm, and We r ne r Lembe r g. All r ights r eser ved excep t a s sp ecified below. 1. No Wa rr anty THE FREETYPE PROJECT IS PROVIDED âÂÂAS ISâ W I THOUT W ARRAN TY OF AN Y KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIE D, INCLU DING, BU T NOT LIMIT ED TO, WARRANT IES OF MERCHA NTABILITY AN D FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE, OF THE FREETYPE PROJECT. 2. Redist r ibution This license g r ants a wo r ldwide, r oyalty-fr ee, p e rp etual and i rr evoca ble r ight and license to use, execute, p er for m, comp ile , disp lay, cop y, cr eate der ivative wor ks of, dist r ibute and sublicense the F r ee Ty p e P r oject (in both sou r ce and obje ct code fo r ms) and de r ivative wo r ks the r eof fo r any p u rp ose; an d to autho r ize othe r s to exe r cise some o r all of the r igh ts g r anted he r ein, sub ject to the following c onditions: â¢R e d i s t r ibution of sour ce code mu st r etain this license file (âÂÂFTL.T XTâÂÂ) una lte r ed; any additions, deletions o r changes to the o r igin al files must be clea r ly indicated in accom p anying documentati on. The co p yr ight notices of th e unalte r ed, o r iginal files must be pr ese r ved in all cop ies of sour ce fi les. â¢R e d i s t r ibution in binar y for m must pr ovide a disclaime r that states that the softwa r e is based in p ar t of the wo r k of the F r ee Ty p e Team, in the dist r ibution documentati on. We also encou r age you to p ut an URL to the F r eeTyp e web p age in you r documenta tion, though thi s isnâÂÂt mandato r y. These conditions a pp ly to any softwa r e de r ived f r om o r based on the F r eeTyp e P r oject, not just the unmodified files. If you use ou r wo r k, you must acknowledge us. Howeve r , no fee need be p aid to us. 3. Adve r tising Neithe r th e F r ee Ty p e autho r s and cont r ibuto r s no r you shall use the nam e of the othe r fo r comme r cial, adve r tising, o r pr omotional p u rp oses without s p ec ific pr io r wr itten p er mission. We suggest, but do not r equir e, th at you use one o r mo r e of the following p hr ases to r efer to t his softwar e in your document ation o r adve r tising mat e r ials: âÂÂF r eeTyp e P r ojectâÂÂ, âÂÂF r eeT y p e EngineâÂÂ, âÂÂF reeTy p e lib r ar yâÂÂ, o r âÂÂF r eeTy p e Dist r ibutionâÂÂ. As you have n ot signed this license, you a r e n o t r equir ed to acce p t it. Ho weve r , as the F r eeTyp e P r oject is LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 48 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
49 En 07 co p yr ighted mate r ial, only this license, o r anot he r one cont r acted with the autho r s, g r ants you the r ight to use, dist r ibute, and modify it. The r ef o r e, by using, dist r ibuting, o r modifyin g the F r eeTy p e P r oject , you indicate t hat you unde r stand and acce p t all the te r ms of this license. 4. Contacts The r e a r e two mailing lists r elated t o F r eeTyp e: â¢f r eetyp e@no ngnu.o r g Discusses gene r al u se and a pp lications of Fr eeTyp e, as well as futu r e and wanted additions to the lib r ar y and dist r ibutio n. If you a r e looking fo r su pp o r t, s ta r t in this list if you havenâÂÂt f ound anything to hel p you in the documentation. â¢f r eetyp e -devel@nong nu.o r g D iscusses bugs, as well as engine inte r nals, design issues, s p ecific licenses, p or ting, etc. Ou r home p age can be found at htt p ://www .f r eety p e.o r g ï° libpng COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DIS CLAIMER, and LICENSE: If you modify lib p ng you may inse r t additional no tices immediately following this sentence. lib p ng ve r sions 1.2.6, August 15, 2004, th r ough 1.2.26, A pr il 2, 2008, a r e Co p yr ight é 2 004, 2006-2008 Gl enn Rande r s- Peh r son, and a r e dist r ibuted acco r ding to the same disclaime r and license as lib p ng-1.2.5 with the fo llowing individual added to the list of Cont r ibuting Autho r s Cosmin T r uta lib p ng ve r sions 1. 0.7, July 1, 2000, th r ough 1.2.5 - Octobe r 3, 2002, a r e Co p yr ight é 2000-200 2 Glenn Rande r s- Peh r son, and a r e dist r ibuted acco r ding to the same disclaime r and license as lib p ng-1.0.6 with the fo llowing individuals added to the list of Cont r ibuting Autho r s Simon-P ie rr e Ca dieux E r ic S. Raymond Gilles Vollant and with the following additions to the disclaime r : The r e is no wa rr anty against int e r fe r enc e with you r enj oyment of the lib r ar y or against infr ingement. Ther e is no wa rr anty that ou r effo r ts o r the lib r ar y will fulfill any of you r p ar ticular p u rp oses or needs. This libr ar y is pr ovided with all faults, and the enti r e r isk of satisfacto r y quality, p er for mance, acc u r ac y, and effo r t is with the use r . lib p ng ve r sions 0.97 , Janua r y 1998, th r ough 1.0. 6, Mar ch 20, 2000 , a r e Co p yr ight é 1998, 1999 Glenn Rande r s- Peh r son, and a r e dist r ibuted acco r ding to the same disclaime r and license as lib p ng-0.96, with the following in divid uals added to the list of Cont r ibuting Autho r s: Tom Lane Glenn R ande r s-Pehr son Willem van Schaik lib p ng ve r sions 0.89 , June 199 6, th r ough 0.96, May 1997, a r e Co py r ight é 1996, 1997 And r eas Dilger Distr ibuted acco r ding to the same disclaime r an d license as lib p ng- 0.88, with the following indivi duals added to the l ist of Cont r ibuting Autho r s: John Bow le r Kevin B r acey Sam Bu shell Magnu s Holmg r en G r eg Roelofs Tom Tanne r lib p ng ve r sions 0.5, May 1995, th r ough 0.88, Januar y 1996, a r e Co py r ight é 1995, 1996 Gu y E r ic Sch alnat, G r oup 42, Inc. Fo r the p u rp oses of this co p yr ight and license, âÂÂCont r ibuting Autho r sâ is defined as the following set of individuals: And r eas Dilge r Da v e Ma r tindale Guy E r ic Schalnat Paul Schmidt Tim Wegne r The PNG Refe r en ce Lib r ar y is su pp lied âÂÂAS ISâÂÂ. The Cont r ibuting Autho r s and G r ou p 42, Inc. d isc laim a ll wa rr anties, ex pr essed o r im p lied, including, without limitation, the wa rr antie s of me r chantability and of fitness fo r any p u rp ose. The Cont r ibuting Autho r s and G r ou p 42, Inc. assume n o liability fo r di r ect, indi r ect, incidental, s p ecial, exem p la r y, o r consequent ial damage s, which ma y r esult fr om the use of the PNG Refer ence Libr ar y, even if advised of the p ossibility of such damage. Pe r mission is he r eby g r ante d to use, co p y, modify, an d dist r ibute this sou r ce code , o r p or tio ns he r eof , fo r any p u rp ose, with out fee, subject to the following r estr ictions: 1. The o r igin of this sou r ce code must not be mis r e pr esented. 2. Alte r ed ve r sions must be p lainly ma r ked as such and must not be m is r e pr esented as being th e o r iginal sou r ce. 3. This Co p yr ight notice may not b e r emove d o r alte r ed f r om any sou r ce o r alte r ed sou r ce dist r ib uti on. The Cont r ibuting Autho r s and G r oup 42, Inc. s p ecifically p er mit, without fee , and encour a ge the us e of thi s sour ce code as a com p onen t to su pp o r ting the PNG file fo r mat in comme r cial pr oducts. If yo u use this sou r ce code in a pr oduct, a cknowledgment is not r equir ed but would be a ppr eciated. A â p ng_get_cop yr ightâ function is av ailable, fo r convenient use in âÂÂaboutâ boxes and the like: pr intf(âÂÂ%sâÂÂ, p ng_get_cop yr ig ht(NULL));Also , the PNG log o (i n PNG fo r ma t, of cou r se) is su pp lied in the files â p ngba r. p ngâ and â p ngba r .j p g (88x31 ) and â p ngnow.p ngâ (98x31). Lib p ng is OSI Ce r tified O p en Sou r ce So ftwa r e. OSI Ce r tified O p en Sou r ce is a ce r tification ma r k of the O p en Sou r ce Initiative. Glenn Rand e r s-Pehr son glenn rp at use r s.sou r cefo r ge.net 2-A pr -08 ï° libjpg The Inde p endent JPEG G r oup âÂÂs JPEG softwa r e README fo r r elease 6b of 27-Ma r -1998 This dist r ibu tion contains the si xth p ublic r elease of the Inde p endent JPEG G r ou p âÂÂs f r ee JPE G softwa r e. You a r e welcome t o r ed istr ibute this softwa r e and to use it fo r any p u rp ose, subject to the conditio ns under LEGAL ISSUES, below. Se r ious use r s of this softwa r e ( p ar ticula r ly those inco rp o r ating it into la r ge r pr og r ams) should contac t IJG at j p eg-info@uunet.uu.net to be added to ou r ele ct r on ic mailing list. Mailing list membe r s a r e notified of u p dates and have a chance to p ar ticip ate in technical discussions, etc. This softwa r e is t he wo r k of Tom Lane, Phili p Gladstone, J im Bouche r , Lee C r ocke r , Julia n Minguillon, Luis O r ti z, Geo r ge Philli p s, Davide Rossi, Guido Vollbeding, Geâ Weije r s, and othe r membe r s of the Inde p enden t JPEG G r ou p . IJG is not affiliated with the official ISO JPEG standa r ds committee. DOCUMENTATION ROADMAP This file contains the f ollowing sections: OVERVIEW Gene r al desc r ip tion of JPEG and the IJG soft wa r e. LEGAL IS SUES Co p yr ight, l ack of wa rr anty, te r ms of dist r ibution. REFERENCES Whe r e to lea r n mo r e about JPEG . ARCHIV E LOCATIONS Whe r e to find newe r ve r sions of this sof twa r e. RELATED SOFTWAR E Othe r stuff you should get. FILE FORMAT WARS Softwa r e *not* to get. TO DO Plans fo r futu r e IJG r eleases. Othe r documentation files in the dist r i bution a r e: Use r documentation: install.doc How to configu r e an d install the IJG sof twa r e. usage.doc Usage inst r uctions f o r cj p eg, dj p eg, j p egt r an, r dj p gcom, and w rj p gcom. *.1 Unix-style man p ages fo r pr ogr ams (same info as usage.do c). wiza r d.doc Advanced usage inst r uctions fo r JPEG wiza r ds only. change.log Ve r sion-to-ve r sion change highlights. P r og r amm e r and inte r nal doc umentation : libj p eg.doc How to use the JPEG lib r ar y in y ou r own pr og r ams. exam p le.c Sam p le code fo r calling the JPEG lib r ar y. st r uctu r e.doc Ove r view of the JPEG lib r ar yâÂÂs inte r nal st r uctu r e. fil e list.doc Road m a p of IJG fi les. code r ules.doc Coding style r ules --- p lease r ead if you cont r ibute c ode . Please r ead at least the files install.doc and usage.doc. Usefu l info r mation can al so be found in the JPEG FAQ (F r equently A sked Questions) a r ticle. See A RCHIVE LOCATIONS below to find ou t whe r e to obtain the FAQ a r ticle. If you want to un de r stand how the JPEG code wo r ks, w e suggest r eading one o r mo r e of the REFERENCES, th en looking at the documentation files (in r ou ghly the o r der listed) befo r e diving in to the code. OVERVIEW This p ackage contains C softwa r e to i m p lement JPEG image com pr ession and de com pr ession. JPEG ( pr onounced âÂÂjay- p egâÂÂ) is a standa r dized com pr es sion method fo r full-colo r and g r ay-scale images. J PEG is intended fo r com pr essing r eal-wor ld sc en es; line d r awin gs, ca r toons an d othe r non- r eali stic images a r e n ot its st r ong suit. JPEG is lossy, meaning that the out p ut image is n ot exactly identical to the in p ut image. Hence you mu st not use JPEG if you ha ve to have ident ical out p ut bits. How eve r , on ty p ical p hotogr ap hic images, ve r y good co m pr ession levels can be obtained with no visible change, and r emar kably h igh com pr ession leve ls a r e p ossible i f you can tole r ate a low-quality image. Fo r mo r e details, se e the r efer ences, or just e xp er iment with var ious com pr ession settings. This softwa r e im p lements JPEG bas eline, extended- sequential, and pr og r essive com pr ession pr ocesses. P r ovision is made fo r su ppo r ting all va r iants of these pr ocesses, although so me uncommon p ar ameter settings a r enâÂÂt im p lemen ted yet. Fo r legal r e asons, we a r e not dist r ibuting code fo r the a r ithmetic-coding va r iants of JPEG; se e LEGAL ISSUES. We hav e made no pr ovision fo r su pp o r ting the hie ra r chical o r lossless pr ocesses defined in the standa r d. We pr ovide a set of lib r ar y r outines fo r r eading an d w r iting JPEG image files, p lus two sam p le a pp lications âÂÂcj p egâ and âÂÂdj p egâÂÂ, whic h use the lib r ar y to p er fo r m conve r sion between JPEG and some othe r p op ular image file for mats. The lib r ar y is intended to be r eused in oth e r a pp lications. In o r der to su pp o r t file co n ve r sion and viewing softwa r e, we have inclu ded conside r able func tionality b eyond the ba r e JPEG coding/decoding c a p ability; fo r exam p le, the colo r quantization modules a r e not st r ictly p ar t of JPEG decoding, but they a r e ess ential fo r out p ut to colo r ma pp ed file fo r mats o r colo r ma pp ed disp lays. These extr a functions can be com p iled out of th e lib r ar y if not r equir ed fo r a p ar ticular a pp lication. We ha ve also included j p egtr an, a utility fo r lo ssless t r anscoding between diffe r ent JPEG pr ocesses, and â r dj p gcomâ and âÂÂw r jp gcomâÂÂ, two sim p le a pp licat ions fo r in se r ti ng and ext r ac ting textual comments in JFIF files. The em p hasis in designing th is softwa r e has be en on achieving p or tability and flexibility, while also making it fast enough to b e usefu l. In p ar ticular , the softwa r e is not intended to be r ead as a tuto r ial on JPEG. (S ee the REFERENCES secti on fo r int r oductor y mate r ial.) Rathe r , it is intended to be r eliable, p or table, indust r ial-str engt h code. We do not clai m t o have achieved that goal in eve r y as p ect of the softwa r e, but we st r ive fo r it. We welcome the use of t his softwa r e as a com p onen t of comme r cial pr oducts. No r oyalty is r equ ir ed, but we do ask fo r an acknowledgement in pr oduct documen tation, as desc r ibed unde r LEGAL ISSUE S. LEGAL ISSUES In p lain English: 1. We donâÂÂt pr omise that this softwa r e wo r ks. (But if you f i nd any bugs, p lease let us know!) 2. You c an use thi s softwa r e fo r whateve r you want. You donâÂÂt have to p ay us. 3. You may not pr etend that y ou w r ote this softwa r e. If you use it in a pr og r am, you must acknowledge somewhe r e in you r docume ntation tha t youâÂÂve u sed the IJG code. In legalese: The autho r s make NO WARRANTY o r r e pr esentation, either ex pr ess o r im p lied, with r es p ect to this softwa r e, its quality, accu r acy, me r ch antability, o r fitness fo r a pa r ticula r p u rp ose. This soft wa r e is pr ovided âÂÂAS ISâÂÂ, and you, its use r , assume the enti r e r isk as to its quality and accu r acy. This softwa r e is co p yr ight é 1 991-1998, Thomas G. La ne. All Rights Res e r ved exce p t as s p ecified below. Pe r m ission is he r eby g r anted to use, co p y, modif y, and dist r ibute this softwa r e (o r p or tions the r eof) for any p u rp ose, without fee, subject to these conditions: (1)If any p ar t of the sou r ce code f o r th is softwa r e is dist r ibuted, then thi s README file mu st be included, with this co p yr ight and no-wa rr anty notice unalte r ed; and any additions, deletions, o r changes to the o r iginal files must be clea r ly indicated in accom p anying document ation. (2)If only ex ecutable c ode is dist r ibuted, then the accom p anying documentation must state that âÂÂthis softwa r e is based in p ar t on the wo r k of the Inde p en dent JPEG G r oup âÂÂ. (3)Pe r mission fo r use of t hi s sof tw a r e is g r anted only if the use r acce p ts full r es p onsibility fo r an y u ndesi r able conseque nces; the autho r s acce p t NO LIABILITY fo r damages of any kind. These conditions a pp ly to an y softwa r e de r ived f r om o r based on the IJG code, not just to the unmo dified lib r ar y. If you use ou r wo r k, you ought to acknowledge us. Pe r mission is NOT g r anted fo r the use of any IJG autho r âÂÂs name o r com p any name in adve r tising o r p ublicity r elating to this softwa r e o r pr oducts de r ived f r om it. This soft wa r e may be r efe rr ed to only as âÂÂthe Ind e p endent JPEG G r ou p âÂÂs softwa r eâÂÂ. We s p ecific ally p er mit and encou r age the use of this softwa r e as the basis of comme r ci al pr oducts, pr ovided that all wa rr an t y o r liability claims a r e assumed by the pr oduct vendo r . ansi2kn r .c is included in this dist r ibution by p er mission of L. Pete r Deutsc h, sole pr o pr iet o r of its co p yr ight holde r , Aladdin Ente rpr ises of Men lo Pa r k, CA . ansi2kn r .c is NOT cove r ed by the above co p yr ight and conditions, but instead by the usual di st r ibut ion te r ms of the F r ee Softwa r e Foundation; pr inci p ally, that you must include sou r ce code if you r edistr ibute it. (See the file ansi2kn r .c fo r full details.) Howeve r , since ansi2kn r .c is not needed as p ar t of any pr og r am gener ated fr om the IJG code, th is does not limit you mo r e th an the fo r egoing p ar agr ap hs do. Th e Un ix configu r ation sc r ip t âÂÂconfigu r eâ wa s pr oduced with GNU Autoconf. It is co p yr ight by the F r ee Soft wa r e Foundation but is f r eely dist r ibutable. The same holds for its su pp o r ting sc ri p ts (config.gu ess, config.sub, l tconfig, ltmain.sh). Anothe r su pp o rt sc r i p t, install-sh, is co p yr ight by M.I.T. but is also f r eely dis t r ibutable. LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 49 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
07 50 En It a pp ea r s that the a r ithmetic coding o p tion of the JPEG s p ec is cove r ed by p atents owne d by IBM, AT&T, and Mitsubishi . Hence a r ithmetic coding cannot legally be used without o btaining one o r mo r e licenses. Fo r th is r eason , su pp o r t for ar ithmetic codi ng has been r emoved f r om the f r ee JPEG softwa r e. (Since a r ithmetic coding pr ovides o nly a ma r ginal gain over the unp atented Huffman mode, it is unlikely that ve r y many im p lementati ons will su pp o r t it.) So fa r as we a r e awa r e, the r e a r e no p atent r estr ictions on the r emaining c ode. The IJG dist r ibution for mer ly included code to r ead and w r ite GIF files. To avoid entanglement with the Unisys LZW p atent, GIF r ea ding su pp or t has been r em oved altogethe r , and the GIF w r iter has been sim p lified to pr oduce uncom pr essed G IFs. This technique doe s not use the LZW algo r ithm; the r esulting GIF files a r e la r ge r than usual, but a r e r eadable by all standa r d GIF decode r s. We a r e r equir ed to state that âÂÂThe G r ap hics Inte r change Fo r mat(c) is the Co p yr ight pr o pe r ty of Com p uSe r ve Inco rp o r ate d. GIF(sm) is a Se r vice Ma r k pr o pe r ty of Com p uSe r ve I nco rpo r ated.â REFERENCES We highly r ecommend r eading one o r mo r e of these r ef e r en ces befo r e t r ying to unde r stand the inna r ds of the JPEG sof twa r e. The best sho r t technical int r oduction to the JPEG com pr ession algo r ithm is Wallace, G r egor y K. âÂÂThe JPEG Still Pictu r e Com pr ession Standa r dâÂÂ, Communications of the ACM, A pr il 1991 (vol. 34 no. 4), pp . 30-44. (Adjacent a r ticles in that issue discuss MPEG motion p ictur e com pr ession, a pp lications of JPEG, and r elated to p ics.) If you don âÂÂt have the CACM issue handy, a PostSc r ip t file conta ining a r evi sed ve r si on of WallaceâÂÂs a r ticle is available at ft p ://ft p .uu.net/g ra p hics/j p eg/ wallace. p s.gz. The file (actually a pr e pr int fo r an a r ticle that a pp ea r ed in IEEE T r ans. Consume r Elect r onics) omits the sam p le images that a pp ea r ed in C ACM, but it includes co rr ections and some added mate r ial. Note: the Wallace a r ticle is co py r ight ACM and IEEE, and it may not be used fo r comme r cial p u rp oses. A somewhat less technical, mo r e leisu r ely int r oduction to JPEG can be found in The Data Com pr ession Book by Ma r k Nelson and Jean-lou p Gailly, p ublished b y M&T Bo oks (New Yo r k), 2nd e d. 1996, ISBN 1-5585 1-434-1. This book pr ovides good ex p lanations and exam p le C code fo r a multitude of com pr ession methods inclu ding JPEG. It is an excellent sou r ce if yo u a r e comfo r table r eading C code but donâÂÂt know much about data com pr ession in gene r al. The bookâÂÂs JPEG sam p le code is far f r om industr ial-str ength, but when you a r e r eady to look at a full im p lementation, youâÂÂve got one he r e... The best ful l desc r ip tion of JPEG is the textbook âÂÂJPEG Still Image Data Com pr essio n Standa r dâ by William B. Pennebake r and Joan L. Mitchell, p ublished by Van Nost r and Reinhold, 19 93, ISBN 0-442-01272-1. P r ice US$59.95, 63 8 pp . The book includes the com p lete text of the ISO JPEG st anda r ds (DIS 10918-1 and d r aft DIS 10918- 2). This is by fa r the mo st com p lete ex p osition of JPEG in existence, and we highly r ec ommend it. The JPEG standa r d itself is not available el ect r onically; you must o r der a p ap er co p y th r ou gh ISO o r ITU. ( Unless you feel a ne ed to own a ce r tified offic ial co p y, we r ecommend buying the Pennebak e r and Mitchell book instead; itâÂÂs much chea p er and includes a g r eat deal of us eful ex p lanato r y mate r ial.) In the USA, co p ies of the standa r d may be o r der ed f r om ANSI Sales a t (212) 642- 4900, o r fr om Global E nginee r ing Docum ents at (8 00) 854 -7179. (AN SI doesnâÂÂt take c r edit ca r d o r de r s , but Global do es.) ItâÂÂs not chea p : as of 1992, ANSI was cha r ging $95 fo r Par t 1 and $47 fo r Pa r t 2, p lus 7% shi pp ing/handling. The standa r d is divided into two p ar ts, Pa r t 1 being the ac tual s p ecification, while Pa r t 2 cove r s com p liance testing methods. Pa r t 1 is titled âÂÂDigital Com pr ession and Coding of Cont inuous-tone Still Images, Pa r t 1: Requi r em ents and guidel inesâ an d has document numbe r s ISO/IEC IS 10918-1, ITU-T T.81 . Pa r t 2 is titled âÂÂDigital Com pr ession and Coding of Cont inuous-tone Still Images, Pa r t 2: Com p liance testingâ and has document numbe r s ISO/IEC IS 10918-2, ITU-T T.83. Some extens ions to the o r iginal JPEG standa r d a r e defined in JPEG Pa r t 3, a newe r ISO standa r d numbe red ISO/IEC IS 10918-3 and ITU-T T. 84. IJG cu rr ently does not su pp o r t an y Pa r t 3 extensions . The JPEG standa r d do es not s p ecify all details of an inte r c hangeable file fo r ma t. Fo r the omitted details we follow the â JFIFâ conve ntions, r ev ision 1.02. A c o p y of the JFIF s p ec is available f r om: Lite r atu r e De p ar tment C-Cube Mic r osystems, I nc. 1778 McCa r thy Blvd. Mil p itas, CA 95035 p hone (408) 94 4-6300, fax (408) 944-631 4 A Post Sc r ip t ve r sion of this document is available by FTP at ft p ://ft p .uu.net/g r ap hics/j p eg/ jfif. p s.gz. The r e is also a p lain text ve r sion at ft p ://ftp .uu. net/gr ap hic s/jp eg/jfif.txt.gz, but it is missing the figu r es. The TIFF 6.0 file fo r mat s p ecification c an be obtained by FTP f r om ft p ://ft p .sgi.com/g r ap hics/tiff/TIF F6. p s.gz. The JPEG inco rp o r ation scheme foun d in the TIFF 6. 0 s p ec of 3-June- 92 has a numbe r of se r iou s pr oblems. IJG d oes not r ecomm end use of the TI FF 6.0 desi gn (TIFF Co m pr ession tag 6). Instead, we r ecommend the JPEG design pr o p osed by TIFF Tech nical Note #2 (C om pr ession tag 7). Co p ies of this Note can be obtained f r om ft p .sgi.c om o r f r om ft p :// ft p .uu.net/g r ap hics/j p eg/. It is ex p ec ted that the nex t r evision of the TI FF s p ec will r ep lace the 6.0 JPEG design with the NoteâÂÂs de sign. Although IJGâÂÂs own c ode does not su pp o r t TIFF/JPEG , the f r ee libtiff lib ra r y uses ou r lib ra r y to im p lement TIFF/JPEG p er the Note. libtiff is available f r om ft p ://ft p .sgi .com/g r ap hics/tiff/. ARCHIVE LOCATIONS The âÂÂofficialâ a r ch ive site fo r this softwa r e is ft p .uu.net (Inte r net ad d r e ss 192.48.96.9 ). The most r ec ent r elea sed ve r sion can always be found the r e in di r ecto r y g r ap hics/ j p eg. This pa r ticul a r ve r sion will be a r chi ved as ft p :// ft p .uu.net/g r ap hics/j p eg/j p eg sr c.v6 b.tar .gz. If you donâÂÂt have di r ect Int e r net access, UUNETâÂÂs a r ch ives a r e also available via UUCP; contact hel p @uun et.uu.net fo r info r mation o n r et r ieving files that way. Nume r ous I nte r net sites maintain c o p ies of the UUNET files. Howeve r , only ft p .uu.net is gua r anteed to hav e the latest official ve r sion. You can also obtain this softwa r e in DOS-co m p atible âÂÂzi p â a r chive fo r mat f r om the Sim Tel a r ch i ves (ft p :// ft p .simtel.net/ p ub/simtelnet/msdos/g r ap hic s/), o r on Com p uSe r ve in the G r ap hics Su pp or t for um (GO CIS:GRAPHSUP), lib r ar y 12 JPEG Tools. Again, these ve r sions may sometimes l ag behind the ft p .uu.net r ele ase. The JPEG FAQ (F r equently Aske d Questions) a r ticle is a useful s ou rce of gene r al info r mation about JPEG. It is u p dated constantly and the r efo r e is not included in this dist r ibution. The FAQ is p os ted eve r y two weeks to Usen et newsg r ou p s com p .g r ap hics.misc, new s.answe r s, and othe r g r ou p s. It is available on the Wo r ld Wide Web at htt p :/ /www.faqs.o r g/faqs/j p eg-faq/ and othe r news.ans we r s a r chi v e sites, including the official news.answe r s a r chive at r tfm.mit. edu: ft p ://r tfm.mit.edu/ p ub /usenet/ne ws.answer s/ j p eg-faq/. If you do nâÂÂt have Web o r FTP access, send e-mail to mail-se r ver @ r tfm.mit.edu with body send usenet/n ews.answe r s/jp eg-faq/p ar t1 send usenet/n ews.answe r s/jp eg-faq/p ar t2 RELATED SOFTWA RE Nume r ous viewing and image mani p ulation pr og r ams now su pp o r t JPEG. (Quite a few of them use this lib ra r y to do so.) The JPEG FAQ desc r ibed above lists some of the mo r e p op ular fr ee and shar ewa r e viewer s, and tells whe r e to obtain them on Inte r net. If you a r e on a Unix machine, we highly r ecommend Jef Poskanze r âÂÂs f r ee PBMPLUS softwa r e, which pr ov ides many useful o p er ations on PPM-fo r mat imag e files. In p ar ticular , it can conv e r t PPM images to and f r om a wide r ange of othe r fo r mats, thus making cj p eg/djp eg conside r ably mo r e useful. The latest ve r sion is dist r ibuted by the Net PBM g r ou p , and is available f r om nume r ous sites, notably ft p :// wua r chive. wustl. edu/g r ap hics/g r ap hics/ p ackages/ NetPBM/. Unfo r tunate ly PBMPLUS/NET PBM is not nea r ly as p or table as the IJG softwa r e is; you a r e likely to have difficulty m aking it wo r k on any non-Unix machine. A diffe r ent f r ee JPEG im p leme ntation, w r itten by the PVRG g r ou p at Stanfo r d, is available f r om ft p :// ha v efun.stanf o r d.edu/ p ub/j p eg/. This pr og r am is designed fo r r esea r ch and ex p er imentation r athe r th an pr oduction use; it is slowe r , ha r der to use, and less p o r table than the IJG code, but it is ea sie r to r ead and modify. Also, the PVRG code su pp o r ts lossless JPEG, which we do not. (On the othe r hand, i t doesnâÂÂt do pr og r essive JPEG.) FILE FORMA T WARS Some JPEG pr og r ams pr oduce files that a r e not co m p atible with ou r lib r ar y. The r oot of the pr oblem is that the ISO JPEG committee failed to s p ecify a conc r ete f ile fo r mat. Some vendo r s âÂÂfilled in the blanksâ on thei r own, c r eating pr opr ieta r y for ma ts that no one else c ould r ea d. (Fo r exam p le, none of the ea r ly comm e r cial J PEG im p lementations fo r the Macint osh we r e able to exchange com pr essed files.) The file fo r mat we hav e ado p ted is called JFIF (see REFERENCES). T his fo r mat has been ag r eed to by a numbe r of majo r comme r cial JPEG ven do r s, and it has become the de facto standa r d. J FIF is a minimal o r âÂÂlow endâ r e pr esentation. We r ecommend the use of TIFF/JPEG (TIFF r evision 6.0 as m odified by TIFF Techn ical Note #2) fo r âÂÂhigh endâ a pp lications that need to r ec or d a lot of additional data about an image. TIFF/JPEG is fai r ly new and not yet widely su pp o r ted, unfo r tunat ely. The u p coming JPEG Pa r t 3 standa r d defines a file fo r mat called SPIFF. SPIFF is inte r op er able with JFIF, in the sense that most JFIF decode r s should be able to r ead the mo st common va r iant of S PIFF. SPIFF has some technical advantages ove r JFIF, but its majo r claim to fame is sim p ly that it is an official standa r d r ather t han an infor mal one. A t this p oin t it is unclea r whethe r SPIFF will su p er sede JFIF o r whethe r JFIF will r emain t he de-facto standa r d. IJG inten ds to su pp o r t SPIFF once th e standa r d is f r ozen, but we have not decided whethe r it sh ould become ou r default out p ut fo r mat o r not. (In any case, ou r decode r will r emain ca p able of r eading JFIF indefinitely.) Va r ious pr o pr ieta r y file fo r mats inco rp o r ating J PEG com pr ession also exist. We h ave little o r no sym p athy fo r the existence of these fo r mats. Indee d, one of the o r iginal r easons for develop ing thi s fr ee so ftwa r e was to he l p fo r ce conve r gence on common, o p en f o r mat standa r ds fo r JPEG files. DonâÂÂt use a pr o pr iet a r y file fo r mat! TO DO The majo r th r us t fo r v7 w ill pr obably be im pr ovement of visual quality. The cu rr ent method fo r scaling the quantization tables is known n ot to be ve r y good at low Q values. We also intend to investigate block bounda r y smoot hing, â p oor manâÂÂs va r iable quantizationâÂÂ, and o t he r means of im pr oving quality-vs-file-size p er for mance without sac r ificing com p atibility. In futu r e ve r sions, we a r e conside r ing s u pp o r tin g some of the u p coming JPEG Pa r t 3 extensions --- pr inci p ally, va r iable quantization and the SPIFF file fo r mat. As alway s , s p eeding things u p is of g r eat inte r est. Please send bug r ep or ts, offe r s of he l p , et c. to j p eg- info@uune t.uu.net. ï° libupnp Co p yr ight (c) 2000-2003 Intel Co rp o r ation All r ights r ese r ved. Redist r ibution and use in sou r ce and bina r y fo r ms, with or without modification, a r e p er mitted pr ovided that the following conditions a r e met: *R e d i s t r ibutions of sour ce code m ust r etain the above co p yr ight notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaime r . *R e d i s t r ibutions in binar y for m must r e pr oduce the above co p yr ight notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaime r in the documentation and/o r othe r mate r ials pr ovided with the dist r ibution. *N e i t h e r name of Inte l Co rp or ation nor the names of its cont r ibuto r s may be used to endo r se o r pr om ote pr odu cts de r ived f r om this softwa r e with out s p ecific pr io r wr itten p er mission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS âÂÂAS ISâ AND ANY EXPRESS OR IM PLIED WARRANT IES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMI TED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES O F MERCH ANTABILITY AN D FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLA IMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL INTEL OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRE CT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCL UDING, BUT NOT LIMI TED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SER VICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGE NCE OR O THERW ISE) ARI SING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. ï° AVC/H.264 THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLI O LICENSE FOR THE P ERSONAL AND NON- COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (âÂÂAVC VIDEOâÂÂ) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONS UMER ENGAGED IN A PE RSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. No LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE HTTP://MPEGLA.COM. ï° GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Ve r sion 2, June 1991 Co p yr ight é 1989, 1991 F r ee Soft wa r e Fo undation, Inc., 51 F r anklin St r eet, Fi fth Floo r , Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA Eve r yone is p er mitted to co p y and dist r ibute ve r batim co p ies of this license document , but changing it is not allowed. Preamble The licens es fo r most softwa r e a r e designed to take away you r f r eedom to sha r e and c hange it. By cont r ast, the GNU Gene r al Public License is intended to gua r antee you r f r eedom t o sha r e and ch ange f r ee softwa r e - to make su r e the softwa r e is f r ee fo r all its use r s. This Gene r al Public License a pp lies to m ost of the F r ee Softwa r e Foundati onâÂÂs softwa r e and to any othe r pr og r am whose autho r s commit to using it. (Some othe r Fr ee Softwa r e Fo undation softwa r e is cove r ed by the GNU Lesse r Gene r al Public License inste ad.) You ca n a pp ly it to you r pr ogr ams, too. When we s p eak of f r ee softwa r e, we a r e r efe rr ing to f r eedom, not pr ice. Ou r Gene r al Public L icenses a r e LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 50 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
51 En 07 designed to make su r e that you have the f r ee dom to dist r ibute co p ies of f r ee soft wa r e (and cha r ge fo r this se r vice if you wish) , that you r eceive sou r ce code o r can get it if you want it, that you can change the softw a r e o r use p ieces of it in new fr ee pr ogr ams; and that you know you can do these things. To pr otect you r r ights, we need to make r es t r ict ions that fo r bid anyone to deny you these r ights or to ask you to su rr ende r the r ight s. Th ese r estr ictions t r anslate to ce r tain r esp onsibilities for you if yo u dist r ib ute co p ies of the softwa r e, o r if you modify it. Fo r exam p le, if you dist r ibute co p ies of such a pr og r am, whethe r g r atis o r fo r a f ee, you must give the r ecip ients all the r ig hts that you have. You must ma ke su r e that they, too, r eceive or can get the sour ce code. And y ou must show them the se te r ms so they know thei r r ights. We pr otect you r r ights with two ste p s: (1) co p yr ight the softwa r e, and (2) offe r you this license which gives you legal p er mission to cop y, distr ibute and/or modify the softwar e. Also, fo r each autho r âÂÂs pr otection and ou r s, we want to make ce r tain that ev er yone und e r stands that the r e is no wa rr anty fo r this f r ee soft wa r e. If the s oftwa r e is modified by someone else and p assed on, we want its r ecip ie nts t o know that w hat they have is n ot the o r iginal, so that any pr oblems int r odu c ed by othe r s will n ot r eflect o n the o r iginal autho r sâ re p utations . Finally, any f r ee pr ogr am is th r eatened co nstantly by softwa r e p atents. We wish to avoid the dang e r that r edistr ibutor s of a fr ee pr ogr am will individually obtain p atent licenses, in effect making the pr ogr am pr o pr ietar y. To pr event this, we have made it clea r th at any p atent must be licensed fo r ever yon eâÂÂs fr ee use or not licensed at all. The pr ecise t e r ms and conditions fo r co p ying, dist r ibution and modification follow. TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0. This License a pp lies to any pr og r am o r oth e r wo r k which contains a noti ce p laced by the co p yr ig ht ho lde r sa ying it may be dist r ibuted unde r the te r ms of this Gene r al Public License. The âÂÂP r ogr amâÂÂ, below, r efer s to any such pr og r am or wor k, an d a âÂÂwor k based on the Pr ogr amâ means eithe r the P r ogr am o r any de r ivative wo r k unde r co p yr ight law: that is to say, a w o r k containing the P r og r am o r a po r tion of it, eithe r ve r batim o r with modifications and/o r tr a nslated into anothe r language. (He r einafte r , t r anslation is included without limitation in the te r m âÂÂmodificationâÂÂ.) Each licensee is add r essed as âÂÂyouâÂÂ. Activities othe r than co p ying, dis t r ibu t ion and modification a r e not cove r ed by this License; they a r e outside its sco p e. The act of r unn ing the P r ogr am is not r estr icted, and the outp ut f r om the P r ogr am is cover ed only if its conten ts constitute a w o r k based on the P r og r am (inde p endent of having been made by r unning the P r ogr am) . Whethe r that is t r ue de p ends on what the P r og r am does. 1. You may co p y and dist r ibute v e r batim co p ies o f the P r og r amâÂÂs sou r ce code as you r eceive it, in any medium , pr ovided tha t you cons p ic uously a nd appr opr iat ely p ublish on each cop y an a ppr o pr iate cop yr ight noti ce and disclaime r of wa rr an ty; kee p i ntact all the notices that r efe r to this License and t o the absence of any wa rr anty; and give any othe r r eci p ients of the P r og r am a co p y of this License alo ng with the P r og r am. You may cha r ge a fee for the p hysical act of tr ansfe rr ing a co p y, and you m ay at you r op tion offe r wa rr anty pr otection in excha nge fo r a fee. 2. You may modify you r co p y o r co p ies of th e P r ogr am o r any p or tion of it, t hus fo r ming a wo r k based on the P r og r am, an d co p y and dist r ibute such modification s o r wo r k unde r the te r ms of Section 1 above, pr ovided that you also meet all of th ese conditions: a) You must cause the modified files to ca rr y pr omin en t notices stating that you chan ged the files and the date of any change. b) You must cause any wo r k that you dist r ibute o r p ublish, that in whole or in p ar t contain s o r is de r ived f r om the P r og r am o r any pa r t the r eof, to be licensed as a whole at no cha r ge to all thi r d p a r ties und e r the te r ms of thi s License. c) If the modified pr og r am no r mally r eads comma nds inte r actively when r un , you mu st cause i t, when sta r ted r unni ng fo r such inte r active use in the most o r dina r y way, to pr int o r dis p lay an announcement including an a ppr opriate co p yr ight notice and a notice that the r e is no wa rr an ty (o r else , saying that you pr ovide a wa rr anty) and that use r s may r edi str ibute the pr og r am under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a co p y of this Li cense. (Exce p tion: if the P r og r am itself is inte r active but does not no r mally pr int such an anno uncement, you r wo r k based on the P r og r am is not r equi r ed to pr int an announcem ent.) These r equi r ements a pp ly to the modified w or k as a whole. If identifiable sections of that wo r k a r e not de r ived f r om the P r og r am, and can be r easonably conside r ed inde p endent and se p ar ate wo r ks in themselves, then this License, and its te r ms, do no t a pp ly to those sections when you dist r ibute them as se p ar at e wo r ks. Bu t when you dist r ibute the same sect ions as p ar t of a whole wh ich is a wo r k based on the P r ogr am, the dist r ibution of the whole must be on the te r ms of this License, whos e p er missions for other licensees extend to th e entir e whole, and thus to eac h and eve r y p ar t r egar dless of who w r ote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim r ights o r contest yo u r r ights to wor k wr itte n enti r ely by you; r ather , the intent is to exe r cise the r ight to co nt r ol the dist r ibution of de r ivative o r collec tive wo r ks based on the P r og r am. In addition, me r e agg r egation of an othe r wo r k not based on the P r ogr am with the P r ogr am ( o r with a wo r k based on the P r ogr am) on a volume of a sto r age o r dist r ibution medium does not b r ing the othe r wo r k unde r the sco p e of this L icense. 3. You may co p y and dist r ibute the P r ogr am (o r a wo r k based on it, unde r Sect ion 2) in object code o r executable fo r m unde r the te r ms of Sections 1 and 2 above pr ovi ded that you also do one of the following: a) A ccom p any it with th e com p lete co rr es p onding machine- r eadabl e sour ce code, which mu st be dist r ibuted und e r the te r ms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customa r ily used fo r softwa r e inte r change; o r , b) Accom p any it with a w r itten o ffe r , valid fo r at least th r ee yea r s, to give any thi r d p ar ty, fo r a cha r ge no mo r e than you r cost of p hysica lly p er for ming sou r ce dist r ibution, a com p lete machine- r eadable co p y o f the co rr es p ond ing sou r ce code, to be dist r ibuted unde r the te r ms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customa r ily used fo r softwa r e inte r change; o r , c) Accom p any it with the info r mation you r eceived as to the offe r to dist r ibute co rr es p onding sou r ce c ode. (This alt e r native is a llowed only fo r noncomme r cial dist r ibution and on ly if you r eceived the pr og r am in object code o r executable fo r m with such an o ffe r , i n acco r d with Subsection b above.) The sou r ce code fo r a wo r k means the pr efe rr ed fo r m of the wo r k fo r making modifica tions to it. Fo r an executable wo r k, com p lete sou r ce code m eans all the sou r ce co de fo r all modules it contains, p lus any associated inte r face definition files, p lus the sc r ip ts used to co nt r ol com p ilation and installation of the executable. Howeve r , as a s p ecial exce p tio n, the sou r ce code dist r ibut ed need not inclu de anything that is no r mally distr ibuted (in eithe r sou r ce o r bina r y fo r m) with the majo r com p onents (com p ile r , ke r nel, and so on) of the o p er ati ng syste m on which the executable r uns, unless that com p onent it self ac com p anie s the executable. If dist r ibution of ex ecutab le o r object code is made by offe r ing access to co p y f r om a designated p lace, then offe r ing equivalent access to co p y th e sou r ce code f r om the same p l a c e c o u n t s a s d i s t r ibution of the sou r ce code , even thoug h thi r d p ar ties a r e not com p elled to co p y the sou r ce along wi th the obje ct code. 4. You may not co p y, mod ify, sublicense, o r dist r ibute the P r og r am exce p t as ex pr essly pr ovided unde r this License. Any attem p t othe r wise to co p y, mo dify, sublicense o r dist r ibute the P r ogr am is void, and will automatically te r min ate you r r i ghts unde r th is License. Howeve r , p ar ties who ha ve r ec eiv ed co p ies, o r r ights, f r om you unde r this License will not have thei r licenses te r minated so long as such p ar ties r emain in full com p lia nce. 5. You a r e not r equ i r ed to acce p t this License , since you have not sig ned it. Howeve r , nothing else g r an ts you p er mission t o modify or distr ibute the Pr ogr am o r its de r ivative wo r ks. These act ions a r e pr ohibited by law if you do not acce p t th is License. The r efo r e, by modifyin g o r dist r ibuting the P r og r am (o r any wo r k based on the P r og r am), you indica te you r acce p tan ce of this License to do so, a nd all its te r ms and conditions fo r cop yin g, dist r ibu ting o r modifying the P r ogr am o r wo r ks ba sed on it. 6. Each time you r edistr ibu te the P r ogr am (or any wo r k based on the P r ogr am), the r ecip ient automatically r eceives a license fr om t he o r iginal licenso r to co p y, dist r ibute o r modify the P r ogr am subject to these te r ms and conditions. You may not im p ose an y fu r ther r estr ictions on the r eci p ientsâ exer cis e of the r ights g r anted he r ein. You a r e not r esp onsible fo r enfo r cing com p liance by thi r d p ar ties to thi s License. 7. If, as a cons equence of a cou r t ju dgment o r allegation of p atent infr ingement or for any other r ea son (no t limit ed to p atent issues), c onditions a r e im p osed on you (whethe r by cou r t o r de r , ag r eement o r othe r wise) that cont r adict the conditions of th is License, they do not excuse you f r o m the condi tions of th is License. If you cannot d ist r ibute so as to satisfy simu ltaneously you r obligations unde r this License and any othe r p er tinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not dist r ibute the P r og r am at all. Fo r exam p le, if a p atent license w ould not p er mit r oyalty-fr ee r ed istr ibu tion o f the P r og r am by all those who r eceive co p ies di r ectly or indi r e ctly th r o ugh you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to r efr ain enti r ely f r om dist r ibution of the P r og r am. If any p or t ion of this section is held invalid o r unenfo r ce able unde r any p ar ticula r ci r cumstance, th e balance of the section is intended to a pp ly and the section as a whole is intended to a pp ly in othe r ci r cumstances. It is not the p u rp ose of this section to induce you to inf r inge any p atents o r othe r pr op er ty r ight claims o r to contest validity of any such c laim s; this section has the sole p u rp ose of pr otecting the integ r ity of the f r ee softwa r e dist r ibution system, which is im p lemented by p ublic license pr actices. Many p eop le have made gene r ou s cont r ibu tions to the wide r ange of softwa r e dist r ibuted th r o ugh tha t syst em in r eliance on consistent a pp lication of that system; it is u p to the autho r /dono r to decide i f he o r she is willing t o dist r ibute softwa r e th r ough any othe r system and a licensee cannot im p ose that choice. This section is intended to make tho r oughly clea r wh at is believed to be a consequence of the r est o f this License. 8. If the dist r ibution and/o r use of the P r og r am is r est r icted in ce r tain count r ies eithe r by p aten ts o r by co p yr ighted inte r faces, the o r iginal co p yr ight ho lde r who p laces the P r og r am unde r this License may add an ex p licit geog r ap hical dis t r ibu t ion limitation excluding those count r ies, so that dist r ibution is p er mitted only in o r among count r ies not thus exclu ded. In such case, this License inco rp o r ates the limitation as if w r itten in the body of this License. 9. The F r ee Softwar e Foundation may p ublish r evised and/ o r new ve r sions of the Gene r al Public License fr om time to time. Such new ve r sions will be simila r in s p ir it to the pr esent ve r sion, but may differ in detail to addr ess new pr oblems o r concer ns. Each ve r sion is given a distinguishing ve r sio n numbe r . If the P r ogr am s p ecifies a ve r sion numbe r of this Lice nse which a pp lies to it and âÂÂany late r ve r sionâÂÂ, you ha ve the o p tion of following t he te r ms and conditions eithe r of that ve r sio n o r of any late r ve r sion p ublished by the F r ee Softwa r e Foundation. If the P r ogr am does not s p ecify a ve r sion numbe r of this Lice nse, you may choose any ve r sion eve r p ublished by the F r ee Softwa r e Foundation. 10.If y ou wish to inco rp o r ate p ar ts of the Pr ogr am into other f r ee pr og r ams whose dist r ibution conditions a r e diffe r ent, w r ite to the autho r to ask fo r p er mission. Fo r softwa r e whic h is co p yr ighted by the F r ee Sof twa r e Foundatio n, w r ite to the F r ee Softwa r e Fou ndation; we someti mes make exce p tions fo r this. Ou r decision will be guided by th e two goals of pr es e r ving the f r ee status of all de r ivatives of ou r f r ee softwa r e and of pr omoting the sha r ing and r euse of softwa r e gene r ally. NO WARRANTY 11.BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR T HE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COP YRIGHT HOLDERS AND/ OR OTHER PARTIES PR OVIDE THE PROGRAM âÂÂAS ISâ WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES O F MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERF ORMANCE OF THE PROGR AM IS WIT H YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY S ERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 12.IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRI TING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERA L, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABIL ITY TO US E THE PROGRAM (INCLUDI NG BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WI TH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs If you deve lo p a n ew pr og r am, and you want it to be of the g r eatest p ossib le use to the p ublic, the best way to achieve this is to make it f r ee softwa r e which eve r yone can r edistr ibute and change unde r thes e te r ms. To do so, attach the following notices to the pr og r am. It is safest to attach them to the sta r t of ea ch sou r ce file to most effective ly convey the exclusion of wa rr anty; and each file LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 51 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
07 52 En should have at least the âÂÂco p y r ightâ line and a p ointer to whe r e the full notice is found. <one line to give the pr og r amâÂÂs name and a b r ief idea of what it does.> Co p yr ight é <yea r > <name of autho r > This pr og r am is fr ee softwar e; yo u can r edistr ibute it and/ o r modify it unde r the te r ms of the GNU Gene r al Public License as p ublishe d by the F r ee Softwa r e Foundation; eithe r ve r sion 2 of the License, o r (at you r o p tion) any late r ve r sion. This pr og r am is dist r ibuted in the ho p e that it will b e useful, but WIT HOUT ANY WARRAN TY; without even the im p lied wa rr anty of MERCHANTABILITY o r FITNESS FO R A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. S ee the GNU Gene r al Public License fo r mo r e details. You should have r eceived a co p y of the GNU Gene r al Public License along with this pr og r am; if n ot, wr ite to the F r ee Softwa r e Found ation, Inc ., 51 F r anklin St r eet, Fifth Floo r , Bost on, MA 02110-1301 USA. Also ad d info r mation on how to c ontact you by e lect r onic and p ap er mail. If the pr og r am is inte r active, make it out p ut a sho r t notice like this when it sta r ts in an in te r active mo de: Gnomovision ve r sion 69, Co p yr ight é yea r name of autho r Gnomovision comes wi th ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; fo r details ty p e âÂÂshow w âÂÂ. This is f r ee softwa r e, and you a r e welcome to r edist r ibute it und e r ce r t ain conditions; ty p e âÂÂshow câ fo r de ta ils. The hy p othet ical commands âÂÂshow wâ and âÂÂshow câ should show the a ppr o pr iate p ar ts of the Gene r al Public License. Of co u r se , the commands you us e may be called some thing othe r than âÂÂshow wâ and âÂÂshow câÂÂ; th ey could even be mouse-c licks o r m enu items - whateve r suits you r pr og r am. You should also get you r em p loyer (if you wo r k as a pr og r ammer ) or your sc hool, if any , to sign a âÂÂc op yr ight disc laim e r â fo r the pr og r am, if necessa r y. He r e is a sam p le; alte r the names: Yoyodyne, I nc., he r eby disclaims all co p yr ight inte r est in the pr og r am âÂÂGnom ovisionâ (whic h makes p asses at com p ile r s) w r itten by Ja mes Hack e r . <signatu r e of Ty Coon>, 1 A pr il 1989 Ty Coon, P r esident of Vic e This Gene r al Publi c License does not p er mit inco rp or ating you r pr og r am in to pr opr ieta r y pr ogr ams. If you r pr ogr am is a sub r outine lib r ar y, you may conside r it mo r e use ful to p er mit linking pr o pr ietar y a pp lications with the libr ar y. If this is what you want to do, use th e GNU Lesse r Gene r al Public License instead of this License. ï° GNU LESSER GENERA L PUBLIC LICENSE Ve r sion 2.1, Fe b r ua r y 1999 Co p yr ight é 1991, 199 9 F r ee Softwa r e Founda tion, Inc. 51 F r anklin St r eet, Fifth Floo r , Boston , MA 02110-1301 USA Eve r yone is p er mitte d to co p y and dist r ibute ve r batim co p ies of this license document, but changing it is not allow ed. [This is the fi r st r eleased ve r sion of the Lesse r GPL. It also counts as the suc cesso r of the GNU Lib r ar y Public License, ve r sion 2, hence the ve r sion numbe r 2.1.] Preamble The licenses fo r most softwa r e a r e designed to take away you r f r eedom to sha r e and change it. By cont r ast, the GNU Gene r al Public Licenses a r e intended t o gua r antee you r f r eedom to sha r e and ch ange f r ee softwa r e - to make sur e the soft wa r e i s f r ee fo r all its use r s. This license , the Lesse r Gene r al Public License, a pp lies to so me s p ecially designated softwa r e p ackages - ty p ically lib r ar ies - of th e F r ee Softwa r e Foun dation and othe r autho r s who decide to use it. You can us e it too, but we su ggest yo u fi r st think ca r efully about whet he r this license o r the o r dinar y Gene r al Public License is the bette r st r ategy to use in any p ar ticular case, based on the ex p lanations be low. When we s p eak of f r ee softw a r e, we a r e r efe rr ing to f r eedom o f use, no t pr ice. Ou r Gene r al Public Licenses a r e designed to make su r e that yo u have the f r eedom to dist r ibute co p ies of f r ee softwa r e (a nd cha r ge fo r this se r vice if you w ish); that you r ec eive so u r ce code o r can get it if you want it; that you can change the softwa r e and use p ieces of it in new fr ee pr og r ams; and that you ar e inf or med that you c an do these things . To pr otect y ou r r ights , we need to m ake r estr ictions that fo r bid dist r ibuto r s to deny yo u these r ights o r to ask you to su rr ende r th ese r ights. These rest r ictions t r an slate to ce r tain r esp onsibilities for you if you distr ibute cop ies of the lib r ar y o r if you modify it. Fo r exam p le, if you dist r ibute co p ies of the lib r ar y, wh ethe r g r atis o r fo r a fee, you mus t give the r ecip ien ts all the r ights that we gav e you. You must make su r e that they, too, r eceive or can get the sour ce code. If you lin k othe r code with the lib r ar y, y ou must pr ovide com p lete object files to the r eci p ients, so that they can r elink them with the lib r ar y afte r making change s to the lib r ar y and r ecomp ilin g it. An d you must show them these te r ms s o t he y k n ow t h e ir r ights. We pr otect y ou r r ights with a two-ste p method: ( 1) we co p yr ight the lib r ar y, and (2) we offe r you t his license, which gives you legal p er mission to co p y, dist r ibute and/o r modify the lib r ar y. To pr ot ect each dist r ibu to r , we want to make it ve r y c lea r that the r e is no wa rr anty fo r the f r ee lib r ar y. Also, if th e lib r ar y is modified by someone else and p assed on, the r ecip ients should know that what they have is not the o r iginal ve r sion, so that the o r iginal autho r âÂÂs r e p utation will not be affect ed by pr oblems that might be int r oduced by othe r s. Finally, softwa r e p atents p ose a constant thr eat to the existence of any f r ee pr ogr am. We wish to make sur e that a com p any cannot effect ively r estr ict the use r s of a f r ee pr og r am by obtaining a r estr ictive license fr om a p atent holde r . The r efo r e , w e i n s i s t t h a t a n y p at ent license obtained fo r a ve r sion of the lib r ar y must be con sistent with the full f r eedom of use s p ecified in this license. Most GNU softwa r e, including some lib r ar ies, is cove r ed by the o r dinar y GNU Gene r al Public License. This license, the GNU Lesse r Gene r al Public License, a pp lies to ce r tain designated lib r ar ies, and is quite diffe r ent f r om the o r dinar y Gene r al Public License. We use this license fo r ce r tain lib r ar ies i n o r de r to p er mit linking those lib r ar ies into non- f r ee pr og r ams. When a pr og r am is linked with a lib r ar y, whet he r statically o r using a sha r ed l ib r ar y, the combination of the two is legally s p eaking a combined wo r k, a de r ivative of the o r iginal lib ra r y. The o r dina r y Ge ne r al Public License the r efo r e p er mits such linking only if the enti re combination fits its c r iter ia of f r eedom. The Lesse r Ge ne r al Public Licens e p er mits mo r e lax c r iter ia fo r linkin g othe r code with t he lib r ar y. We call this license the âÂÂLesse r â Gene r al Public License because it does Less to pr ot ect the use r âÂÂs f r eedom than the o r dina r y Gene r a l P ubl ic L ice nse . It als o pr ovides othe r f r ee softwa r e develo p er s Less of an advantage ove r co m p et ing non-f r ee pr og r ams. The se disadvantages a r e the r eason we use the o r dina r y Gener al Public License for many libr ar ies. Howeve r , the Lesse r license pr ov ides adv antages in ce r tain s p ecial ci r cumsta nces. Fo r exam p le, on r ar e occasions, the r e may be a s p ecia l need to encou r age th e widest p ossible use of a ce r tain lib r ar y, so that it becomes a de-facto standa r d. To ac hieve this, non-f r ee pr ogr ams must be allowed to use the lib r ar y. A mo r e f r equent case is that a f r ee lib r ar y do es the same job as widely used non-f r ee li b r ar ies. In this case, the r e is little to gain by limiting the f r ee lib r ar y to f r ee softwa r e only, so we use the Lesse r Gene r al Public License. In othe r cases, p er m ission to use a p ar ticular lib r ar y in non - f r ee pr og r ams enables a g r eate r numbe r of p eo p le to use a la r ge body of f r ee softw a r e. Fo r exam p le, p er mission to use the GNU C Lib r ar y in non-f r ee pr ogr ams enables many mo r e p eo p le to use the whole GNU o p er ating system, as well as its va r iant, the GN U Linux o p er ating system. Although the Lesse r Gene r al Public License is Less pr otective of the use r sâ f r ee dom, it does ensu r e that the use r of a pr og r am that is linked with the Lib r ar y has the f r eedom and the whe r ewithal to r un that pr og r am using a modified ve r sion of the Lib r ar y. The pr ecise t e rms and conditions fo r co p ying, dis t r ibution and modification follow. Pay close atten tion to the diffe r ence betwe en a âÂÂwo r k based on the lib r ar yâ an d a âÂÂwo r k that uses the lib r ar yâÂÂ. The fo r me r contains code de r ived f r om the lib r ar y, whe r eas the latte r must be combined with the lib r ar y in or der to r un. TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0. This Li cense Ag r eement a pp lies to any softwa r e libr ar y or ot he r pr ogr am which contai ns a notice p laced by the co p yr ight holde r o r othe r autho r ized p ar ty saying it may be dist r ibuted unde r th e te r ms of this Lesse r Gene r al Public License ( also called âÂÂthis LicenseâÂÂ). Each licensee is add r essed as âÂÂyouâÂÂ. A âÂÂlib r ar yâ means a collection of softwa r e functions and/ o r data pre pa r ed so as to be conveniently linked with a pp lication pr og r ams (whic h use some of those functions and data) to fo r m executables. The âÂÂLib r ar yâÂÂ, bel ow, r efer s to any such softwa r e lib r ar y o r wo r k which has bee n dist r ibuted unde r these te r ms. A âÂÂwo r k based on the Lib r ar yâ means ei the r th e L ib r ar y o r any de r ivative wo r k unde r co p yr ight law: that is to say, a wo r k containing the Lib r ar y o r a p or tion o f it, eithe r ve r batim o r with modifications and/o r t r anslated st r aightfo r wa r dly into anothe r langu age. (Her eina fter , t r anslation is inclu ded without limitatio n in the te r m âÂÂmodificationâÂÂ.) âÂÂSou r ce codeâ fo r a wo r k means the pr efe rr ed fo r m of the wo r k fo r making modifications to it. Fo r a lib r a r y, com p lete sou r ce code means all the so u r ce code fo r all modules it co ntains, p lus any associated inte r face definition files, p lu s the sc r ip ts used to cont r ol com p ilation and installation of the lib r ar y. Activities othe r than co p ying, dist r ibut ion and modification a r e not cove r ed by this Licens e; they a r e outside its sco p e. The act o f r unning a pr og r am using the Lib r ar y is not r es t r icted, and out p ut f r om such a pr og r am is cove r ed only if its contents c onstitute a wo r k based on the Lib r ar y (inde p endent of the us e of the Lib r ar y in a tool fo r w r iting it). Whethe r that is tr ue de p end s on what the Lib r ar y does and what the pr og r am that uses t he Lib r ar y does. 1. You may co p y and dist r ibute ve r batim co p ies of the Lib r ar yâÂÂs com p lete sou r ce code as you r eceive it, in any medium, pr ovided that you cons p icuously and a ppro pr iately p ublish on each co p y an a ppro pr iate co p yr ight notice and dis claime r of wa rr anty; kee p in tact all the notices that r efer to this License and to the absence of any wa rr anty; and dist r ibute a co p y of this License along with the Lib r ar y. You may cha r ge a fee fo r the p hysical act of t r ansfe rr ing a co p y, and you may at you r o p tion offer wa rr anty pr otection in exchan ge fo r a fee. 2. You may mo dify you r co p y o r co p ies o f th e Lib r ar y o r an y p or tio n of it, thus fo r ming a wo r k based on the Lib r ar y, and co p y and dist r ibute su ch modificat ions o r wo r k unde r the te r ms of Sec tion 1 above, pr ovided t hat you also meet all of these condit ions: a) The modified wo r k must itself be a softwa r e lib r a r y. b) You m ust caus e the fil es modif ied to ca rr y pr omine nt notices stating that you chan ged the files and the date of any change. c) You must cause the wh ole of the wo r k to be licensed at no cha r ge to all thi r d p ar ties un de r the te r ms of this License. d) If a facility in the modified Lib r ar y r efer s to a functio n o r a table of data to be su pp lied by an a pp lica tion pr og r am that uses the facility, othe r than as an a r gument p assed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effo r t to ensur e that , in the event an a pp lication does n ot su pp ly such function o r t a ble, the fac ility stil l o p er ates, and p e r for ms what eve r p ar t of its p u rp ose r emains meaningful. (For examp le , a function in a lib r ar y to com p ute squa r e r oots has a p u rp ose that is entir ely well-define d indep ende nt of the a pp lication. The r efor e, Subsection 2d r equir es that any a pp lication-su pp lied function o r ta ble used by this function must be o p tional : if the a pp lication does not su pp ly it, the squa r e r oot function must still comp ute squa r e r oots.) These r equi r eme nts a pp ly to the modified wo r k as a whole. If identifiable sections of that wo r k a r e no t de r ived f r om t h e Lib r ar y, and c an be r easonably conside r ed inde p endent and se p ar ate wo r ks in themselves, th en this License, and its te r ms, do not a pp ly to those sections when you dist r ibute them as se p ar ate wo r ks. But when you dist r ibute the same section s as p ar t of a whole w hich is a wo r k based on the Lib r ar y, the dist r ibution of the whole must be on th e te r ms of this License, whose p er missions for other licensees extend to th e entir e whole, and thus to eac h and eve r y p ar t r egar dless of who w r ote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim r ights o r contest y ou r r ights to wo r k w r it ten enti r ely by yo u; r ather , the intent is to exe r cise the r i ght to cont r ol t he dist r ibution of de r ivative o r collective wo r ks based on the Lib r ar y. In addition, me r e agg r egation of an othe r wo r k not based on the Li b r ar y with the Lib r ar y (o r with a wo r k based on the Lib r ar y) on a volum e of a sto r age o r dist r ibution medium does no t b r ing the othe r wo r k unde r the sco p e of this L icense. 3. You may o p t to a pp ly the te r ms of th e o r dinar y GNU Gene r al Public License instead of this License to a given co p y of the Lib r ar y. To do this, you must a lte r all the notices that r efer to this License, so that they r efer to the o r dina r y GNU Gene r a l Pu blic Lic ens e, v er si on 2 , instead o f t o t h i s L i c e n s e . ( I f a n e w e r ve r sio n than ve r sion 2 of the o r dina r y GNU Gene r al Public Lice nse has a pp ea r ed, then you can s p ecify that ve r sio n instead if you wish .) Do not make any othe r change in the se notices. Once this change is made in a given co p y, it is i rr eve r sible fo r that co p y, so the o r dina r y GNU Gene r al Public Licens e a pp lies to all subsequent co p ies and de r ivative wo r ks made f r om that co p y. This o p tion is useful when y ou wish to co p y p ar t of the code o f the Lib r ar y into a pr og r am that is not a lib r ar y. 4. You may co p y and dist r ibute the Lib r ar y (o r a p or tio n or de r iv ative of it, unde r Section 2) in object code o r executable fo r m under the ter ms of Sections 1 and 2 above pr ovided that you accom p any it with the comp lete co rr es p onding mac hine- r eadable sou r ce cod e, which must be dist r ib uted unde r the te r ms of Sec tions 1 and 2 above on a me dium customa r ily used fo r softwa r e inte r change. If dist r ibution of object code is made by offe r ing access to co p y f r om a designated p lace, then offe r ing equiv alent access to co p y the sou r ce code f r om the s ame p lace satisfies the r equir ement to dist r ibute the sou r ce code, even thoug h thi r d p ar ties a r e not com p elled to co p y the sou r ce along wi th the obje ct code. LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 52 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
53 En 07 5. A pr og r am that contains no de r ivative of any p or tion of the Lib r ar y, but is designed to wo r k with the Lib r ar y by being com p iled o r linked with it, is called a âÂÂwo r k th at uses the Lib r ar yâÂÂ. Such a wo r k, in isolation, is not a de r ivative wo r k of the Lib r ar y, and the r efo r e falls outside the sco p e of this License. Howeve r , linking a âÂÂwor k that uses the Libr ar yâ w ith the Lib r ar y c r eates an executable that is a de r ivative of the Lib r ar y (bec ause it contains p or tions of the Li b r ar y), r ather than a âÂÂwor k th at uses the libr ar yâÂÂ. The executable is the r efor e cove r ed by this License. Section 6 states te r ms fo r dis t r ibution of such exec utables . When a âÂÂwo r k that uses the Lib r ar yâ uses mate r ial f r om a heade r file that is p ar t of the Lib r ar y, the object c ode fo r the wo r k may be a de r ivative wo r k of the Lib r ar y even though the sou r ce code is not . Whethe r this is tr ue is es p ecially significant if the w o r k can be linked without the Lib r ar y, o r if the wo r k is itself a lib r ar y. The th r eshold fo r this to be t r ue is not pr ecisely defined by law. If such an object file uses only nume r ic al p a r ameter s, data st r uctur e layouts and accesso r s, and small mac r os and small inline functions (ten li nes o r less in length), then the us e of the object file is un r estr icte d, r egar dle ss of w hethe r it is legally a de r ivative wo r k. (Executables containing this object cod e p lus p or tions of the Lib r ar y will s till f all un de r Sec tion 6.) Othe r wi se, if th e wo r k is a de r ivative of the Lib r ar y, you may dist r ibute the object code fo r the wo r k unde r the te r ms of Sec tion 6. Any executable s containing that wo r k also fall unde r Section 6, whet he r or not they a r e linked di r ectly with the Lib r ar y itself. 6. As an exce p tion to the Sec tions above, yo u may also combine o r link a âÂÂwo r k tha t uses the L ib r ar yâ with the Lib r ar y to pr oduce a wo r k containing p or tions of the Lib r ar y, and dist r ibute that wo r k unde r te r ms of you r cho ice, pr ovided that the te r ms p er mit modificatio n of the wo r k fo r the custome r â s own use and r ever se enginee r ing fo r debugging such modifications. You must giv e pr ominent no tice with each co p y of th e wo r k that the Lib r ar y is used in it and that the Lib r ar y and its use a r e cove r ed by thi s License. You mus t su pp ly a co p y o f t h i s L i c e n s e . I f t h e w o r k du r ing executi on dis p lays co p yr ight notice s, you must include the co p yr ight no tice fo r the Lib r ar y among them, as well as a r efe r ence di r ecting the use r to the co p y of this License. Also , you must do one of these things: a) Accom p any the wo r k wi th the com p lete co rr es p onding machine- r eadable so u r ce code fo r the Lib r ar y including whateve r changes we r e used in th e wo r k (which must be dist r ibuted unde r Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the wo r k is an executable linked with the Lib r ar y, with the co m p lete machine- r eadable âÂÂwo r k that uses the Lib r ar yâÂÂ, as obje ct code and/ o r sou r ce code, so that the use r can mo dify the Lib r a r y and then r elink to pr oduce a modified executable containing the modified Lib r ar y. (It is under stood that the us e r wh o changes the cont ents of definitions files in the Lib r ar y will not necessa r ily be able to r ecomp ile the a pp lication to use the modified definitions .) b) Use a suitable sha r ed lib r ar y mec hanism fo r linking with the Lib r ar y. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at r un time a co p y of the lib r ar y al r ea dy pr ese nt on the use r âÂÂs comp uter system, r ather than cop ying lib r ar y functions in to the executable , and (2) will o pe r ate pro pe r ly w i th a m o di fi ed v e r sion of the lib ra r y, if the use r installs one, as long as the modified ve r sion is inte r face -comp at ible with the ve r sion that the wo r k was made with. c) Accom p any the wo r k with a w r itten offe r , valid fo r at least th r ee yea r s, to give the same use r the mate r ials s p ecified in Subsection 6a, above, fo r a ch a r ge no mo r e than the cost of p er fo r ming this dist r ibution. d) If dist r ibution of the wor k is made by offer ing access to co p y f r o m a designated p lace, offe r equivalent acc ess to co p y the ab ove s p ecified mate r ials f r om the same p lace. e) Ve r ify that the use r ha s al r eady r eceived a co p y of these mate r ials o r t hat you have al r eady sent this us e r a co p y. Fo r an executable, the r eq uir ed for m of the âÂÂwor k that uses the Lib r ar yâ must include any data and util ity pr og r ams needed for r e pr oducing the executable fr om it. Howeve r , as a sp ecial excep tion, the mater ials to be dist r ibuted need no t include anythin g that is no r ma lly dist r ibuted (in eit he r sou r ce o r bina r y fo r m) with the majo r com p on ents (com p iler , ke r nel , and so on) of the o pe r ating system on which the executable r uns, unless that c om p onent itself accom p anies the executable . It may ha pp en that this r equir ement cont r adicts the license r est r ictions of othe r pr o pr ieta r y lib r ar ies that do not no r mally a ccom p any the o p er ating system. Such a cont r adiction means you ca nnot use both th em and the Lib r ar y togethe r in an executable that you dist r ibute. 7. You may p lace lib r ar y facilities that a r e a wo r k based on the Lib r ar y side-by-side in a single lib r ar y togethe r with othe r lib r ar y facilities not cove r ed by this License, and dist r ibute such a combined lib r ar y, pr o v ided that the se p ar ate dist r ibution of the wo r k based on the Lib r ar y and of the othe r lib r ar y facilities is o the r wise p er mitted, and pr ovided that yo u do these two things: a) Accom p any the combined lib r ar y wi th a co p y of the same wo r k based on the Lib r ar y, uncomb ined with any othe r lib r ar y facilities. This must be dist r ibuted unde r the te r ms of the Secti ons abov e. b) Give pr ominent notice w ith the combined lib r ar y of the fact that p ar t of it is a wo r k based on the Lib r ar y, and ex p laining whe r e to find the ac com p anying uncombined f o r m of the s ame wo r k. 8. You may not co p y, modify, sub license, link with, o r dist r ibu te the Lib r ar y e xce p t as ex pr essly pr ovided unde r this License. Any attem p t o the r wise to co p y, m odify, sublicense, link with, o r dist r ibute the Lib r ar y is void, and will automatically te r minate you r r ights unde r this License. Howe ve r , p ar ties who have r eceived co p ies, o r r ights, fr om you under this License will not have their licenses te r minated so long as such p ar tie s r emain in full com p lia nce. 9. You a r e not r equ i r ed to acce p t this License , since you have not sig ned it. Howeve r , nothing else g r an ts you p er mission t o modify or distr ibute the Libr ar y or its de r iv ative wo r ks. These action s a r e pr ohibited by law if you do not acce p t th is License. The r efo r e, by modifyin g o r dist r ibuting the Lib ra r y ( o r any wo r k based on the Lib r ar y), you indicate you r accep tanc e of this Li cense to do so, and all its te r ms and cond itions fo r co p ying, dist r ibuting o r modifying the Li b r ar y o r wo r ks based on it. 10.Each time you r edistr ibute the Lib r ar y (o r any wo r k based on the Li b r ar y), the r ecip ient automatically r eceives a license f r om the o r iginal licenso r to co p y, dist r ibute, link with o r modif y the Lib r ar y subject to these ter ms and c o nditions. You may not im p ose any fu r th e r r est r ictions on the r ecip ientsâ exe r cise of the r ights g r anted he r ein. You a r e not r esp onsible fo r enfo r cing com p liance by thi r d p ar ties with this License. 11.If, as a cons equence of a cou r t judgment o r allegation of p atent infr ingement or for any other r ea son (no t limit ed to p atent issues), c onditions a r e im p osed on you (whethe r by cou r t o r de r , ag r eement o r othe r wise) that cont r adict the conditions of th is License, they do not excuse you f r o m the condi tions of th is License. If you cannot d ist r ibute so as to satisfy simu ltaneously you r obligations unde r this License and any othe r p er ti nent obl igations, t hen as a consequence you may no t dist r ibute the Lib r ar y at all. Fo r exam p le, if a p atent license wo uld not p er mit r o yalty-fr ee r edistr ibution of the Lib r ar y by all those who r eceive co p ies di r ectly o r indi r ectly th r ough yo u, then the o nly way you c ould satisfy both it and this License would be to r efr ain enti r ely f r om dist r ibution of the Lib ra r y. If any po r tion of this section is held invalid o r un enfo r ceabl e unde r any p ar ticular cir cumsta nce, the bala nce of the sectio n is intended to a pp ly, and the section as a whole is intended to a pp ly in othe r ci r cum stances. It is not the p u rp ose of this section to induce you to inf r inge any p aten ts o r ot he r pr op er ty r ight claims o r to contest vali dity of any such claim s; this se ction has th e sole p u rp ose of pr otecting the inte g r ity of the f r ee softwa r e dist r ibution system which is im p lemented by p ublic license pr actices. Many p eop le have made gene r ous cont r ibutions to the wide r ange of softwa r e dist r ibuted th r ough that system in r eliance o n consistent a pp lication of that system; it is u p to t he autho r dono r to decide if he o r she is willing to dist r ibute softwa r e th r ough any othe r system and a li censee cannot im p ose that choice . This section is intended to m ake tho r oughly clea r what is believed to be a consequence of the r est of t his License. 12.If the dist r ib ution and/o r use of the Lib r ar y is r estr ic ted in ce r tain coun t r ies eithe r by p atents o r by co p yr ighted inte r faces, the o r iginal co p yr ight holde r who p laces the Lib r ar y unde r this License may add an ex p licit geog r ap hical dist r ibution limitat ion excluding those count r ies, so that dist r ibution is p er mitted only in o r among count r ies n ot thus excluded. In such ca se, this License i nco rp o r ates the limitation as if w r itten in the body of th is License. 13.The F r ee Soft wa r e Foundation may p ublish r evised and/ o r new ve r sions of the Lesse r Ge ne r al Public Licens e f r om time to time. Such new ve r sions will be simila r in s pi r it to the pr esent ve r sio n, but may diffe r in detail to add r ess new pr oblems o r conce r ns. Each ve r sion is given a distinguishing ve r sion numbe r . If the Lib r ar y s p ecifies a ve r sion numbe r of this Licens e which a pp lies to it and âÂÂany late r ve r sionâ , you have the o p tion of following the te r ms and conditions eithe r of that ve r sion o r of any late r ve r sion p ublished by t he F r ee Softwa r e Found ation. If the Lib r a r y does not s p ecify a license ve r sion numb e r , yo u may choose any ve r sion eve r p ublished by the Fr ee Softwar e Fo undation . 14.If you w ish to inco rp o r ate pa r ts of th e Lib r ar y into othe r f r ee pr og r am s whose dist r i bution c onditions a r e incom p atible with these, w r ite to the autho r to ask fo r p er mission. For softwar e which is cop yr ighted by the F r ee Softwa r e Fo undation, w r ite to the F r ee Softw a r e Foundation; we sometimes make e xce p tions fo r this. Ou r decision will be gui ded by the two goals of pr ese r ving the f r ee status of all de r ivatives of ou r f r ee softwa r e and of pr omoti ng the sha r ing and r euse of softwar e gener ally. NO WARRANTY 15.BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PE RMITTED BY APPLICABL E LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVID E THE L IBRAR Y âÂÂAS I Sâ WITHO UT W ARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMI TED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES O F MERCHA NTABILITY AN D FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. T H E ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY P ROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 16.IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRI TING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMI TTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAG ES, INCLUDING ANY GENER AL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUEN TIAL DAMAGES ARISIN G OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DA TA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOS SES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE) , EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries If you deve lo p a n ew lib r ar y, and you wan t it to be of the g r eat est p ossi ble use to the p ublic, we r ecommend making it f r ee softwa r e that eve r yo ne can r ed istr ibute and change. You can do so by p er mitting r edis tr ibutio n unde r these te r ms (o r , alter natively, unde r the te r ms of the o r dinar y Gene r al Public License). To a pp ly these te r ms, attach the following notices to th e lib r ar y. It is safest to attach them to the sta r t of each sou r ce file to most effectively convey t he exclusion of wa rr anty; and each file should have at least the âÂÂco p yr ightâ line and a p ointe r to wher e the full notice is found. <one line to giv e the lib r ar yâÂÂs n ame and a b r ief idea of what it does.> Co p yr ight é <yea r > <name of autho r > This lib r ar y is f r ee softwa r e; y ou can r edistr ibute it and/o r modify it unde r the te r ms of the GNU Lesse r Gene r al Public License as p ublishe d by the F r ee Sof twa r e Founda tion; eithe r ve r sion 2.1 of the License, o r (at you r o p tion) any late r ve r sion. This lib r ar y is dist r ibuted in the ho pe that it will be useful, but WI THOUT A NY WAR RANTY; w ithout e ven the i m p lie d wa rr anty of MERCHANTABILITY o r FITN ESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesse r Gene r al Public License fo r mo r e deta ils. You should have r eceived a co p y of the GNU Lesse r Gener al Public License along with this lib r ar y; if not, w r ite to th e F r ee Softwa r e Fou ndation, Inc., 51 F r anklin St r eet, Fifth Floo r , Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA Also add info r mation on how to contact you by elect r onic and p ap er mail. You should als o get you r em p loyer (if y ou wo r k as a pr og r ammer ) or your school, if any, to sign a âÂÂcop yr ight disclaime r â fo r the lib r ar y, if necessa r y. He r e is a sam p le; alte r the names: Yoyodyne , Inc., he r eby disclaims all co p yr ight inte r est in the lib r ar y âÂÂF r obâ (a lib r ar y fo r tweaking knobs) w r itten by James Random Hacke r . <signatu r e of Ty Coon>, 1 A pr il 1990 Ty Coon, P r esident o f Vice ThatâÂÂs all the r e is to it! ï° [Notice on GNU Gen eral Public License] This pr oduct include the softwa r e licensed fo r use unde r the te r ms of a GNU Gene r al Public License. A co p y of the co rr es p ond ing sou r ce code can be obtaine d by being cha r ged the fee fo r di st r ibution. To obtain a c o p y, contact y ou r loca l Pionee r Custom e r Su pp o r t Cente r. See the GNU website ( htt p ://w ww.gnu.or g) fo r details of the GNU Gene r al Public License. LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 53 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
07 54 En Cautions on use Moving the player If you need to move this unit, fi r st r emove the disc if the r eâÂÂs one loaded, and close the disc t r ay. Next, pr ess ïµ STANDBY/ON to switch the p ower to standby, checking th at the POWER OFF indication on the f r ont p anel disp la y goes off. Wait at least 10 seconds. Lastly, disconnect the p ower co r d. Neve r lift o r move the unit du r ing p layback â discs r otate at a high s p eed and may be damaged. Place of installation Select a stable p lace nea r the TV and AV system to which the unit is connected. Do not p lace the p layer on to p of a TV o r colo r monito r . Kee p it away f r om cassette de cks o r othe r com p onents easily affected by magnetism. Avoid the following ty p es of p laces : â¢P l a c e s e x p osed to dir ec t sunlight â¢H u m i d o r p oor ly ventilated p laces â¢E x t r emely hot o r cold p lac es ⢠Places subject to vib r ation â¢D u s t y p laces â¢P l a c e s e x p osed to soo t, steam o r heat (in kitchens, etc.) ï° Do not place objects on top Do not p lace obj ects on to p of th e p layer . ï° Do not obstruct the ventilation holes Do not use the p layer on a shaggy r ug, bed, o r sofa, and do not cove r the p layer with a c loth, etc. D oing so will pr event heat dissi p ation an d could lead to dama ge. ï° Keep away from heat Do not p lace the p layer on to p of an amp lifie r or othe r device gene r ating heat. When inst alling in a r ack, to avoid the heat gene r ated by the am p lifier and othe r devices, p lace it o n a shelf below th e amp lifier whenever p ossible. Turn the power off when not using the player De p ending on the conditions of the TV b r oa dcast signals, st r ip ed p atter ns may a pp ear on the scr een when the TV is tu r ned on while the p laye r âÂÂs p ower is tur ned on. This is not a malfu nction with the p layer or TV. If this ha pp ens, tu r n the p laye r âÂÂs p owe r off. In the same way, noise ma y be hea r d in the sound of a r adio. Condensation If the p layer is moved suddenly f r om a cold p lace into a wa r m r oom (in winte r , fo r exam p le) o r if th e tem p er atu r e in the r oom in which the p layer is installed r ises suddenly due to a heate r , etc., wate r d r op lets (condensation) may fo r m insi de (on o p er ating p ar ts and the lens). When condensation is pr esent, the p la yer will not o p er ate pr o pe r ly and p layba ck is not p ossibl e. Let th e p laye r stand at r oom tem p eratu r e fo r 1 o r 2 hou r s with the p owe r tu r ned on (t he t ime de p ends on the extent of condensation). The wate r dr op lets will dissi p ate and p layback will become p ossible. Condensati on can also occu r in the summe r if the p layer is ex p osed to the di r ect wind f rom an ai r -conditioner . If this ha pp ens, move the p layer to a d iffe r ent p lace. Cleaning the player No r mally, wi p e the p laye r with a soft cloth. Fo r tough di r t, a pp ly some neut r al dete r gent diluted in 5 to 6 pa r ts wate r to a soft cloth, w r ing out tho r ough ly, wi p e off the di r t, then wi p e again with a d r y cloth. Note that ge tting alcoho l, thinne r , benzen e o r insectic ide on the p layer could cau se the pr int an d coatin g to p eel o ff. Also, avoid leav ing r ubber or vinyl pr oducts in contact with the p layer fo r lo ng p er iods of time, as this could damage the cabinet. When using che mical-im pr egnated wi p es, etc., r ea d the wi p eâÂÂs cautions ca r efully. Un p lug the p owe r co r d f r om the powe r outlet when cleaning the p layer . Caution for wh en the unit is installed in a rack with a glass door Do not pr ess the ï¨ OPEN/CLOSE on the r emote cont r ol to o p en the disc t r ay while the glass doo r is c losed. The doo r will ham p er the movement of the disc t r ay, and t he unit could be damaged. Cleaning the pickup lens The p laye r âÂÂs lens s hould not b ecome di r ty in no r mal use, but if fo r some r eason it should malfuncti on due to dust o r di r t, consult you r nea r est Pionee r autho r ized se r vice cente r . Although lens cleane r s fo r p laye r s a r e comme r cially availa ble, we advise against using them since some may damage the lens. Handling discs Do not use damaged (c r acked o r wa rp ed) discs. Do not sc r atch the discâÂÂs signal su r fac e o r let it ge t di r ty. Do not load mo re than one disc into the p layer at a time. LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 54 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
55 En 07 Do not glu e p ap er or p ut sticke r s on to the disc , o r use a p encil, ball-p oint p en or other sha rp -ti pp ed w r iting inst r ument. These co uld all damage the disc. ï° Storing discs Always sto r e discs in thei r cases, and place the cases ve r ticall y, avoiding p laces ex p osed to high tem p er atu r e o r humidity, di r ec t sunlight or extr emely low temp er atur es. Be su r e to r ead the cautions included with the disc. ï° Cleaning discs It may not be p ossible to p lay the disc if the r e a r e finge rp r ints o r dust on it. In this case, using a cleanin g cloth, etc. , to wi p e the disc ge ntly f r om the cente r towa r d the oute r edge. Do not use a di r ty cleaning cloth. Do not use benzene, thinne r or othe r volatile chemicals. Also do not u se r ecor d s pr ay o r antistatic agents. Fo r tough di r t, a pp ly some wate r t o a s o f t c l o t h , w r in g out tho r oughly, wi p e off the di r t, then wi p e off the moistu r e with a d r y cloth. ï° Specially shaped discs S p ecially sha p ed discs (hea r t-sha p ed, hexagonal, etc.) cannot be used on this p layer . Neve r use such discs, as they will damage the p laye r . ï° Condensation on discs If the disc is moved suddenly f r om a cold p lace into a wa r m r oom (in winte r , fo r ex am p le), wate r d r op lets (conde nsation) may fo r m on the disc su r face. Discs will not p lay pr o pe r ly if the r e is condensatio n on them. Ca r efully wi p e off the wa te r d r op lets f r om the disc su r face befo r e using the disc. Troubleshooting Inco rr ect o p er ation is ofte n mistaken fo r t r ouble o r malfun ction. If you th ink that the r e is somethin g w r ong wi th this com p onent, check the p oints below. Sometimes the t r ouble may lie in anothe r com p onent. Ins p ect the othe r com p onents and elect r ical a pp liances being used. If the t r ouble cannot be r ectified even afte r checking the p oints below, ask you r nea r est Pion ee r autho r ized se r vice cente r or you r deale r to ca rr y o ut r ep air wo r k. Playback Problem Check Remedy ⢠Disc does not p lay. ⢠Disc t r ay o p ens automatic ally. Is the disc one that is p layable on this p layer ? Check whethe r the disc is one that c an be p layed on th is p layer ( p age 7). Is the file one tha t is p layable on this p layer ? ⢠Check whethe r the fi le is one that can be p layed on this p layer ( p age 9). ⢠Check whethe r or not the file is damage d. Is the disc sc r atched? I t may not be p ossi ble to p lay sc r atched discs. Is the disc di r ty? Clean the disc (above) . Is the r e a p iece of p ap er or sticke r attached to the dis c? The disc may be wa rp ed an d un p layable. Is the disc pr o pe r ly set in the disc t r ay? ⢠Set the disc with the pr inted side faci ng u p . ⢠Set the disc pr o pe r ly in the depr ession in the disc t r ay. Is the r egion num be r co rr ect? See About region numbers on p age 9 fo r the r egion numbe r s of discs that can be p layed on th is p layer . LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 55 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
07 56 En No p ictur e is disp layed or the p ictur e is not disp layed pr o pe r ly. Is the video cable pr o pe r ly connected? ⢠Conne ct the cable pr o pe r ly acco r din g to the connected devices ( p age 13) . ⢠Inse r t the cable fi r mly and all the wa y in. Is the video cable dam aged? If the cable is damaged, r ep lace it with a new one. Is the in p ut setting on the connected T V o r AV r eceiv er o r am p lifie r r ight ? Read the o p e r ating inst r uctions of the connected com p onents an d switch to the pr o pe r in p ut. A r e you viewing the p ictu r e f r om the vi deo out p ut te r minal selected with VIDEO SELECT ? P r ess VIDEO SELECT to switch the video out p ut t e r minal to be viewed ( p age 21) . Is the out p ut vi deo r esolu tion pr o pe r ly set? Use OUTPUT RESOLU TION t o s w i t c h t o a r esolution at which the vid eo and audio s ignals a r e out p ut ( p age 21). ⢠Is the p layer connected with an HDMI cable othe r than a Hi gh S p eed HDMI⢠cable (with a Standa r d HDMI⢠cable)? ⢠A r e you using an HDMI cable with built-in equalize r ? 1080 p o r Dee p Colo r video signals m ay not be out p ut pr op er ly, de p ending on the HDMI cable being used o r the p layer âÂÂs settings. P r ess ï§ while pr essing ï¤ on the p la ye r âÂÂs f r ont p anel to r esto r e the video out p uts to the facto r y default settin gs. Afte r this, if you wish to out p ut the video signa ls with 1080 p or Dee p Colo r , connect the TV using a H igh S p eed HDMI⢠cable with out built-in equalize r , then r eset the p laye r using the Setup Navigator ( p age 18). Does the co nnected TV su pp o r t the f r ame r ate of the video sig nal being out p ut by the p laye r ? If the p ictur e is not dis p layed when p la ying a disc with a f r ame r ate that is not su pp o r ted, th e p ictu r e will not be dis p layed eve n when p layback is sto pp ed. In this case, use the pr ocedu r e below to switch the fr ame r ate of the vid eo signals out p ut f r om the p layer . Eject the disc and close th e disc t r ay. Then, pr ess ï¨ OPEN/CL OSE while pr essing ï¤ on the p laye r âÂÂs f r ont p anel to sw itch to a f r ame r ate su pp o r ted b y the connected T V. Is NTSC on PAL TV pro pe r ly set? When viewing the video signals out p ut fr om the p layer âÂÂs S-Video or Video te r minal, set NTSC on PAL TV pro pe r ly ( p age 37). Is a DVI device c onnected? The p ictur e may not be dis p layed pr op er ly if a DVI device is conne cted. Is HDMI Color Space pr o pe r ly set? Change the HDMI Color Space setting ( p age 38) . Pictu r e f r eezes and th e f r ont p anel and r emote contr ol buttons sto p wo r king. ⢠P r ess ï§ STOP to sto p p layback, then r estar t p layback. ⢠If the p layback cannot be sto pp ed, pr ess ïµ STANDBY/ON on the p layer âÂÂs fr ont p anel to tur n off the p ower , th en tur n the p ower back on. ⢠If the p ower cannot be tu r ned off, pr ess and hold ïµ STANDBY/ON on the p layer âÂÂs fr ont p anel fo r ove r 5 seconds. The p ower will tu r n off. Motion is unna tu r al o r p ictur e is not clear . Change the Pur e Cinema sett ing ( p age 34). No p ictu r e is dis p layed o r p ictur e is not outp ut in high definition when p laying BD s. With so me discs, it m ay not be p ossible to out p ut the video sign als f r om the VIDEO out p ut te r minal o r the COMPONENT VIDEO out p ut te r minals. In this case, connect using an H D MI cable ( p age 13). ⢠Pictu r e is distu r bed du r ing p layback. ⢠Pictu r e is da r k. ⢠This p laye r su pp o r ts Mac r ovision analog co p y pr otection techn ology. With some TVs (such as with b uilt-in video de ck), the p ictur e will not be dis p layed pr o pe r ly when the co p y pr otected DVD title is p layed. This is not a malfunct ion. ⢠If the p layer and TV a r e connected via a DVD r ecor de r /video deck, etc., the p ictur e will not be dis p layed pr op er ly d ue to analog co p y pr otection. Co nnect the p layer and TV d i r ectly. Problem Check Remedy LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 56 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
57 En 07 ⢠Pictu r e is st r etched. ⢠Pictu r e is c r o pp ed. ⢠As p ect r atio cannot be switched. Is the TVâÂÂs as p ect ratio pr o pe r ly set? Read the TVâÂÂs o p er at ing inst r uctions and set the TVâÂÂs as p ect r atio pr o pe r ly. Is TV Aspect Ratio pro pe r ly set? Set TV Aspect Ratio pro pe r ly ( p age 37). Is 4:3 Video Out pro pe r ly set? Set 4:3 Video O ut pro pe r ly ( p age 37). Is DVD 16:9 Video Out pr o pe r ly set? Set DVD 16: 9 Video Out pro pe r ly ( p age 37). When video signals with a r esolution of 1080/50i, 1080/50p , 720/50p , 1080/24 p , 1080/60i, 1080/60 p o r 720/60 p a r e being out p ut f r om the HDMI OUT te r minal o r the COMPONENT VIDEO out p ut te r minals, they may be out p ut with an as p ect r atio of 16:9 even if TV Aspect Ra tio is set to 4:3 (Standar d) ( p age 37). Pictu r e is inte rr u p ted. The p ictu r e may be inte rr u p ted when the r esolut ion of the r ecor de d video signal switches. P r ess OUTPUT RESOLUTION to select a setting othe r than Auto o r So urce Direc t (p age 21) . The subtitles cannot be switched. The subtitles cannot be switched fo r discs r eco r ded on a DVD o r BD r ecor der . Sound and p ictur e a r e not synch r onized. Is Outpu t Terminal pr o pe r ly set? Set Output T erminal pro pe r ly ( p ages 18 an d 43). Is Lip Sync pro pe r ly set? Adjust the amount of audio delay wit h the Lip Sync setting ( p age 35) . ⢠No sound is out p ut. ⢠Sound is no t out p ut pr o pe r ly. Is the disc p layed back in slow motion? Is the disc p layed back in fast fo r wa r d o r fast r ever se? No sound is out p ut du r ing slow motion p lay and for war d and r eve r se scanning. A r e the audio cables pr o pe r ly connected? ⢠Conne ct the cable pr o pe r ly acco r din g to the connected devices ( p age 13) . ⢠Inse r t the cable fi r mly and all the wa y in. Is the audio ca ble damaged? If the cable is damaged, r ep lace it with a new one. A r e the connect ed com p onents (AV r eceive r o r am p lifie r , etc.) pr o pe r ly set? Read the o p e r ating inst r uctions of the connected com p onents an d check the volume, in p ut, sp eaker settings, etc. A r e you t r yin g to listen to th e sound of the HDMI OUT te r minal while wat ching the p ictur e fr om the COMPONENT VIDEO o r VIDEO out p ut te r minals? Audio signals a r e not o ut p ut f rom the HDMI OUT te r minal when vide o signals a r e being out p ut f r om the COMPONENT VIDEO o r VIDEO out p ut te r minals. When watching the p ictur e of the COMPONENT VIDEO o r VIDEO out p ut te r minals, co nnect an o p tical digi tal audio cable o r r egular aud io cables to listen to the sound ( p age 16). Once connections a r e comp leted, u se Setup Na vigator to make the p layer âÂÂs settings ( p age 18). Is HDMI A udio Out pro pe r ly set? Set HDMI Audio Out to Auto o r PCM. ( p age 3 8). Is Outpu t Terminal pr o pe r ly set? When ANALOG AUDIO is selected at Output Terminal , no audi o signals a r e out p ut f r om the HDMI OUT o r DIGITAL OUT te r minal ( p age 43) . Is the out p ut vi deo r esolu tion pr o pe r ly set? Use OUTPUT RE SOLUTION to switch to th e r esolutio n at which the video and audi o signals a r e out p ut ( p age 21) . Is a DVI device connected? The sound will not be out p ut f r om the HDMI OUT te r minal if a DVI device is connected. Connect the device to a DIGITAL OUT te r minal o r the AUDIO OUT te r minals ( p age 16). Fo r some BDs, audio signals ar e only out p ut f r om DIGITAL OUT te r minal o r the HDMI OUT te r minal. Problem Check Remedy LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 57 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
07 58 En Multi-channel sou nd is not out p ut. Is Outpu t Terminal pr o pe r ly set? Linea r PCM (2-channe l) audio signals a r e out p ut fr om outp ut ter minals othe r than the one set at Output Terminal unde r Audio Out . Set Output Terminal pro pe r ly ( p age 4 3). Is the audio ou t p ut of the connected A V r eceiver or am p lifie r , etc., pr o pe r ly set? Read the o p e r ating inst r uctions of the connected AV r eceive r o r am p lifi e r and check the a udio out p ut settings of AV r eceiver or am p lifi e r . Is multi-channel sound selected? Use the menu sc r ee n or AUDIO to switch the discâÂÂs sound to multi- channel. Noise can be hea r d when out p utting D TS Digital Su rr ound signals f r om the DIGITAL OUT te r minal. Is the connected AV r eceiver o r am p lifie r com p atible with DTS Digi tal Su rr ound? If an AV r eceiver or am p lifier that is not com p atib le with DTS Digital Su rr ound is connec ted to the DIGITAL OUT te r minal, set DTS Out to DTS ï¤ PCM ( p age 37). 192 kHz o r 96 kHz digital audio signals ca nnot be out p ut f r om the DIGITAL OUT te r minal. It is not p ossibl e to out p ut 192 kHz o r 96 kHz digital audio signals f r om this p laye r âÂÂs DIGITAL OUT te r minal. The signals a r e auto matically conve r ted to 48 kHz o r less fo r out p ut . Seconda r y audio o r inte r active audi o is not out p ut. Is HDMI A udio Out pro pe r ly set? When listening to the soun d f r om an HDMI OUT te r mina l, set HDMI Audio Ou t to PCM ( p age 38) . A r e Dolby Digita l Out and DTS Out pro pe r ly set? When listening to the sound f r om an DIGITAL OUT te r minal, set Dolby Digital Out to Dolby Digital 1 , DTS Out to DTS 1 ( p age 37). Sound is fast o r slow. When an HDMI cable is connected, a r e audio signals being ou t p ut f r om devices connected wi th cables othe r than HDMI cables? When a Pion ee r AV r eceiver or am p lifier com p atib le with the PQLS function is connected di r ectly to the p layer âÂÂs HDMI OUT te r minal using an HDMI cable, the PQLS func tion is activated when p laying discs. Because of this, the sound out p ut fr om comp onents other than the ones connected by HDMI cable may be fast o r slow. If this ha pp ens, set PQLS to Off ( p age 38). Afte r a disc is inse r ted, Loading stays dis p layed and p layback does not star t. A r e the r e too many files r ecor ded on th e disc? When a disc on which files a r e r ecor ded is inser ted, dep ending on the numbe r of files r eco r ded on the disc, loading may take se ve r al dozen minutes. ï§ is dis p layed in file names, etc. The cha r acter s that cannot be dis p layed on th is p layer are dis p layed in ï§ . A message indicating low memo r y a pp ea r s while p laying a BD-ROM disc. ⢠Pe r for m Individual/Sh ared Data Erase o r Storag e Format ( p age 42) . ⢠Pe r for m Applic ation Data Eras e ( p age 42) . The DVD la ye r of BD and DVD hyb r id discs cannot be p layed. Is Hybrid Disc Playb ack pr o pe r ly set? Set Hybrid Disc Pl ayback to DVD ( p age 39). The CD laye r of BD and CD hyb r id discs cannot be p layed. Is Hybrid Disc Playb ack pr o pe r ly set? Set Hybrid Disc Pl ayback to CD ( p age 39). The BDMV fo r mat on BD-R/ -RE discs cannot be p layed. To p lay the BDMV fo r mat on BD-R/-RE discs containing both BDMV and BDAV fo r ma ts, set BDMV/BDAV Play back Priority to BDMV ( p age 39) . Problem Check Remedy LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 58 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
59 En 07 KURO LINK Network Problem Check Remedy KURO LINK func tion does not wo r k. Is the HDMI cable pr o pe r ly connected? To use the KURO L INK function, connect t he Flat Sc r een TV, and AV system (AV r ece ive r o r am p lifie r , etc.) and HD AV Conve r te r to the HDMI OUT te r minal ( p age 1 5). Is the HDMI ca ble you a r e using a High S p eed HDMI⢠cable? Use a High S p eed HDMI⢠ca ble. The KURO LINK function may not wo rk pr o pe r ly if HDMI cable othe r than a High S p eed HDMI⢠cable is used. A r e you connected to th e TV using an HDMI ca ble to watch the p ictur e? If video signals a r e being out p ut f r om a te r minal othe r than the HDMI OUT te r minal, the KURO LINK function does not wo r k. Connect to the TV using a n HDMI cable and pr ess VIDEO SELECT to switch to the HDMI OUT te r minal ( p ages 1 5 and 21). Is KURO LINK set to On on the p laye r ? Set KURO LINK to On on the p layer (p age 38). Does the connected device su pp o r t the KURO LINK function? ⢠The KURO LINK function will not wo r k with devices of othe r br an ds that do not su pp o r t the KURO LINK function, even when conne cted using an H DMI cable. ⢠The KURO LINK function will not wo r k if devices that do not su pp o r t the KURO LINK fu nction a r e connecte d between the KURO LINK- com p atible device and the p laye r . ⢠See About connections to components of other makes support ing the KURO LINK function on p age 15. ⢠Even when con nected to a Pionee r product com p atible with the KURO LINK fu nction, some of the func tions may not wo r k. Also r efe r to the o p er ating inst r uctions of the connected device. Is KURO LINK set to On on the connected device? Set KURO LINK to On on the co nnected device. The KURO LINK function o p e r ates when KURO LINK is set to On for al l devices connected to the HDMI OUT te r minal. Once connections and settin gs of all the devices a re finished, be su r e to check that t he p layer âÂÂs p ictur e is ou t p ut to the Flat Sc r een TV. (Also check afte r changing the conne cted de vices and connec ting and/o r disconnect ing HDMI cables.) I f the p layer âÂÂs p ictur e is not be ing out p ut to the Flat Sc r e en TV, the KURO LINK function may not wo r k pr o pe r ly. Fo r details, refe r to the o p er ating i nst r uctions of the c onnected device. A r e multi p le p laye r s connected? The KURO LINK func tion may not wo r k if th r ee o r mo r e p layer s, including this p layer , a r e connected by HDMI ca ble. The in p ut does not switch automatica lly on the Flat Sc r een TV and AV system (AV r eceiver or amp li fie r , etc.) when p layb ack is sta r ted on the p laye r o r the Home Menu o r Home Media Galle r y is dis p layed. Is Display Power On set to Off on the p layer ? Set Display Power On to On ( p age 38). Problem Check Remedy ⢠BD-LIVE function (connection t o the Inte r net) cannot be use d. ⢠âÂÂConnection to t he softwa r e u p dating se r ve r failedâ is dis p layed when you t r y to u p date the softwa r e. Pe r fo r m Connection Te st ( p age 42). If âÂÂNetwo r k connection test com p leted successfully.â is dis p layed, check the pr oxy se r ve r settin gs ( p age 41). Als o the r e may b e a pr oblem with the Inte rnet connection . Contact you r Inte rnet se r vic e pr ovide r . âÂÂOK to g r ant net w o r k access to BD a pp lications?â is dis p layed when a B D-LIVE com p atible disc is r ead. This is dis p layed if the BD-R OM does not have valid BD-LIVE netwo r k access a ppr oval. Select No if you do not want to autho r ize access to the netwo r k. LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 59 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
07 60 En Others Softwa r e u p dating is slow. De p ending on the Inte r net connect ion and othe r conditions , some time may be r equir ed to u p date th e softwa r e. ⢠âÂÂWRT NG ****â is dis p layed on the f r ont p anel dis p lay du r ing softwa r e u p dating. (**** meaning any cha r acte r s) ⢠âÂÂWRT FAILEDâ is dis p layed on the f r ont p anel dis p lay du r ing softwa r e u p dating. The message is d is p layed wh en softwa r e u p dating has failed. Check again whethe r it can be u p dated pr op er ly. A message othe r th an âÂÂNetwo r k connection test com p leted successfullyâ is dis p layed whe n Connection Test is p er for med. Is âÂÂLAN cable not connec tedâ dis p layed? Check that this p laye r and Ethe r n et hub (o r r outer with hub functionality) a r e pr op er ly connected. ⢠Is âÂÂIP add r ess ca nnot be obtained.â dis p layed? ⢠Is âÂÂNo r esp onse f r om the gateway.â dis p layed? ⢠If the I P add r ess is obtai ned using the DHCP se r ver function , check the setting is co rr ect at th e Display Network Configuration ( p age 41). Fo r details on the DHC P se r ve r function, see the o p er ating inst r uctions of th e Ethe r net hub (o r r oute r with hub functi onality). ⢠Set the I P add r ess manually. Is âÂÂIP add r ess is o ve r la pp ed .â dis p layed? ⢠Check the o p e r ation and settings of the DHCP se r ver function of the Ethe r net hub (o r r outer with hu b functionality). Fo r deta ils on the DHCP se r ve r function, see the o p er ating inst r uctions of the Ethe r net hub (o r r outer with hub functionali ty). ⢠If this p layer âÂÂs has been set manually , r eset the IP ad d r ess of this p layer or other comp onents. Is the Ethe r net hu b (o r r outer with hub func tionality) o pe r ating pro pe r ly? ⢠Check the settings an d o p er ation the Ethe r ne t hub (o r r outer with hub functionality). Fo r details, see the o p er ating inst r ucti ons of t he Ethe r net hub. ⢠Reboot the Ethe r net hub (o r r outer with hub functiona lity). Problem Check Remedy The p laye r âÂÂs p owe r tu r ns off automatic ally. Is Auto Power Off set to On ? If Auto Power Off is set to On , the p laye râÂÂs p owe r tu r ns off automatica ll y if no o p er ation is p er fo r me d for over 30 minu tes ( p age 40) . Is Display Power Off set to On ? The p laye r âÂÂs p owe r may tu r n off togethe r w ith the p owe r of the TV connected to the HDMI OUT te r minal. If you do not want the p layer âÂÂs p ower to tur n off when the TVâÂÂs p ower is tu r ne d off, set Disp lay Power Off to Off ( p age 38). The p laye r âÂÂs p owe r tu r ns on automatic ally. Is KURO LINK set to On ?T h e p layer âÂÂs p ower may tur n on together with the p ower of the TV connected to the HDMI OUT te r minal. If you do not want the p layer âÂÂs p ower to tur n on when the TVâÂÂs p ower is tu r ned on, set KURO LINK to Off ( p age 38). Playe r cannot be o p er ated with r emote cont r ol . Is an AV r eceiver or am p lifier connected t o the CONTROL IN te r minal on the p laye r âÂÂs r ear p anel? O pe r ate with the r emo te cont r ol of the device connec ted to the CONTROL IN te r mina l. A r e you o pe r ating the r emote cont r ol f r om a p oint too fa r away f r om the p layer ? O pe r ate f r om wi thin 7 m of the r emote cont r ol senso r . A r e the batt e r ies dead? Re p lace the batt e r ies ( p age 6 ). In p ut of connect ed TV, an d AV system and HD AV Conve r te r switches automatic ally. Is KURO LINK set to On ?T h e i n p ut of the TV, an d AV system (AV r eceiver or amp lifier , etc.) and HD AV Conve r ter connected to the HD MI OUT te r minal may automatically switc h to the p layer when p layback sta r ts on the p layer o r the menu sc r een (Home Media Galle r y, etc.) is dis p layed. If you do not want the in p uts of the connected TV, and AV system (AV r ece iver or am p lifi e r , e tc.) and HD AV Conve r te r to switch automatically, set KURO LINK to Off ( p age 38). âÂÂP r ocessing failed.â is dis p layed. If the mes sage a pp ea r s r ep eatedly, p lease ask you r nea r est Pionee r autho r ized se r vice ce nte r or yo u r deale r to ca rr y out r ep ai r wo r k. Problem Check Remedy LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 60 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
61 En 07 Glossary ï° Angle (Multi angle) U p to 9 ca me r a angl es can be r eco r ded simultaneous ly on BD- ROM o r DVD-Video discs, le tting you view the same scene f r om diffe r ent angles. ï° AVCHD (Advanced Video Codec High Definition) See Playing DVDs on p age 9 . ï° BDAV Of the BD fo r mat, the Audio Visual For mat Sp ecifications for HD digital b r oadcast r ecor ding is r efe rr ed to as BDAV on this p layer and in this o p er ating inst r uct ions. ï° BD-J See Playing BDs on p age 8. ï° BD-LIVE See Playing BDs on p age 8. ï° BDMV Of the BD fo r ma t, the Audio Visua l For mat Sp ecifications designed fo r pr e- p ackaged high definitio n (HD) movie contents is r efe rr ed to a s BDMV on this p layer and in this o p er at ing inst r uctions. ï° BONUSVIEW See Playing BDs on p age 8. ï° Compon ent video ou tput This video out p ut te r minal pr ovides clea r er p ictur es when connecte d to a TV eq ui pp ed wit h com p onent in p uts. Co m p on ent video signals consist of t h r ee sign als, Y , P B and P R . ï° Deep Color See About HDMI on p age 13. ï° Default Gateway A default gateway is a communication device such as a r outer which p asses data b etween ne two r ks. It is used to di r ec t data to netwo r ks on which th e destination gateway is n ot ex p licitly s p ecified. ï° DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol ) This pr otocol pr ovides configu r at ion p ar amete r s (IP add ress , etc.) fo r com p uter s and othe r devices connec ted to the ne two r k. ï° DivX See Supported video file formats on p age 9. ï° DNS (Domain Name System) This is a system fo r associating In te r net host names with IP add r esses. ï° Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is an au dio fo r mat to r ec or d the sound in u p to 5.1 channels with a f r action of the am ount of data as com p ar ed to linea r PCM audio signals. Settings you have made have been clea r ed. ⢠Have you di sconne cted the p ower cor d while the p la ye r âÂÂs p ower was on? ⢠Has the r e been a p ower failu r e? Always pr ess ïµ STANDB Y/ON on the p laye r âÂÂs f r ont p anel o r ïµ STANDBY/ON on the r emote contr ol an d check that POWER OFF has tu r ned off f r om the p layer âÂÂs f r ont p anel dis p lay befo r e disconn ecting t he p ower co r d. Be p ar ti cular ly car efu l when the p ower co r d is connecte d to the AC outl et on anothe r device because the p layer tur ns off in conjunction with th e device. EXT does not ligh t on the p layer âÂÂs fr ont p an el dis p lay when a USB (exte r nal sto r age) devi ce is connected. Is the exte r nal sto r ag e device pr o pe r ly connected? ⢠Tu r n the p layer âÂÂs p ower off, then t u r n the p ower back on. ⢠Tu r n the p layer âÂÂs p ower off, then r ec onnect the e xte r nal sto r age device ( p age 16) . A r e you using a USB cable that is longe r than 2 mete r s? Use a USB cabl e with a length of 2 mete r s or less. Is the p ower of th e exte r nal ha r d disk tu r ned on? Tu r n the p la ye r âÂÂs p owe r off, then tur n the exter nal har d diskâÂÂs p ower on. Is the exte r nal sto r ag e device connecte d to the USB p or t via a memo r y ca r d r eader o r USB hub? Exte r nal sto r age device may not wo r k if connected to the USB po r t via a memo r y car d r eader or USB hu b. Does the e xte r nal sto r age device contain multi p le p ar titions? Exte r nal sto r age devices may not be r ecognized if t hey contain multi p le p ar titions. Some exte r na l sto r age devices may not o p er at e. EXT flashes on th e p layer âÂÂs f r ont p anel d i s p lay when a USB (exte r nal sto r age) device is connected. Is the exte r nal sto r ag e device w rite- pr otected? Tu r n the p laye r âÂÂs p owe r off, then disable the w r ite- protection. Is the exte r nal sto r ag e deviceâÂÂs file system FA T16 o r FAT32? Only exte r nal sto r age devices with a FAT16 o r FAT32 file system can be used. They m ay be usable if they a r e fo r matted fr om the p layer ( p age 42) . Tu r n the p laye r âÂÂs p owe r off, then tu r n the powe r back on. Problem Check Remedy LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 61 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
07 62 En ï° Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Pl us is an audio fo r mat fo r high-definition media. Built on Dolb y Digital, it combines the ef ficiency and flexibility to pr ovide high quality multi-channel audio. With BD-ROMs, u p to 7.1 channels of digital sound can be r ecor ded. ï° Dolby TrueHD Dolby T r ueHD is an audio fo r mat using lossless coding. With BD- ROMs, u p to 8 channels can be r ecor ded at 96 kHz/24 bits, o r up to 6 channels at 192 kHz/24 bits. ï° DRM A technology fo r pr otecting co p yr ighted digital data. Digitized videos, image s and audio r etain the s ame quality even when th ey a r e co p ied o r t r ansfe rr ed re p eatedly. D RM is a technology fo r r estr icting the distr ibution or p layb ack of such digita l data without the autho r ization of the co p yr ight holde r . ï° DTS Digital Surround DTS Digi tal Su rr ound is an audio fo r mat to r ecor d 48 kHz/ 24 bits audio signals in 5.1 channels. ï° DTS-HD High Resolution Audio DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is an audio fo r mat u sing lossy coding. It can r ecor d 7.1 channels at 96 kHz/24 bits. ï° DTS-HD Master Audio DTS-HD Maste r Audio is an audio fo r mat using lossle ss coding. With BD-ROMs, 7.1 channels can be r ecor ded at 96 kHz/24 bits, o r 5.1 channels at 192 kHz/24 bits. ï° Ethernet A standa r d fo r local ar ea networ ks (LANs) used to connect multi p le com p ute r s, etc. in the same loca tion. This p layer su pp o r ts 100BASE -TX. ï° Frame s and fields A f r ame is the un it fo r one of the sti ll p ictur es which com p ose motion p ictur es. One fr ame consists of a p ictur e of odd lines and a p ictur e of even lines ca lled fields in video sign al with inte r laced scan method (576i, 1080i, etc.). ï° HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) See About HDMI on p age 13. ï° Interactive audio The audio s ignals r ecor ded in the titles of BD-ROMs. They includ e fo r exam p le the clicking soun d made when the menu sc r ee n is o pe r ated. ï° Interlaced scan With this method, one p ictur e is dis p layed by scann ing it twice. The odd line s a r e dis p layed in the fi r st p ass, the even lin es a r e dis p layed in th e second, to fo r m a single p ictur e (f r ame). Inte r laced scan is indi cated in this p laye r an d o p er ating inst r uctio ns by an âÂÂiâ afte r the r esolution valu e (fo r exam p le, 576i). ï° IP address An add r ess tha t identifies a com p uter or othe r de vice con nected to the Int e r net o r local a r ea netwo r k. It is r e pr esented a numbe r in fou r sections. ï° Linear PCM This is r efe rr ed as the audio signals that a r e not com pr essed. ï° MAC (Media Access Control) address A ha r dwar e identification nu mbe r assigned s p ecifically to the netwo r k device (LAN ca r d, etc.). ï° MPEG (Moving Picture Expe rts Group) The name of a family of standa r ds used to encode video a nd audio signals in a digital com pr essed fo r mat. The vi deo encoding standa r ds include MPEG-1 Video, MP EG-2 Video, MPEG-4 Visu al, MPEG-4 AVC, et c. The audio encoding standa r ds include MPEG- 1 Audio, MPEG-2 Audio, MPEG-2 AAC, etc. ï° Parent al Lock See Changing the Parental Lock level for viewing DVDs and Changing the Age Restrict ion for viewing BD-ROMs on p age 43. ï° Picture-in-Picture (P-in-P) This is a function fo r sup er imp osing a sub video on the main video. Some BD-ROMs include seconda r y video, which can be su p er im p osed on the pr ima r y video. ï° Port nu mber This is a sub-add r ess pr ovided below t he IP add r ess fo r simultaneously connecting to multi p le p ar ties du r ing Inte r net communications. ï° Progr essive scan With this method , one p ictur e is consisted of a sin gle p ictur e, without divi ding it in two p ictur es. P r ogr essive sca n pr ovid es clea r p ictu r es with no flicke r , in p ar ticula r fo r still pictu r es that conta in much text, g r ap hics, o r ho r izontal lines. P r ogr essive scan is indicated in this p layer and o p er ating inst r uctions by a â p â afte r the r esolution value (fo r exam p le, 576 p ). ï° Proxy se rver This is a r elay se r ver fo r en su r ing fast access and safe communicatio ns when connecting to the In te r ne t f r om an inte r nal netwo r k. ï° Region nu mber See About region numbers on p age 9. ï° Second ary audio Some BD-ROMs include sub audio st r eams mixed with the main audio st r eam. These sub audio st r eams a re called âÂÂseconda r y audioâÂÂ. On some discs this seconda r y audio is r ecor de d as the audio fo r the seconda r y video. ï° Second ary video Some BD-ROMs include sub videos su p er imp osed on the main videos using the Pictu r e-in-Pictur e function. These su b videos a r e called âÂÂseconda r y videoâÂÂ. ï° Subn et mask This is used to ident ify which p ar t of th e IP add r ess co rr es p onds to the subnet (a se p ar ately managed netwo r k). The subnet mask is ex pr essed as âÂÂ255.255.255. 0âÂÂ. ï° USB(Universal Serial Bus) USB is the indust r y standar d fo r connecting p e r ip her als to PCs. ï° VC-1 A video codec develo p ed by Mic r osof t and standa r dized by the Society of Motion Pictu r e and Televisio n Enginee r s (SMPTE ). Some BDs include videos encoded in this codec. ï° x.v. Color See About HDMI on p age 13. LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 62 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
63 En 07 Specifications Note â¢T h e s p ecifications and design of this pr oduc t a r e subject to change without notice. â¢T h i s pr oduct includes FontAvenue î fonts licenced by NEC Co rp o r ation. FontAvenue is a r egiste r ed t r adema r k of NEC Co rp o r ation. Model BDP-LX52 Type Blu- r ay Disc PLAYER Rated voltage Europe, Australia and New Zealand mode ls: AC 220 V to 24 0 V Others: AC 110 V to 240 V Rated frequ ency 50 Hz/60 Hz Power consumption 32 W Power consumpt ion (standby) 0.3 W Weight 3.6 kg External dime nsions (in cluding project ing parts) 420 mm (W) x 83 mm (H) x 287 mm (D) Tolerable opera ting temperatur e 5 ðC to 35 ðC Tolerable ope ra ting humidity 5 % to 85 % (no condensation) Output terminal s HDMI 1 set, 19- p in: 5 V, 250 mA Video outp uts Video 1 set, RCA jack: 1.0 V p - p (75 é) Compone nt video 1 set, RCA jacks: Y: 1.0 V p -p (75 é ) P B , P R : 0.7 V p- p (75 é) Audio outputs 2-channel ( left/right) 1 set, RCA jacks Audio output level 200 mV r ms (1 kHz, âÂÂ20 dB) Frequenc y response 4 Hz to 88 kHz (192 kHz sam p ling) Digital audio output s Optical 1 set, O p tical digital jack LAN 1 set, Ethe r net jack (100BASE-T X) Control Input 1 set, Minijack (3.5 ø) USB 1 set, Ty p e A LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 63 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Printed in <VRB1514-A> Published b y Pioneer Cor poration. Cop yr ight é 2009 Pioneer Cor poration. All rights reser ved. PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. 178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V. Blvd.Manuel A vila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Me xico,D .F . 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 K002_B_En Please ref er to our website for inf ormation regarding software updates and ser vice to this product. Contact inf ormation: U .K. Pioneer GB L TD . Hollybush Hill, Stok e P oges Slough, Buckinghamshire SL2 4QP UNITED KINGDOM 0870 600 1539 http://www .pioneer .co.uk/uk/content/support/suppor t/upgrade .html A ustralia, Ne w Zealand and other Oceania area Pioneer Electronics A ustralia Pty Ltd 2211 Princes Highwa y , Mulgrav e, VIC 3170, A ustralia 1800 988 268 http://www .pioneer .com.au Hong K ong Pioneer (HK) Limited - Customer Ser vice Center Unit 2, 17/F , V anta Industr ial Centre, 21-33 T ai Lin P ai Road, Kwai Chung, Hong K ong (852) 3583 3288 https://www .pioneerhongkong.com.hk Singapore Pioneer Electronics AsiaCentre Pte Ltd 253 Ale xandra Road (K omoco Building)#04-01, Lobby 2 Singapore 159936 (65) 6472-7555 http://www .pioneer .com.sg/firmwaredownload Malaysia Pioneer T echnology (Mala ysia) Sdn Bhd 16th Floor , Menara Uni. Asia, 1008, Jalan Sultan Ismail 50250, Kuala Lumpur , Malaysia (03) 2697-2920 http://www .pioneer .com.sg/firmwaredownload Thailand Pioneer Electronics (Thailand) CO .,L TD 91/1 Floor 1&7 Chaiyo Building, Rama 9 Road, Hua ykwang District Bangkok 10320, Thailand (662) 6439-444 http://www .pioneer .com.sg/firmwaredownload T aiwan Pioneer High Fidelity T aiwan Co . Ltd 13th Floor , No .44, Chung Shan Nor th Road, Sec.2 T aipei, T aiwan (886 2) 2521-3166 http://www .pioneer-twn.com.tw Indonesia PT . Adab Alam Electronic Jl. K.H. Zainul Ar ifin No . 13A Jakarta-Pusat Indonesia (21) 6331-924 http://www .pioneer .com.sg/firmwaredownload LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN .book 64 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ